Yokogawa GC8000 Process Gas Chromatograph User's Manual

User’s Manual GC8000 Process Gas Chromatograph IM 11B08A01-01E IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition i u Introduction Thank you for purchasing the GC8000 process gas chromatograph. This manual describes the meintenance and inspection of Model GC8000 Process Gas Chromatograph. Please lead the following repective documents before installing and using the GC8000 system. n Documents Related to the GC8000 Process Gas Chromatograph l User’s manuals The product comes with the following user’s manuals. (The last “E” in the document number is the language code.) • • • User’s manuals that do not depend upon the specifications of the product: GC8000 Process Gas Chromatograph (IM 11B08A01-01E, this manual) User’s manuals that are attached depending on specifications of the product: Process Gas Chromatograph GC8000 Installation Manual (TI 11B08A01-01E) User’s manuals for related products: PCAS PC Analyzer Server Software (IM 11B06B01-01E) ASET Analyzer Server Engineering Terminal Software (IM 11B06C01-01E) ASGW Analyzer Server Gateway Software (IM 11B06E01-01E) ASIU Analyzer Server Interface Unit Software (IM 11B06F01-01E) GCVT Virtual Tech Software (IM 11B08C02-01E) ANABUS Ethernet System Redundancy Setting Manual (TI 11B03A03-14E) l Operation Data Operation data is supplied with the operation manuals in the delivered package and contains the following application specific information required to use the GC8000 Process Gas Chromatograph. • • • • • • • • • Process conditions and measurement range Instrument specifications and operating conditions Standard sample for calibration Column system and column Miscellaneous data Chromatogram, base line, repeatability, etc. Analyzer flow diagram and installation Parts composition table General connection diagram Sampling system diagram (when supplied by Yokogawa) Media No. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 2016 (YK) All Rights Reserved Copyright © 2011, Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 ii u Notice n Regarding This Manual • This Manual should be passed on to the end user. • Read this manual carefully and fully understand how to operate this product before you start operation. • All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without Yokogawa’s written permission. • The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. • Great effort has been made to ensure that the descriptions in this Manual are correct. However, if you notice any error or inconsistency, please inform Yokogawa Electric Corporation. n Regarding Protection, Safety, and Prohibition Against Unauthorized Modification • For the protection and safe use of the product and the system controlled by it, be sure to follow the safety instructions described in this manual. Safety is not guaranteed if you do not follow these instructions. • The following safety symbol marks are used on the product concerned or in this Manual: WARNING A WARNING sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure, practice, condition or the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in injury or death of personnel. CAUTION A CAUTION sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure, practice, condition or the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the product. IMPORTANT Indicates that operating the hardware or software in this manner may damage it or lead to system failure. NOTE Draws attention to information essential for understanding the operation and features. TIP Gives information that complements the present topic. Protective ground terminal: In order to provide protection against electrical shock in case of a fault. This symbol indicates that the terminal must be connected to ground prior to operation of equipment. Function ground terminal: In order to provide protection against noise. This symbol indicates that the terminal must be connected to ground prior to operation of equipment. • If protection/safety circuits are to be used for the product or the system controlled by it, they should be installed outside of the product. • When you replace parts or consumables of the product, use those specified by us. • Do not modify the product. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 iii n Exemption from Responsibility • Yokogawa Electric Corporation does not make any warranties regarding the product except for those mentioned in the WARRANTY that is provided separately. • Yokogawa Electric Corporation assumes no liability to any party for any loss or damage, direct or indirect, caused by the use or any unpredictable defect of the product. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 iv n ATEX Documentation The procedure is only applicable to the countries in European Union. GB All instruction manuals for ATEX Ex related products are available in English, German and French. Should you require Ex related instructions in your local language, you are to contact your nearest Yokogawa office or representative. DK Alle brugervejledninger for produkter relateret til ATEX Ex er tilgængelige på engelsk, tysk og fransk. Skulle De ønske yderligere oplysninger om håndtering af Ex produkter på eget sprog, kan De rette henvendelse herom til den nærmeste Yokogawa afdeling eller forhandler. I Tutti i manuali operativi di prodotti ATEX contrassegnati con Ex sono disponibili in inglese, tedesco e francese. Se si desidera ricevere i manuali operativi di prodotti Ex in lingua locale, mettersi in contatto con l’ufficio Yokogawa più vicino o con un rappresentante. E Todos los manuales de instrucciones para los productos antiexplosivos de ATEX están disponibles en inglés, alemán y francés. Si desea solicitar las instrucciones de estos artículos antiexplosivos en su idioma local, deberá ponerse en contacto con la oficina o el representante de Yokogawa más cercano. NL Alle handleidingen voor producten die te maken hebben met ATEX explosiebeveiliging (Ex) zijn verkrijgbaar in het Engels, Duits en Frans. Neem, indien u aanwijzingen op het gebied van explosiebeveiliging nodig hebt in uw eigen taal, contact op met de dichtstbijzijnde vestiging van Yokogawa of met een vertegenwoordiger. SF Kaikkien ATEX Ex -tyyppisten tuotteiden käyttöhjeet ovat saatavilla englannin-, saksan- ja ranskankielisinä. Mikäli tarvitsette Ex -tyyppisten tuotteiden ohjeita omalla paikallisella kielellännne, ottakaa yhteyttä lähimpään Yokogawa-toimistoon tai -edustajaan. P Todos os manuais de instruções referentes aos produtos Ex da ATEX estão disponíveis em Inglês, Alemão e Francês. Se necessitar de instruções na sua língua relacionadas com produtos Ex, deverá entrar em contacto com a delegação mais próxima ou com um representante da Yokogawa. F Tous les manuels d’instruction des produits ATEX Ex sont disponibles en langue anglaise, allemande et française. Si vous nécessitez des instructions relatives aux produits Ex dans votre langue, veuillez bien contacter votre représentant Yokogawa le plus proche. D Alle Betriebsanleitungen für ATEX Ex bezogene Produkte stehen in den Sprachen Englisch, Deutsch und Französisch zur Verfügung. Sollten Sie die Betriebsanleitungen für Ex-Produkte in Ihrer Landessprache benötigen, setzen Sie sich bitte mit Ihrem örtlichen Yokogawa-Vertreter in Verbindung. S Alla instruktionsböcker för ATEX Ex (explosionssäkra) produkter är tillgängliga på engelska, tyska och franska. Om Ni behöver instruktioner för dessa explosionssäkra produkter på annat språk, skall Ni kontakta närmaste Yokogawakontor eller representant. GR IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 v SK PL CZ SLO LT H BG LV EST RO M IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 vi n Labeling Labels are attached to the product for safety. Read each description. Label D is applicable only to TIIS explosion protection. Label G is for ATEX, IECEx, and NEPSI. A D F C E B G [Left side] B [Front] [Right side] [Back] A G D (ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI) (TIIS) E C IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 vii F TIIS FM-X NEPSI FM-Y ATEX IECEx CSA-X CSA-Y IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 viii n General Precautions WARNING In order to analyze gases, process gas chromatographs use various kinds of process gases and utility gases. Since these gases are typically combustible, combustion-sustaining, toxic, odorous, resolvable, polymerizing, or corrosive, refer to the “Safety Information” in our approval drawings and others to ensure safety thoroughly before using them. WARNING • The GC8000 weighs about 100 to 220 kg. Unpack it near the installation site. Use a transportation machine to move it. Handle it carefully to prevent it from falling. • For lifting and carrying equipment, use two brackets at which GC8000 is fixed to the crate (made of wood etc.). Use wall-mounting brackets or their equivalent (unpainted brackets are attached to self-standing type for transportation). • Up to two protection system may be included, each of which weighs approximately 7 kg, are installed on top of the GC8000. Therefore, the center of gravity is higher than the center of the analyzer body. CAUTION • Since the GC8000 is a precision instrument, take care when handling it to avoid impact. • The GC8000 is designed for use under specified environment (overvoltage category, pollution degree, ambient temperature, flowrate and pressure of sample and utility gas and specification of electric power). It is out of warranty against occured result in case when exceed these specs. • Use the GC8000 within the range of your purchase specifications. Yokogawa assumes no responsibility for problems resulting from use by the customer outside the purchase specifications. If the GC8000 needs to be modified or repaired, please contact your nearest Yokogawa representative. Yokogawa assumes no responsibility for results where the customer or any third party has attempted to modify or repair this product. • For cleaning of analyzer, do not use any abrasives or organic solvent. CAUTION This instrument is a Class A product for EMC standard (Emission), and is designed for use in an industrial environment. Please use this instrument in an industrial environment only. Complying with EMC Standard for ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI, and TIIS (/KC): • EN61326-1 Class A (Emission) • EN61326-1, EN61326-2-3 (Immunity) • Korea Electromagnetic Conformity Standard IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 ix IMPORTANT • Read the attached instruction manual before operating the GC8000. • The instruments must be installed and operated according to the installation manual, instruction manual, approval drawings, and operation data. l How to dispose the batteries: This is an explanation about the new EU Battery Directive (DIRECTIVE 2006/66/EC). This directive is only valid in the EU. Batteries are included in this product (except for TIIS). Batteries incorporated into this product cannot be removed by yourself.Dispose them together with this product. When you dispose this product in the EU,contact your local Yokogawa Europe B.V.office. Do not dispose them as domestic household waste. Battery type: Poly-carbon monofluoride Lithium battery Notice: The symbol (see above) means they shall be sorted out and collected as ordained in ANNEX II in DIRECTIVE 2006/66/EC. l How to dispose the Desktop type Communication converter (K9806AT) or Signal interrupter (K9606AB): Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE), Directive (This directive is only valid in the EU.) This product complies with the WEEE Directive marking requirement. The affixed product label (see below) indicates that you must not discard this electrical/ electronic product in domestic household waste. Product Category With reference to the equipment types in the WEEE directive, this product is classified as a “Monitoring and Control instruments.” When disposing of products in the EU, contact your local Yokogawa Europe B.V. office. Do not dispose of this products in domestic household waste. ● Labeling The following label is placed on the top side of the product. n Authorized Representative in EEA * The Authorized Representative for this product in EEA is Yokogawa Europe B.V. (Euroweg 2, 3825 HD Amersfoort, The Netherlands). *: Applicable only for GC8000-A (ATEX) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 x l Precautions Against Electrostatic Damage IMPORTANT Electrostatic discharge may damage the operation panel. Handle them after discharging static electricity. When handling cards with IC components mounted on them for maintenance or setting changes, take full precautions against electrostatic problems. • When storing or carrying cards, enclose them in a conductive bag or antistatic bag. (Cards as shipped by Yokogawa are enclosed in a conductive bag or antistatic bag labeled with cautions against electrostatic problems.) • When servicing cards, wear a wrist strap grounded via a 1 MΩ resistance. Connect the wrist strap to a ground terminal. • When servicing cards on the bench, wear a wrist strap and place them on a conductive sheet grounded via a 1 MΩ resistance. Keep easily-chargeable plastic materials away from the bench. • Never touch components mounted on the cards, the pattern side, connectors, pin components, etc. with bare hands, unless using a wrist strap and a conductive sheet. Wrist strap Conductive Sheet 1MΩ 1MΩ 1 MΩ resistance Wrist strap F01.ai Figure 1 Example of wrist strap and conductive sheet l Replacing parts Always use parts specified by Yokogawa when replacing parts. For replacement, see “6. Maintenance”. l Maintenance and Repair Instrument modification or parts replacement by any person other than an authorized representative of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 xi n CAUTIONS WHEN USING EXPLOSION-PROTECTED INSTRUMENTS The GC8000 is designed to protect against explosion. When the analyzer is used in a hazardous area, observe the following precautions. Since the applicable standard differs depending on the specifications of the analyzer to be used, check the specifications of your analyzer. l Type of explosion protection To assure explosion protection, the GC8000 has a pressurized and flameproof enclosure, meeting the following standards (flameproof enclosure is not provided in FM-Y, CSA-Y): Type X pressurization and Explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, Group B, C and D (Described as FM-X hereafter) Type X and Y pressurization for Class I, Division 1, Group B, C & D (Described as FM-Y hereafter) T1 (programmed-temperature oven 320°C max., isothermal oven 225°C max., liquid-sample valve 250°C max.) T2 (programmed-temperature oven 225°C max., isothermal oven 225°C max., liquid-sample valve 225°C max.) T3 (programmed-temperature oven 145°C max., isothermal oven 145°C max., liquid-sample valve 145°C max.) T4 (programmed-temperature oven 95°C max., isothermal oven 95°C max., liquid-sample valve 95°C max.) Type X pressurization and Explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, Group B, C and D (Described as CSA-X hereafter) Type X and Y pressurization for Class I, Division 1, Group B, C & D (Described as CSA-Y hereafter) T1 (programmed-temperature oven 320°C max., isothermal oven 225°C max., liquid-sample valve 250°C max.) T2 (programmed-temperature oven 225°C max., isothermal oven 225°C max., liquid-sample valve 225°C max.) T3 (programmed-temperature oven 145°C max., isothermal oven 145°C max., liquid-sample valve 145°C max.) T4 (programmed-temperature oven 95°C max., isothermal oven 95°C max., liquid-sample valve 95°C max.) ATEX: Group II Category 2G, DEKRA 11ATEX0238 X * Ex d px II B +H2 T1 Gb (programmed-temperature oven 320°C max., isothermal oven 225°C max., liquid-sample valve 250°C max.) Ex d px II B + H2 T2 Gb (programmed-temperature oven 225°C max., isothermal oven 225°C max., liquid-sample valve 225°C max.) Ex d px II B + H2 T3 Gb (programmed-temperature oven 145°C max., isothermal oven 145°C max., liquid-sample valve 145°C max.) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 xii Ex d px II B + H2 T4 Gb (programmed-temperature oven 95°C max., isothermal oven 95°C max., liquid-sample valve 95°C max.) * : The symbol “X” used to denote specific conditions of use The symbol "X" is used to provide a means of identifying that essential information for the installation, use, and maintenance of the equipment is contained within the certificate. - Warning in the label refers you to read the instruction manual for an avoidance of static risk. - The threaded type and size of the flameproof enclosure is only uses "M25x1.5". That is the reason why no indication on the flameproof enclosure. On the other hand, the threaded adapter has the indication of its own type and size. - The gap between flameproof joints is different from the standard values of the flameproof standard. The joint dimensions of the flameproof enclosure differ from the minimum or maximum values asa mentioned in the Ex d standard. Since the modification is not allowed, this manual gives out no detailed information. - The instrument modification or parts replacement by any person other than authorized representative of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and will void the flameproof certifications. - All externally powered input signals into the pressurized enclosure shall be isolated by external relays controlled by the Ex px protection system(Ex px safety device). IECEx certified: IECEx DEK 11.0083X * Ex d px II B +H2 T1 Gb (programmed-temperature oven 320°C max., isothermal oven 225°C max., liquid-sample valve 250°C max.) Ex d px II B + H2 T2 Gb (programmed-temperature oven 225°C max., isothermal oven 225°C max., liquid-sample valve 225°C max.) Ex d px II B + H2 T3 Gb (programmed-temperature oven 145°C max., isothermal oven 145°C max., liquid-sample valve 145°C max.) Ex d px II B + H2 T4 Gb (programmed-temperature oven 95°C max., isothermal oven 95°C max., liquid-sample valve 95°C max.) * : The symbol “X” used to denote specific conditions of use The symbol “X” is used to provide a means of identifying that essential information for the installation, use, and maintenance of the equipment is contained within the certificate. - Warning in the label refers you to read the instruction manual for an avoidance of static risk. - The threaded type and size of the flameproof enclosure is only uses “M25x1.5”. That is the reason why no indication on the flameproof enclosure. On the other hand, the threaded adapter has the indication of its own type and size. - The gap between flameproof joints is different from the standard values of the flameproof standard. The joint dimensions of the flameproof enclosure differ from the minimum or maximum values asa mentioned in the Ex d standard. Since the modification is not allowed, this manual gives out no detailed information. - The instrument modification or parts replacement by any person other than authorized representative of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and will void the flameproof certifications. - All externally powered input signals into the pressurized enclosure shall be isolated by external relays controlled by the Ex px protection system(Ex px safety device). NEPSI certified: GYJ13.1125X * Ex d px II B +H2 T1 Gb (programmed-temperature oven 320°C max., isothermal oven 225°C max., liquid-sample valve 250°C max.) Ex d px II B + H2 T2 Gb (programmed-temperature oven 225°C max., isothermal oven 225°C max., liquid-sample valve 225°C max.) Ex d px II B + H2 T3 Gb (programmed-temperature oven 145°C max., isothermal oven 145°C max., liquid-sample valve 145°C max.) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 xiii Ex d px II B + H2 T4 Gb (programmed-temperature oven 95°C max., isothermal oven 95°C max., liquid-sample valve 95°C max.) * : The suffix “X” placed after the certificate number indicates that this product is subject to special conditions for safe use: - The values of the flamepaths are different from the standard values given in GB 3836.2-2010. Repair of the equipment is only allowed when done by the manufacturer or authorized representative. - When used in hazardous location, electrostatic discharge should be avoided. - The minimum overpressure of both electronic section and ovens is 392 Pa. - The purging time for electronic section is 18 minutes. - The purging time for ovens is 8 minutes. TIIS (The Technology Institution of Industrial Safety) Ex pd II B +H2 T1 (programmed-temperature oven 320°C max., isothermal oven 225°C max., liquid-sample valve 250°C max.) Ex pd II B +H2 T2 (programmed-temperature oven 225°C max., isothermal oven 225°C max., liquid-sample valve 225°C max.) Ex pd II B +H2 T3 (programmed-temperature oven 145°C max., isothermal oven 145°C max., liquid-sample valve 145°C max.) Ex pd II B +H2 T4 (programmed-temperature oven 95°C max., isothermal oven 95°C max., liquid-sample valve 95°C max.) l Analyzer component names Protection system B (Flameproof enclosure) *1 Cable entry (Conduit entry) Protection system A (Flameproof enclosure) *1 Cover of safety system Electronics section (Purged and pressurized enclosure) *2 Vent for protective gas (instrumental air) Covers of electronics section Door of electronics section Name plate Control unit Protective gas (instrumental air) inlet Oven safety unit Door of isothermal oven or programmedtemperature oven door Oven unit Covers of pressure and flow control section (Non-purged and non-pressurized enclosure) Isothermal oven or programmedtemperature oven (Purged and pressurized enclosure) *2 Note: *1: *2: Replace the following term for FM, CSA explosionproof models. Protection system A or B (explosionproof enclosure) Type X pressurization enclosure or Type Y pressurization enclosure Figure 2 Analyzer component names for explosionproof type IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 xiv l Opening/closing the door The control unit, and the oven unit (large isothermal oven, standard isothermal oven, programmed-temperatureoven) have a door fastener with a lock. Lock the door when operating these devices. The same key is used for all the door fasteners. Do not lose it. Confirm that the lever cannot be lifted up after locking. Lever Door Key (Accessory kit) Right side view Figure 3 Door fastener l Electronics section The electronics section of the control unit, and the oven unit (large isothermal oven, standard isothermal oven, programmed-temperature oven) is a pressurized enclosure. Use a hex wrench (an accessory) to open/close the cover of the electronic chamber. l Precautions for protection system (The analyzer with FM-Y, CSA-Y does not have the protection system.) WARNING When the cover of the protection system is uninstalled, use a gas detector to check that the concentration of explosive gases in the ambient atmosphere is less than the allowable limit. The protection system is a flameproof enclosure. When handling the screws on the cover of the protection system, note the following to avoid damaging the screws since they cannot be repaired. • Use a hex wrench (option) to tighten/loosen the hexagon socketset screw. • The cover should be placed in a clean plastic bag or on a clean space to prevent it from contamination. Before installing the cover, confirm that the body and screws are not contaminated. If they are, make sure to clean them. • Since the screws are coated with MOLYKOTE, do not lubricate them. • When installing the cover, tighten the screws by hand; never use tools. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 xv Hex. key wrench (Accessory kit) Protection-film cover for wiring Threads Hex.socket set screw Turn in this direction to remove Turn in this direction to replace Cover Body Figure4 Opening/closing the cover of the protection system l Precautions for hydrogen gas When using hydrogen gas as the carrier gas, the FID or FPD combustion gas, install the analyzer in a location equipped with a ventilator or where there is sufficient ventilation to ensure safety. Check for leaks regularly to make sure there are no gas leaks from the pipe joints. Supply hydrogen gas to this analyzer at 500 ±20 kPa to meet the explosionproof requirements. l Protective gas (instrumental air) pipe This is the pipe for supplying air to the analyzer for purging pressurized enclosures. An air pressure of 350 to 900 kPa (500 to 900 kPa for FPD) is required. Use general instrument air as the source and connect the piping to the analyzer PURGE AIR port. A pressure regulator should be installed in-between. l Installation site and environment The analyzer specifications allow it to be used in hazardous areas as defined by DIV1, GPS B, C & D, T1, T2, T3, T4 (FM, CSA) or Zone 1 IIB + H2T1, T2, T3, T4 (ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI, TIIS). However, never install the analyzer in an area where dense explosive gas exists for a long time. For the class of hazardous areas: For FM, refer to Article 500 of the National Electrical Code (NEC). For CSA, refer to Section 18 of CSA C22.1, Canadian Electrical Code (CEC). For ATEX or IECEx, see IEC/EN 60079-10-1. For NEPSI, see GB 3836.14. For TIIS explosion protection, refer to Article 1 (15) to (17) of the Constructional Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Explosive Atmospheres (Japanese only). l Wiring works WARNING • All wiring shall comply with National Electric Code ANSI/NFP A 70 and Local Electric Codes. • In a hazardous area, use conduits for wiring in the protection system or to electronics sections. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 xvi CAUTION • The unused electrical connection ports should be closed with an appropriate flameproofcertified plug. • Analyzers have pressurized enclosures. The cable end should be sealed in order to maintain pressure to the pressurized enclosure. Otherwise, power is not supplied to the electronics section. WARNING • All wiring shall comply with Canadian Electric Code CSA C22.1 and Local Electric Codes. • In a hazardous area, use conduits for wiring in the protection system or to electronics sections. CAUTION • The unused electrical connection ports should be closed with an appropriate flameproofcertified plug. • Analyzers have pressurized enclosures. The cable end should be sealed in order to maintain pressure to the pressurized enclosure. Otherwise, power is not supplied to the electronics section. WARNING • All wiring shall comply with Local Electric Codes and Requirements. • In a hazardous area, use appropriate flameproof-certified parts for connecting cables. • All externally powered input signals into the pressurized enclosure shall be isolated by external relays controlled by the Ex px protection system(Ex px safety device). CAUTION • The unused electrical connection ports should be closed with an appropriate flameproofcertified plug. • Analyzers have pressurized enclosures. The cable end should be sealed in order to maintain pressure to the pressurized enclosure. Otherwise, power is not supplied to the electronics section. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 xvii WARNING • In case of TIIS-certified wiring, the attached cable packing adapters or sealing fitting must be used. Otherwise, it does not comply with TIIS regulation. • Use the wiring to the pressurized enclosure, whose allowable temperature is more than 80°C. IMPORTANT Cables should be arranged in an orderly manner in the protection system. Otherwise, they may damage other parts (e.g. relay). l Maintenance and inspection Before opening the doors or the covers for maintenance and inspection, be sure to turn off the power and wait for at least 25 minutes. After completing inspections, close the door or cover tightly, check that the specified explosionproof performance is ensured, and then turn on the power. The parts to be checked are described in “6. Maintenance”. If any of the following damage occurs, contact a Yokogawa sales representative or the Yokogawa sales division. • The screws securing the Protection System (explosionproof construction) are damaged • The exterior of the enclosures is damaged • Packings are cracked or deformed l Override function (The analyzer with FM-Y, CSA-Y does not have this function.) WARNING When the override function is used, use a gas detector to check that the concentration of explosive gases in the ambient atmosphere is less than the allowable limit. In this analyzer, if the pressure of the pressurized enclosure (electronics section) drops below a specified level while the power is on, the protection system is activated to stop power supply. Therefore, if the door of the electronics section is inadvertently opened for maintenance while the power is on, the protection system is activated to cut off the power. The override function forcibly disables this function. This function allows operators to open the door or cover of the pressurized enclosure while the power is still on. This function is activated by opening the cover of the protection system and pressing the override switch while the light sensor is detecting more than 100 (lx) of light. The function becomes invalid automatically when the cover of the protection system is closed. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 xviii l Checking the pressure in the pressurized enclosure The LED (Green) of "POWER" is turned ON and the LED (Red) of "ALARM" is turned OFF when the pressure is in the normal condition. See Figure.5. The pressurized enclosure is divided into "Electronics section" and "Isothermal oven” and “programmed-temperature oven”. How to check the pressure in each enclosure is as follows. WARNING When the cover of the protection system is uninstalled, use a gas detector to check that the concentration of explosive gases in the ambient atmosphere is less than the allowable limit. The status of the protection system can be checked with the LEDs as shown in Figure 5. The meaning of each LED is written on the status display. POWER: ON when power is supplied to the protection system PRESSURE: ON when the specified internal pressure is applied to the electronics section. This LED is ON in the normal condition. If the internal pressure becomes low, it turns off. PURGING: OVERRIDE: ON when purging the electronics section. After purging, it turns off. When power is supplied and “PRESSURE” LED is on, this LED turns ON and purging begins. After the electronics section is purged for 21 ± 3 min, the LED turns off and power is supplied to the electronics section. The LED is OFF in the normal condition after purging. If purging ends incompletely, the status of purging is reset and purging begins again. ON when the override function is activated. , If the internal pressure in the isothermal oven becomes low, the following alarms appear on the operation panel. Top isothermal oven: Alarm for low internal pressure No. 112 “OVEN1 PRESS DOWN” Middle isothermal oven or programmed-temperature oven: Alarm for low internal pressure No. 113 “OVEN2 PRESS DOWN” Bottom isothermal oven: Alarm for low internal pressure No. 114 “OVEN3 PRESS DOWN” Alarms are displayed on the “ASET” PC software for the specification without the operation panel on GC8000. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 xix Protection system (Explosionproof / Flameproof enclosure) Cover Override switch Light sensor OVERRIDE SWITCH LABEL POWER PRESSURE PURGING OVERRIDE Status Display OVERRIDE LED (Yellow) PURGING LED (Red) PRESSURE LED (Green) Door of electronic section POWER LED (Yellow) Operating Display Electronics section (Pressurized enclosure) Cover of electronic section TIIS, FM-X, CSA-X, ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI Door of isothermal oven LED (Green) of "POWER" LED (Red) of "ALARM" LED (Green) of analysis "RUN" POWER ALARM RUN Electronic section (Pressurized enclosure) FM-Y, CSA-Y Figure 5 l Operation WARNING • Do not open the doors and the covers. Refer servicing to propery trained personnel. High voltage and high temperature are presented on the inside parts. If contacted, produce electric shock and burns. • Before opening the doors and the covers, turn off the power under the permission of the administrator and wait for at least 25 minutes with the Protective gas (instrumental air) supplied. • Electrostatic charge may cause an explosion hazard. Avoid any actions that cause the generation of electrostatic charge, such as rubbing with a dry cloth. • Do not put anything on the surface of the Operating display (touch operation panel) such as clear protection film. This would be a violation for Ex-proof cirtification requirements. CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 xx FM-X, CSA-X, ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI, TIIS (1) Power is supplied to the protection system (flameproof enclosure). (2) Protective gas (instrumental air) is supplied to the protective gas (instrumental air) inlet. (3) When the internal pressure in the electronics section, which is the control unit and oven unit 1 to 3, exceeds 392 (Pa), purging to each electronics section begins. (4) After 21 ±3 minutes purging, power is applied to the electronics section of the control unit. On the other hand, it does not be applied to the electronics section of the oven unit 1 to 3, the heater and detector in the oven yet. (5) When the internal pressure in the oven unit 1 to 3 exceeds 392 (Pa), purging to each oven unit begins independently. (6) After the purging time as follows, power is applied to the electronics section of the oven unit. Then the hydrogen limiting unit, the heater and detector in the oven are ready for operation. The purging time depends on the flameproof certifications. TIIS, FM, CSA: 9 ±2.5 minutes ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI: 11 ±3 minutes (1) The operation and supply of sample to be measured are stopped. For the detail procedure, refer to “3.3.4 Stopping operation”. (2) The detector is turned off. For the detail procedure, refer to “3.2.4 Stopping operation”. In case of FID, FID with methanizer and FPD, the detector should be “Frame out” with stopping the supply of make-up gas, combustion gas and combustion air. Then, wait for over 4 hours. (3) Each heater of the isothermal oven, programmed-temperature oven, LSV and FPD is turned off. For the detail procedure, refer to “Procedure to Turn off the Heater” in “3.3.4 Stopping operation”. (4) Wait until the oven temperature drops to near room temperature. Usually it takes over one hour. For the detail procedure, refer to “3.1.3 How to Check the Temperature at Each Part”. (5) The supply of power to the protection system is stopped. (6) After the oven temperature drops, the supply of the protective gas (instrumental air) is stopped. For long-term operation stop, refer to “3.3.7 Precautions for long-term operation stop. IMPORTANT In case of emergency, stop the supply of power immediately. In this case, it may damage to the analyzer. A. Electronics section (control unit, oven unit 1 to 3) (1) When the internal pressure in the electronics section falls below 392 (Pa), the protection system immediately shuts off the power supply to the control unit and oven unit 1 to 3. (2) When the internal pressure described above returns to normal, the procedure starts automatically from item (4) in . B. Each isothermal oven (or programmed-temperature oven) in the oven unit 1 to 3 (1) When any of internal pressure in the oven falls below 392 (Pa), the control unit immediately shuts off the power supply to the electronics section of the relevant oven. (2) When the internal pressure in the oven returns to normal, the procedure starts automatically at item (6) in . IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 xxi FM-Y, CSA-Y (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Protective gas (instrumental air) is supplied to the protective gas (instrumental air) inlet. The pressure value is checked if it is indicated the specified one at the pressure gauge. Wait for 21±3 minutes to keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied. Power is supplied to the electronics section of the control unit. Check if the “Elec. Press. Down” error is not outputted. When this alarm is outputted, stop the supply of power. In this case, the procedure starts automatically described in “A. Electronics section (control unit, oven unit 1 to 3)” in . (6) When the internal pressure in the oven unit 1 to 3 exceeds 392 (Pa), purging to the oven unit begins. (7) After 9 ±2.5 minutes the purging, power is applied to the electronics section of the oven unit. Then the hydrogen limiting unit, the heater and detector in the oven are ready for operation. (1) The operation and the supply of sample to be measured are stopped. For the detail procedure, refer to “3.3.4 Stopping operation” (2) The detector is turned off. For the detail procedure, refer to “3.2.4 Stopping operation”. In case of FID, FID with methanizer and FPD, the detector should be “Frame out” with stopping the supply of make-up gas, combustion gas and combustion air. Then, wait for over 4 hours. (3) Each heater of the isothermal oven, programmed-temperature oven, LSV and FPD is turned off. For the detail procedure, refer to “Procedure to Turn off the Heater” in “3.3.4 Stopping operation”. (4) Wait until the oven temperature drops to near room temperature. Usually it takes over one hour. For the detail procedure, refer to “3.1.3 How to Check the Temperature at Each Part”. (5) The supply of power to the protection system is stopped. (6) After the oven temperature drops, the supply of the protective gas (instrumental air) is stopped. For long-term operation stop, refer to “3.3.7 Precautions for long-term operation stop. IMPORTANT In case of emergency, stop the supply of power immediately. In this case, it may damage to the analyzer. A. Electronics section (control unit, oven unit 1 to 3) When the internal pressure in the electronics section falls below 392 (Pa), the following function is activated. The power supply is not shut off automatically. It should be done manually. - The alarm is outputted from the contact output. - The pressure low alarm is indicated on the operation panel. - The “ALARM” LED is turned on. B. Each isothermal oven (or programmed-temperature oven) in the oven unit 1 to 3 When the internal pressure in any of the ovens falls below 392 (Pa), the control unit immediately shuts off the power supply to the heater and detector in the respective ovens. The function as follows is also activated at the same time. - The alarm is outputted from the contact output. - The pressure low alarm is indicated on the operation panel. - The “ALARM” LED is turned on. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 xxii When the internal pressure in the oven returns to normal, the procedure starts automatically from item (7) in . l Safety Instructions This content described as follows is only for ATEX, IECEx, and NEPSI. ● Specification of safety system Protection system Oven safety unit Power supply Install in accordance with the specification of GC8000 Ambient condition Threshold Pressure 392 Pa value Flow rate of protective gas 35 L/min (instrumental air) Time Purging time 21 ±3 min 11 ±3 min Safety response time < 2 sec Safety HFT (*1) 1 characteristics SIL (*2) 2 Proof test interval No needed At least once within 3 years Replacement interval (*3) At least once within 12 years At least once within 27 years Type of Protection system itself Ex d Ex px protection Protection target Ex px (*1) (*2) (*3) HFT: hardware Fault Tolerance SIL: Safety Integrity Level This interval is the longest period to maintain explosion proof function and does not mean that the system is under warranty during the interval. ● Installation and wiring works The safety system is built-in GC8000. Installation and wiring into GC8000 are completed before shipping. • Do not use for other than GC8000. • Do not change connection of cables and harnesses. ● Action in Emergency Relays and SSRs in safety system will be in safe state (contact opens) when de-energized. In emergency, stop supply of power to GC8000 immediately and contact your nearest Yokogawa representative. • In a normal situation, follow the procedure of “3.3.4 Stopping operation” for shutdown, or GC8000 may be damaged. ● Regular proof test In order to maintain the safety function, proof test at least once while test period below is necessary. Contact your nearest Yokogawa representative. If proof test is not performed for longer than test interval, GC8000 cannot be used as explosion proof equipment. Test interval Protection system No needed Oven safety unit 3 years ● Replacement In following case, stop supply of power to GC8000 immediately and replace the safety system. • Safety function does not work correctly. • Safety system is used over replacement interval. Replacement is needed even if all safety functions work correctly. Contact your nearest Yokogawa representative. Replacement interval Protection system 12 years Oven safety unit 27 years IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 Toc-1 GC8000 Process Gas Chromatograph IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition CONTENTS u Introduction.....................................................................................................i u Notice..............................................................................................................ii 1. Overview..................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 Wiring and Piping Diagram............................................................................... 1-4 1.2 External Dimensions......................................................................................... 1-5 1.3 Auxiliary Hardware.......................................................................................... 1-16 1.4 Gases Required for Operation........................................................................ 1-16 1.5 Conformance Standards................................................................................. 1-18 1.6 Data Plate.......................................................................................................... 1-19 1.7 Features............................................................................................................ 1-29 1.8 GCM................................................................................................................... 1-30 1.9 User Program Function................................................................................... 1-31 1.10 Configuration................................................................................................... 1-31 1.11 1.12 1.10.1 Type and Appearance....................................................................... 1-31 1.10.2 Components and their Functions...................................................... 1-33 Human Machine Interface............................................................................... 1-43 1.11.1 Types of GC8000 Human Machine Interface................................... 1-43 1.11.2 User Level......................................................................................... 1-46 1.11.3 Status and Operation Mode.............................................................. 1-46 Analyzer operation........................................................................................... 1-48 1.12.1 Process status.................................................................................. 1-48 1.12.2 Manual status.................................................................................... 1-82 1.12.3 Stream............................................................................................... 1-83 1.12.4 Method.............................................................................................. 1-85 2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring................................................................ 2-1 2.1 Installation.......................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.1 Installing the Analyzer......................................................................... 2-1 2.1.2 Installing Auxiliary Hardware............................................................... 2-4 2.2 Piping.................................................................................................................. 2-7 2.2.1 Types of Piping and Installation.......................................................... 2-7 2.2.2 Connecting Piping............................................................................. 2-10 2.3 Wiring................................................................................................................ 2-12 2.3.1 Types of Wiring and Locations.......................................................... 2-13 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 Toc-2 3. 2.3.2 Recommended Cables..................................................................... 2-14 2.3.3 Preparing Wiring Depending on Specifications................................ 2-16 2.3.4 Connecting Power Cable and Grounding......................................... 2-24 2.3.5 Connecting Signal Cables................................................................ 2-27 Basic Operation and Startup.................................................................... 3-1 3.1 Checking the pressure in the pressurized enclosure.................................... 3-1 3.1.1 How to check the Status Indication of the Protection System............ 3-1 3.1.2 GC-HMI (Touch Panel)....................................................................... 3-3 3.1.3 How to Check the Temperature at Each Part..................................... 3-5 3.1.4 How to Check the Operating Status of the Detector........................... 3-6 3.1.5 How to Measure/Set the Pressure and Flow Rate of Various Gases.3-7 3.1.6 How to Check the Analysis Result...................................................... 3-9 3.1.7 How to Check the Alarm................................................................... 3-13 3.1.8 How to Check the Chromatogram.................................................... 3-16 3.2 Startup............................................................................................................... 3-17 3.2.1 Preparation and check before the power is supplied....................... 3-17 3.2.2 Power supply.................................................................................... 3-20 3.2.3 Operation after supplying power....................................................... 3-21 3.2.4 On/Off operation of detectors........................................................... 3-23 3.2.5 Measuring the standard sample (gas or liquid)................................ 3-25 3.2.6 Calibration......................................................................................... 3-28 3.3 4. Normal operation (continuous measurement of process sample)............ 3-33 3.3.1 Setting Stream sequence................................................................. 3-33 3.3.2 Setting pressure and flow rate of process samples.......................... 3-34 3.3.3 Starting operation.............................................................................. 3-34 3.3.4 Stopping operation............................................................................ 3-34 3.3.5 Checking data in upper systems....................................................... 3-35 3.3.6 Storing parameters........................................................................... 3-35 3.3.7 Precautions for long-term operation stop......................................... 3-35 GC-HMI (Touch Panel)............................................................................... 4-1 4.1 Setting Screen.................................................................................................... 4-5 4.1.1 General Setting................................................................................... 4-6 4.1.2 GC-HMI Setting................................................................................. 4-11 4.1.3 GC8000 Setting................................................................................ 4-15 4.1.4 Alarm Setting.................................................................................... 4-17 4.2 Analyzer Overview Screen.............................................................................. 4-19 4.3 Analyzer Map Screen....................................................................................... 4-23 4.4 4.3.1 GCM Map Tab................................................................................... 4-23 4.3.2 Stream Map Tab................................................................................ 4-24 Analyzer Operation Screen............................................................................. 4-24 4.4.1 GCM Tab........................................................................................... 4-25 4.4.2 SYS Tab............................................................................................ 4-38 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 Toc-3 4.5 Chromatogram Screen.................................................................................... 4-42 4.5.1 Pen Selector..................................................................................... 4-44 4.5.2 Snapshot........................................................................................... 4-50 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.5.3 Detail Settings................................................................................... 4-50 4.5.4 Zoomed View.................................................................................... 4-58 Analysis Result Screen................................................................................... 4-59 4.6.1 Analysis Result Screen..................................................................... 4-60 4.6.2 Concentration Analysis History Screen, Retention Time History Screen, and Calibration Factor History Screen.............................................. 4-62 Alarm Screen.................................................................................................... 4-65 4.7.1 Alarm Status Screen......................................................................... 4-66 4.7.2 Alarm History Screen........................................................................ 4-67 4.7.3 Alarm Details..................................................................................... 4-68 4.7.4 Alarm Popup Screen......................................................................... 4-68 Help Screen...................................................................................................... 4-69 5. EtherLCD.................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1 User Level Switching......................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 Status Display Screen....................................................................................... 5-4 5.3 5.4 5.2.1 A/I Status............................................................................................. 5-5 5.2.2 A/O Status........................................................................................... 5-6 5.2.3 D/I Status............................................................................................ 5-7 5.2.4 D/O Status........................................................................................... 5-8 5.2.5 Remote A/O Status........................................................................... 5-10 5.2.6 Remote D/O Status........................................................................... 5-11 5.2.7 Revision Number.............................................................................. 5-11 5.2.8 Ethernet Status................................................................................. 5-13 5.2.9 Alarm Status..................................................................................... 5-15 5.2.10 Standard B.P data............................................................................. 5-18 5.2.11 Operation Status............................................................................... 5-18 Operation Display screen............................................................................... 5-22 5.3.1 A/O Chromatogram Operation......................................................... 5-22 5.3.2 A/O Operation................................................................................... 5-23 5.3.3 D/O Operation................................................................................... 5-24 5.3.4 Remote A/O Operation..................................................................... 5-25 5.3.5 Remote D/O Operation..................................................................... 5-25 5.3.6 User Program Operation................................................................... 5-26 5.3.7 SD Card Operation........................................................................... 5-31 5.3.8 Auto Tuning Operation...................................................................... 5-32 5.3.9 Detector Adjustment......................................................................... 5-33 5.3.10 Status Switching............................................................................... 5-38 5.3.11 Password Setup................................................................................ 5-38 Table screen..................................................................................................... 5-39 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 Toc-4 6. 5.4.1 System Settings................................................................................ 5-40 5.4.2 Operation Parameters...................................................................... 5-41 5.4.3 Temperature Setup........................................................................... 5-47 5.4.4 Detector Setup.................................................................................. 5-48 5.4.5 Method Setup.................................................................................... 5-50 5.4.6 Stream Setup.................................................................................... 5-63 5.4.7 Stream Sequence ............................................................................ 5-64 5.4.8 Peak Setup-General......................................................................... 5-65 5.4.9 Peak Setup-Specific......................................................................... 5-66 5.4.10 Cal/Val Setup.................................................................................... 5-75 5.4.11 Multirange Setup............................................................................... 5-79 5.4.12 Alarm Setup...................................................................................... 5-80 5.4.13 Peak Assignments ........................................................................... 5-81 5.4.14 Communications Setup .................................................................... 5-82 5.4.15 D/O Setup ........................................................................................ 5-83 5.4.16 D/I Setup........................................................................................... 5-87 5.4.17 A/O Setup.......................................................................................... 5-89 5.4.18 A/I Setup........................................................................................... 5-90 5.4.19 Network Setup.................................................................................. 5-91 5.4.20 GCCU Setup..................................................................................... 5-93 5.4.21 Remote A/O (GCCU) Set.................................................................. 5-93 5.4.22 GCM Setup....................................................................................... 5-94 5.4.23 SYS Setup........................................................................................ 5-96 5.4.24 User Programming............................................................................ 5-98 5.4.25 SIMDIS Setup.................................................................................5-101 5.4.26 Units Setup (User Defined) ............................................................5-103 5.4.27 MODBUS CLIENT Setup................................................................5-104 Maintenance................................................................................................6-1 6.1 Maintenance and Inspection............................................................................ 6-1 6.1.1 Explosion-protection Structure........................................................... 6-1 6.1.2 Stopping the system........................................................................... 6-1 6.1.3 Routine Inspection.............................................................................. 6-1 6.1.4 Cylinder............................................................................................... 6-2 6.2 6.1.5 Leak Test............................................................................................. 6-2 6.1.6 Insulation Resistance Test.................................................................. 6-2 6.1.7 Maintenance of Bushings in Isothermal Ovens.................................. 6-2 6.1.8 Checking Chromatograms.................................................................. 6-3 6.1.9 Recommended Parts List for Periodical Replacement...................... 6-3 Procedure for Replacing Parts......................................................................... 6-5 6.2.1 Parts for the Protection system........................................................... 6-5 6.2.2 Components for Electronics section................................................. 6-14 6.2.3 Components for Pressure/Flow Control Section.............................. 6-22 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 Toc-5 7. 6.2.4 Oven (Isothermal, Programmed-Temperature) Components.......... 6-31 6.2.5 Components in the Sample Processing System.............................. 6-60 Troubleshooting........................................................................................ 7-1 7.1 7.2 Appendix A Alarm................................................................................................................... 7-1 7.1.1 Alarm Type.......................................................................................... 7-1 7.1.2 Alarm Process..................................................................................... 7-2 7.1.3 Alarm Number..................................................................................... 7-2 7.1.4 Alarm Contents................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.5 GC-HMI Alarms................................................................................. 7-11 Common Procedure of Troubleshooting...................................................... 7-12 7.2.1 Malfunctioning Component Concentration Value............................. 7-12 7.2.2 Malfunctioning Retention Time......................................................... 7-13 7.2.3 Malfunctioning Chromatogram......................................................... 7-14 7.2.4 Column system failure...................................................................... 7-18 Principle of Gas Chromatograph.................................................App.A-1 Appendix B Terminology........................................................................ App.B-1 Appendix C Standard Specifications.................................................... App.C-1 Appendix D Action of External Input and Output Signals.................. App.D-1 Appendix E Computation Scheme.........................................................App.E-1 Appendix F GC File Converter (GCFC)..................................................App.F-1 Appendix G User Program..................................................................... App.G-1 Appendix H GC User Programming Debugger (GCUD)...................... App.H-1 Appendix I Distillation Analyzer Operation..............................................App.I-1 Revision Information................................................................................................i IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-1 <1. Overview> 1. Overview Three types of GC8000 are available (Type 1 to 4). And each type has a wall-mounting version and a self-standing version. Protection system Protection system Control unit Control unit Large isothermal oven Large isothermal oven Standard isothermal oven Type 1 (Wall-mounting) Type 2 (Wall-mounting) Protection system Explosion proof enclosure Control unit Control unit Standard isothermal oven Standard isothermal oven Standard isothermal oven Programmed oven Standard isothermal oven Type 3 (Wall-mounting) Type 4 (Wall-mounting) * The self-standing type is equipped with a GCSMP (excluding Type 3). External sampling systems can be connected as needed. Figure 1.1 GC8000 configuration example l System configuration The following equipment is used to construct a process gas chromatograph system with the GC8000 analyzer: • External sample conditioning equipment • Personal computer • Computer for upper system, Analog equipment • Analyzer network system The system configuration may differ according to the specifications. See the General Specifications for details IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 1  1-2 <1. Overview> l Model and Suffix code There are some limits in each choice item of Model and Suffix code. Option Code GC8000 ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••• ••••••••••••• Explosion- -F ••••••••••••• proof -G ••••••••••••• -C ••••••••••••• -D ••••••••••••• -A ••••••••••••• -E ••••••••••••• -T ••••••••••••• -P Oven 1 1 ••••••••••••• 2 ••••••••••••• Oven 2 0 ••••••••••••• 2 ••••••••••••• 3 ••••••••••••• Oven 3 0 ••••••••••••• 2 ••••••••••••• Temperature rating A ••••••••••••• (Upper limit of oven B ••••••••••••• temp) C ••••••••••••• D ••••••••••••• EPC (Electronic N ••••••••••••• Pressure Controller) 1 ••••••••••••• Display N ••••••••••••• 1 ••••••••••••• ••••••••••••• Power supply -A ••••••••••••• -B ••••••••••••• -C ••••••••••••• -D ••••••••••••• -E ••••••••••••• -F ••••••••••••• -G ••••••••••••• -H Language E ••••••••••••• J ••••••••••••• ••••••••••••• Wiring connection G ••••••••••••• P ••••••••••••• Q R ••••••••••••• Installation -S ••••••••••••• -W ••••••••••••• Connection of air & carrier gas N ••••••••••••• R ••••••••••••• Air output S ••••••••••••• Model Suffix Code Nos. of air-output for stream changing E 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E ••••••••••••• ••••••••••••• ••••••••••••• ••••••••••••• ••••••••••••• ••••••••••••• ••••••••••••• ••••••••••••• ••••••••••••• ••••••••••••• ••••••••••••• ••••••••••••• ••••••••••••• ••••••••••••• ••••••••••••• Description Process Gas Chromatograph FM X-purge FM Y-purge CSA X-purge CSA Y-purge ATEX IECEx TIIS NEPSI Large isothermal oven Standard isothermal oven None Standard isothermal oven Programmed oven None Standard isothermal oven T1 (320 degC or less) T2 (225 degC or less) T3 (145 degC or less) T4 (95 degC or less) None Provided None Provided 100VAC+/-10%, 50/60Hz+/- 5% 110VAC+/-10%, 50/60Hz+/- 5% 115VAC+/-10%, 50/60Hz+/- 5% 120VAC+/-10%, 50/60Hz+/- 5% 200VAC+/-10%, 50/60Hz+/- 5% 220VAC+/-10%, 50/60Hz+/- 5% 230VAC+/-10%, 50/60Hz+/- 5% 240VAC+/-10%, 50/60Hz+/- 5% English Japnese Conduit wiring (3/4NPT(F)) Cable packing (G3/4(F)) Cable packing (3/4NPT(F)) Cable packing (M25x1.5(F)) Self-standing Wall-mounting Inlet: NPT, Outlet: 1/4” tube fitting Inlet: Rc, Outlet: 6mm tube fitting To GCSMP (Analyzer Base Sampling System) To External System Decimal: 0 Decimal: 1 Decimal: 2 Decimal: 3 Decimal: 4 Decimal: 5 Decimal: 6 Decimal: 7 Decimal: 8 Binary: 1bit Binary: 2bits Binary: 3bits Binary: 4bits Binary: 5bits IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  Model Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Ethernet connection Option 1-3 <1. Overview> Option Code ••••••••••••• -P ••••••••••••• -C ••••••••••••• -D ••••••••••••• -1 ••••••••••••• -2 ••••••••••••• -3 ••••••••••••• -4 ••••••••••••• -5 ••••••••••••• -6 ••••••••••••• -7 ••••••••••••• -8 ••••••••••••• -A ••••••••••••• -N ••••••••••••• C ••••••••••••• D ••••••••••••• 1 ••••••••••••• 2 ••••••••••••• 3 ••••••••••••• 4 ••••••••••••• 5 ••••••••••••• 6 ••••••••••••• 7 ••••••••••••• 8 ••••••••••••• A ••••••••••••• N ••••••••••••• 1 ••••••••••••• 2 ••••••••••••• 3 ••••••••••••• 4 ••••••••••••• 5 ••••••••••••• 6 ••••••••••••• 7 ••••••••••••• 8 ••••••••••••• A ••••••••••••• N ••••••••••••• 1 ••••••••••••• 2 ••••••••••••• 3 ••••••••••••• 4 ••••••••••••• 5 ••••••••••••• 6 ••••••••••••• 7 ••••••••••••• 8 ••••••••••••• A ••••••••••••• N ••••••••••••• 1 ••••••••••••• 2 ••••••••••••• 3 ••••••••••••• 4 ••••••••••••• 5 ••••••••••••• 6 ••••••••••••• 7 ••••••••••••• 8 ••••••••••••• A ••••••••••••• N -A ••••••••••••• -B ••••••••••••• -C ••••••••••••• -D ••••••••••••• -N ••••••••••••• N ••••••••••••• N ••••••••••••• /KC Suffix Code Description User Programming Serial communication (1ch) Serial communication (2ch) AO (System isolated), 8 outputs AO (Channel isolated), 8 outputs AI (Voltage), 4 inputs AI (Current), 4 inputs DIO (DC), 3 outputs & 3 inputs DIO (AC), 3 outputs & 3 inputs DO (DC), 5 outputs DO (AC), 5 outputs DI, 8 inputs None Serial communication (1ch) Serial communication (2ch) AO (System isolated), 8 outputs AO (Channel isolated), 8 outputs AI (Voltage), 4 inputs AI (Current), 4 inputs DIO (DC), 3 outputs & 3 inputs DIO (AC), 3 outputs & 3 inputs DO (DC), 5 outputs DO (AC), 5 outputs DI, 8 inputs None AO (System isolated), 8 outputs AO (Channel isolated), 8 outputs AI (Voltage), 4 inputs AI (Current), 4 inputs DIO (DC), 3 outputs & 3 inputs DIO (AC), 3 outputs & 3 inputs DO (DC), 5 outputs DO (AC), 5 outputs DI, 8 inputs None AO (System isolated), 8 outputs AO (Channel isolated), 8 outputs AI (Voltage), 4 inputs AI (Current), 4 inputs DIO (DC), 3 outputs & 3 inputs DIO (AC), 3 outputs & 3 inputs DO (DC), 5 outputs DO (AC), 5 outputs DI, 8 inputs None AO (System isolated), 8 outputs AO (Channel isolated), 8 outputs AI (Voltage), 4 inputs AI (Current), 4 inputs DIO (DC), 3 outputs & 3 inputs DIO (AC), 3 outputs & 3 inputs DO (DC), 5 outputs DO (AC), 5 outputs DI, 8 inputs None 100Base TX (RJ45 port), Dual type 100Base FX (SC connector), Dual type 100Base TX (RJ45 port), Single type 100Base FX (SC connector), Single type Always “-N” Always “N” Always “N” EMC model (only TIIS) For products whose suffix code contains “Z,” an exclusive manual may be included. Please read it along with the standard manual. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 1  1.1 1-4 <1. Overview> Wiring and Piping Diagram Ethernet communication *10 Serial communication (RS-422) *10 *4 Contact output for System alarm 1 *4 Contact output for Annunciator *4 *6 Analog output (4 to 20mA DC) Channel isolation or System isolation, up to 32 Contact output (AC or DC), up to 20 *10 Power Analog input (4 to 20mA/1 to 5V DC), up to 16 *10 Contact input (5V DC, 20mA DC or more), up to 32 *1 50A SGP, STPG Vent line (1/8 inch 316SS pipes for standard, 1/4 inch teflon tube for FID/FPD) Grounding resistance 100Ω or less 15A SPG, STPG Vent stack Air output for Stream switching valve (350 kPa), up to 8 *5 Dehumidifier *8 Vent header (Both ends are Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT) 15A SPG, STPG Drain ID:10mm or more Calibration standard sample *9 Sample *7 Drain tank Using a drain tank Without Vent stack Using a water seal pot With Vent stack … 50A Water seal pot Sample *2 Analyzer base sampling unit (Depends on specifications) (Spare) 15A SPG, STPG Vent stack Combustion air for FID/FPD (400 to 700 kPa) Air output for Atmospheric balance valve (350 kPa) *3 Instrument air (350 to 900kPa) *11 (500 to 900 kPa for FPD) Carrier gas Liquid sample (Spare) 50A SGP, STPG Combustion gas or Make-up gas for FID/FPD *1: The specification determines the number of Explosion proof enclosures. No enclosures is needed for FM-Y, CSA-Y type. *2: If an analyzer base sampling unit is provided, most applications require no external sampling equipment. In addition, optimum sampling systems are prepared depending on various conditions. (For details, consult Yokogawa. Optimal sampling systems will be offered.) *3: For air purge piping, use stainless steel pipe of 1/2 inch or more. *4: Power and contact output for system alarm 1 or annunciator are connected to control unit in case of FM-Y, CSA-Y type. *5: Dehumidifier can be optionally provided by Yokogawa. Other wiring cables, piping and installation materials should be supplied by the user. *6: Circuit breaker (30 AT or less) shall be suitable for the item of the power supply described in the specification, and located near the analyzer. *7: Drain tank is needed only for GCs using FID/FPD. This is not used for GCs using TCD. *8: Fix venting pipes properly so that the load of the venting pipes does not apply to the assembling vents of this analyzer. *9: The number of streams including one for calibration standard sample is as follows, in case of using GCSMP. Type 1: Maximum of 7 Type 2: Maximum of 4 *10: Signal interrupters (disconnects) are required depending on the specification. *11: Air pressure set value of the regulator is depended on the source air temperature and need to tune the setting value. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  External Dimensions Type 1 (Wall-mounting) Unit: mm Protection system *1 102 580 Wiring connection *2 Connection to electronics section *2 102 Vent for protective gas (instrumental air) Grounding wiring (100 Ω or less) Air outlet for stream switching valve 6 mm or 1/4” tube Control unit Inlet/outlet for sample gas, carrier gases, etc. 6 mm or 1/4” tube 50 (935) 375 Vent header *1 (connection Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT) 1131 Protective gas (instrumental air) inlet Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT Operation panel *1 Pressure gauge *1 Holes for installation 4-ø10.5 50 455 560 30 Liquid-sample valve (LSV) *1 30 674 (80) 430 20 Large isothermal oven A (190) (580) (800) View A Weight: approx. 100 kg 28 For FM-X, CSA-X (wiring connection: 3/4NPT) Connection 3/4NPT 125 Cable gland (as accessories) Connection Connection G3/4 G3/4 Cable gland (62) (85) For TIIS (wiring connection: G3/4) Sealing fitting (as accessories) (for Ethernet cable) For FM-Y, CSA-Y (wiring connection: 3/4NPT) Connection 3/4NPT 28 *1: It depends on specifications. *2: Wiring connections are shown in right figures. Sealing fitting (as accessories) (for Ethernet cable) 35 36 (62) Connector (as accessories) Cable gland For ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI (wiring connection: G3/4 or 3/4NPT) Connector (as accessories) Connection a *3 400 20 (580) (430) 590 300 (85) 125 36 36 For TIIS (wiring connection: 3/4NPT) Connector (as accessories) Cable gland (as accessories) Connection Connection 3/4NPT For ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI (wiring connection: M25x1.5) Connection M25x1.5 3/4NPT 1100 b *5 (1280) *3: Required clearance needed for wiring. *4: It is recommended to mount at approx. 800 mm above the floor for easy operation or maintenance. *5: The wall construction for mounting has to be designed for 4 times the weight of the analyzer. *4 1.2 1-5 <1. Overview> Wiring connection a b G3/4 31 3/4NPT 29 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 1  1-6 <1. Overview> Type 1 (Self-standing) Unit: mm Protection system *1 Wiring connection *2 Connection to electronics section *2 580 430 Vent for protective gas (instrumental air) Grounding wiring (100 Ω or less) Air outlet for stream switching valve *1 6 mm or 1/4” tube 375 Control unit Protective gas (instrumental air) inlet Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT Operation panel *1 Pressure gauge *1 Vent header *1 (connection Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT) Inlet/outlet for sample gas, carrier gases, etc. 6 mm or 1/4” tube Liquid-sample valve (LSV) *1 1900 (1704) 560 Large isothermal oven Holes for installation 4-ø15 *3 500 40 Analyzer base sampling unit (GCSMP) or base *4 (190) 22.5 700 300 (430) Inlet/outlet for sample gas, standard gas and others Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT (580) (800) 69 View A Steam drain outlet *1 Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT Steam inlet *1 Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT For FM-Y, CSA-Y (wiring connection: 3/4NPT) 28 Connection 3/4NPT 36 (62) Sealing fitting (as accessories) (for Ethernet cable) For ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI (wiring connection: G3/4 or 3/4NPT) Connector (as accessories) Connection a b 1100 Connector (as accessories) Cable gland 125 36 36 20 400 (430) (580) Sealing fitting (as accessories) (for Ethernet cable) For TIIS (wiring connection: 3/4NPT) Connector (as accessories) Cable gland (as accessories) Connection Connection 3/4NPT For ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI (wiring connection: M25x1.5) Connection M25x1.5 3/4NPT (85) 590 300 125 Cable gland *4: The empty compartment (base) placed by Yokogawa to create a Self-standing GC8000-A, does not impair the compliance of the GC8000-A. For FM-X, CSA-X (wiring connection: 3/4NPT) Connection 3/4NPT *4 M12 screw Cable gland (as accessories) Connection Connection G3/4 G3/4 (62) 25±5 (85) For TIIS (wiring connection: G3/4) 35 *1: It depends on specifications. *2: Wiring connections are shown in right figures. *3: The four outer holes are used for installation. The height of M12 screw (prepared by user) is 25 ±5 mm from the floor. Weight: approx. 140 kg 28 A (1280) *5: Required clearance needed for wiring. *4: Wiring a b connection G3/4 31 3/4NPT 29 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-7 <1. Overview> Type 2 (Wall-mounting) Protection system B *1 (only 100 V) 102 Unit: mm Protection system A *1 580 102 Vent for protective gas (instrumental air) Grounding wiring (100 Ω or less) Air outlet for stream switching valve 6 mm or 1/4” tube Control unit 375 865 1541 (1345) 560 50 Inlet/outlet for sample gas, carrier gases, etc. 6 mm or 1/4” tube Large isothermal oven Liquid-sample valve (LSV) *1 30 30 674 (80) 430 20 (70) 50 410 Standard isothermal oven Liquid-sample valve (LSV) *1 70 Protective gas (instrumental air) inlet Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT Operation panel *1 Pressure gauge *1 Holes for installation 4-ø10.5 Vent header *1 (connection Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT) 1 Wiring connection *2 Connection to electronics section *2 (190) (580) (800) View A A Weight: approx. 155 kg For FM-X, CSA-X (wiring connection: 3/4NPT) Connection 3/4NPT Cable gland (62) 125 (85) Cable gland (as accessories) Connection Connection G3/4 G3/4 28 For TIIS (wiring connection: G3/4) Sealing fitting (as accessories) (for Ethernet cable) For FM-Y, CSA-Y (wiring connection: 3/4NPT) Connection 3/4NPT 28 *1: It depends on specifications. *2: Wiring connections are shown in right figures. For ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI (wiring connection: G3/4 or 3/4NPT) Connector (as accessories) c Sealing fitting (as accessories) (for Ethernet cable) 35 125 36 36 1100 Connector (as accessories) Cable gland (62) 400 Connection a *3 (580) (430) 590 300 20 (85) 36 For TIIS (wiring connection: 3/4NPT) Connector (as accessories) Cable gland (as accessories) Connection Connection 3/4NPT For ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI (wiring connection: M25x1.5) Connection M25x1.5 3/4NPT b *5 (1280) Wiring a b c connection connection b G3/4 31 30 G3/4 31 3/4NPT 29 29 28 3/4NPT *4 *3: Required clearance needed for wiring. *4: It is recommended to mount at approx. 500 mm above the floor for easy operation or maintenance. *5: The wall construction for mounting has to be designed for 4 times the weight of the analyzer. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-8 <1. Overview> Type 2 (Self-standing) Unit: mm Protection system A *1 Protection system B *1 (only 100 V) Wiring connection *2 Connection to electronics section *2 580 430 Vent for protective gas (instrumental air) Grounding wiring (100 Ω or less) Air outlet for stream switching valve *1 6 mm or 1/4” tube 375 Control unit Protective gas (instrumental air) inlet Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT Operation panel *1 Pressure gauge *1 Vent header *1 (connection Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT) Inlet/outlet for sample gas, carrier gases, etc. 6 mm or 1/4” tube Liquid-sample valve (LSV) *1 Holes for installation 4-ø15 *3 500 40 300 (430) 410 Standard isothermal oven (190) (580) (800) Sealing fitting (as accessories) (for Ethernet cable) For FM-Y, CSA-Y (wiring connection: 3/4NPT) Connection 3/4NPT For ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI (wiring connection: G3/4 or 3/4NPT) Connector (as accessories) c Sealing fitting (as accessories) (for Ethernet cable) 35 36 (62) 125 36 36 Connector (as accessories) Cable gland Connection a b *4 1100 (85) 20 For TIIS (wiring connection: 3/4NPT) Connector (as accessories) Cable gland (as accessories) Connection Connection 3/4NPT For ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI (wiring connection: M25x1.5) Connection M25x1.5 3/4NPT (430) 400 For FM-X, CSA-X (wiring connection: 3/4NPT) Connection 3/4NPT 125 Cable gland (580) Cable gland (as accessories) Connection Connection G3/4 G3/4 (62) 25±5 (85) For TIIS (wiring connection: G3/4) *4: The empty compartment (base) placed by Yokogawa to create a Self-standing GC8000-A, does not impair the compliance of the GC8000-A. Weight: approx. 190 kg Steam inlet *1 Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT 28 69 Steam drain outlet *1 Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT A M12 screw View A 28 440 *4 Analyzer base sampling unit (GCSMP) or base *1: It depends on specifications. *2: Wiring connections are shown in right figures. *3: The four outer holes are used for installation. The height of M12 screw (prepared by user) is 25 ±5 mm from the floor. 22.5 Inlet/outlet for sample gas, standard gas and others Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT Liquid-sample valve (LSV) *1 590 300 2050 (1854) 560 Large isothermal oven (1280) *5: Required clearance needed for wiring. *4: Wiring a bb c connection connection G3/4 31 30 G3/4 31 3/4NPT 29 29 28 3/4NPT IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-9 <1. Overview> Type 3 (Wall-mounting) Protection system B *1 102 Unit: mm Protection system A *1 Connection to electronics section *2 580 Vent for protective gas (instrumental air) Grounding wiring (100 Ω or less) Air outlet for stream switching valve 6 mm or 1/4” tube 375 Control unit Protective gas (instrumental air) inlet Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT Operation panel *1 Pressure gauge *1 Holes for installation 4-ø10.5 Inlet/outlet for sample gas, carrier gases, etc. 6 mm or 1/4” tube 410 410 50 Vent header *1 (connection Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT) 410 50 1801 (1605) Standard isothermal oven Liquid-sample valve (LSV) *1 715 Standard isothermal oven 410 Liquid-sample valve (LSV) *1 Standard isothermal oven (190) 50 (580) (800) View A 30 30 674 (80) 430 20 (70) 70 Liquid-sample valve (LSV) *1 1 Wiring connection *2 102 Weight: approx. 200 kg A For FM-X, CSA-X (wiring connection: 3/4NPT) Connection 3/4NPT Cable gland (62) 125 (85) Cable gland (as accessories) Connection Connection G3/4 G3/4 28 For TIIS (wiring connection: G3/4) Sealing fitting (as accessories) (for Ethernet cable) For FM-Y, CSA-Y (wiring connection: 3/4NPT) Connection 3/4NPT 28 *1: It depends on specifications. *2: Wiring connections are shown in right figures. For ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI (wiring connection: G3/4 or 3/4NPT) Connector (as accessories) c Sealing fitting (as accessories) (for Ethernet cable) 35 125 36 36 1100 Connector (as accessories) Cable gland (62) 400 Connection a *3 (580) (435) 590 300 20 (85) 36 For TIIS (wiring connection: 3/4NPT) Connector (as accessories) Cable gland (as accessories) Connection Connection 3/4NPT For ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI (wiring connection: M25x1.5) Connection M25x1.5 3/4NPT b *5 (1280) Wiring Wiring a b c connection connection b G3/4 31 30 G3/4 31 3/4NPT 29 29 28 3/4NPT *4 *3: Required clearance needed for wiring. *4: It is recommended to mount at approx. 250 mm above the floor for easy operation or maintenance. *5: The wall construction for mounting has to be designed for 4 times the weight of the analyzer. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-10 <1. Overview> Type 3 (Self-standing) Unit: mm Protection system A *1 Connection to electronics section *2 Protection system B *1 580 Wiring connection *2 430 Vent for protective gas (instrumental air) Grounding wiring (100 Ω or less) Air outlet for stream switching valve 6 mm or 1/4” tube 375 Control unit Protective gas (instrumental air) inlet Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT Operation panel *1 Pressure gauge *1 410 Vent header *1 (connection Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT) Inlet/outlet for sample gas, carrier gases, etc. 6 mm or 1/4” tube (1855) Liquid-sample valve (LSV) *1 Holes for installation 4-ø15 *3 500 40 300 (435) 410 Standard isothermal oven 2051 Standard isothermal oven 410 Standard isothermal oven (190) (580) (800) Liquid-sample valve (LSV) *1 View A 250 Base For FM-X, CSA-X (wiring connection: 3/4NPT) Connection 3/4NPT 125 Cable gland (as accessories) Connection Connection G3/4 G3/4 Sealing fitting (as accessories) (for Ethernet cable) For FM-Y, CSA-Y (wiring connection: 3/4NPT) Connection 3/4NPT 28 Cable gland (62) 25±5 (85) For TIIS (wiring connection: G3/4) 28 A For TIIS (wiring connection: 3/4NPT) Connector (as accessories) Cable gland (as accessories) Connection Connection 3/4NPT For ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI (wiring connection: M25x1.5) Connection M25x1.5 3/4NPT 35 36 125 36 Sealing fitting (as accessories) (for Ethernet cable) For ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI (wiring connection: G3/4 or 3/4NPT) Connector (as accessories) c Connection a b 1100 Connector (as accessories) Cable gland (62) 400 *4 (580) (435) 590 300 20 (85) 36 M12 screw Weight: approx. 220 kg 350 435 *1: It depends on specifications. *2: Wiring connections are shown in right figures. *3: The four outer holes are used for installation. The height of M12 screw (prepared by user) is 25 ±5 mm from the floor. 27.5 Liquid-sample valve (LSV) *1 (1280) *4: Required clearance needed for wiring. Wiring Wiring a bb c connection connection G3/4 31 30 G3/4 31 3/4NPT 29 29 28 3/4NPT IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-11 <1. Overview> Type 4 (Wall-mounting) Protection system B *1 102 Unit: mm Protection system A *1 Connection to electronics section *2 580 1 Wiring connection *2 102 Vent for protective gas (instrumental air) Grounding wiring (100 Ω or less) Air outlet for stream switching valve 6 mm or 1/4” tube 375 Control unit Operation panel *1 Pressure gauge *1 Holes for installation 4-ø10.5 Inlet/outlet for sample gas, carrier gases, etc. 6 mm or 1/4” tube 615 Standard isothermal oven Liquid-sample valve (LSV) *1 1391 (1195) 410 50 Vent header *1 (connection Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT) Protective gas (instrumental air) inlet Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT 130 50 410 Programmed temperature oven 30 674 (80) 430 20 (190) (580) (800) A View A Weight: approx. 140 kg For TIIS (wiring connection: G3/4) For FM-X, CSA-X (wiring connection: 3/4NPT) Connection 3/4NPT For FM-Y, CSA-Y (wiring connection: 3/4NPT) Sealing fitting (as accessories) (for Ethernet cable) Connection 3/4NPT 28 Cable gland (62) 125 (85) Cable gland (as accessories) Connection Connection G3/4 G3/4 28 *1: It depends on specifications. *2: Wiring connections are shown in right figures. 35 125 36 36 Sealing fitting (as accessories) (for Ethernet cable) For ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI (wiring connection: G3/4 or 3/4NPT) Connector (as accessories) c 1100 Connector (as accessories) Cable gland (62) 400 Connection a *3 (580) (430) 590 300 20 (85) 36 For TIIS (wiring connection: 3/4NPT) Connector (as accessories) Cable gland (as accessories) Connection Connection 3/4NPT For ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI (wiring connection: M25x1.5) Connection M25x1.5 3/4NPT b *5 (1280) Wiring Wiring a b c connection connection b G3/4 31 30 G3/4 31 3/4NPT 29 29 28 3/4NPT *4 *3: Required clearance needed for wiring. *4: It is recommended to mount at approx. 500 mm above the floor for easy operation or maintenance. *5: The wall construction for mounting has to be designed for 4 times the weight of the analyzer. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-12 <1. Overview> Type 4 (Self-standing) Unit: mm Protection system A *1 Connection to electronics section *2 Protection system B *1 580 Wiring connection *2 430 Vent for protective gas (instrumental air) Grounding wiring (100 Ω or less) Air outlet for stream switching valve 6 mm or 1/4” tube 375 Control unit Operation panel *1 Pressure gauge *1 Inlet/outlet for sample gas, carrier gases, etc. 6 mm or 1/4” tube (1704) Standard isothermal oven Liquid-sample valve (LSV) *1 1900 410 Vent header *1 (connection Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT) 410 Programmed temperature oven Protective gas (instrumental air) inlet Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT Holes for installation 4-ø15 *3 40 500 300 (430) Analyzer base sampling unit (GCSMP) or base *4 (190) 22.5 440 Inlet/outlet for sample gas, standard gas and others Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT (580) (800) View A 36 125 36 Sealing fitting (as accessories) (for Ethernet cable) For ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI (wiring connection: G3/4 or 3/4NPT) Connector (as accessories) c Connection a b 1100 Connector (as accessories) Cable gland (62) 400 Connection 3/4NPT *4 (580) (430) 590 300 For FM-Y, CSA-Y (wiring connection: 3/4NPT) For TIIS (wiring connection: 3/4NPT) Connector (as accessories) Cable gland (as accessories) Connection Connection 3/4NPT For ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI (wiring connection: M25x1.5) Connection M25x1.5 3/4NPT 20 Sealing fitting (as accessories) (for Ethernet cable) 36 *4: The empty compartment (base) placed by Yokogawa to create a Self-standing GC8000-A, does not impair the compliance of the GC8000-A. For FM-X, CSA-X (wiring connection: 3/4NPT) Connection 3/4NPT 125 Cable gland (85) M12 screw Cable gland (as accessories) Connection Connection G3/4 G3/4 (62) 25±5 (85) For TIIS (wiring connection: G3/4) Weight: approx. 170 kg 35 *1: It depends on specifications. *2: Wiring connections are shown in right figures. *3: The four outer holes are used for installation. The height of M12 screw (prepared by user) is 25 ±5 mm from the floor. Steam inlet *1 Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT 28 A 28 69 Steam drain outlet *1 Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT (1280) *5: Required clearance needed for wiring. *4: Wiring Wiring a b c connection connection b G3/4 31 30 G3/4 31 3/4NPT 29 29 28 3/4NPT IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-13 <1. Overview> l Piping connection of control unit, isothermal oven, large isothermal oven, and programmed temperature oven Unit :mm Vent for protective gas (instrumental air) 39 20 Air outlet for stream switching valve 6mm or 1/4” tube 138 Inlet/outlet for sample gas, carrier gases, etc. 6mm or 1/4” tube 30 Protective gas (instrumental air) inlet Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT 155 30 139.5 138 23 23 170 39 20 170 Control unit 30 15 230 230 23 23 30 15 Isothermal oven Programmed temperature oven 40 Protective gas (instrumental air) inlet Large isothermal oven Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT 20.5 l Analyzer base sampling system (GCSMP) Unit: mm 215 Inlet/outlet for sample gas, standard gas, etc. Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT 30 55 80 60 30 60 120 Steam outlet or drain * Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT 120 Steam inlet * Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT 165 For Type 1 * 150 120 60 Steam inlet * Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT 110 150 60 30 60 Steam outlet or drain * Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT 215 110 300 55 Inlet/outlet for sample gas, standard gas, etc. Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT 80 *: It depends on specifications. 165 For Type 2, Type 4 Some specifications do not have these connections. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 1  1-14 <1. Overview> l Communication converter/Signal interrupter (disconnecter) Rack-mounted type • Converter for RS-422/RS-232C: K9806AS* • Signal interrupter for Ethernet twisted pair cable: K9806AA • Signal interrupter for RS-422 output, analog input: K9806AE 15 Unit: mm 2-holes for M4 screw The number and the location of the terminals depend on its part number. 15 135 170 15 160 92 5 30 Weight: approx. 500 g • Signal interrupter for contact output (AC): K9806AN* • Signal interrupter for contact output (DC): K9806AJ* 20 2-holes for M4 screw 135 Unit: mm 170 15 160 92 15 The number and the location of the terminals depend on its part number. 5 or 40 K9806AN: Protective earth Weight: approx. 500 g Note: Rack-mounted type should be installed vertically. The space between the converters/the signal interrupters with mark (*) should be kept more than 10 mm. The wall construction for mounting has to be designed for 4 times the weight of the product. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  Desk-top type • Converter for RS-422/RS-232C: K9806AT • Signal interrupter for Ethernet twisted pair cable: K9806AB 1 Unit: mm 90 135 38 15 The number and the location of the terminals depend on its part number. 41.5 1-15 <1. Overview> Weight: approx. 500 g Note: Desk-top type should be installed horizontally. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1.3 1-16 <1. Overview> Auxiliary Hardware (1) Cylinders (carrier gas, standard gases, etc.) These cylinders are filled with a carrier gas or standard gas. The maximum filling pressure is limited to 15 MPa considering the strength of the cylinders. (2) Regulator for cylinder This valve reduces a cylinder pressure to a safe degree to facilitate handling. The valve is directly mounted to the cylinder. (3) Stop valve This valve shuts down the lines for the sample gas, instrument gas, and so on. It is operated manually. (4) Dehumidifier Any moisture in the carrier gas affects the columns. Therefore, if the carrier gas contains moisture over 10 ppm, it is recommended to use a desiccant, such as a molecular sieve, to prevent deterioration of the columns. (5) Vent stacks These are pipes to discharge sample bypass vent, sample vent, backflush vent, foreflush vent, detector vent, measurement gas vent, and others to the atmosphere collectively. Direct the exhaust gas to an area where the gas sufficiently disperses and diffuses before discharging. (6) Regulator for sample This valve reduces the sample pressure to a specified degree. To vaporize a liquid sample, use a regulator with a steam-heated vaporizer. (7) Pipings The pipes for the sample inlet, carrier gas inlet, standard gas inlet, air for valve driving, air for FID/FPD, FID/FPD hydrogen, steam, sampling bypass, and various vents are provided. (8) Joints The joints are used to connect pipes. 1.4 Gases Required for Operation The following gases are required for the analyzer: (1) Sample gas The gas to be analyzed from the process line IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-17 <1. Overview> (2) Carrier gas Prepare a gas cylinder for the carrier gas. Keep spare cylinders at hand, too. 1 If two different carrier gases are used, two gas cylinders are needed. The gas must satisfy the following conditions. (Gas with higher purity may be required depending on the specifications. See the delivery specifications for details.) Purity: Measuring range from 0 to 50 ppm or more: 99.99% minimum Moisture: 10 ppm or less; organic components: 5 ppm or less Measuring range from 0 to less than 50 ppm: 99.999% minimum Moisture: 5 ppm or less; organic components: 0.1 ppm or less (3) Standard gas This gas is used for calibration. Prepare a gas cylinder including measurement component. Since up to three different standard gases can be used for automatic calibration, prepare gas cylinders suitable for calibration. (4) FID/FPD combustion hydrogen gas Hydrogen gas is necessary when either FID or FPD is used as a detector. Prepare pure hydrogen gas in a cylinder, and keep spare cylinders at hand. The gas must satisfy the following conditions. (Gas with higher purity may be required depending on the specifications. See the delivery specifications for details.) Purity: Measuring range from 0 to 50 ppm or more: 99.99% minimum Moisture: 10 ppm or less; organic components: 5 ppm or less Measuring range from 0 to less than 50 ppm: 99.999% minimum Moisture: 5 ppm or less; organic components: 0.1 ppm or less (5) Instrument air This air is used for valve actuation and purging. Pressure: 350 to 900 kPa 500 to 900 kPa (with FPD) 350 to 900 kPa (Programmed temperature oven without cooler) 500 to 900 kPa (Programmed temperature oven with cooler) Flowrate: Type 1: 140 L/min Type 1 with FPD: 440 L/min Type 2: 210 L/min Type 2 with FPD: 510 L/min Type 3: 280 L/min Type 4: Depend on the specification 210 L/min or more (Without cooler and immediate cooling function) 600 L/min or more (Without cooler with immediate cooling function) 510 L/min or more (With cooler without immediate cooling function) 510 L/min or more (With cooler and immediate cooling function) Oil: 5 ppm or less Cleanliness: Must be free from dust, corrosive elements, and toxic elements. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-18 <1. Overview> (6) FID/FPD combustion air This air is used to burn hydrogen gas in an FID or FPD. The air must satisfy the following conditions. Purity: Measuring range from 0 to 50 ppm or more: moisture: 10 ppm or less; organic components: 5 ppm or less Measuring range from 0 to less than 50 ppm: moisture: 5 ppm or less; organic components: 0.1 ppm or less (7) Steam Steam is required to steam-heat a sample. Prepare a steam source that can apply the pressure listed in “Operation Data.” 1.5 Conformance Standards Safety Standard and EMC Standard are showned in the following list. Ex Certification MS code TIIS GC8000-T GC8000-T /KC *2 ATEX *1 GC8000-A IECEx *2 GC8000-E NEPSI *3 GC8000-P FM GC8000-F GC8000-G CSA *1: *2: *3: Safety Standard EN 61010-1 EN 61010-2-030 EMC standard EN 61326-1 Class A, Table 2 EN 61326-2-3 Korea Electromagnetic Conformity Standard RCM Mark FM 3810: 2005 (ANSI/ISA 61010-1-2004 (82.02.01), ANSI/ISA-82.02.02-1996 (IEC 61010-2-031)) GC8000-C CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1-04 GC8000-D - Analyzer base sampling unit (GCSMP) or base placed under GC8000-A is not covered by the EU-DoC nor the EC Typeexamination Certificate. The empty compartment (base) placed by Yokogawa to create a Selfstanding GC8000-A, does not impair the compliance of the GC8000-A. The design is based on the safety and EMC standard, though the mark of CE is not indicated. The design is based on the safety and EMC standard, though the mark of CE, KC and RCM are not indicated. CAUTION This instrument is a Class A product, and is designed for use in an industrial environment. Please use this instrument in an industrial environment only. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1.6 <1. Overview> 1-19 Data Plate n FM 1 l FM-X (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) l FM-Y (a) (b) (c) (d) (g) (f) (e) (h) (i) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  No. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) 1-20 <1. Overview> Text -F, -G Model and suffix codes 100, 110, 115, 120, 200, 220, 230, 240 Maximum rated power Latest style number Instrument number Year of production KGC number (T)1 to (T)4 Remarks FM-X, FM-Y With additional code Depends on power specifications (-A to -H) In A.D. year Depends on temperature class specifications n CSA l CSA-X (a) (b) (c) (d) (g) (f) (e) (h) (i) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-21 <1. Overview> l CSA-Y 1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (g) (f) (e) (h) (i) No. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) Text -C, -D Model and suffix codes 100, 110, 115, 120, 200, 220, 230, 240 Maximum rated power Latest style number Instrument number Year of production KGC number (T)1 to (T)4 Remarks CSA-X, CSA-Y With additional code Depends on power specifications (-A to -H) In A.D. year Depends on temperature class specifications IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <1. Overview> 1-22 n ATEX In case of Type 1 *1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (h) (g) (f) (e) (i) (i) (j) In case of Type 2 *2 In case of Type 3 *3 In case of Type 4 *1: Approx. 110,000 cm3 with EPC *2: Approx. 129,000 cm3 with EPC *3: Approx. 142,000 cm3 with EPC *4: Approx. 120,500 cm3 with EPC *4 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  No. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) Text -A Model and suffix codes 100, 110, 115, 120, 200, 220, 230, 240 Maximum rated power 40, 45, 50 Latest style number Instrument number Year of production KGC number (T)1 to (T)4 1-23 <1. Overview> Remarks ATEX With additional code Depends on power specifications (-A to -H) T1, T2: 40 °C, T3: 45 °C, T4: 50 °C In A.D. year Depends on temperature class specifications IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 1  <1. Overview> 1-24 n IECEx In case of Type 1 *1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (h) (g) (f) (e) (i) (j) In case of Type 2 *2 In case of Type 3 *3 In case of Type 4 *1: Approx. 110,000 cm3 with EPC *2: Approx. 129,000 cm3 with EPC *3: Approx. 142,000 cm3 with EPC *4 *4: Approx. 120,500 cm3 with EPC IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  No. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) Text -E Model and suffix codes 100, 110, 115, 120, 200, 220, 230, 240 Maximum rated power 40, 45, 50 Latest style number Instrument number Year of production KGC number (T)1 to (T)4 1-25 <1. Overview> Remarks IECEx With additional code Depends on power specifications (-A to -H) T1, T2: 40 °C, T3: 45 °C, T4: 50 °C In A.D. year Depends on temperature class specifications IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 1  <1. Overview> 1-26 n NEPSI In case of Type 1 *1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (h) (g) (f) (e) (i) (j) In case of Type 2 *2 In case of Type 3 *3 In case of Type 4 *1: Approx. 110,000 cm3 with EPC *2: Approx. 129,000 cm3 with EPC *3: Approx. 142,000 cm3 with EPC *4 *4: Approx. 120,500 cm3 with EPC IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  No. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) Text -P Model and suffix codes 100, 110, 115, 120, 200, 220, 230, 240 Maximum rated power 40, 45, 50 Latest style number Instrument number Year of production KGC number (T)1 to (T)4 1-27 <1. Overview> Remarks NEPSI With additional code Depends on power specifications (-A to -H) T1, T2: 40 °C, T3: 45 °C, T4: 50 °C In A.D. year Depends on temperature class specifications IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 1  1-28 <1. Overview> n TIIS In case of Type 1 (a) (b) *1 (c) (f) (e) (d) (g) (h) (only for /KC) In case of Type 3 In case of Type 2 *3 *2 In case of Type 4 *1: Approx. 110,000 cm3 with EPC *2: Approx. 129,000 cm3 with EPC *3: Approx. 142,000 cm3 with EPC *4 *4: Approx. 120,500 cm3 with EPC No. Text (a) -T (b) Model and suffix codes (c) 100 ±10%, 110 ±10%, 115 ±10%, 120 ±10%, 200 ±10%, 220 ±10%, 230 ±10%, 240 ±10% (d) Latest style number (e) Instrument number (f) Year of production (g) KGC number (h) (T)1 to (T)4 Remarks TIIS With additional code Depends on power specifications (-A to -H) In A.D. year Depends on temperature class specifications IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-29 <1. Overview> 1.7 Features 1 l Simple operation by touching the screen The GC-HMI (Human Machine Interface: a 12-inch color LCD touch panel) dramatically improves operation and simplifies maintenance. l GC modules enable parallel chromatography Parallel chromatography is made practical with the introduction of the GC Module concept. Complex applications are divided into smaller simultaneous measurements, reducing the analysis time and allowing configurations to be tailored to customers’ needs. ● Gas Chromatograph Module (GCM) As a single GCM is equivalent to a single virtual GC, virtual GCs set up on the GC8000 can measure multiple streams simultaneously. ● System (SYS) SYS is the smallest segment for analysis, and SYSs can be set up in a single GCM. Therefore, individual SYS configurations allow the GC8000 to measure only the most important element with a shorter analysis time among the elements. Each SYS assigned to a specific GCM analyzes simultaneously, whereas each SYS assigned to a different GCM does not. l Flexible and secure GC network design ● The communications network of the GC8000 is based on the Ethernet structure to transmit data to GC workstations and the DCS system. The GC8000 can be set up for either a single Ethernet network or a redundant network. ● Modbus TCP/IP protocol support eliminates the need for communication gateways to DCS systems in many situations. This not only simplifies the network architecture, but also removes a potential point of failure in delivering analytical data to the DCS system. For communication systems that still require Serial Modbus gateways, the ASGW is available. ● For customer sites with an existing Ethernet network for the GC1000 Mark II, the GC8000 is fully compatible without having to modify the network. l State-of-the-art maintenance software ● Re-analysis function of ASET Conventional process chromatographs measure concentrations in accordance with the preset configuration for chromatogram analysis. The appropriate configuration is determined by trial-and-error based on the results of many analyses. With this function, the GC8000 can measure concentrations in accordance with the most appropriate configuration for chromatograms saved in a file after measurements. The result can be sent to the analyzer and reused for other measurements. This feature dramatically reduces the maintenance time and improves troubleshooting such as mixtures of process samples with uncertain components. ● Custom software capability With the programming in YM-BASIC (Yokogawa’s original programming language based on BASIC), calculation formulas for analysis results and various measurement statuses such as stream switching can be changed. This function also allows special calculations using analog inputs from other analyzers and contact inputs. ● Gate tracking function The automatic peak tracking function of GC1000 Mark II was improved. The setting of tracking (correction) conditions of the gate time setting to detect peaks has become flexible, from simultaneously setting all GCs to setting each SYS or each detector. This enables precise measurement even in multicomponent analysis such as PIONA. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-30 <1. Overview> ● Gas Chromatograph File Converter (GCFC) software (option) Chromatogram data saved in a file on the GC8000 can be converted to the AIA/ANDI format (complying with the ASTME1947-98 Reapproved 2004 and E1948-98 Reapproved 2004). The file of converted chromatogram data can be opened with EZchrom Elite, which is a chromatography data system from Agilent Technologies, for comparison with the currently used data. l Highly reliable hardware The GC8000 uses the same proven components including detectors and valves as used in our previous GC model for reliable, precise performance. It is possible to share service parts with the previous model. 1.8 GCM n Configuration of a flexible system achieved by multiple ovens/ detectors and the GC module The GC8000 is capable of holding up to three ovens. Each oven can accommodate up to two detectors (up to six detectors for the entire GC). Furthermore, a new GC module (GCM) concept has been introduced into the GC8000. With the combination of multiple ovens/detectors and the GCM concept, complex applications can be segmented into simple column systems, enabling far more flexible system configuration to address customers’ requests. For example, it is applicable to parallel chromatography (parallel GC) to conduct simultaneous analysis of multiple streams and high-speed analysis of components which require relatively short-time analysis. Figure 1.2 n GC Module (GCM) The GCM is a virtual GC that measures process streams which exist in one GC. Up to six GCMs can be configured for one GC8000 unit, each of which operates as an independent GC. Through this approach, one GC8000 unit can have functions equal to multiple GCs. The GCM can hold multiple independent analysis cycles, which are called SYSs. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-31 <1. Overview> n SYS SYS is the smallest analysis unit with an independent analysis cycle. Up to six SYSs can be set in the GCM. This enables the GCM to repeat the measurement of only components which require relatively short-time analysis among the process stream component group, in a short period of time. Respective SYSs in the same GCM synchronously analyze. SYSs in different GCMs asynchronously analyze. 1.9 User Program Function The user program function is to achieve a more complex and advanced value analyses and GC operation, based on scripts created by the user. The script is described using an interpreter-type language based on the YM-BASIC developed by Yodogawa. There are two timing options to execute the script: at the end of peak detection and regular cycle. Specific examples of functions achieved by the user program function are as follows: • Calculations (temperature correction, atmospheric pressure correction, etc.) by acquiring analog input or contact input from other analyzers • Range changes depending on concentration values • BTU value calculations • Backup GC analysis start command when a malfunction arises in the main GC * This function is optional. To use it, an UP card is necessary 1.10 1.10.1 Configuration Type and Appearance The GC8000 Process Gas Chromatograph consists of a protection system*, control unit, oven unit, and stanchion or analyzer base sampling unit (GCSMP)**. * ** The specification decides the number of the flameproof enclosure. A GCSMP can be mounted on the self-standing type. External sampling systems can be connected as needed. The oven unit can contain a large isothermal oven (volume: 40 L) or isothermal oven (31 L), or programmed-temperature oven (11 L). Thus, the GC8000 has four major models by type and number of oven units. Moreover, each model comes with the self-standing type and wallmounting type. The control unit consists of the electronic section and the flow control section. In some specifications, a 12-inch color LCD touch panel is mounted on the front as the GC-HMI. Each oven unit can contain a large isothermal oven, isothermal oven, or programmedtemperature oven and its pressure and flow control section and electronic section. An EPC box is mounted in the electronic section depending on the specifications. The electronic section of the control unit and the electronic section of oven units 1-3 (including the EPC box) connect with one another to form a single pressurized enclosure. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 1  1-32 <1. Overview> Refer to Figures 1.3 to 1.6. GC-HMI (touch panel) *3 Data plate Pressure control section *3 Large isothermal oven section Protection system *1 Warning plate Control unit Electronics section Flow control section Oven unit 1 EPC box *3 Analyzer base sampling unit *2 /Up to 6 streams + standard gas (liquid) LSV (liquid sample valve) *3 *1 *2 *3 The specification decides the number of the flameproof enclosure of the protection system. A stanchion or GCSMP can be mounted on the self-standing type. External sampling systems can be connected as needed. Depending on the specifications. Figure 1.3 Structure and components of Type 1 GC-HMI (touch panel) *3 Data plate Large isothermal oven section Protection system *1 Warning plate Control unit Electronics section Pressure control section *3 Isothermal oven section Oven unit 1 EPC box *3 Oven unit 2 Analyzer base sampling unit *2 /Up to 6 streams + standard gas (liquid) LSV (liquid sample valve) *3 *1 *2 *3 Flow control section The specification decides the number of the flameproof enclosure of the protection system. A GCSMP can be mounted on the self-standing type. External sampling systems can be connected as needed. Depending on the specifications. Figure 1.4 Structure and components of Type 2 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-33 <1. Overview> GC-HMI (touch panel) *2 Protection system Data plate Warning plate Control unit Isothermal oven section Electronics section Pressure control section *1 Flow control section EPC box *3 Oven unit 1 Oven unit 2 Oven unit 3 LSV (liquid sample valve) *1 *1 *2 Stanchion*1 A stanchion is mounted on the self-standing type. External sampling systems can be connected as needed. Depending on the specifications. Figure 1.5 Structure and components of Type 3 GC-HMI (touch panel) *2 Protection system *2 Data plate Warning plate Pressure control section *2 Control unit Electronics section Isothermal oven section Flow control section Oven unit 1 EPC box *2 LSV (liquid sample valve) *2 Oven unit 2 Programmed temperature oven section Analyzer base sampling unit *1 /Up to 3 streams + standard gas (liquid) *1 *2 A GCSMP can be mounted on the self-standing type. External sampling systems can be connected as needed. Depending on the specifications. Figure 1.6 1.10.2 Structure and components of Type 4 Components and their Functions (1) Protection System The protection system is a flameproof enclosure and contains the protection circuit in the pressurized enclosure. The Y-purging specification (FM) does not use this system. This device contains the power relay, pressure switch, timer, relay, illuminance sensor, and override switch. The device monitors the internal pressures of the pressurized enclosures (the electronic section of the control unit and oven units 1 to 3, the large isothermal oven, the isothermal oven, or programmed-temperature oven) while the power is on, and if any of them indicates lower than 392 Pa, the protection system will automatically turn off the power. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 1  1-34 <1. Overview> This automatic power-off can be disabled by a function called “overriding.” To enable this function, open the cover of the protection system and press the override switch while the illuminance sensor is detecting light of 100 lx or more. When the illuminance becomes lower than 10 lx, the function becomes invalid, and the automatic power-off prevails. The override function allows operators to open the door of the protection system while the power is on. However, make sure the ambient atmosphere is not hazardous before opening the door for repairs or other purposes. Refer to Chapter 2 for details of checking the status display of the protection system and override function. * Guideline for illuminance and brightness In an office with fluorescent lights: 400 to 500 lx Under a street lamp: 50 to 100 lx Candlelight (at a distance of 20 cm): 10 to 15 lx Ordinance on Industrial Safety and Health, Article 604 For precision work: 300 lx or more For ordinary work: 150 lx or more For rough work: 70 lx or more (2) Electronic Section The electronic section of the control unit and the electronic section of oven units 1-3 (including the EPC box) connect with each other as a single pressurized enclosure. The electronic section of the control unit controls the electronic section of oven units 1 to 3, computing, and communicates I/O data with external devices. The GC-HMI (Human Machine Interface: a 12-inch color LCD touch panel) mounted on the front makes it easy to check analysis results, trend data, and parameters, and thus monitor the measurement condition of devices on the screen. The electronic section of oven units 1 to 3 controls the large isothermal oven, the isothermal oven, or programmed-temperature oven; detector, RV, LSV, hydrogen limiting unit, atmosphericpressure balancing valve, and EPC, and sends the data to the electronic section of the control unit. (3) Pressure and Flow Control Section The pressure and flow control section controls the pressures and flow rate of protective gas (instrumental air), carrier gas, and utility gas, and displays their pressures. The connections for supplying carrier gas and utility gas or air output, the hydrogen limiting unit, and the vortex tube (programmed-temperature oven or cooling device for FPD) and the regulator are installed. The specification determines the number and types of parts installed. This section is on the right side of the control unit and on the front and right side of oven units 1 to 3. (a) The pressure control section of the control unit The connection for air output for stream valves is equipped in the pressure control section on the right side of the control unit, and the pressure regulator is equipped under the cover. There are up to eight air outputs for stream valves. The connection is a 6-mm or 1/4-inch tube. Air pressure is 350 kPa. They may be used in GCSMP or sampling units. The manifold regulators adjust the following pressures, and display them. Each setting pressure is described in the operational manual, and can be checked on the operation condition configuration screen of the EtherLCD. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <1. Overview> 1-35 • Pressure for operating solenoid valves: Air pressure which is applied to the solenoid valves for operating RV, LSV, air-operated valves of the hydrogen limiting unit, atmospheric-pressure balancing valves (including air output to outside), and stream valves (including air output to outside). Setting pressure: 350 kPa. • Air pressure for the electric chamber: Air pressure which is applied as protective gas (instrumental air) to the pressurized enclosure, which consists of the electronic section of the control unit and the electronic section of oven units 1 to 3 (including the EPC box). The setting pressure is described in the operational manual. • Air pressure for oven units 1 to 3: Air pressure which is applied as protective gas (instrumental air) to the large isothermal oven, isothermal oven, or programmed-temperature oven. The setting pressure is described in the operational manual. Refer to Figures 1.7 and 1.8. Cover Manifold regulators Air OUT 2 Air OUT 4 Air OUT 6 Air OUT 8 Figure 1.7 11/03/22 15:15:45 > - - Air OUT 1 Air OUT 3 Air OUT 5 Air OUT 7 Air output for stream switching valve (connection: 6 mm or 1/4 inch tube, pressure: 350kPa) Pressure control section of the control unit Operating Parameters (7/8) SV air press Elec Purge press 350 350 Menu F1 Menu F2 Menu F3 Menu F4 Oven# F5 Gas# F6 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 1  1-36 <1. Overview> 11/03/22 15:15:45 Operating Parameters (8/8) Oven #1 - Oven air Press 200 - TPM Vortex press **************** > - FPD Vortex press Menu F1 Menu F2 Figure 1.8 EtherLCD Menu F3 Menu F4 Oven# Oven# F5 F6 Example of the operation condition configuration screen of the GC-HMI (touch panel) (b) Pressure and flow control section of the oven In the case of the large isothermal oven or isothermal oven, the pressure and flow rate control section is equipped on the front and right side of the oven unit. In the case of the programmedtemperature oven, this section is equipped only on the right side of the oven unit. The pressure regulators with a pressure gauge for utility gases 1 to 4 are equipped in sequence from right to left on the front of the oven unit, followed by the pressure gauges for carrier gases 1 to 2. The connections for the following purposes are on the right side of the oven unit. • Air for driving the solenoid valve and for purging/cooling the electric chamber and ovens 1 to 3: Rc1/4 or NPT1/4(F) (Use the pipe of 1/2 inch or more.) • Inlet and outlet of sample gases 1 to 2 respectively: 6-mm or 1/4-inch tube • Inlet of carrier gases 1 to 2 (except for H2): 6-mm or 1/4-inch tube • Inlet of H2 for carrier gas, combustion gas, make-up gas: 6-mm or 1/4-inch tube • Inlet of make-up gas (except for H2): 6-mm or 1/4-inch tube • Inlet of combustion air: 6-mm or 1/4-inch tube • Outlet of atmospheric-pressure balancing valves 1 to 2: 6-mm or 1/4-inch tube The following parts are under the cover on the right side of the oven unit. • • • • • Hydrogen limiting unit Pressure regulator for carrier gases 1 to 2 (in the large isothermal oven or isothermal oven) Restrictors 1 to 6 (in the large isothermal oven or isothermal oven) Vortex tube (cooling device for FPD, installed in large oven) Regulator for vortex tube (cooling device for FPD, installed in large oven) * Air pressure set value of the regulator is depended on the source air temperature and need to turn the setting value. If the oven unit is a programmed-temperature oven, the pressure and flow control section is on the right side of the oven unit. The following parts are under the cover on the right side of the oven unit. • Vortex tube (cooling device for the programmed-temperature oven and protective gas (instrumental air) supply) • Regulator for vortex tube • Air-operated valve for rapid cooling IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-37 <1. Overview> The values of each setting pressure and flow rate are described in the operation manual. They also are checked on the operation condition configuration screen of the GC-HMI (touch panel) EtherLCD. Refer to Figures 1.9 to 1.12. Pressure regulator for utility gas (1 to 4) A Pressure gauge for utility gas (1 to 4) A-A Pressure gauge for carrier gas (1, 2) A Hydrogen limiting unit Inner wall of the large isothermal oven Pressure regulator for carrier gas (1, 2) Pressure regulator for carrier gas 1 Pressure regulator for carrier gas 2 Restrictor 1 Restrictor 2 Restrictor 3 Restrictor 4 Restrictor 5 Restrictor 6 Figure 1.9 Vortex tube (cooling device for FPD) Regulator for vortex tube Sample 1 (IN) Sample 1 (OUT) Sample 2 (IN) Sample 2 (OUT) Carrier gas 1(except for H2) Carrier gas 2(except for H2) Combustion air Air output (Atmospheric balance valve 1) Air output (Atmospheric balance valve 2) Connection: 6 mm or 1/4 inch tube Pressure and flow control section of the large isothermal oven Pressure regulator for utility gas (1 to 4) A Pressure gauge for utility gas (1 to 4) A-A Pressure gauge for carrier gas (1, 2) A Inner wall of the isothermal oven Pressure regulator for carrier gas 1 Pressure regulator for carrier gas 2 Restrictor 1 Pressure regulator Restrictor 2 Restrictor 3 for carrier gas (1, 2) Restrictor 4 Restrictor 5 Restrictor 6 Figure 1.10 Hydrogen limiting unit Sample 1 (IN) Sample 1 (OUT) Sample 2 (IN) Sample 2 (OUT) Carrier gas 1(except for H2) Carrier gas 2(except for H2) Combustion air Air output (Atmospheric balance valve 1) Air output (Atmospheric balance valve 2) Connection: 6 mm or 1/4 inch tube Pressure and flow control section of the isothermal oven IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 1  1-38 <1. Overview> Air-operated valve for rapid cooling Vortex tube Regulator for vortex tube Figure 1.11 Pressure and flow control section of the programmed-temperature oven 11/03/22 15:15:45 Operating Parameters (1/8) Oven #1 Carrier gas #1 > - Carrier gas type N2 - Carrier gas pressure 140.0 kPa Menu F1 Menu F2 Menu F3 Menu F4 Oven# F5 Gas# F6 11/03/22 15:15:45 Operating Parameters (2/8) Oven #1 Utility gas #1 > - Detector number 1-1 - Utility gas function Burner fuel - Utility gas type H2 - Utility gas pressure 260.0 kPa - Utility gas flowrate 28 Menu F1 Menu F2 Menu F3 Menu F4 Oven# F5 Gas# F6 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <1. Overview> 1-39 11/03/22 15:15:45 Operating Parameters (2/8) Oven #1 Utility gas #2 > - Detector number 1-1 - Utility gas function Make up - Utility gas type N2 - Utility gas pressure 320.0 kPa - Utility gas flowrate 20 1 Menu F1 Menu F2 Menu F3 Menu F4 Oven# F5 Gas# F6 11/03/22 15:15:45 Operating Parameters (2/8) Oven #1 Utility gas #3 > - Detector number 1-1 - Utility gas function Burner fuel - Utility gas type Air - Utility gas pressure 220.0 kPa - Utility gas flowrate 390 Menu F1 Menu F2 Menu F3 Menu F4 Oven# F5 Gas# F6 11/03/22 15:15:45 Operating Parameters (3/8) Oven #1 Det #1 - Carrier gas number 1-1 > - Vent-D (NONE) flowrate 11 - Vent-REF flowrate Menu F1 Menu F2 Menu F3 Menu F4 Oven# F5 Det# F6 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <1. Overview> 1-40 11/03/22 15:15:45 Operating Parameters (4/8) Oven #1 Vent #1 > - Carrier gas number 1-1 - Vent type BF - Vent flowrate 30 +/-5 Menu F1 11/03/22 15:15:45 Menu F2 Menu F3 Menu F4 Oven# F5 Vent# F6 Operating Parameters (5/8) > - Pressure unit kPa - Vent flowrate unit ml/min - Sample volume unit micro-l Menu F1 Menu F2 Menu F3 Menu F4 Oven# F5 Gas# F6 11/03/22 15:15:45 Operating Parameters (6/8) Oven #1 Valve #1 - Valve type Other - Sample phase Liquid - Sample pressure 300 - Sample flowrate 10 - Sample volume 0.33 Menu F1 Menu F2 Figure 1.12 EtherLCD Menu F3 Menu F4 Oven# Valve# F5 F6 Example of the operation condition configuration screen of the GC-HMI (touch panel) (4) Isothermal Oven and Programmed-temperature Oven A large isothermal oven (volume: 40 L), isothermal oven (31 L), and programmed-temperature oven (11 L) are provided, each having a pressurized enclosure. The temperature setting of both ovens is the fixed set point. The setting range is from 55 to 225°C (in 1°C units). When LSV is equipped, the temperature is set at a fixed value from 60 to 250°C (in 1°C units). When FPD is equipped as a detector (only for the large isothermal oven), the temperature is set at a fixed value from 0 to 60°C (in 1°C units). IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <1. Overview> 1-41 The maximum temperature is limited in accordance with each explosion-proof standard and its allowable temperature level and type of detector installed. The values of the setting temperature are described in the operation manual, and can be checked on the operation condition configuration screen of the GC-HMI (touch panel) EtherLCD. Refer to Figure 1.13. The following parts are in the large isothermal oven and isothermal oven. • Pressure regulator for carrier gas • Restrictor • RV • LSV • Column • Detector • Flame arrester • Mesh arrester The specification determines the number and types of parts. Refer to Table 1.1 for the maximum number of parts for each oven. 11/03/22 15:15:45 Temperature Setup Oven #1 - Oven max temp > - Oven temp setpoint - LSV temp setpoint - FPD temp setpoint 320.0 degC 145.0 degC 150.0 degC ***** degC Menu F1 Menu F2 Menu F3 Menu F4 Oven# Oven# F5 F6 11/03/22 15:15:45 Temperature Setup Oven #2 - Oven max temp 320.0 degC > - Oven temp setpoint 30.0 degC - LSV temp setpoint ***** degC - FPD temp setpoint ***** degC Menu F1 Menu F2 Menu F3 Menu F4 Oven# Oven# F5 F6 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 1  1-42 <1. Overview> 11/03/22 15:15:45 Temperature Setup Oven #1 - Oven max temp 145.0 degC - Oven temp setpoint 130.0 degC - LSV temp setpoint 1***** degC > - FPD temp setpoint 30.0 degC Menu F1 Menu F2 Menu F3 Menu F4 Oven# Oven# F5 F6 Figure 1.13 EtherLCD Example of the operation condition configuration screen of the GC-HMI (touch panel) Table 1.1 The maximum number of parts for each oven Pressure regulator for carrier gas Restrictor RV LSV Atmospheric-pressure balancing valve Detector Mesh arrester Flame arrester Max. 2 Large isothermal oven Max. 6 Max. 8 in total Select from: 7 RVs, 1 LSV, 2 Atmospheric-pressure balancing valves Providing RV + LSV ≤ 7 Max. 2 in total Select from: 2 TCDs, 2 FIDs, 1 FID-MC, 1 FPD Max. 2 Isothermal oven Max. 6 (4 recommended) Max. 7 in total Select from: 5 RVs (3 recommended), 1 LSV, 2 Atmospheric-pressure balancing valves Providing RV + LSV ≤ 5 Max. 2 in total Select from: 2 TCDs, 2 FIDs, 1 FID-MC *FPD is not mountable. Max. 2 (used for FID and FPD) Max. 5 (Connections for sample gas, carrier gas, utility gas, and I/O of the detector) (5) Analyzer Base Sampling Unit (GCSMP) In order to ensure the process gas chromatograph operates stably over a long period of time, it is necessary to select the most appropriate sampling system corresponding to sample properties in addition to analyzer stability and reliability. The GCSMP can be equipped on the self-standing GC8000 Type 1 and 2, in which the analyzer and GCSMP can be operated and maintained integrally. The GCSMP adjusts the pressure and flow rate of the measurement stream for measuring the process sample (gas and liquid) and the calibration and validation stream with standard gas (liquid). The GCSMP also has a humidifying and warming function (setting temperatures: 50°C or 75°C) and stream switching function by using air output from the analyzer. If the GCSMP is not equipped, the stream switching valve can be operated by sending the air output or contact output to an external sampling system. l Limitation in Selecting a Sampling System Sample properties that can be conditioned in the GCSMP are as follows. In addition, the specifications for the maximum number of air-operated valves are limited. The sample properties and specifications exceeding these limits necessitate preparing an external sampling system. Table 1.2 Sample Properties Sample Temperature Pressure Dust Gas 150°C or less 0.01 to 3 MPa 0.01 g/m3 (stp) or less Liquid 150°C or less 0.2 to 3 MPa None Note: It may differ from these value, depending on the process condition. Mist None ― IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-43 <1. Overview> Refer to Table 1.3 for the limitations on specifications with the GCSMP. Table 1.3 The limitations on specifications with the GCSMP 1 Purpose of airoperation valve Number of Mountable Valves Type 1 Type 2 Max. 7 in total *1 Max. 4 in total *1 Automatic stream Stream for measurement: 1 to 6 Stream for measurement: 1 to 3 switching valve Stream for calibration and Stream for calibration and validation: 1 to 3 validation: 1 to 3 Atmospheric-pressure Max. 2 Max. 1 *Max. 1 per 1 GCM balancing valve *1 *2 If the number of automatically switched streams exceeds the above limitation, use an external sampling system. The GCSMP is not mounted on Type 3. Table 1.4 shows the limitation by the analyzer on specifications with an external sampling system Table 1.4 The limitation by the analyzer on specifications with an external sampling system Type of Stream Valves Automatic stream One-to-one output (air) *2 One-to-one output (DO) *2 switching valve Binary output (air) *2 *3 Purpose of airoperation valve Atmospheric-pressure balancing valve *1 *2 *3 Number of Remarks Streams *1 1 to 8 1 to 12 DIO card: 3 ch × 4 (Max. 12 ch) 1 to 20 DO card: 5 ch × 4 (Max. 20 ch) 4 bits: 1 to 15 1 to 31 5 bits: 16 to 31 Number of Mountable Valves Type 1 Type 2 Max. 2 Max. 4 *Max. 1 per 1 GCM Stream for calibration and validation is included. Air output from the analyzer is 350 kPa. Only 1 GCM can be set up for an analyzer in the case of binary output (air). (Multiple GCMs are not possible.) 1.11 1.11.1 Human Machine Interface Types of GC8000 Human Machine Interface The GC8000 has the following three operation interfaces. GC-HMI ASET PCAS GC human-machine interface Displays the status of the GC8000 analyzer, operates it, changes its settings, and displays analysis data. 12.1-inch color LCD touch panel on the GC8000 Analyzing server engineering terminal software PC software which displays status of analyzers and operates analyzers PC analyzer server software PC software which manages the network and automatically saves data (1) GC-HMI (Touch panel) Either the GC8000 analyzer with or without the GC-HMI can be specified. The GC-HMI can display the status, perform operations, change settings, and display analysis data of the analyzer with the GC-HMI or one of the registered analyzers (up to 7 with/without the GC-HMI) via Ethernet. Only one analyzer (control CPU) can be connected to the GC-HMI at one time, and only one GC-HMI can be connected to the analyzer (control CPU) at one time. Refer to Chapter 4 for details of the GC-HMI operation. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-44 <1. Overview> GC-HMI Control CPU Figure 1.14 Position of the GC-HMI (touch panel) of the analyzer and control CPU Connection Registration Connection Registration Figure 1.15 • Only one analyzer (control CPU) can be connected to the GC-HMI at one time. • Only one GC-HMI can be connected to the analyzer (control CPU) at one time. Example of registration and connection between the GC-HMI and analyzers IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-45 <1. Overview> 1 • Registration (including ID update/delete) of analyzers to be connected to the GC-HMI and the settings can be done on the Analyzer Selecting screen. • Home: the analyzer on which the GC-HMI is mounted • 1 to 7: analyzers other than the above analyzer Figure 1.16 Analyzer Selecting screen of the GC-HMI (touch panel) (2) PC Software and Network In addition to the GC-HMI, the GC8000 analyzer can be connected to PC software (ASET and PCAS) which is provided as the GC8000 operation interface. The GC8000 analyzer can be added to and connected with the existing network which GC1000 MarkIIs are connected via Ethernet or the analyzer bus. [ Analyzer Server Engineering Terminal Display of operation and Network management, status of gas chromatograph Auto save PC ][ ] [ PC Gateway Unit Exchange data with the host systems ] [ ] describes the function. DCS DCS STARDOM FCJ RS-232C DI/O Ethernet Interface Unit Analog output from field devices/ Interface to contact I/O signals STARDOM FCN [ GC8000 GC8000 ] GC1000 MarkII Process Gas Chromatograph F0116.ai GC8000 The analyzer installed on the site (Process gas chromatograph) GC1000 MarkII The analyzer installed on the site (Process gas chromatograph) ASET Analyzing server engineering terminal software Operates and displays the analyzers. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  PCAS PC analyzer server software Manages the network and automatically saves data. Distributed control system The upper system of analyzers Analyzer server gateway software Exchanges data with the upper system by using the STARDOM FCJ. Analyzer server interface unit software Serves as an interface with the network for analog output signals of field devices except for process gas chromatographs or input/output of contact signals. DCS ASGW ASIU Figure 1.17 1.11.2 1-46 <1. Overview> Example of the structure of Ethernet and analyzer bus system User Level The display of the status, operation, change of settings, and display of analysis data of the analyzer performed on the GC-HMI (touch panel) are limited depending on the user level. EtherLCD is a function which consolidates the settings for display of I/O and Ethernet connection status of analyzers under connection; operation of I/O, user program, and detectors; and parameters of hardware configuration, analysis method, and I/O, which are mainly used for maintenance among general settings from the GC-HMI. Since this is equivalent to the functions of EtherLCD (display and operation), which is the humanmachine interface of the GC1000 Mark II, excluding operation and display of analysis data, the term “EtherLCD” is used in the GC8000. User-level settings for EtherLCD are independent of other screens of the GC-HMI (analyzer overview, etc.), and so they must be set separately. The operation of the PC software (ASET and PCAS) is also limited based on the user level. For more information, refer to each chapter of GC-HMI, ASET, and PCAS. 1.11.3 Status and Operation Mode Manual Process Pause mode Stop command Run command Pause command Pause Run command command Stop mode Run mode Stop command Change the status Run mode Stop command Run command Stop mode The GC8000 has the following statuses. The change is possible only in the Stop mode. Process Normal measurement, calibration and validation Manual Manual operation The GC8000 has the following operation modes and commands. Run Pause Mode in which measurement is running. Starts the measurement in the Process mode. This operation can be made by operators with user level B or higher. Starts to display chromatograms in the Manual mode. (It does not detect peaks, calculate concentration, or save chromatograms.) This operation can be made by operators with user level C or higher. Mode in which measurement pauses. Operates until the pause time specified in the GCM method in the Process mode. This operation can be made by operators with user level B or higher. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  Stop Command cancellation Forced stop <1. Overview> 1-47 Mode in which measurement stops. Operates in the Process mode for the main cycle specified in the GCM method. This operation can be made by operators with user level B or higher. Stops the Run mode immediately in the Manual status. This operation can be made by operators with user level C or higher. Cancels the operation mode command that is in the operation queue in the Process mode. This operation can be made by operators with user level B or higher. Stops the current operation mode forcibly in the Process mode. This operation can be made by operators with user level C+. 1 Figure 1.18 shows the change of status and operation mode. Process Manual Run command Pause mode Stop command Pause command (Revocable) Pause Run command command Forced stop command Stop mode Run mode Run mode Stop command (Revocable) Stop command Forced stop command Run command Stop mode Change the status Figure 1.18 Diagram of Changing the Status and Operation Modes The statuses and operation modes can be changed in the Analyzer Operation screen of the GCHMI (touch panel) equipped on the GC8000 analyzer. The operation modes can be changed in the Analyzer Overview screen. Figure 1.19 shows the Analyzer Operation screen of the GC-HMI (touch panel). Figure 1.20 shows the Analyzer Overview screen and the Operation Mode Changing screen. For detailed information of the GC-HMI operation, refer to Chapter 4. Refer to “ASET: Analyzing Server Engineering Terminal software IM 11B06C01-01E” for details of changing the statuses and operation modes using the PC software (ASET) connected to the GC8000. Figure 1.19 Analyzer Operation screen of the GC-HMI (touch panel) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-48 <1. Overview> F0119.ai Figure 1.20 1.12 Analyzer Overview screen of the GC-HMI (touch panel) Analyzer operation The GC8000 operates in two operating statuses: the process status and the manual status. The operating statuses are changed to each other in the stop mode. The process status is set when the equipment is turned on. 1.12.1 Process status Normal process measurement, calibration, and validation are performed in the process status. The following measurement statuses are available in the process status. The measurement status is set to “Stream sequence” when the equipment is turned on. Measurement status Function User level Stream sequence Measures streams in series in a preset sequence. Stream designation Measures the designated streams continuously or a B or higher specified number of times. Also stops operation after the specified number of times of measurement. Gives a command to change the measurement setting to a B or higher preset pattern among Calibration 1 to 6 or Validation 1 to 6. Cancels a command to change the measurement status. C or higher Calibration (Validation) Command cancellation Start of calibration (or validation) Termination of calibration (or validation) Start/termination of automatic calibration B or higher Gives a command to start calibration (or validation). This is used for manual calibration (or validation). Gives a command to terminate calibration (or validation). This is used for manual calibration (or validation). Gives a command to start or terminate automatic operation. This is not available when manual or semiautomatic calibration (or validation) is selected. Operation button B or higher B or higher C or higher The following modes are available in the process status. The process status and the manual status can be changed to each other in the stop mode. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-49 <1. Overview> Run • A mode to perform measurement • Measurement is started in this mode. Users at Level B or higher are allowed to activate this mode. • A mode to suspend measurement • In the process status, measurement is suspended in this mode at the time preset by the GCM method. Users at Level B or higher are allowed to activate this mode. • A mode to stop measurement • In this mode, measurement is continued through the main cycle preset by the GCM method, and then stopped. Users at Level B or higher are allowed to activate this mode. • Operation mode commands waiting for execution are canceled in this mode. Users at Level B or higher are allowed to activate this mode. • The current operation mode is forcibly terminated in this mode. Users at Level C+ are allowed to activate this mode. Pause Stop Command cancellation Forced stop 1 Figure 1.21 shows the transition among measurement statuses and operation modes. Stream sequence Stream designation *1 Run (1) *1 Pause Stop (2) (A) (B) *1 (A) (B) *1 Run Run (1) (3) *1 (2) *1 (A) Pause Stop (4) (B) *1 (A) (B) Stop *2 Calibration/validation *1: Command can be canceled. *2: Only for manual • If a calibration/validation command is issued during the pause mode or the stop mode in the stream sequence or stream specifiation (N times or continuous (set to “0”)) status (A) The measurement status and the operation mode innediately changes to the requested calibration/validation status and the run mode, respectively. (B) The measurement status and the operation mode respectivily return to the stream sequenace status and the stop mode when calibration/validation is complete for all the spwcified streams. • If a calibration/validation command is issued during the run mode in the stream sequence status (1) The measurement status changes to the requested calibration/validation status when the measurement of the currentlymeasured stream is completed. (2) The measurement status and the operation mode respectively return to the stream sequence status and the run mode when calibration/validation is completed for all the specified streams. The suspended measurement is (not reset but) resumed from the next stream. • If a calibration/validation commands is issued during the run mode in the stream specification (N times) status (3) The measurement status changes to the requested calibration/validation status when the Nth round of the spwcified measurement is completes. (4) The measurement status and the operation mode respectively return to the stream specification (N times) status and the stop mode when calibration/validation is completed for all the specified streams. • If a calibration/validation command is issued in the stream specification (Continuous (set to “0”))status (3) The measurement status changes to the requested calibration/validation status when the measurement of the currentlymeasured stream is completed. (4) The measurement status and the operation mode respectively return to the stream specification (Continuous) status and the run mode when calibration/validation is completed for all the specified streams. Figure 1.21 Transition among measurement statuses and operation modes IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-50 <1. Overview> (1) Operation description For example, this section describes the operation where the stream sequence, calibration, and validation are set as shown in Table 1.5, 1.6, and 1.7, respectively. Table 1.5 Stream sequence 1 Stream sequence 2 1st stream Stream 1 Stream 4 2nd stream Stream 2 Stream 5 3rd stream Stream 3 Stream 6 Table 1.6 Calibration Measurement Automatic Validation Measurement Validating Measurement stream frequency calibration stream frequency stream frequency number number before after calibration calibration Calibration 1 Stream 7 2 Valid 0 0 Stream 8 1 Table 1.7 Validation 1 Validation stream Measurement frequency Automatic validation Stream 8 2 Invalid (2) Operation in the stream sequence status • • • • • • Streams are measured in series in a preset sequence. The measurement status is set to “Stream sequence” when the equipment is turned on. Eight patterns of stream sequence can be stored. To select a sequence, touch the “Stream sequence” button to open the selection window on the GCM operation status screen on the analyzer operation display (Figure 1.22). Users at Level B or higher are allowed to select stream sequences and change the measurement status. A sequence of up to 31 streams can be specified in sequence for each stream sequence. To define a sequence, touch the “Stream sequence setting” button to open the setting window on the GCM operation status screen on the analyzer operation display (Figure 5.3) or define it on the “Stream sequence setting” screen on the EtherLCD (Figure 1.23). Users at Level C or higher are allowed to define stream sequences. When a command is issued to change the measurement status to the stream sequence status during the pause mode in the stream sequence status or the stream specification status, the measurement status is changed to the requested status but the operation mode changes to the stop mode and valves are all turned off. Then change the operation mode (to the run mode or pause mode). If a run command is issued while a completely undefined stream sequence is selected, an “ALM#455: Failed to change measurement status, Level 3” alarm is activated and the measurement status is not changed. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-51 <1. Overview> 1 F0121.ai Figure 1.22 Stream sequence window on the GCM operation status screen on the GC-HMI analyzer operation display 11/03/22 15:15:45 Stream Sequence (1/4) GCM #1 Seq #1 - #01 Stream 1 (STR1) - Excuted - #02 Stream 2 (STR2) - Excuted - #03 Stream 3 (STR3) - Excuted - #04 Stream ** (********) - Not excuted - #05 Stream ** (********) - Not excuted - #06 Stream ** (********) - Not excuted - #07 Stream ** (********) - Not excuted - #08 Stream ** (********) - Not excuted - #09 Stream ** (********) - Not excuted Menu Gate Valve Atm GCM# Seq# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 1.23 An example of the stream sequence setting screen on the GC-HMI EtherLCD ● In the case where a stream sequence change command is received during the stop mode in the stream sequence status [1A1] The measurement status is immediately changed to the requested stream sequence status. In this case, the operation mode remains unchanged from the stop mode. * Requests for changes to the same stream sequence number are invalid. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <1. Overview> 1-52 ● In the case where a stream sequence change command is received during the run mode in the stream sequence status [1A2] The measurement status is changed to the requested stream sequence status when the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed. In this case, the operation mode remains unchanged from the run mode. * Requests for changes to the same stream sequence number are invalid. ● In the case where a stream sequence change command is received during the pause mode in the stream sequence status [1A6] The measurement status is immediately changed to the requested stream sequence status. In this case, the operation mode changes to the stop mode and valves are all closed (turned off). * Requests for changes to the same stream sequence number are invalid. [1A1] Assinning stream sequence 2 Run command W4 Time Stream sequence 1 S5 W1 S1 W2 S2 W3 Stream sequence 1 Run [1A6] Assinning stream sequence 2 Stream sequence 1 Pause [1A2] Assinning stream sequence 1 Run command W4 Time S4 W5 Stream sequence 2 Stop [1A2] Assinning stream sequence 1 S4 W5 S5 W1 Stream sequence 2 Stop S1 W2 S2 W3 Stream sequence 1 Run ● In the case where a stream specification change command (for continuous measurement) is received during the run mode in the stream sequence status [1B2] The measurement status is changed to the requested stream specification status (for continuous measurement) when the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed. In this case, the operation mode remains unchanged from the run mode. [1B2] Assinning stream specification 4 (Continous) Time W1 Stream sequence 1 S1 W2 S2 W4 S4 W4 S4 W4 S4 W4 S4 W4 Stream specification 4 (Continuous) Run ● In the case where a stream specification change command (for N times of measurement) is received during the run mode in the stream sequence status [1C2] The measurement status is changed to the requested stream specification status (for N times of measurement) when the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed. In this case, the operation mode changes from the run mode to the stop mode when the Nth round of the specified measurement is completed. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <1. Overview> 1-53 [1C2] Assinning stream specification 4 (Twice) W1 Time S1 W2 S2 W4 S4 W4 Stream sequence 1 1 S4 Stream specification 4 (Twice) Run Stop ● In the case where a stream specification change command is received during the pause mode in the stream sequence status [1B6]The measurement status is immediately changed to the requested stream specification status. In this case, the operation mode changes to the stop mode and valves are all closed (turned off). [1B6] Assinning stream specification 4 Time Stream sequence 1 Stream specification 4 Run Stop ● In the case where a stream specification change command is received during the stop mode in the stream sequence status [1B1] The measurement status is immediately changed to the requested stream specification status. In this case, the operation mode remains unchanged from the stop mode. [1B1] Assinning stream specification 4 Time Stream sequence 1 Stream specification 4 Stop ● In the case where a stop command is received during the run mode in the stream sequence status [1E2] The operation mode is immediately prepared to be changed to the stop mode. The operation mode changes to the stop mode in the stream sequence status when the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed. The stop command can be canceled with a cancel command until the operation mode changes to the stop mode. [1E2] Stop command Time W1 S1 W2 S2 W3 Stream sequence 1 Run Stop IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <1. Overview> 1-54 ● In the case where a stop command is received during the pause mode in the stream sequence status [1E6] The operation mode is immediately changed to the stop mode in the stream sequence status. * Pause status W1 S1 W2 [1E6] Stop command Pause time Time Stream sequence 1 Run Stop ● In the case where a forced stop command is received during the run mode in the stream sequence status [1F2] The operation mode is immediately changed to the stop mode in the stream sequence status. [1F2] Forced stop command Time W1 S1 S2 W2 Stream sequence 1 Run Stop ● In the case where a forced stop command is received while the operation mode is scheduled to be changed to the stop mode or pause mode in the stream sequence status [1F3], [1F4] The operation mode is immediately changed to the stop mode in the stream sequence status. [1F3] [1F4] Forced stop command Time W1 S1 S2 W2 Stream sequence 1 Run (Waiting for stop or pause) Stop IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <1. Overview> 1-55 ● In the case where a forced stop command is received during the pause mode in the stream sequence status [1F6] The operation mode is immediately changed to the stop mode in the stream sequence status. [1F6] Forced stop command Time Stream sequence 1 Pause Stop ● In the case where a pause command is received during the stop mode in the stream sequence status [1H1] The operation mode is immediately changed to the pause mode in the stream sequence status. S1 W1 [1H1] Pause command S1 W2 Pause time Run command S1 W2 Time S2 W3 Stream sequence 1 Stop Pause Run ● In the case where a pause command is received during the run mode in the stream sequence status [1H2] The operation mode is immediately prepared to be changed to the pause mode in the stream sequence status. The operation mode changes to the pause mode in the stream sequence status at a preset time during the measurement of the currently-measured stream. The pause command can be canceled with a cancel command until the operation mode changes to the pause mode. ● In the case where a run command is received during the pause mode in the stream sequence status [1G6] The suspended measurement is resumed. [1H2] Pause command Time W1 S1 W2 S2 W3 S3 W1 S1 W2 [1G6] Run command Rest of S1 Rest of W2 S2 W3 Stream sequence 1 Run Pause Run IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 1  <1. Overview> 1-56 (3) Operation in the stream specification status • In the stream specification status, a specified stream is measured continuously (when the preset number is 0) or a preset number of times (when the preset number is 1 to 9999). To specify a stream, touch the “Stream specification” button to open the specification window on the GCM operation status screen on the analyzer operation display (Figure 5.5). Users at Level B or higher are allowed to specify a stream and change the measurement status. • In the stream specification status, operation stops after the preset number of times of measurement. • When a command is issued to change the measurement status to the stream specification status during the pause mode in the stream sequence status or the stream specification status, the measurement status is changed to the requested status but the operation mode changes to the stop mode and valves are all turned off. Then change the operation mode (to the run mode or pause mode). • If a command is issued to change the measurement status to a stream specification status of which GCM numbers or Method numbers have been inappropriately defined on the “Stream specification” screen on the EtherLCD, an “ALM#454: Failed to change operation mode, Level 3” alarm is activated and the operation mode is not changed. (When the operation mode changes from the stop mode to the pause mode or run mode, an alarm is immediately activated. In case where a command is issued to change the measurement status to an inappropriately defined stream specification status during the run mode in the stream sequence status or the stream specification status, an alarm is activated when the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed and preparation starts for the measurement of the specified stream.) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <1. Overview> 1-57 1 To “Stream number setting” screen To “Number of repeats” screen F0122.ai Figure 1.24 An example of the stream specification window on the GCM operation status screen on the GC-HMI analyzer operation display IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <1. Overview> 1-58 ● In the case where a stream sequence change command is received during the run mode in the stream specification status (for continuous measurement) [2A2] The measurement status is changed to the requested stream sequence status when the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed. In this case, the operation mode remains unchanged from the run mode. [2A2] Assinning stream sequence 2 Time W1 S1 W4 S4 W5 Stream specification 1 (Continuous) S5 W6 S6 W4 S4 W5 Stream sequence 2 Run ● In the case where a stream sequence change command is received during the run mode in the stream specification status (for N times of measurement) [3A2] The measurement status is changed to the requested stream sequence status when the Nth round of the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed. In this case, the operation mode remains unchanged from the run mode. [3A2] Assinning stream sequence 2 Run command Time W1 S1 W1 S1 W4 Stream specification 1 (Twice) Stop S4 W5 S5 W6 S6 W4 S4 W5 Stream sequence 2 Run ● In the case where a stream sequence change command is received during the pause mode in the stream specification status [2A6] The measurement status is immediately changed to the requested stream sequence status. In this case, the operation mode changes to the stop mode and valves are all closed (turned off). [2A6] Assinning stream sequence 2 Time Stream specification 1 Stream sequence 2 Run Stop ● In the case where a stream sequence change command is received during the stop mode in the stream specification status [2A1] The measurement status is immediately changed to the requested stream sequence status. In this case, the operation mode remains unchanged from the stop mode. [2A1] Assinning stream sequence 2 Time Stream specification 1 Stream sequence 2 Stop IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <1. Overview> 1-59 ● In the case where a stream specification change command (for continuous measurement) is received during the run mode in the stream specification status (for continuous measurement) [2B2] The measurement status is changed to the requested stream specification status (for continuous measurement) when the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed. In this case, the operation mode remains unchanged from the run mode. [2B2] Assinning stream specification 4 (Continuous) S1 W1 W1 Time S1 W4 Stream specification 1 (Continuous) S4 W4 S4 W4 S4 W4 Stream specification 4 (Continuous) Run ● In the case where a stream specification change command (for continuous measurement) is received during the run mode in the stream specification status (for N times of measurement) [3B2] The measurement status is changed to the requested stream specification status (for continuous measurement) when the Nth round of the measurement of the currentlymeasured stream is completed. In this case, the operation mode remains unchanged from the run mode. [3B2] Assinning stream specification 4 (Continuous) Run command Time W1 S1 W1 S1 W1 S1 W4 Stream specification 1 (3 times) Stop S4 W4 S4 W4 S4 W4 Stream specification 4 (Continuous) Run ● In the case where a stream specification change command (for N times of measurement) is received during the run mode in the stream specification status (for continuous measurement) [2C2] The measurement status is changed to the requested stream specification status (for N times of measurement) when the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed. In this case, the operation mode changes from the run mode to the stop mode when the Nth round of the specified measurement is completed. [2C2] Assinning stream specification 4 (Twice) Time W1 S1 W1 S1 W4 Stream specification 1 (Continuous) Run * Measurement status cannot be changed S4 W4 S4 Stream specification 4 (Twice) Stop IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 1  <1. Overview> 1-60 ● In the case where a stream specification change command (for N times of measurement) is received during the run mode in the stream specification status (for N times of measurement) [3C2] The measurement status is changed to the requested stream specification status (for N times of measurement) when the Nth round of the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed. In this case, the operation mode changes from the run mode to the stop mode when the Nth round of the specified measurement is completed. [3C2] Assinning stream specification 4 (Twice) Run command Time W1 S1 W1 S1 W1 S1 W4 Stream specification 1 (3 times) Stop S4 W4 S4 Stream specification 4 (Twice) Run Stop ● In the case where a stream specification change command is received during the stop mode in the stream specification status [2B1] The measurement status is immediately changed to the requested stream specification status. In this case, the operation mode remains unchanged from the stop mode. [2B1] Assinning stream specification 4 Time Stream specification 1 Stream specification 4 Stop ● In the case where a stream specification change command is received during the pause mode in the stream specification status [2B6] The measurement status is immediately changed to the requested stream specification status. In this case, the operation mode changes to the stop mode and valves are all closed (turned off). [2B6] Assinning stream specification 4 Time Stream specification 1 Stream specification 4 Run Stop ● In the case where a stop command is received during the run mode in the stream specification status (for continuous measurement) [2E2] The operation mode is immediately prepared to be changed to the stop mode. The operation mode changes to the stop mode in the stream specification status (for continuous measurement) when the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed. The stop command can be canceled with a cancel command until the operation mode changes to the stop mode. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <1. Overview> 1-61 [2E2] Stop command S1 W1 W1 Time 1 S1 W1 Stream specification 1 (Continuous) Run Stop ● In the case where a stop command is received during the run mode in the stream specification status (for N times of measurement) [3E2] The operation mode is immediately prepared to be changed to the stop mode. The operation mode changes to the stop mode in the stream specification status (for N times of measurement) when the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed. In this case, the number of times of measurement is counted again from the beginning. The stop command can be canceled with a cancel command until the operation mode changes to the stop mode. Run command Time W1 [3E2] Stop command * The number of times of measurement is reset. Run command S1(1/8) W1 S1(2/8) W1 W1 S1(1/8) W1 S1(2/8) Stream specification 1 (8 times) Stop Run Run ● In the case where a stop command is received during the pause mode in the stream specification status [2E6] The operation mode is immediately changed to the stop mode in the stream specification status. In the stream specification status (for N times of measurement), the number of times of measurement is counted again from the beginning. [2E6] Stop command Time Stream specification 1 Pause Stop ● In the case where a forced stop command is received during the run mode in the stream specification status [2F2] The operation mode is immediately changed to the stop mode in the stream specification status. In the stream specification status (for N times of measurement), the number of times of measurement is counted again from the beginning. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <1. Overview> 1-62 [2F2] Forced stop command S1 S1 W1 W1 Time Stream specification 1 Run Stop ● In the case where a forced stop command is received while the operation mode is scheduled to be changed to the stop mode or pause mode in the stream specification status [2F3], [2F4] The operation mode is immediately changed to the stop mode in the stream specification status. In the stream specification status (for N times of measurement), the number of times of measurement is counted again from the beginning. [2F3] [2F4] Forced stop command S1 S1 W1 W1 Time Stream specification 1 Run (Waiting for stop or pause) Stop ● In the case where a forced stop command is received during the pause mode in the stream specification status [2F6] The operation mode is immediately changed to the stop mode in the stream specification status. In the stream specification status (for N times of measurement), the number of times of measurement is counted again from the beginning. [2F6] Forced stop command Time Stream specification 1 Pause Stop ● In the case where a pause command is received during the stop mode in the stream specification status [2H1] The operation mode is immediately changed to the pause mode in the stream specification status. [2H1] Pause command Time Stream specification 1 Stop Pause IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-63 <1. Overview> ● In the case where a pause command is received during the run mode in the stream specification status [2H2] The operation mode is immediately prepared to be changed to the pause mode in the stream specification status. The operation mode changes to the pause mode in the stream specification status at a preset time during the measurement of the currently-measured stream. The pause command can be canceled with a cancel command until the operation mode changes to the pause mode. ● In the case where a run command is received during the pause mode in the stream specification status [2G6] The suspended measurement is resumed. [2H2] Pause command Time W1 S1 W1 S1 W1 S1 W1 S1 W1 [2G6] Run command Rest of S1 Rest of W1 S1 W1 Stream sequence 1 Run Pause Run (4) Calibration and validation Three types of calibration and validation methods are available as follows. Manual Semiautomatic Automatic Selection of a calibration (or validation) number, switching of stream valves to flow the standard sample, and issue of a calibration (or validation) start command are all performed manually. Once a calibration (or validation) number is selected, stream valves are automatically switched to flow the standard sample, then calibration (or validation) starts automatically. Stream valves are automatically switched to flow the standard sample, then calibration (or validation) starts automatically at a preset date, time, and interval. The preset calibration (or validation) patterns of which automatic execution is enabled are automatically executed. The details of these three types of calibration and validation are described below. (a) Manual calibration • • To select the calibration (or validation) method, touch the “Calibration (validation) method” button to open the selection window on the GCM operation status screen on the GC-HMI analyzer operation display (Figure 1.25) or select it on the “Calibration/validation setting” screen on the EtherLCD (Figure 1.26). A set of stream numbers and the numbers of times of measurement is specified for each of Calibration 1 to 6 and Validation 1 to 6 on the “Calibration/validation setting” screen on the EtherLCD. Users at Level C or higher are allowed to select the calibration (or validation) method. Next, issue a command to change the measurement status to a preset status among Calibration 1 to 6 or Validation 1 to 6 on the calibration (validation) window on the GCM operation status screen. Calibration (or validation) numbers for which stream numbers are not specified are not in the options. If there is no calibration (or validation) numbers for which stream numbers are specified, the operation button is invalid and is displayed in gray. Select a calibration (or validation) number, and then touch the “OK” button. Then the waiting measurement status is changed to the selected calibration (or validation) number on the overall GCM information screen. Users at Level B or higher are allowed to select the calibration (or validation) number. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 1  • • 1-64 <1. Overview> Users at Level C or higher can cancel the command to change the measurement status to the specified calibration (or validation) status until the waiting measurement status is changed to the selected calibration (or validation) number and the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed. (Figure 1.27) The measurement status changes to “Replaceable” when the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed. After the measurement status has changed to “Replaceable,” open the manual stream valve on the calibration stream (or validated) to flow the standard calibration (or validation) sample. After the flow in the line has been completely replaced with the standard sample, touch the “Calibration (validation) start” button. Users at Level B or higher are allowed to start calibration (or validation). (Figure 1.27) When calibration (or validation) is completed for all the streams specified for the selected calibration (or validation) number, the measurement status returns to “Replaceable.” Then stop flowing the standard sample and press the “Calibration (validation) stop” button to return to the stop mode in the measurement status before the calibration (or validation) (the stream sequence status or the stream specification status). Users at Level B or higher are allowed to stop calibration (or validation). (Figure 1.28) F0123.ai Figure 1.25 An example of the calibration (validation) method window on the GCM operation status screen on the GC-HMI analyzer operation display IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-65 <1. Overview> 11/03/22 15:15:45 Cal/Val Setup (Main) GCM #1 > - Cal(Val) method Manual - Auto start date 2011/07/27 - Auto start time 09:00 - Time interval 001 day:00:00 Auto cal status Stopping 1 Menu F1 Start F2 Stop F3 Cal F4 Val F5 GCM# F6 11/03/22 15:15:45 Calibration Setup GCM #1 Cal #1 > - Cal stream 4 - Cal times 3 - Auto cal Executed - ValStr# before Cal 3 - ValStr# after Cal 3 - Val before Cal times 1 - Val after Cal times 1 Menu Peak Stop Main GCM# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Figure 1.26 Cal# F6 An example of the calibration/validation setting screen on the GC-HMI EtherLCD IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <1. Overview> 1-66 F0125.ai Figure 1.27 An operation example of the calibration (validation) window on the GCM operation status screen on the GC-HMI analyzer operation display IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-67 <1. Overview> 1 F0126.ai Figure 1.28 An operation example of the calibration (validation) start window on the GCM operation status screen on the GC-HMI analyzer operation display IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-68 <1. Overview> F0127.ai Figure 1.29 An operation example of the calibration (validation) stop window on the GCM operation status screen on the GC-HMI analyzer operation display ● In the case where a (manual) calibration/validation command is received during the run mode in the stream sequence status The measurement status is immediately prepared to be changed to the calibration (or validation) status. The measurement status changes to “Replaceable” in the stop mode in the calibration (or validation) status when the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed. Users at Level C or higher can cancel the calibration/validation command until the operation mode changes to the stop mode. Issue a command to start calibration (or validation) after confirming that manual replacement of the flow with the sample has been completed. When calibration (or validation) is completed for all the streams specified for the selected calibration (or validation) number, the operation mode returns to the stop mode in the stream sequence status. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-69 <1. Overview> Assinning calibration 1 Time W1 S1 W2 Stream sequence 1 Run Start of calibration (or validation) S7 W7 W7 (Replaceable) Calibration 1 Stop S7 W8 (Replaceable) End of calibration (or validation) S8 Stream sequence 1 Run Stop ● In the case where a (manual) calibration/validation command is received during the stop mode in the stream sequence status The measurement status immediately changes to “Replaceable” in the stop mode in the requested calibration (or validation) status. Issue a command to start calibration (or validation) after confirming that manual replacement of the flow with the sample has been completed. When calibration (or validation) is completed for all the streams specified for the selected calibration (or validation) number, the operation mode returns to the stop mode in the stream sequence status. Assinning calibration 1 Calibration (or validation) start command Time Stream sequence 1 (Replaceable) S7 W8 Calibration 1 Stop S7 W7 W7 Calibration (or validation) stop command S8 (Replaceable) Run Stream sequence 1 Stop ● In the case where a (manual) calibration/validation command is received during the pause mode in the stream sequence status The measurement status immediately changes to “Replaceable” in the stop mode in the requested calibration (or validation) status. Issue a command to start calibration (or validation) after confirming that manual replacement of the flow with the sample has been completed. When calibration (or validation) is completed for all the streams specified for the selected calibration (or validation) number, the operation mode changes to the stop mode in the stream sequence status. Assinning calibration 1 Calibration (or validation) start command Time Stream sequence 1 (Replaceable) S7 W7 W7 Pause Stop Calibration 1 Run S7 W8 Calibration (or validation) stop command S8 (Replaceable) Stream sequence 1 Stop ● In the case where a (manual) calibration/validation command is received during the run mode in the stream specification status The measurement status is immediately prepared to be changed to the calibration (or validation) status. In the case of the stream specification status (for continuous measurement), the measurement status immediately changes to “Replaceable” in the stop mode in the requested calibration (or validation) status. In the case of the stream specification status (for N times of measurement), the measurement status changes to “Replaceable” in the stop mode in the requested calibration (or validation) status when the Nth round of the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 1  1-70 <1. Overview> Users at Level C or higher can cancel the calibration/validation command until the operation mode changes to the stop mode. Issue a command to start calibration (or validation) after confirming that manual replacement of the flow with the sample has been completed. When calibration (or validation) is completed for all the specified streams, the operation mode returns to the stop mode in the stream specification status. Assinning calibration 1 Time W1 S1 W1 Stream specification 1 Run Start of calibration (or validation) S7 W7 W7 S7 W8 (Replaceable) Calibration 1 Stop End of calibration (or validation) S8 (Replaceable) Stream specification 1 Run Stop ● In the case where a (manual) calibration/validation command is received during the stop mode in the stream specification status The measurement status immediately changes to “Replaceable” in the stop mode in the requested calibration (or validation) status. Issue a command to start calibration (or validation) after confirming that manual replacement of the flow with the sample has been completed. When calibration (or validation) is completed for all the specified streams, the operation mode returns to the stop mode in the stream specification status. Assinning calibration 1 Calibration (or validation) start command Time Stream specification 1 (Replaceable) S7 W8 Calibration 1 Stop S7 W7 W7 Calibration (or validation) stop command S8 (Replaceable) Run Stream specification 1 Stop ● In the case where a (manual) calibration/validation command is received during the pause mode in the stream specification status The measurement status immediately changes to “Replaceable” in the stop mode in the requested calibration (or validation) status. Issue a command to start calibration (or validation) after confirming that manual replacement of the flow with the sample has been completed. When calibration (or validation) is completed for all the specified streams, the operation mode changes to the stop mode in the stream specification status. Assinning calibration 1 Calibration (or validation) start command Time Stream specification 1 (Replaceable) Pause S7 W7 W7 Stop Calibration 1 Run S7 W8 Calibration (or validation) stop command S8 (Replaceable) Stream specification 1 Stop ● In the case where a stop command is received during the run mode in the (manual) calibration/validation status [4E2] The operation mode is immediately prepared to be changed from the run mode to the stop mode in the calibration (or validation) status. The measurement status changes to “Replaceable” in the stop mode in the calibration (or validation) status when the current measurement is completed. The stop command can be canceled with a cancel command until the operation mode changes to the stop mode. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  Time [4E2] Stop command Assinning calibration 1 Calibration (or validation) Calibration (or validation) stop command start command S7 S7 W7 W7 Stream sequence 1 (Replaceable) 1-71 <1. Overview> Stop Calibration 1 (Replaceable) Run Stream sequence 1 Stop ● In the case where a forced stop command is received during the run mode in the (manual) calibration/validation status [4F2] The measurement status immediately changes to “Replaceable” in the stop mode in the calibration (or validation) status. ● In the case where a forced stop command is received when the operation mode is prepared to be changed from the run mode to the stop mode in the (manual) calibration/validation status [4F3] The measurement status immediately changes to “Replaceable” in the stop mode in the calibration (or validation) status. [4F3] (Stop command) [4F2] [4F3] Forced stop command Assinning calibration 1 Calibration (or validation) Calibration (or validation) stop command start command S7 S7 W7 W7 Time Stream sequence 1 (Replaceable) Stop Calibration 1 (Replaceable) Run Stream sequence 1 Stop (Waiting for stop) (b) Semiautomatic calibration • To select the calibration (or validation) method, touch the “Calibration (validation) method” button to open the selection window on the GCM operation status screen on the GC-HMI analyzer operation display (Figure 1.30) or select it on the “Calibration/validation setting” screen on the EtherLCD (Figure 1.31). A set of stream numbers and the numbers of times of measurement is specified for each of Calibration 1 to 6 and Validation 1 to 6 on the “Calibration/validation setting” screen on the EtherLCD. Users at Level C or higher are allowed to select the calibration (or validation) method. • Next, issue a command to change the measurement status to a preset status among Calibration 1 to 6 or Validation 1 to 6 on the calibration (validation) window on the GCM operation status screen. Calibration (or validation) numbers for which stream numbers are not specified are not in the options. If there is no calibration (or validation) numbers for which stream numbers are specified, the operation button is invalid and is displayed in gray. Select a calibration (or validation) number, and then touch the “OK” button. Then the waiting measurement status is changed to the selected calibration (or validation) number on the overall GCM information screen. Users at Level B or higher are allowed to select the calibration (or validation) number. Users at Level C or higher can cancel the command to change the measurement status to the specified calibration (or validation) status until the waiting measurement status is changed to the selected calibration (or validation) number and the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed. (Figure 1.32) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 1  1-72 <1. Overview> • When calibration (or validation) is completed for all the streams specified for the selected calibration (or validation) number, the measurement status returns to the status before the calibration (or validation). The operation mode after calibration (or validation) is determined as follows depending on the measurement status and the operation mode before the calibration (or validation). Measurement status and operation mode before calibration (or validation) Stream sequence/Stream specification (for continuous measurement), Run Stream specification (for N times of measurement), Run Stream sequence/Stream specification (for continuous measurement)/ Stream specification (for N times of measurement), Stop Stream sequence/Stream specification (for continuous measurement)/ Stream specification (for N times of measurement), Pause Operation mode after calibration (or validation) Run Stop Stop Stop Users at Level B or higher are allowed to stop calibration (or validation). F0128.ai Figure 1.30 An example of the calibration (validation) method window on the GCM operation status screen on the GC-HMI analyzer operation display IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-73 <1. Overview> 11/03/22 15:15:45 Cal/Val Setup (Main) GCM #1 - Cal(Val) method Semi-auto - Auto start date 2011/07/27 - Auto start time 09:00 - Time interval 001 day:00:00 Auto cal status Stopping 1 Menu F1 Start F2 Figure 1.31 Stop F3 Cal F4 Val F5 GCM# F6 An example of the calibration/validation setting screen on the GC-HMI EtherLCD. F0125.ai Figure 1.32 An operation example of the calibration (validation) window on the GCM operation status screen on the GC-HMI analyzer operation display ● In the case where a (semiautomatic) calibration/validation command is received during the run mode in the stream sequence status Calibration (or validation) is started when the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-74 <1. Overview> Users at Level C or higher can cancel the calibration/validation command until the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed. When calibration (or validation) is completed for all the streams specified for the selected calibration (or validation) number, measurement is resumed from the next stream in the run mode in the stream sequence status. Assinning calibration 1 Time W1 S1 W7 S7 W7 Stream sequence 1 S7 W8 S8 W2 S2 W3 Calibration 1 S3 Stream sequence 1 Run ● In the case where a (semiautomatic) calibration/validation command is received during the stop mode in the stream sequence status Calibration (or validation) is immediately started. When calibration (or validation) is completed for all the streams specified for the selected calibration (or validation) number, the operation mode returns to the stop mode in the stream sequence status. Assinning calibration 1 W7 Time Stream sequence 1 S7 W7 S7 W8 Calibration 1 Stop S8 Stream sequence 1 Run Stop ● In the case where a (semiautomatic) calibration/validation command is received during the pause mode in the stream sequence status Calibration (or validation) is immediately started. When calibration (or validation) is completed for all the streams specified for the selected calibration (or validation) number, the operation mode changes to the stop mode in the stream sequence status. Assinning calibration 1 Calibration (or validation) start command Time Stream sequence 1 (Replaceable) S7 W7 W7 Pause Stop Calibration 1 Run S7 W8 Calibration (or validation) stop command S8 (Replaceable) Stream sequence 1 Stop ● In the case where a (semiautomatic) calibration/validation command is received during the run mode in the stream specification status (for continuous measurement) Calibration (or validation) is started when the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed. Users at Level C or higher can cancel the calibration/validation command until the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed. When calibration (or validation) is completed for all the streams specified for the selected calibration (or validation) number, the operation mode returns to the run mode in the stream specification status (for continuous measurement). IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-75 <1. Overview> Assinning calibration 1 Time W1 S1 W7 S7 W7 S7 W8 S8 W1 Stream specification 1 (Continuous) Calibration 1 S1 W1 1 S1 Stream specification 1 (Continuous) Run ● In the case where a (semiautomatic) calibration/validation command is received during the run mode in the stream specification status (for N times of measurement) Calibration (or validation) is started when the Nth round of the measurement of the currentlymeasured stream is completed. Users at Level C or higher can cancel the calibration/validation command until the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed. When calibration (or validation) is completed for all the streams specified for the selected calibration (or validation) number, the operation mode changes to the stop mode in the stream specification status (for N times of measurement). Assinning calibration 1 Run command Time W1 S1 W1 S1 W7 S7 W7 Stream specification 1 (Twice) Stop S7 W8 S8 Calibration 1 Stream specification 1 (Twice) Run Stop ● In the case where a (semiautomatic) calibration/validation command is received during the stop mode in the stream specification status Calibration (or validation) is immediately started. When calibration (or validation) is completed for all the streams specified for the selected calibration (or validation) number, the operation mode returns to the stop mode in the stream specification status. Assinning calibration 1 W7 Time Stream specification 1 S7 W7 S7 W8 S8 Calibration 1 Stop Stream specification 1 Run Stop ● In the case where a (semiautomatic) calibration/validation command is received during the pause mode in the stream specification status Calibration (or validation) is immediately started. When calibration (or validation) is completed for all the streams specified for the selected calibration (or validation) number, the operation mode changes to the stop mode in the stream sequence status. Assinning calibration 1 Time Stream specification 1 Pause W7 S7 W7 Calibration 1 Run S7 W8 S8 Stream specification 1 Stop IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <1. Overview> 1-76 ● In the case where a stop command is received during the run mode in the (semiautomatic) calibration/validation status [4E2] The operation mode is immediately prepared to be changed to the stop mode in the calibration (or validation) status. The operation mode changes to the stop mode in the previous measurement status when the current measurement is completed. Assinning calibration 1 W7 Time Stream sequence 1 [4E2] Stop command S7 W7 S7 W8 Calibration 1 Stop Stream sequence 1 Run Stop ● In the case where a forced stop command is received during the run mode in the (manual) calibration/validation status [4F2] The operation mode is immediately changed to the stop mode in the previous measurement status. ● In the case where a forced stop command is received when the operation mode is prepared to be changed from the run mode to the stop mode in the (manual) calibration/validation status [4F3] The operation mode is immediately changed to the stop mode in the previous measurement status. [4F3] (Stop command) [4F2] [4F3] Forced stop command Assinning calibration 1 Time Stream sequence 1 Stop W7 S7 W7 Calibration 1 S7 Stream sequence 1 Run Stop (Waiting for stop) (c) Automatic calibration • Stream valves are automatically switched to flow the standard sample, then calibration (or validation) starts automatically at a preset date, time, and interval. The preset calibration (or validation) patterns of which automatic execution is enabled are automatically executed. • To select the calibration (or validation) method, touch the “Calibration (validation) method” button to open the selection window on the GCM operation status screen on the GC-HMI analyzer operation display (Figure 1.33). To issue a command to start/stop automatic calibration, touch the “Automatic calibration start/stop” button to open the confirmation window on the GCM operation status screen on the GC-HMI analyzer operation display (Figure 1.34). On the “Calibration/validation setting” screen on the EtherLCD (Figure 1.35), a set of stream numbers and the numbers of times of measurement is specified for each of Calibration 1 to 6 and Validation 1 to 6, while the date, time, and interval of automatic start as well as the validity of automatic calibration are specified. Users at Level C or higher can cancel the command to change the measurement status to the specified calibration (or validation) status until the waiting measurement status is changed to the selected calibration (or validation) number and the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-77 <1. Overview> When the measurement status is set to the calibration (or validation) status, commands to start/stop automatic calibration are invalid. Users at Level C or higher are allowed to specify the setting and issue commands. • When all the calibration (or validation) patterns of which automatic execution is enabled are completed, the measurement status returns to the status before the calibration (or validation). The operation mode after calibration (or validation) is determined as follows depending on the measurement status and the operation mode before the calibration (or validation). Measurement status and operation mode before calibration (or validation) Stream sequence/Stream specification (for continuous measurement), Run Stream specification (for N times of measurement), Run Stream sequence/Stream specification (for continuous measurement)/ Stream specification (for N times of measurement), Stop Stream sequence/Stream specification (for continuous measurement)/ Stream specification (for N times of measurement), Pause Operation mode after calibration (or validation) Run Stop Stop Stop F0131.ai Figure 1.33 An example of the calibration (validation) method window on the overall GCM information screen on the GC-HMI analyzer operation display IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 1  1-78 <1. Overview> F0132.ai Figure 1.34 An operation example of the automatic calibration start/stop window on the overall GCM information screen on the GC-HMI analyzer operation display 11/03/22 15:15:45 Cal/Val Setup (Main) GCM #1 - Cal(Val) method Manual - Auto start date 2011/07/27 - Auto start time 09:00 > - Time interval 001 day:00:00 Auto cal status Executing Operation change selected Menu Start Stop Cal F1 F2 F3 F4 Val F5 GCM# F6 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-79 <1. Overview> 11/03/22 15:15:45 Calibration Setup GCM #1 Cal #1 > - Cal stream 4 - Cal times 4 - Auto cal Executed - ValStr# before Cal 3 - ValStr# after Cal 3 - Val before Cal times 1 - Val after Cal times 1 Menu Peak Stop Main GCM# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 1 Cal# F6 Enable/disable automatic calibration with function keys. Start (F2): Automatic calibration start command Stop (F3): Automatic calibration stop command Figure 1.35 An example of the calibration/validation setting screen on the GC-HMI EtherLCD. ● In the case where automatic calibration starts during the run mode in the stream sequence status Calibration (or validation) is started when the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed. When all the calibration (or validation) patterns of which automatic execution is enabled are completed, measurement is resumed from the next stream in the run mode in the stream sequence status. Start of automatic calibration Time W1 S1 W7 Stream sequence 1 S7 W7 S7 W8 S8 W2 Calibration 1 S2 W3 S3 Stream sequence 1 Run ● In the case where automatic calibration starts during the stop mode in the stream sequence status Calibration (or validation) is immediately started. When all the calibration (or validation) patterns of which automatic execution is enabled are completed, the operation mode returns to the stop mode in the stream sequence status. Start of automatic calibration W7 Time Stream sequence 1 Stop S7 W7 S7 W8 Calibration 1 Run S8 Stream sequence 1 Stop ● In the case where automatic calibration starts during the pause mode in the stream sequence status Calibration (or validation) is immediately started. When all the calibration (or validation) patterns of which automatic execution is enabled are completed, the operation mode changes to the stop mode in the stream sequence status. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-80 <1. Overview> Start of automatic calibration S7 W7 W7 Time Stream sequence 1 S7 W8 Calibration 1 Pause S8 Stream sequence 1 Run Stop ● In the case where automatic calibration starts during the run mode in the stream specification status (for continuous measurement) Calibration (or validation) is started when the measurement of the currently-measured stream is completed. When all the calibration (or validation) patterns of which automatic execution is enabled are completed, the operation mode returns to the run mode in the stream specification status (for continuous measurement). Start of automatic calibration Time W1 S1 W7 S7 W7 S7 W8 S8 W1 Stream specification 1 (Continuous) Calibration 1 S1 W1 S1 Stream specification 1 (Continuous) Run ● In the case where automatic calibration starts during the run mode in the stream specification status (for N times of measurement) Calibration (or validation) is started when the Nth round of the measurement of the currentlymeasured stream is completed. When all the calibration (or validation) patterns of which automatic execution is enabled are completed, the operation mode changes to the stop mode in the stream specification status (for N times of measurement). Start of automatic calibration Run command Time W1 S1 W1 S1 W7 S7 W7 Stream specification 1 (Twice) Stop S7 W8 S8 Calibration 1 Stream specification 1 (Twice) Run Stop ● In the case where automatic calibration starts during the stop mode in the stream specification status Calibration (or validation) is immediately started. When all the calibration (or validation) patterns of which automatic execution is enabled are completed, the operation mode returns to the stop mode in the stream specification status. Start of automatic calibration Time Stream specification 1 Stop W7 S7 W7 Calibration 1 Run S7 W8 S8 Stream specification 1 Stop ● In the case where automatic calibration starts during the pause mode in the stream specification status Calibration (or validation) is immediately started. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <1. Overview> 1-81 When all the calibration (or validation) patterns of which automatic execution is enabled are completed, the operation mode changes to the stop mode in the stream specification status. Start of automatic calibration W7 Time Stream specification 1 S7 W7 S7 W8 S8 Calibration 1 Pause Stream specification 1 Run Stop ● In the case where a stop command is received during the run mode in the (automatic) calibration/validation status [4E2] The operation mode is immediately prepared to be changed from the run mode to the stop mode in the calibration (or validation) status. The operation mode changes to the stop mode in the previous measurement status when the current measurement is completed. [4E2] Stop command Start of automatic calibration W7 Time Stream sequence 1 S7 W7 S7 W8 Calibration 1 Stop Stream sequence 1 Run Stop ● In the case where a forced stop command is received during the run mode in the (manual) calibration/validation status [4F2] The operation mode is immediately changed to the stop mode in the previous measurement status. ● In the case where a forced stop command is received when the operation mode is prepared to be changed from the run mode to the stop mode in the (manual) calibration/validation status [4F3] The operation mode is immediately changed to the stop mode in the previous measurement status. [4F3] (Stop command) [4F2] [4F3] Forced stop command Start of automatic calibration Time Stream sequence 1 Stop W7 S7 W7 Calibration 1 S7 Stream sequence 1 Run Stop (Waiting for stop) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 1  1.12.2 1-82 <1. Overview> Manual status Manual operation is performed and chromatograms are displayed in the manual status. The operations available in the manual status are as follows. Oven heater ON/ OFF LSV heater ON/OFF FPD detector heater ON/OFF Hydrogen limiter ON/OFF Detector ON/OFF Stream valve ON/ OFF Atmospheric pressure balancing valve ON/OFF Built-in oven valves (RV, LSV) ON/OFF When the oven belongs to two GCMs, set both the GCMs in the manual status, then click the SYS tab and open the “Temperature regulator control” window to turn on and off the heater. Set the GCM to which the LSV belongs to the manual status, then click the SYS tab and open the “Temperature regulator control” window to turn on and off the heater. Set the GCM to which the FPD belongs to the manual status, then click the SYS tab and open the “Temperature regulator control” window to turn on and off the heater. When the hydrogen limiter belongs to two GCMs, set both the GCMs in the manual status, then turn on and off the limiter in the “GCM Det Control” window or the “SYS Det Control” window. Set the GCM to which the detector belongs to the manual status, then turn on and off the detector in the “GCM Det Control” window or the “SYS Det Control” window. Set the GCM to which the stream valve belongs to the manual status, then turn on and off the valve in the “GCM VLV Control” window. Set the GCM to which the atmospheric pressure balancing valve belongs to the manual status, then turn on and off the valve in the “GCM VLV Control” window. Set the GCM to which the built-in oven valves (RV, LSV) belong to the manual status, then turn on and off the valves in the “GCM VLV Control” window or the “SYS VLV Control” window. The following operation modes are available in the manual status. The process status and the manual status can be changed to each other in the stop mode. When the equipment is switched from the process mode to the manual mode, valves and stream valves are all turned off. Run Stop • A mode to perform measurement • Activate this mode in the manual status to start to display a chromatogram. (Peak detection or concentration calculation is not performed. Chromatograms are not saved.) Users at Level C or higher are allowed to activate this mode. • A mode to stop measurement • Activate this mode to immediately stop the run mode in the manual status. Users at Level C or higher are allowed to activate this mode. In the manual status, the measurement status can be changed only by HMI and ASET. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <1. Overview> 1-83 1 SYS tab Oven information area SYS operation condition area F0134.ai Figure 1.36 Operation examples of the temperature regulator control window and others on the GCHMI analyzer operation display 1.12.3 Stream The GC8000 can handle 31 streams. The following items are defined for each stream. l Stream name l Stream valve number A stream valve number from 1 to 31 is defined for each stream. The stream valve number “0” means that the stream has no stream valves. Stream valve numbers can be defined only for the valves that belong to the GCM. (It is required to input the total number of stream valves used by GC8000 in the “Number of stream valves” in the “Basic system setting” window and to define the stream valve numbers that belong to the GCM with the “Initial stream valve number” and “Number of stream valves” in the “GCM setting” window. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <1. Overview> 1-84 When the stream valves are automatic valves, the valves specified among them are turned on and off. When the stream valves are manual valves, these settings do not affect the operation of the valves. The same stream valve number can be specified for different streams. Specify the same stream valve number when a single stream is used for several measurements. Also define the standard sample stream as one of the streams. l Stream type • • Measurement stream This is used for the measurement of the process sample. Validation stream This is used for the measurement of the standard sample in order to compare the measurement results between before and after calibration or to validate whether the GC8000 operates normally. • Calibration stream This is used for the measurement of the standard sample for the purpose of calibration. This is also used as a validation stream in some cases. l Sum calibration (Valid/Invalid) and sum total When the “Concentration calculation” is set to “Standard” in the “Peak common setting” of the relevant GCM and the relevant stream is a measurement stream or a validation stream, sum calibration is enabled. However, sum calibration is disabled when the GCM of the relevant stream is composed of several systems. The sum total can be arbitrary defined within the range from 0.1 to 100.0%. l Baseline calibration (Valid/Invalid) The previously-stored detector signal of the baseline-calibrating chromatogram is subtracted from the detector signal that measures the relevant stream for the purpose of calibration of the increase in the chromatogram baseline due to column bleed or something. Several detectors are used to measure the relevant stream depending on the configuration of the equipment. If it can be handled with individual peak setting integral treatment: the perpendicular method, it is recommended. Baseline calibration shall be enabled or disabled for each stream. Obtain the chromatogram to be used for the baseline calibration by running the method specified not to operate sample valves, then touch the “Save baseline chromatogram” button while displaying the chromatogram to save it in the main unit of the GC8000 (Section 4.5.3). Users at Level C or higher are allowed to save the baseline chromatogram. l GCM number and Method number Assign a number from 1 to 6 to GCM number and Method number, respectively that are used for the relevant stream. Methods are classified into GCM methods and SYS methods. For example, if the GCM number and the Method number are both set to 1, Method#1 of GCM#1 and Method#1 of SYS#11 are used for the measurement of the relevant stream. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-85 <1. Overview> 11/03/22 15:15:45 Stream Setup Stream #1 - Name of stream - Str valve number - Type of stream - Normalization - Total value - Base line corr - GCM number - Method number 1 STR-1 1 Measurement Not excuted 100.0 % Not excuted 1 1 Menu F1 Gate F2 Valve F3 Figure 1.37 Atm F4 DO F5 Strm# F6 An example of the stream setting screen on the GC-HMI EtherLCD 1.12.4 Method (1) GCM and SYS GC module concept has achieved parallel chromatography to perform simultaneous analysis of multiple streams and has enabled optimal analysis condition by breaking the complicated applications into simple column systems. This shortens the analysis time and achieves flexible equipment configuration to meet customer needs. Roles of GCM and SYS GCM Gas Chromatograph Module One GCM is equivalent to one virtual GC and assumes GC function of multiple units by setting multiple GCMs to GC8000. Two GCMs can be set at a maximum per isothermal oven. Up to two GCMs can be set in one isothermal oven. Up to four GCMs can be set in two isothermal ovens. Up to six GCMs can be set in three isothermal ovens. SYS Setting for atmospheric pressure balancing valve number, stream valve number, stream identification output, and use of distillation point analyzer, and peak common setting are performed for each GCM. Operation setting of stream valves is performed by GCM method setting. System SYS is the minimum analysis unit, and multiple SYSs can be set within GCM. This shortens the analysis time for the important control elements among the element group which is analyzed by GCM. The time obtained by dividing the main cycle of GCM method by an integer of 1 to 8 can be set to the analysis cycle of SYS method. [SYS method analysis cycle] = [GCM method main cycle] / n n: Integers of 1 to 8, division ratio of SYS analysis cycle and GCM main cycle Each SYS in the same GCM performs synchronous analysis. Each SYS in different GCMs performs asynchronous analysis. Two SYSs can be set at a maximum per isothermal oven. Up to two SYSs can be set in one isothermal oven. Up to four SYSs can be set in two isothermal ovens. Up to six SYSs can be set in three isothermal ovens. Perform setting of valve (RV or LSV), detector, and EPC for each SYS, and use SYS method for each operation setting. Although the atmospheric pressure balancing valve belongs to GCM, perform operation setting with SYS method. Perform the operation setting of timing signal using DO, by means of SYS method. *: Type 4 (programmed-temperature oven specifications) is the same as with one isothermal oven. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-86 <1. Overview> (2) GCM method Method setting of 1 to 6 for each GCM is possible with users at Level C or higher. The items to be set for GCM method are described below. Refer to “5.4.5 to find the setting method. Method Setup” l Main cycle The time required from the start to the end of analysis. The operational settable lower limit values depending on the sample rate and the number of ovens are shown in the following table. Sample rate (ms) 40, 80, 160 Number of ovens 1 2 3 Main cycle lower limit (s) 60 120 180 The operational settable upper limit values depending on the sample rate are shown in the following table. Sample rate (ms) 40 80 160 Main cycle upper limit (s) 5400 s 10800 s 21600 s l Warming up time Warming up time is time for displacement in sample streams. The warming up time at shipment is shown in the following table. When there is one SYS within GCM When there are multiple SYSs within GCM Half the time of the GCM method main cycle Half the time of the shortest SYS method analysis cycle among multiple SYSs The operational settable lower limit values depending on the sample rate and the number of ovens are shown in the following table. Sample rate (ms) 40, 80, 160 The number of ovens 1 2 3 Warming up time (s) 30 60 120 The operational settable upper limit values depending on the sample rate are shown in the following table. Sample rate (ms) 40 80 160 Warming up time (s) 5400 s 10800 s 21600 s l Stream valve ON/OFF time Sample stream valve ON/OFF time. Normally, turn on the stream valve one second after the warming up time. Therefore, set a negative time for stream valve ON time. Please note that when multiple SYSs are set for GCM and the time obtained by dividing GCM main cycle by an integer of 2 to 8 is set for SYS analysis time, it is necessary to turn on the stream valve until the sample valve ON/OFF operation for all SYSs, which were set for the GCM, is performed. The operational setting range is shown in the following table. Stream valve ON time –(Warming up time – 1) to 0 s Stream valve OFF time 0 to (main cycle – 2) s IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-87 <1. Overview> l Pause time The time when the measurement is suspended in Pause mode. Set a time to suspend each valve, and EPC program, which does not cause harmful effect on the column system. Normally, set a time between [SYS method peak detection stop time] × n and the main cycle – 2 s. (n: Integers of 1 to 8, division ratio of SYS analysis cycle and GCM main cycle) The operational setting range is shown in the following table. Pause time (Main cycle ‒600) to (main cycle – 2) s (3) SYS method Method setting of 1 to 6 for each SYS is possible with users at Level C or higher. SYS method number and GCM method number are in pairs. The items to be set for SYS method are described below. Refer to “5.4.5 Method Setup” to find the setting method. l Analysis cycle The time required from the start to the end of SYS analysis. [SYS method analysis cycle] = [GCM method main cycle] /n n: Integers of 1 to 8, division ratio of SYS analysis cycle and GCM main cycle l Peak detection stop time The time when peak detection of chromatogram is completed. Set a time after all the peaks to be analyzed in SYS have been eluted. The operational setting range is shown in the following table. Peak detection stop time 5 s to analysis cycle – 10 s l Tracking specification and automatic renewal of tracking factors Perform setting for whether to execute tracking (correction) of gate time setting to be used for peak detection and whether to automatically update tracking factors. As for peak tracking setting, please refer to “(4) Gate tracking function”. l Valve ON/OFF time Set the ON/OFF time of the valve, which is set for SYS in advance, by using “SYS setting” (RV or LSV for sample valve, backflushing valve, and column switching valve). ON time and OFF time can be set three times per cycle of SYS method, respectively. The operational setting range is shown in the following table. Valve ON time Valve OFF time 0 to analysis cycle – 2 s ON time + 1 s to analysis cycle – 2 s * Make sure to set the 2nd time after 1st time, 3rd time after 2nd time. * Set ON time and OFF time for each cycle in pairs with an interval of 1 s or more. l Atmospheric pressure balancing valve ON/OFF time Set the ON/OFF time of the atmospheric pressure balancing valve for the gas sample. There is a case when the atmospheric pressure balancing valve is used for collecting gas sample depending on the specification. Because the compressibility of the gas sample changes along with the change in flow rate, sample collection quantity changes. To prevent this change, use the atmospheric pressure balancing valve. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 1  <1. Overview> 1-88 Specifically, stop the flow of gas sample by turning on the atmospheric pressure balancing valve, which was set before the sample valve measuring pipe, and turn on the sample valve. Collect the sample by turning on the sample valve when the pressure within the sample valve measuring pipe is in equilibrium with the outlet atmospheric pressure. These operations are executed by setting each valve at SYS method setting. Perform setting for whether to install atmospheric pressure balancing valve per Oven# at “Atmospheric pressure balancing valve setting” and set atmospheric pressure balancing valve number to be used on each GCM at “GCM setting.” In this way, set the ON/OFF time of the atmospheric pressure balancing valve, which was set to GCM to which the SYS belongs, in advance with “SYS method.” ON time and OFF time can be set three times per cycle of SYS method, respectively. Please note that when multiple SYSs are set to GCM, perform setting of ON/OFF operation of atmospheric pressure balancing valve that was set to GCM (mechanically one for one GCM) from the SYS method of each SYS which was set to the GCM. The operational setting range is shown in the following table. Atmospheric pressure balancing valve ON time Atmospheric pressure balancing valve OFF time –(Warming up time or analysis cycle, whichever shorter) to analysis cycle – 2 s –(Warming up time or analysis cycle, whichever shorter) to analysis cycle – 2 s * Make sure to set the 2nd time after 1st time, 3rd time after 2nd time. * Set ON time and OFF time for each cycle in pairs with an interval of 1 s or more. l DO operation time This time is set to inform the timing of analysis completion by contact output to the upper level calculator, etc. Set the processing designation to “Timing” per DO number with “DO setting” and set SYS number and SYS method number. ON time and OFF time can be set three times per cycle of SYS method, respectively, and whether to perform contact output to the upper level calculator, etc. or not is also set. In this way, set the ON/OFF time of the DO timing signal, which was set for the SYS in advance, with “SYS method.” The operational setting range is shown in the following table. DO ON time DO OFF time 0 to Analysis cycle – 2 s 0 to Analysis cycle – 2 s * Make sure to set the 2nd time after 1st time, 3rd time after 2nd time. * Set ON time and OFF time for each cycle in pairs with an interval of 1 s or more. Figure 1.38 GCM method and SYS method setting example 1 SYS1 and SYS2 analysis cycle are the same as GCM main cycle IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-89 <1. Overview> 1 Figure 1.39 GCM method and SYS method setting example 2 SYS1 analysis cycle is the same as GCM main cycle, and SYS2 analysis cycle is 1/2 of GCM main cycle l EPC program setting When pressure adjustor for career gas complies with EPC specification of program control, three-staged heating program can be set. Pressure 3rd control pressure 3rd rise 2nd control pressure 1st control pressure 2nd rise Initial control 1st rise pressure Initial control time 1st control time 2nd control time 3rd control time Time Analysis cycle Analysis cycle Stream 1 Start Figure 1.40 Stream 2 Warm up time for stream 2 Start EPC program operations IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <1. Overview> 11/03/22 15:15:45 SYS Setup SYS #1 Oven #1 - Carrier 1-1 - Carrier 1-2 > - Utility 1-1 - Utility 1-2 - Utility 1-3 - Utility 1-4 1-90 (3/4) Executed Executed Executed Executed ------- Menu F1 Peak F2 Figure 1.41 Status F3 Get F4 SYS# F5 Oven# F6 Setting example of SYS (GC-HMI EtherLCD) 11/03/22 15:15:45 EPC program Set (1/2) GCM #1 / SYS #1 / Method #1 / Gas #1-#1 > - Initial press setpoint 100.0 kPa - #1 Press ramp start time 30.0 s Total run-time 400.0 s Main F1 Menu F2 Menu F3 Menu F4 Oven# F5 Gas# F6 11/03/22 15:15:45 EPC program Set (2/2) GCM #1 / SYS #1 / Method #1 / Gas #1-#1 > - #1 Press ramp rate 50.0 kPa/min - #1 Press hold setpoint 200.0 kPa - #1 Press hold time 30.0 s - #2 Press ramp rate 100.0 kPa/min - #2 Press hold setpoint 300.0 kPa - #2 Press hold time 30.0 s - #3 Press ramp rate 200.0 kPa/min - #3 Press hold setpoint 400.0 kPa - #3 Press hold time 100.0 s Main Menu Menu Menu Oven# Gas# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 1.42 Setting example of SYS method EPC program (GC-HMI EtherLCD) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-91 <1. Overview> 11/03/22 15:15:45 Operation Parameters (1/8) Oven #? Carrier gas #2 - Carrier gas type H2 - Carrier gas pressure 140.0 kPa 1 Menu F1 Menu F2 Figure 1.43 Menu F3 Menu F4 Oven# F5 Gas# F6 Operation conditions setting (GC-HMI EtherLCD) l Heating program setting Like the GC1000 MarkII, when Type 4 (programmed-temperature oven specifications) is used, a three-staged heating program can be set. Temperature 3rd control temp. 3rd rise 2nd control temp. 1st control temp. 2nd rise Initial control 1st rise temp. Initial temp. hold time 1st temp. hold time 2nd temp. hold time 3rd temp. hold time Time Analysis cycle Analysis cycle Stream 1 Start Figure 1.44 Stream 2 Warm up time for stream 2 Start Heating program operation IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <1. Overview> 1-92 11/03/22 15:15:45 Oven program Setup (1/2) GCM #1 / SYS #1 / Method #1 > - Initial temp setpoint 85 degC - #1 Temp ramp start time 10.0 s Total run-time 252.0 s Main F1 Menu F2 Menu F3 Menu F4 Oven# F5 Gas# F6 11/03/22 15:15:45 Oven program Setup (2/2) GCM #1 / SYS #1 / Method #1 > - #1 Temp ramp rate 20.0 degC/min - #1 Temp hold setpoint 85 degC - #1 Temp hold time 60.0 s - #2 Temp ramp rate 25.0 degC/min - #2 Temp hold setpoint 90 degC - #2 Temp hold time 90.0 s - #3 Temp ramp rate 30.0 degC/min - #3 Temp hold setpoint 100 degC - #3 Temp hold time 60.0 s Main Menu Menu Menu Oven# Gas# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 1.45 Example of a GC-HMI EtherLCD SYS method heating program (3) Auto-operation starting function Auto-operation starting function operates the analyzer at process status Run mode without manual operation. When the auto-operation is started, consecutive measurement of the streams, which were set to the stream sequence 1, is performed in order. It is required to supply power, protective gas (instrumental air), carrier gas, and utility gas sample to the analyzer in the same manner as when starting up the device manually. It is not recommended to use the auto-operation starting function for FPD detector because it is necessary to operate pneumatic pressure for fuel two times as the value written in “operation condition setting” in the Operation Material. If FPD is lit up with the pneumatic pressure for fuel at the operation condition setting value as is, a peak may not appear in the chromatogram and only the base line may be output. The operation of the analyzer when “Auto-operation setting” is set to “Yes” is described below. (1) Following the power supply for the electronic section of the control unit, immediately after power is supplied to the oven unit circuit section, the hydrogen limiting unit is turned on automatically. For the model in which H2 is not used for carrier gas and utility gas, the hydrogen limiting unit is not equipped. If there is no hydrogen limiting unit, move to 2) operation after power is supplied to the electronic section of control unit and oven unit. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <1. Overview> 1-93 (2) After a lapse of “the 1st auto-start time,” automatically turn on the oven, LSV, and FPD heater. (3) After a lapse of “the 2nd auto-start time,” automatically turn on the detector. (4) After a lapse of “the 3rd auto-start time,” automatically perform the Run command of the stream sequence 1 at process status. When the mode is switched from Stop mode to run mode, start “warming up time” to substitute the sample stream according to the method, which was set at the first stream sequence 1. When the “warming up time” lapsed, measurement starts. When the measurement start condition is not met at the starting of Run mode due to the reasons such as SV value of each types of heater temperature is not PV value, or detector is not at ON status, or when the power is not supplied to the oven unit in 20 minutes after control unit start up: the level 3 alarm “#434 operation mode change failure” occurs, and auto-operation will not be started. In addition, if the level 1 alarm is generated during the Run mode after the auto-operation is started, the mode is switched to Stop mode after a lapse of the main cycle time of the stream during measurement, when an alarm is generated. The following table explains the setting for auto-operation starting functions. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 1  <1. Overview> 1-94 Auto-operation setting 1st auto-start time Yes/No No initial value Until the heater is turned on. Range: 0 to 50000 s Initial value: 0 The purpose is to prevent deterioration of the column by turning the oven heater on while the column is not sufficiently substituted by the carrier gas. Set a time (s) when the carrier gas stream within the column system is sufficiently substituted by carrier gas. The rough indication is the time (s) obtained by dividing about 5 times the volume (ml) of the column total inner volume by the carrier gas DET flow rate (ml/s). 2nd auto-start Until the detector is turned on. time Range: 0 to 50000 s Initial value: 0 s TCD detector: The purpose is to prevent filament from burning out as a result of turning on the air in the TCD without being sufficiently substituted by carrier gas. Set 600 s (10 min) or more. FID detector: Even if the heater is at ON status after a lapse of the 1st auto-start time, when the detector is turned on while the temperature within the isothermal oven is low, the vent may be clogged as a result of condensation or freezing (0°C or lower) of moisture generated by combustion of FID detector. To prevent this, set the required time. The rough indication is a time (s) when SV value of isothermal oven temperature exceeds 20°C and reaches PV value. FID-MC: The purpose is the same as the FID detection, and in addition to that, to prevent catalyst deterioration by turning the detector on while the air inside the MC (methane converter) is not sufficiently substituted by carrier gas. Set the time (s) in which SV value of the isothermal oven temperature exceeds 20°C and reaches PV value, or 600 s (10 min), whichever is longer. 3rd auto-start Time until Run mode command is executed time Range: 0 to 50000 s Initial value: 0 s TCD detector: Even if the detector is turned on after a lapse of the 2nd auto-start time, the baseline drifts until the current value becomes stable. If such drifting becomes significant, an accurate analysis cannot be performed. To prevent this, set the required time. The rough indicator for the setting to start up the analyzer at room temperature is 12 hours or more in total of the 2nd and the 3rd auto-start time. Example: The 2nd auto-start time: 600 s (10 minutes) The 3rd auto-start time: 43200 s (12 hours) FID detector: Set at least “140 s” for generating detector anti-inflammation alarm as a result of decrease in pressure of utility gas, etc. The rough indication for configuring the analyzer to star up at room temperature is: When the isothermal oven temperature is set to 145°C or lower: 2 to 4 hours in total of the 2nd and the 3rd auto-start time. Example: The 2nd auto-start time: 3600 s (1 hour) The 3rd auto-start time: 7200 s (2 hours) When the isothermal oven temperature is set to 146°C or higher: 4 to 8 hours in total of the 2nd and the 3rd auto-start time. Example: The 2nd auto-start time: 3600 s (1 hour) The 3rd auto-start time: 18000 s (5 hours) FID-MC: Set at least “140 s” or more than the time required for generating detector anti-inflammation alarm as a result of decrease in pressure of utility gas, etc. In addition, there is a case when accurate analysis cannot be performed until the catalyst within the MC becomes activate, even if the detector is turned on after a lapse of the 2nd auto-start time. To prevent this, set the required time. The rough indicator for the setting to start up the analyzer at room temperature is 4 to 8 hours in total of the 2nd and the 3rd auto-start time. Example: The 2nd auto-start time: 3600 s (1 hour) The 3rd auto-start time: 18000 s (5 hours) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <1. Overview> 1-95 (4) Gate tracking function This is a function to track (correct) the gate ON/OFF time to be used for peak detection and the operation time of base level processing by using tracking factor a/b, subsequent to fluctuation of retention time due to such changes as ambient temperature and atmospheric pressure, carrier gas supply pressure, and aged deterioration of column. l Tracking specification Set whether to execute tracking. Perform this setting per SYS method. When multiple detections are set at SYS setting for the relevant SYS, they are treated as single setting. l Automatic renewal of tracking factors Set “Update” for automatic renewal of tracking factor a/b. Set “No Update” to enter the set value of tracking factor a/b. Perform this setting per SYS method. When multiple detections are set at SYS setting for the relevant SYS, they are treated as single setting. 11/03/22 15:15:45 SYS Method Setup GCM #1 / SYS #1 / Method #1 - Execution On - Cycle time 300.0 s - End of peak detect 280.0 s - Tracking exec Executed > - Tracking coef updating Updating GCM F1 Seq F2 Temp F3 EPC F4 Copy F5 SYS# F6 Figure 1.46 Tracking specification and automatic renewal of tracking factors in SYS method setting (GC-HMI EtherLCD) l Timing and target for tracking When “Execute” is set for “Tracking specification” in SYS method, perform correction of the gate ON/OFF time and the operation time of base level processing by using the latest tracking factor a/b after completion of peak detection of all the peaks of the relevant SYS method, and re-detect the peak and re-calculate the concentration. Tracking (correction) is performed only for the peaks for which “Standard” or “Tracking” is set for “Automatic renewal of tracking factors” of the peak individual setting. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 1  1-96 <1. Overview> The following table shows processing designation of peak individual settings for the tracking (correction) target. Processing designation Type Details Peak processing External 3rd External straight line Tracking specification No tracking Tracking Standard*1 Tracking (correction) items Gate ON time Gate OFF time Indirect method Calculation processing *1 Base level No tracking Tracking Operation time Stream type Calibration, Measurement, Validation Calibration, Measurement, Validation Calibration, Measurement, Validation Calibration, Measurement, Validation Concentration calculation Standard Standard, Correction area fraction Auto-tracking is not possible when the gate processing method is set to “Zone gate.” 11/03/22 15:15:45 Peak Setup-Specific (4/5) Stream #1 Peak #1 External 3rd > - Auto tracking req Tracking std - Peak std time 100.0 s - Tracking coef a 0.965 - Tracking coef b 0.0 Menu F1 Copy1 Copy2 F2 F3 Atm F4 Strm# F5 Peak# F6 Figure 1.47 Tracking specification and tracking factor a/b in peak individual setting (GC-HMI EtherLCD) l Tracking factor a/b Tracking factor a/b is a factor to perform correction of gate ON/OFF time and operation time of base level processing by straight-line approximation. When the tracking factor b is 0, proportional correction by tracking factor a is performed. -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Gate ON time after tracking = Gate ON time × Tracking factor a + Tracking factor b Gate OFF time after tracking = Gate OFF time × Tracking factor a + Tracking factor b Base level operation time after tracking = Base level operation time × Tracking factor a + Tracking factor b -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Tracking factor a/b can be obtained by auto-calculation or by entering a set value. To obtain tracking factor a/b by auto-calculation, set “Update” for “Automatic renewal of tracking factors” of SYS method. Automatic renewal of tracking factor a/b is performed after completion of peak detection of all the peaks for the relevant SYS method but before correction of gate ON/ OFF time and operation time of base level processing. Refer to the following items to find the details of automatic renewal of tracking factor a/b. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-97 <1. Overview> The setting range is shown below. Tracking factor a Tracking factor b 0.500 to 2.000 -21600.000 to +21600.0 1 If auto-calculation result of tracking factor a/b does not fall within the above scope, the level 3 alarm, “#484 Peak tracking failure” occurs, and automatic renewal of tracking factor a/b and tracking of gate ON/OFF time and base level processing operation time are not performed. Nor is the automatic renewal of the tracking factors performed for peaks assigned to the same sensor. Note that for peaks assigned to other sensors, the automatic renewal is performed. NOTE If gate tracking function is available, it is necessary to confirm that a peak is detected definitely on chromatogram when rebooting and after long time rest of analyzing. And re-adjust a gate as needed. l Tracking standard and tracking interval at automatic renewal of tracking factors When “Update” is set for “Automatic renewal of tracking factors” of SYS method, calculation is performed by “Peak standard time“ of the peak for which “Standard” is set for “Tracking specification“ in peak individual setting, and “Retention time“ of the measurement result. When multiple detections are set in SYS setting, tracking factor a/b is calculated per detector. Determine “Tracking interval” according to the number of peaks, which were set for “Standard,” and alignment, and automatic renewal the tracking factor a/b. Determine Tracking interval according to the number of peaks for which Standard is set for “Tracking specification” of peak individual setting, and alignment, and automatic renewal the tracking factor a/b. Calculation method is different when “Standard” is one and when it is more than one. The rules of tracking standard and tracking interval are explained below. The peak which was set as “Tracking execution” and the peak which was set as “Standard” are called “Tracking peak” and “Standard peak,” respectively. -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------• • • The first tracking peak follows the subsequent standard peak. The first standard peak is calculated by a single standard peak (itself). a1 = y1 / x1 b1 = 0 The tracking peak that exists between the 1st standard peak and the 2nd standard peak follows the 2nd standard peak. • The 2nd standard peak is calculated by two standard peaks of the 1st and the 2nd. a2 = (y1-y2) / (x1-x2) b2 = y1 - {(y1 - y2) / (x1 - x2)} × x1 • The tracking peak that exists between the 2nd standard peak and the 3rd standard peak follows the 3rd standard peak. • The 3rd standard peak is calculated by two standard peaks of the 2nd and the 3rd. a3 = (y2-y3) / (x2-x3) b3 = y2 - {(y2 – y3) / (x2 – x3)} × x2 • The peak that exists behind the 3rd standard peak with no subsequent standard peak follows the 3rd standard peak. • When multiple detections are set in SYS setting, tracking factor a/b is calculated per detector. • “The 1st, 2nd, 3rd......” stands for the order from the earliest retention time, not the numerical order of the peak number. -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-98 <1. Overview> x: Peak standard time, which was set for tracking criteria x: Peak retention time, which was set for tracking criteria a: Tracking factor (Inclination) b: Tracking factor (Intercept) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The example of tracking standard and tracking interval are shown below. (1) When there is zero (0) standard Because tracking factor cannot be calculated, tracking is not performed. (2) When there is one standard P1 Time P2 Tracking peak Standard peak Factor a1 Factor a1 P3 Tracking peak Factor a1 P4 P5 Tracking peak Tracking peak Factor a1 Factor a1 P6 Tracking peak Factor a1 • P1: The first tracking peak follows the subsequent standard peak, therefore, tracking factor is a1. • P2: This is the 1st standard peak. a1= y1 / x1 (b1=0) • P3 to P6: Because there is no other standard peak after the 1st peak, follow the 1st standard peak, therefore, tracking factor is a1. (3) When there is more than one tracking standard P1 Time Tracking peak Factor a1 P2 Tracking peak Factor a1 P3 Tracking peak Factor a2 Factor b2 P4 P5 Standard peak Tracking peak Factor a2 Factor a2 Factor b2 Factor b2 P6 Tracking peak Factor a2 Factor b2 • P1: The first tracking peak follows the subsequent standard peak, therefore, tracking factor is a1. • P2: This is the first standard peak. a1= y1 /x1 (b1=0) • P3: Because the tracking peak that exists between the 1st and the 2nd standard peak follows the 2nd standard peak, the tracking factors are a2 and b2. • P4: The 2nd standard peak is calculated by two standard peaks of the 1st and the 2nd. a2 = (y1-y2) / (x1-x2), b2 = y1 - {(y1 - y2) / (x1 - x2)}× x1 • P5 to 6: Because there is no standard peak after the 2nd peak, follow the 2nd standard peak, therefore, tracking factors are a2 and b2. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  1-99 <1. Overview> (4) When multiple detections are set to SYS Tracking factor a/b is calculated for each detector. P1 Time P3 DET1-1 Standard peak Factor a1 Tracking peak Factor a1 P2 Time 1 P4 P5 DET1-2 Standard peak Factor a1 Tracking peak Tracking peak Factor a1 Factor a1 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  2. 2-1 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> Installation, Piping, and Wiring If the process gas chromatograph is installed in a hazardous area, do the wiring according to the applicable explosionproof requirements. 2.1 Installation Refer to “1.1 Wiring and Piping Diagram.” 2.1.1 Installing the Analyzer Two types of analyzer are available: self-standing and wall-mounted. Install the chromatograph according to the procedure for each type. (1) Installation site The following conditions must be met: (a) Satisfying specified environmental conditions (atmospheric gases) even if it is a hazardous area. (b) No vibration (c) Not subject to rainfall or direct sunlight (d) No corrosive gas and little dust (e) Environmental temperature: –10 to 50°C, humidity: 95% RH or less (f) Altitude of installation site: Max. 2000 m above sea level (g) Installation category based on IEC 61010: II * (h) Pollution degree based on IEC 61010: 2 * *: The “Installation category” indicates the regulation for withstanding impulse voltage. It is also called the “Overvoltage category”. “II” applies to electrical equipment. “Pollution degree” describes the degree to which a solid, liquid or gas which degrades dielectric strength is adhering. “2” applies to a normal indoor atmosphere. (2) Analyzer house If the analyzer is installed outdoors, it should be constructed so as to protect it from rain and direct sunlight and to facilitate inspection and maintenance. Figure 2.1 shows an example of an analyzer house. The house should be designed to provide space for standard gas cylinders because the effects of the ambient temperature on standard gas can be better controlled indoors than outdoors. It is also desirable for maintenance that the house accommodates an external sampling system if any, except when leakage of toxic or flammable standard gas is to be avoided indoors. The floor area shown in Figure 2.1 is the minimum requirement for the house. Allow as much area as possible for the house taking into consideration the types of items to be accommodated and the space required for maintenance. For the maintenance space, refer to “1.2 External Dimensions.” Provide ventilation openings in the upper portion (near the ceiling) and lower portion (near the floor) of a side wall of the house. Also provide a window and electric lights. Carrier gas cylinders, should be protected from exposure to direct sunlight and rainfall by placing them under the eaves of the house. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 2  2-2 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> Unit: mm Ventilation opening * Carrier gas cylinder A’ A Front Standard gas cylinder Right side 1600 Analyzer 1600 Piping and wiring inlet Drain pipe outlet Window to let in natural light Standard gas cylinder Floor plan A - A’ Figure 2.1 Rear * Prepare the structure which keeps the inside of an analyzer house from rain and wind Example of analyzer house (3) Unpacking WARNING • The GC8000 weighs about 100 to 220 kg. Unpack it near the installation site. Use a transportation machine to move it. Handle it carefully to prevent it from falling. • For lifting and carrying equipment, use two (or three) brackets at which GC8000 is fixed to the crate (made of wood etc.). Use wall-mounting brackets or their equivalent (unpainted brackets are attached to self-standing type for transportation). • Up to two protection system may be included, each of which weighs approximately 7 kg, are installed on top of the GC8000. Therefore, the center of gravity is higher than the center of the analyzer body. (4) Checking equipment Check that the equipment has not been damaged during transportation. Contact Yokogawa if any damage is found. Keep the packing such as crates. l Model and Suffix Codes Check that the model and suffix codes on the data plate on the left side of the GC8000 match those on the order sheet. Refer to “1.6 Data Plate.” IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  2-3 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> l Accessories Check the accessories listed in Table 2.1 and Table 2.2. Table 2.1 Accessory kit Accessory kit part number (K9800**) EA EB EC ED HE HF HG HH EG EH EJ EK EE EF HA HB HC TIIS FM-X, FM-Y, ATEX, IECEx, CSA-X CSA-X NEPSI ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ P P Q Q P P Q Q R R Q Q P Type 1 Type 2 (200V) Type 2 (100 V) Type 3 Type 4 Option ciode /KC No. Item Parts No. 1 Cable B1010EN 2 packing adapter 2 Packing — 2 3 Manual 4 Packing 5 Manual ○ ○ ○ ○ Quantity HD Remark ○ ○ ○ P G, Q: 3/4NPT, P: G3/4, R: M25x1.5 Remark 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 For B1010EN 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 For B1010EN For B1009EN K9800GE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 9 8 9 K9800FG 1 — 6 Connector K9402PU 7 Connector K9800FX K9407PU 8 O-ring Y9118XA 9 Sealing L9811GQ fitting 10 Nipple K9194ZS 11 Nut K9194ZU 12 Manual K9800GF 13 Hex L9827AT L9827AC wrench L9827AS 14 Fuse A1423EF A1463EF 15 Fuse A1598EF 16 Label K9191NK 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 4 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 4 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 4 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 4 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 4 1 2 2 2 2 2 4 1 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 4 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 UP300 1 1 1 For pressure gauge 17 Ferrite core A1179MN 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 18 Key B1018HL 4 or 6 or 4 or 6 or 4 or 6 or 4 or 6 or 4 or 6 or 4 or 6 or 4 or 6 or 4 or 6 or 4 or 6 or 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 8 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 For B1009EN 3/4NPT 3/4NPT 3 G3/4 3 For sealing fitting IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 2  2-4 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> 1 13 2 14 3 15 6 5 9 11 4 7 Figure 2.2 8 10 16 17 18 12 Accessory kit Note: Table 2.2 Item Coil over wrench for LSV Seal kit for LSV Seal kit for LSV Ferrule Ferrule Cutter User’s manual (CD) Operation data Parts number Quantity L9827EA 1 K9402VG number of LSV K9402VH number of LSV J9218VU 1 set J9218VT 1 set J9218VV 1 — 1 — 1 Remark Rulon Teflon For capillary column For megabore column For megabore or capillary column IM 11B08A01-51E (5) Installation Use anchor bolts to secure the self-standing type analyzer on the floor. Use nuts and bolts to secure the wall-mounted type analyzer on the wall. The wall construction has to be designed for four times the weight of the analyzer. For the hole for installation, refer to “1.2 External Dimensions.” 2.1.2 Installing Auxiliary Hardware (1) Cylinders The following conditions must be met: (a) Located near the analyzer or the external sampling system. (b) Not subject to rainfall or direct sunlight (c) Ambient temperature: 0 to 40°C (d) The place should be well-ventilated so that leaking gases, if any, do not accumulate. Comply with regulations for high-pressure gases. (2) Other items (a) Dehumidifier Provide a dehumidifier between the carrier gas cylinders and the analyzer (as near the analyzer as possible). IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> 2-5 (b) Sample-gas pressure regulator Provide sample-gas pressure regulators between the sampling point and the analyzer or the external sampling system (as near the sampling point as possible). (c) Vent stack, Drain tank Without Vent Stack Provide a header with a diameter of about 5 cm near the analyzer to connect the venting lines. Extend the vent stack outside the house using a pipe with 1.5 cm diameter. Make provisions to prevent rain from getting in the top end of the vent stack. (See Figure 2.4.) With Vent Stack Connect the top end of the vent stack to the section for exhaust. Extend the vent stack outside the house using a pipe with 1.5 cm diameter. Make provisions to prevent rain from getting in the top end of the vent stack. When using a TCD detector, plug the lower end of the vent stack. When using a FID or FPD detector, provide a drain tank with a diameter of about 5 cm near the analyzer to the venting lines. For the details, see Figure 2.5. Wrench Unscrew using the upper spanner while gripping the vent stack with the lower spanner. Vent stack Figure 2.3 Unscrewing the vent stack IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 2  <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> 2-6 50A SGP, STPG 15A SPG, STPG Vent stack *8 Vent header (Both ends are Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT) 15A SPG, STPG Drain ID:10mm or more Drain tank 50A Water seal pot Using a drain tank Using a water seal pot With Vent stack Figure 2.4 Example of vent stack installation Note 1: The drain tank is used only for FID/FPD. Note 2: For FID/FPD, incline the piping so that drain water will not accumulate in it. Figure 2.5 Example of vent stack construction IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  2-7 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> 2.2 Piping IMPORTANT • Do not remove the blind plugs at the analyzer piping connections until starting piping work to prevent deterioration of the columns. On the condition that carrier gas does not be supplied after the blind plugs taken out or during out of operation, the column has the risk of deterioration. In these condition, fix the the blind plugs at each vent with carrier gas enclosed. • Use an anti-corrosion material for the pipes and pipe fittings. • Never use pipes with too large a diameter for the sample inlet piping, for reducing dead time. However, use a little larger pipe for the exhaust line so as not to apply back pressure to the venting lines. • Use pipes and pipe fittings free from interior contamination such as grease, oil or other substances. The contamination damage the analyzer. Before connecting the pipes, completely air-purge their interiors. • Carefully connect the pipes so that there is no leakage from the pipe connections such as the joints. • Use filters or other appropriate pipe fittings to prevent dust, moisture, or other foreign matter from getting into the analyzer. 2.2.1 Types of Piping and Installation The types of piping are shown below. Note that the types of piping and quantities of individual pipes required vary with the specifications such as the analyzer type and detector type (TCD, FID, or FPD). See the flow sheets in the “Operation Data” for implementing piping. Control unit (A) Air output for stream valve 1 to 8 (AIR OUT 1 to AIR OUT 8) Isothermal oven, large isothermal oven, programmed temperature oven (B) Protective gas (instrumental air) inlet (PURGE AIR) (C) Inlet/outlet of sample gas (SAMPLE 1 IN, SAMPLE 2 IN, SAMPLE 1 OUT, SAMPLE 2 OUT) (D) Carrier gas (CARRIER 1, CARRIER 2) (E) Hydrogen gas for combustion (H2) (F) Make-up gas (MAKE UP) (G) Air for combustion (BURNER AIR) (H) Air output (ATM 1, ATM 2) (J) FID vent (FID 1, FID 2) (K) FPD vent (FPD 1) (L) TCD vent (TCD1, REF.1, TCD2, REF.2) (M) Vent (VENT 1 to VENT 10) Analyzer base sampling system (GCSMP) (1) Sample inlet (STREAM #1 to STREAM #12) (2) Standard-gas inlet (STANDARD #1 to STANDARD #3) (3) Sample bypass vent (STREAM #1 B/P VENT to STREAM #12 B/P VENT) (4) Sample vent (SAMPLE VENT 1 to SAMPLE VENT 3) (5) Condensate drain (CONDENSATE OUT) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 2  2-8 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> (6) Steam (STEAM IN) (7) Steam drain (STEAM OUT) Vent for protective gas (instrumental air) (open to the atmosphere) Air outlet for stream swiching valve (A) 6mm or 1/4” tube AIR OUT 1 AIR OUT 2 AIR OUT 3 AIR OUT 4 AIR OUT 5 AIR OUT 6 Control unit AIR OUT 7 AIR OUT 8 Figure 2.6 Right side of control unit Protective gas (instrumental air) inlet (B) Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT Inlet/outlet for sample gas, carrier gases, etc. (C)(D)(E)(F)(G)(H) 6mm or 1/4” tube PURGE AIR SAMPLE 1 IN SAMPLE 1 OUT Isothermal oven SAMPLE 2 IN SAMPLE 2 OUT Large isothermal oven CARRIER 1 CARRIER 2 Protective gas (instrumental air) inlet (B) Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT H2 MAKE UP BURNER AIR ATM 1 Programmed temperature oven Figure 2.7 PURGE AIR ATM 2 Left side of isothermal oven, large isothermal oven, and programmed temperature oven IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> FID 2 FID 1 2-9 FID/FPD vent (J)(K) 1/4” tube FPD 1 Vent (L)(M) 1/8” tube Isothermal oven TCD1 TCD2 VENT1 VENT3 VENT5 REF.1 REF.2 VENT2 VENT4 VENT6 Figure 2.8 TCD1 TCD1 TCD2 VENT1 REF.1 REF.1 REF.2 VENT2 TCD2 VENT1 VENT1 VENT3 REF.2 VENT2 VENT2 VENT4 VENT1 VENT3 VENT3 VENT5 VENT2 VENT4 VENT4 VENT6 VENT3 VENT5 VENT5 VENT7 VENT4 VENT6 VENT6 VENT8 VENT2 VENT5 VENT7 VENT7 VENT9 VENT4 VENT6 VENT8 VENT8 VENT10 Large isothermal oven TCD1 VENT1 VENT3 VENT5 VENT7 REF.1 VENT2 VENT4 VENT6 VENT8 TCD2 VENT1 VENT3 VENT5 VENT7 REF.2 VENT2 VENT4 VENT6 VENT8 VENT1 VENT3 VENT5 VENT7 VENT9 VENT6 VENT8 VENT10 Left side of isothermal oven and large isothermal oven Inlet/outlet for sample gas, standard gas, etc. (1)(2)(3)(4)(5) Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT Inlet/outlet for sample gas, standard gas, etc. (1)(2)(3)(4)(5) Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT Steam outlet (7) or drain Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT Steam outlet (7) or drain Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT Steam inlet (6) Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT Steam inlet (6) Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT STREAM #1 For type 1 STREAM #2 STREAM #3 STREAM #4 Example of labels STREAM #5 STREAM #6 STANDARD #1 STANDARD #2 STANDARD #3 STREAM IN Figure 2.9 2 STREAM #1 B/P VENT STREAM #2 B/P VENT STREAM #3 B/P VENT STREAM #4 B/P VENT STREAM #5 B/P VENT SAMPLE VENT 1 SAMPLE VENT 2 SAMPLE VENT 3 CONDENSATE OUT CONDENSATE OUT For type 2, type 4 Analyzer base sampling unit (GCSMP) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  2.2.2 2-10 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> Connecting Piping For connection, refer to “1.2 External Dimensions.” For the user-specific connection, refer to “Operation Data.” (a) Sample inlet pipes These are pipes to lead samples from process lines or an external sampling system into analyzer STREAMS #1 to #12 or the sample inlet of the pressure control section. The analyzer can analyze up to 31 sample streams. For more than 31 sample streams, an external sampling system is employed, which has a stream switching function. In this case, one sample inlet pipe is used to lead multiple samples into the analyzer. When providing more than one pipe, see the “Operation Data” so that the specified sample can flow into the analyzer from the designated inlet port. STREAM and No. are marked at the piping port. Use stainless steel of O.D. 6 mm or 1/4 inch with any oil cleaned off. (b) Standard sample inlet pipes These are pipes between the outlets of pressure regulators for standard gas cylinders and STANDARD #1 to #3 ports of the analyzer. When different standard gases are used, provide separate pipes for each gas to lead them into the analyzer. Use stainless steel of O.D. 6 mm or 1/4 inch with any oil cleaned off. (c) Carrier gas inlet pipes These are pipes to introduce the carrier gas to the analyzer between the outlets of carrier gas cylinder pressure regulators and CARRIER IN ports of the analyzer. When two different carrier gases are used, provide separate pipes for each gas to lead them into the analyzer. The following is recommended. By arranging the two gas cylinders in this way, there is no contamination of air. To GC8000 (Spare) Figure 2.10 Confirm that the insides of the pipes and pipe fittings are not contaminated. Confirm that the piping connections are done with no leakage. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> 2-11 CAUTION The following explosionproof requirements must be satisfied for hydrogen gas. 2 • No leakage • Supply hydrogen gas to the analyzer at 500 ±20 kPa. If the carrier gas contains moisture with a dew point of –60°C or above, it is recommended that a desiccant, such as a molecular sieve, be used to remove moisture to prevent deterioration of the columns. Use stainless steel of O.D. 6 mm or 1/4 inch with any oil cleaned off. CAUTION Do not use solvents containing impurities such as non-volatile components to clean the inside of the pipes. They will contaminate the inside of the pipes and prevent correct analysis. If it is necessary to use a solvent for cleaning, use highly pure acetone. (d) Instrument air pipe These are the pipes for supplying air to the analyzer for actuating sampling and backflush valves and for purging the inside of the electronics section and the ovens. An air pressure of 350 to 900 kPa (500 to 900 kPa for FPD) is required. Use general instrument air as the source and do the piping to the analyzer PURGE AIR port. A pressure regulator should be installed in-between. Use stainless steel pipe of O.D. 1/2 inch or more with any oil cleaned off. Vortex tube (cooling device for FPD) Regulator for vortex tube Figure 2.11 Pressure and flow control section of the large isothermal oven Air pressure set value of the regulator is depended on the source air temperature and need to tune the setting value. (e) Piping combustion air for FID/FPD The FID/FPD air must not contain impurities that have an adverse effect on the analyzed results. Use an air supply meeting the above condition and do the piping between this supply and the analyzer BURNER AIR port. Use stainless steel of O.D. 6 mm or 1/4 inch with any oil cleaned off. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  2-12 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> (f) Piping combustion hydrogen gas for FID/FPD Connect the piping between the outlet of the pressure regulator of a hydrogen gas cylinder and the analyzer BURNER FUEL port. Supply it at 500 ±20 kPa to meet the explosionproof requirements. Use stainless steel of O.D. 6 mm or 1/4 inch with any oil cleaned off. (g) Steam pipe This is necessary for heating the sample with steam. Connect the piping between a steam supply that can provide the required pressure (see Operation Data) and the analyzer STEAM IN port. (h) Venting pipes These are used for backflush venting, foreflush venting, detector venting, etc. With a vent header, the piping is provided. Without a vent stack, install piping to the vent stack. Use large pipes for venting to minimize pressure losses. Connect venting pipes of 1/4 inch for FID/FPD or 1/8 inch for others to about a 2-inch header. When ejector suction is used in the sample outlet system, connect the venting pipes to the downstream of the vent header with a pipe of I.D. 10 mm or more. CAUTION Please keep safety in mind because the sample vent is usually open to the atmosphere. When the sample vent is connected to the flare stack, please consider the pressure and the flow rate of the stack. (i) Steam drain pipe This is used to drain the condensate of the steam for heating the sample. Connect the piping from the steam trap of the analyzer and also from the condensate drain piping port (CONDENSATE OUT), if provided, to the drain pit on the down-grade. (j) Pipes for external valves These are used for piping between the analyzer valve actuating pneumatic outlet and the external sampling system to actuate the stream valves and atmospheric balance valves provided in the external sampling system. Connect the piping properly according to the piping diagram. Use stainless steel of O.D. 6 mm or 1/4 inch. 2.3 Wiring See “1.1 Wiring and Piping Diagram” for wiring. Note that the specifications determines the number of the protection system, which results in different wiring. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  Table 2.3 2-13 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> Number of protection system Explosionproof Specifications TIIS (-T) FM-X (-F), CSA-X (-C) FM-Y (-G), CSA-Y (-D) ATEX (-A) IECEx (-E) NEPSI (-P) ( ): Suffix codes Type 1 (100) 1 1 1 1 1 Type 2 (120) Type 3 (222) Type 4 (230) 100 V (-A, B, C, D) 200 V (-E, F, G, H) 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 WARNING In case of TIIS-certified wiring, the attached cable packing adapters or sealing fitting must be used. Otherwise, it does not comply with TIIS regulation. CAUTION • Lay the signal wiring and electrical wiring in separate conduit pipes or ducts. • Use independent grounding with a grounding resistance of 100 ohms or less. 2.3.1 Types of Wiring and Locations The following types of wiring are required for the GC8000. The wiring required varies with the specifications. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H) (J) (K) (L) (M) (N) Electric circuit and heater power Heater power Contact output for system alarm 1 Contact output for annunciator Analog input (4 to 20 mA) Contact input (Operation start/stop, mode-selection request, etc.) Contact output Communication wiring (RS-422 and analyzer bus) Analog output (4 to 20 mA), Analog hold output Grounding External I/O cutoff output (Power cutoff signal) Ethernet (twisted-pair cable) Ethernet (optic fiber cable) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 2  2-14 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> B A Protection system A ABCDEFGH JLMN CD EFGH JLMN Protection system B * K K Control unit With protection system Without protection system * Protection system B is equipped in some specifications. Figure 2.12 2.3.2 Cable connection locations Recommended Cables CAUTION (C) to (L) cables: Use heat-resistant cables with maximum allowable temperature of 80°C or higher. (M) and (N) cables: Required maximum allowable temperature of the cables depends on the temperature class of the instrument and the actual ambient temperature. Use cables with maximum allowable temperature shown in the table below. Temperature Class Ambient temp. Maximum allowable temperature of cable Up to 30°C Up to 35°C Up to 40°C 60°C 31 to 36°C 36 to 40°C 41 to 45°C 65°C 37 to 43°C 41 to 45°C 46 to 50°C 70°C 44 to 50°C 46 to 50°C 75°C T1, T2 T3 T4 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  2-15 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> Table 2.4 Wiring Connections Cable Inlet Cable O.D. (for TIIS) Protection system A (right): 2 ø8.0 to B (left): 1 16.0 mm Electronics section 6 (Junction box as needed) ø9.0 to 16.0 mm NA (use sealing fitting) Wiring Protection system A: (A) Electric circuit and heater power Protection system B: (B) Heater power (C) Contact output for system alarm 1 (D) Contact output for annunciator Without protection system: (A) Electric circuit and heater power (B) Heater power Without protection system: (C) Contact output for system alarm 1 (D) Contact output for annunciator (E) Analog input (16 points max.) (F) Contact input (32 points max.) (G) Contact output (Note 1) (20 points max.) (H) Serial communication (Note 2) (J) Analog output (32 points max.) (K) Grounding Cable Condition 3.5 to 5.5 mm2 max. 1.25 to 5.5 mm2 max. 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 max. Cable length 1 km max. Terminal Cable Shield M4 screw Not crimp-on required terminal For Required MKKDSN (Note 3) 3.5 to 5.5 mm2 max. M4 screw Not crimp-on required terminal 1.25 to 5.5 mm2 max. 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 max. Cable length 1 km max. For FKC (Note 3) Required For FKC (Note 3) M4 screw crimp-on terminal For FKC (Note 3) Required RJ45 Required 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 max. Cable length 1 km max. 5.5 mm2 or more Grounding resistance of 100 ohms max. (L) External I/O cutoff 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 max. output (Power Cable length 1 km max. cutoff signal) Twisted-pair cable (M) Ethernet (shielded CAT.5/CAT.5E twisted-pair cable) 50 m or less (N) Ethernet (fiberFor 1300 nm Outdoor optic cable) type multi-mode of 50/125 µm or 62.5/125 µm Not required Required SC Note 1: Use double-isolation cables for the contact output line (AC). Double-isolate either contact output line (AC) or (DC) if they are mixed. Note 2: Twisted pair cable is recommended. Note 3: Use MKKDSN series terminals (manufactured by Phoenix Contact Ltd.) for the protection system, and FKC series terminals (manufactured by Phoenix Contact Ltd.) for the electric circuit except for the power or Ethernet line. For these wiring connections, use AI series crimp-on terminals manufactured by the same company. Four types of crimp-on terminals are used according to the wire diameters (see Table 2.5). IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 2  Table 2.5 Crimp-on terminals Terminal Series Cable Core Cable O.D. Less than ø2.8 mm 0.75 mm2 Less than ø3.0 mm 1 mm2 MKKDSN Less than ø3.4 mm 1.5 mm2 Less than ø2.5 mm 0.5 mm2 Less than ø2.8 mm 0.75 mm2 FKC Less than ø3.0 mm 1 mm2 Less than ø3.4 mm 1.5 mm2 Contact Phoenix Contact Ltd. for details. 2.3.3 2-16 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> Terminal Type AI 0.75-6GY AI 1-6RD AI 1.5-6BK AI 0.5-10WH AI 0.75-10GY AI 1-10RD AI 1.5-10BK Peel off length Approx. 6 mm Approx. 10 mm Preparing Wiring Depending on Specifications Perform wiring carefully because the connection of wiring varies depending on the GC8000 explosionproof specifications. IMPORTANT Cables should be arranged in an orderly manner in the protection system. Otherwise, they may damage the parts (e.g. relay). n FM WARNING • All wiring shall comply with National Electric Code ANSI/NFP A 70 and Local Electric Codes. • In a hazardous area, use conduits for wiring in the explosionproof enclosure or to electronics sections. CAUTION • The unused electrical connection ports should be closed with an appropriate flameproofcertified plug. • Analyzers have pressurized enclosures. The cable end should be sealed in order to apply pressure to the pressurized enclosure. Otherwise, power does not supplied to the electronics section. In the FM-Y, all wiring must be connected to the electronics section since the protection system is not provided. Six connection ports are provided in the electronics section. Use convenient ones. Remove the attached plug of the connector and perform wiring. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  2-17 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> Connection port of the protection system *3 3/4NPT(F) Connection port of the electronics section *1 9/16 inch Plug *2 3/4NPT Connector Gasket NONHAZARDOUS LOCATION EQUIPMENT NONHAZARDOUS LOCATION EQUIPMENT NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS Plate Nut Detail of A HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS Sealing Fitting 18 inches (457mm) maximum Protection system *3 (Flameproof enclosure) Conduit *1: Any of the six connection ports of the electronics section can be equally used. *2: A plug is attached to connector. Remove and keep it for future use. *3: In the FM-Y, the protection system is not provided. as close as possible not more than 18 inches (457 mm) A Electronic section (Pressurized enclosure) Figure 2.13 Wiring in FM specification n CSA WARNING • All wiring shall comply with Canadian Electric Code C22.1 and Local Electric Codes. • In a hazardous area, use conduits for wiring in the explosionproof enclosure or to electronics sections. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 2  2-18 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> CAUTION • The unused electrical connection ports should be closed with an appropriate flameproofcertified plug. • Analyzers have pressurized enclosures. The cable end should be sealed in order to apply pressure to the pressurized enclosure. Otherwise, power does not supplied to the electronics section. In the CSA-Y, all wiring must be connected to the electronics section since the protection system is not provided. Six connection ports are provided in the electronics section. Use convenient ones. Remove the attached plug of the connector and perform wiring. Connection port of the protection system *3 3/4NPT(F) Connection port of the electronics section *1 9/16 inch Plug *2 3/4NPT Connector Gasket NONHAZARDOUS LOCATION EQUIPMENT NONHAZARDOUS LOCATION EQUIPMENT NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS Plate Nut Detail of A HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS Sealing Fitting 50 cm maximum Protection system *3 (Flameproof enclosure) Conduit *1: Any of the six connection ports of the electronics section can be equally used. *2: A plug is attached to connector. Remove and keep it for future use. *3: In the CSA-Y, the protection system is not provided. as close as possible not more than 50 cm A Electronic section (Pressurized enclosure) Figure 2.14 Wiring in CSA specification IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  2-19 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> n ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI WARNING • All wiring shall comply with Local Electric Codes and Requirements. • In a hazardous area, use appropriate flameproof-certified parts for connecting cables. • All externally powered input signals into the pressurized enclosure shall be isolated by external relays controlled by the Ex px protection system(Ex px safety device). CAUTION 8 mm 32 mm Connection port of the protection system Connection port of M25x1.5 the electronics section *1 9/16 inch • The unused electrical connection ports should be closed with an appropriate flameproofcertified plug. • The blind plug shall not be used with an adapter. • Analyzers have pressurized enclosures. The cable end should be sealed in order to apply pressure to the pressurized enclosure. Otherwise, power does not supplied to the electronics section. M25x1.5 Plug *2 3/4NPT G3/4 Connector-2 Gasket Protection system (Flameproof enclosure) Plate Connector-1 (accessory) Detail of A (Connector) Nut Connector-2 A Electronic section (Pressurized enclosure) *1: Any of the six connection ports of the electronics section can be equally used. *2: A plug is attached to connector 2. Remove and keep it for future use. *3: Connector 1 is not attached at shipment. One of the three types of connector 2 is attached at shipment. “N” is inscribed on the 3/4NPT connector and “G” on the G3/4 connector. (No inscription on the M25x1.5 connector) Figure 2.15 Wiring in ATEX, IECEx or NEPSI specification IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 2  2-20 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> l Connection port for the protection system Remove the attached plug and perform wiring. For the 3/4NPT or G3/4 connection port, use the connectors in the accessory kit. l Connection port for the electronics section Six connection ports are provided in the electronics section. Use convenient ones. Remove the attached plug of the connector and perform wiring. n TIIS For TIIS explosionproof wiring connections, use cable packing adapters or sealing fittings (for Ethernet cable). Connection port of the protection system Connection port of the electronics section *1 Sealing fitting (Accessory kit) *2 Connector *4 Cable packing adapter Nut Gasket Protection system (Flameproof enclosure) Cable packing adapter (Accessory kit) *3 Nipple Detail of A A Electronic section (Pressurized enclosure) *1: Any of the six connection ports of the electronics section can be equally used. *2: To mount the sealing fitting, remove the cable packing adapter from one of the six connection ports of the electronics section. *3: To use the protection system, remove the plug from its connection port and mount the cable packing adapter. *4: A connector (3/4NPT) can be mounted on any of the connection ports. Figure 2.16 Wiring in TIIS specification l Connecting cables to the protection system Remove the attached plug and mount the cable packing adapter (G3/4) in the accessory kit on the connection port. Use the connector in the accessory kit for the cable packing adapter (3/4NPT). IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  2-21 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> CAUTION The minimum packing (for ø8.0 to ø9.0) is attached to the cable packing adapters at shipment. Change it to an appropriate packing for the cable O.D. (See Table 2.6.) Hex key wrench Hex.socket set screw Hex.socket set screw Flameproof packing adapter Lock nut Cable Protection system (Flameproof enclosure) Cover Connection threads Coupling Gland O-ring Guide ring Double-deck packing (Replace it with an appropriate one from the accessory kit.) Lock nut Identification mark Body Figure 2.17 Procedure for mounting a cable packing adapter for a protection system The cable packing adapters comply with the Technical Standard of the Ministry of Health, Labour and Welfare, Japan. Table 2.6 Connection port screw Size of double-deck packing for the protection system Applicable cable O.D. Identification mark Recommended torque for the gland (N·m) ø8.0 to ø9.0 SFFP209 ø8.0 to ø9.0 17 ø9.0 to ø10.0 SFFP2010 ø9.0 to ø10.0 25 ø10.0 to ø11.0 SFFP2011 ø10.0 to ø11.0 20 ø11.0 to ø12.0 SFFP2012 ø11.0 to ø12.0 20 G3/4 ø12.0 to ø13.0 SFFP2013 ø12.0 to ø13.0 20 ø13.0 to ø14.0 SFFP2014 ø13.0 to ø14.0 25 ø14.0 to ø15.0 SFFP2015 ø14.0 to ø15.0 20 ø15.0 to ø16.0 SFFP2016 ø15.0 to ø16.0 20 *: When a cable O.D. falls under two categories, try both and choose the more suitable one. l Connecting cables to the electronics section Six connection ports are provided in the electronics section. Use convenient ones. The cable packing adapters (G3/4) and plates for sealing are mounted as standard. Remove the plate before using the port for wiring, and keep it for future use. (Do not remove the plate for the unused connection port.) CAUTION The minimum packing (for ø9.0 to ø10.0) is attached to the cable packing adapters at shipment. Change it to an appropriate packing for the cable O.D. (See Table 2.7.) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 2  2-22 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> Hex.socket set screw Hex key wrench Cable packing adapter Hex.socket set screw Gasket Case of electronics section (Pressurized enclosure) Cable Nut Connection threads Cover Coupling Plate This plate is included with shipment. Please keep the removed the plate. Gland Guide ring Double-deck packing (Replace it with an appropriate one from the accessory kit.) To the connection port of the electronics section Figure 2.18 Identification mark Body Procedure for mounting a cable packing adapter for the electronics section The cable packing adapters comply with the Technical Standard of the Ministry of Health, Labour and Welfare, Japan. Table 2.7 Connection port screw Double-deck packing size for electronics section Applicable cable O.D. Identification mark Recommended torque for the gland (N·m) ø9.0 to ø10.0 SCFP2010 ø9.0 to ø10.0 25 ø10.0 to ø11.0 SCFP2011 ø10.0 to ø11.0 20 ø11.0 to ø12.0 SCFP2012 ø11.0 to ø12.0 20 G3/4 ø12.0 to ø13.0 SCFP2013 ø12.0 to ø13.0 20 ø13.0 to ø14.0 SCFP2014 ø13.0 to ø14.0 25 ø14.0 to ø15.0 SCFP2015 ø14.0 to ø15.0 20 ø15.0 to ø16.0 SCFP2016 ø15.0 to ø16.0 20 *: When a cable O.D. falls under two categories, try both and choose the more suitable one. For Ethernet cable, use sealing fittings in the accessories kit for the connection port (see Figure 2.19). Remove the attached cable packing adapter and mount the sealing fitting back in place. Six connection ports are provided in the electronics section. Use convenient ones. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  2-23 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> Insulated wires * Unit: mm O-ring Close-up plug Hex. key wrench * (width across flats: 10 mm) Sealing compound * 17 or more Sealing dam * Body O-ring Nut 24±1 Gasket Close-up plug (1) Case of electronics section (Pressurized enclosure) Body Nipple (connection threads) Thread type and size: G3/4 Nut Nipple *：Provided by user To the connection port of the electronics section Figure 2.19 Mounting procedure for sealing fitting (accessory) CAUTION The cable end should be sealed in order to apply pressure to the electronics section. Otherwise, power does not be supplied to the electronics section. For the 3/4NPT connection port, use the connectors in the accessory kit to all of the connections. TIP Refer to “USERS’ GUIDELINES for Electrical Installations for Explosive Gas Atmospheres in General Industry” for more details. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 2  2.3.4 2-24 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> Connecting Power Cable and Grounding CAUTION • Wire the power supply cable keeping the distance of 1 cm or more from other signal wires. • The power supply cable shall comply with UL or CSA. • Do wiring after securing protective grounding. Use crimp-on terminals for all power cables and grounding (see Figure 2.20). Use crimp-on terminals suitable for the cable core (see Table 2.8). Insulation covering inside diameter d Hole diameter a Lug outside diameter b Figure 2.20 Table 2.8 Lug length c Crimp-on terminal Size of crimp-on terminal Hole Outside Nominal cross Screw diameter a diameter b sectional area (mm) (mm) (mm) *: Length c (mm) Insulation covering inside diameter d (mm) 5.5 mm2 4 4 to 5 9.8 or less 25 to 29 5.8 or less 2.0 mm2 4 4.3 or more 8.7 or less approx. 21 5.8 or less 1.25 mm2 4 4.3 or more 8.7 or less approx. 21 5.8 or less AMP: Japan AMP Co., Ltd. JST: JST Co., Ltd. Applicable terminal* AMP 170785-1 JST 5.5-4 AMP 170782-1 JST V2-4 AMP 170782-1 JST V1.25-4 l Power supply line to the protection system (A) (B) The power supply to protection system A is used for both heater power and electric circuit power. The power supply or protection system B is used only for heater power. Connect the attached ferrite core for ATEX, IECEx, or NEPSI. Grounding must be wired. Please do not forget to put protection-film cover, after wiring is finished. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  2-25 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> Power supply for heater Power supply for electric circuit and heater Contact output for system alarm 1 Contact output for annunciator 2 Top view of the protection system without the cover Protection-film cover for wiring L N L ! N L N ! ELECTRIC HEATER CIRCUIT HEATER ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM ALARM NO COM NC 3 2 1 6 5 4 NO COM NC . Power supply for heater Front view Power supply for electric circuit and heater Ferrite core (provided for Contact for annunciator ATEX, IECEx, or TIIS (/KC)) NO COM NC 3 2 1 6 5 4 Position when the cable O.D. exceeds 13 mm NO COM NC Contact for system alarm 1 L N * HEATER L N L N ELECTRIC HEATER CIRCUIT * *: Grounding is possible from any one of the three terminals. Figure 2.21 CAUTION Use heat-resistant cables with maximum allowable temperature of 80°C or above. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  2-26 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> l Power supply line of the electronics section (A) (B) without the protection system Power supply for electric circuit and heater Type 1, Type 2 (200 V) ! L L N N ELECTRIC HEATER CIRCUIT L N L ELECTRIC HEATER CIRCUIT Type 2 (100 V), Type 3, Type 4 Power supply for electric circuit and heater L ! N L N ELECTRIC HEATER CIRCUIT * N L Power supply for heater N HEATER L *: Grounding is possible from any one of the three terminals. N L * N ELECTRIC HEATER CIRCUIT L N HEATER Figure 2.22 CAUTION Use heat-resistant cables with maximum allowable temperature of 80°C or above. l Grounding (K) CAUTION Use independent grounding with a grounding resistance of 100 ohms or less. Connect the earth terminal to the upper right of the control unit as shown in Figure 2.23. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  2-27 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> 2 Screw for Ground Figure 2.23 2.3.5 Earth terminal for the GC8000 Connecting Signal Cables CAUTION (C) to (L) cables: Use heat-resistant cables with maximum allowable temperature of 80°C or higher. ! (M) and (N) cables: Required maximum allowable temperature of the cables depends on the temperature class of the instrument and the actual ambient temperature. Use cables with maximum allowable temperature shown in the table below. Temperature Class Ambient temp. Maximum allowable temperature of cable Up to 30°C Up to 35°C Up to 40°C 60°C 31 to 36°C 36 to 40°C 41 to 45°C 65°C 37 to 43°C 41 to 45°C 46 to 50°C 70°C 44 to 50°C 46 to 50°C 75°C T1, T2 T3 T4 CAUTION Be sure to keep the power and signal cables apart. Avoid placing them in parallel. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  2-28 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> NOTE • For analog input, use twisted pair cables with a common shield (a twist pitch of 50 mm or less), to avoid induction noise. Use twisted pair cables for digital signals as well. • Stranded cables are superior to single-conductor cables in the following respects: • Stranded cables are more flexible and easy to lay in a curved pit or cramped space. • Stranded cables provide better contact with crimp-on terminal, with less aging over time. • Secure the cables so they do not weight on the terminals. • Fasten the terminal screws securely. n Signal Cable Termination CAUTION • Use crimp-on terminal with insulated covering. • Wire crimp-on terminal with the dedicated tool. • The tool must be suitable for the size of wires. Use crimp-on terminal for all signal cables. The specifications of the crimp-on terminal are determined by the nominal cross sectional area of the power cable. For the protection system, use MKKDSN series terminals from Phoenix Contact Ltd., and FKC series terminals from the same company for the contact output line (D) (G), analog input line (E), contact input line (F), serial communication line (H), analog output line (J), and explosionproof status line (L) of the electronics section. For the Ethernet line (L) (M), use twisted pair cables of CAT.5 or CAT.5E or multi-mode optical fiber of 50/125 μm or 62.5/125 μm. For these wiring connections, use AI series crimp-on terminal from Phoenix Contact Ltd. There are four types of crimp-on terminal for respective wire diameters (see Table 2.5). Peel off the cover of wire by 6 mm for MKKDSN series terminals and 10 mm for FKC series terminals (maker-recommended values). CAUTION • Parts such as the signal line, relay terminal, relay, and power supply to be connected to the contact input/output shall comply with IEC 61010 or CSA 61010. • Connect wiring after securing protective grounding. l External I/O cutoff output (power cutoff signal) (L) Wiring for the cutoff signal must be performed in case the explosionproof requirements are not satisfied. The shield is grounded at the earth bar (see Figure 2.24). Remove the cover on the upper right of the electronics section and perform wiring. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  2-29 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> n Contact output for system alarm 1 (C) and contact output for annunciator (D) The wiring locations differ depending on whether the protection system is provided or not. 2 l Wiring to protection system A Perform wiring to the terminals shown in Figure 2.21. The MKKDSN series terminals from Phoenix Contact Ltd. are used. For these wiring connections, use AI series crimp-on terminals from the same company. Check if the crimp-on terminals meet wire diameters in Table 2.5. l Wiring to the electronics section (without the protection system) Perform wiring to the electronics section of the control unit (see Figure 2.24). FKC series terminals from Phoenix Contact Ltd. are used. For these wiring connections, use AI series crimp-on terminals from the same company. Check if the crimp-on terminals meet wire diameters in Table 2.5. Earth bar ! CPU card 1 2 3 4 5 6 NC COM NO NC COM NO Contact for system alarm 1 (C) Contact for annunciator (D) Figure 2.24 n Ethernet (twisted pair) (M) (L) CAUTION (M) cable: Required maximum allowable temperature of the cables depends on the temperature class of the instrument and the actual ambient temperature. Use cables with maximum allowable temperature shown in the table below. Temperature Class Ambient temp. Maximum allowable temperature of cable Up to 30°C Up to 35°C Up to 40°C 60°C 31 to 36°C 36 to 40°C 41 to 45°C 65°C 37 to 43°C 41 to 45°C 46 to 50°C 70°C 44 to 50°C 46 to 50°C 75°C T1, T2 T3 T4 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  2-30 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> Connect the twisted pair cable of the RJ-45 connector to the CPU card. The CPU card is labeled “CTRL.CPU”. 1 2 3 4 1 + + - 2 *1 24V DC *1 *2 V+ V- (L) 24V DC *1 3 GC A USER A V+ VGC B USER B 4 (L) (M) For dual (M) *1 *2 *1 Signal interrupter K9806AA (rack-mountyed type) K9806AB (desk-top type) Connected to the operation panel *1: This is not used for FM-Y, CSA-Y. *2: The ground wire is connected to the earth bar. Figure 2.25 Ethernet (twisted pair cable) The external I/O cutoff output (power cutoff signal) (L) is also wired. The shield is grounded at the earth bar shown in Figure 2.24. Remove the cover on the upper right of the electronics section and perform wiring. n Ethernet (optical fiber) (N) CAUTION (N) cable: Required maximum allowable temperature of the cables depends on the temperature class of the instrument and the actual ambient temperature. Use cables with maximum allowable temperature shown in the table below. Temperature Class Ambient temp. Maximum allowable temperature of cable Up to 30°C Up to 35°C Up to 40°C 60°C 31 to 36°C 36 to 40°C 41 to 45°C 65°C 37 to 43°C 41 to 45°C 46 to 50°C 70°C 44 to 50°C 46 to 50°C 75°C T1, T2 T3 T4 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  2-31 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> Connect an optical fiber to the media converter shown in Figure 2.26. 2 Media converter CPU board Ethernet Tx Rx Tx Rx For dual (N) (N) Figure 2.26 Media converter for SC fiber-optics /RJ-45 twisted pair (if needed) example: MOXA made P/N: IMC-101-M-SC Tx Rx Tx Rx Ethernet (optical fiber) n Wiring to slots 1 to 5 Perform wiring to slots 1 to 5 for each card. CAUTION After the card is removed, return it to its original position. There is a label on the card. Earth bar Slot 5 Slot 4 Slot 3 Slot 2 Slot 1 Figure 2.27 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  2-32 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> FKC series terminals from Phoenix Contact Ltd. are used. For these wiring connections, use AI series crimp-on terminals from the same company. Check if the crimp-on terminals meet wire diameters in Table 2.5. l Serial communication (1ch) (Code: C) and serial communication (2ch) (Code: D) (H) (L) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 For 2ch 1 V1 + 2 V1 3 TxD1 + 4 TxD1 5 RxD1 + 6 RxD1 7 V2 + 8 V2 9 TxD2 + 10 TxD2 11 RxD2 + 12 RxD2 - *1 24V DC 1 V+ 2 V- (L) (H) RS-422 11 Rx1 + 12 Rx1 13 Tx1 + 14 Tx1 - Tx1 + 21 Tx1 - 22 Rx1 + 23 Rx1 - 24 15 Rx2 + 16 Rx2 17 Tx2 + 18 Tx2 - Tx2 + 25 Tx2 - 26 Rx2 + 27 Rx2 - 28 RS-422 24V DC (H) RS-422 *1 *2 *1 Signal interrupter RS-422 K9806AE *3 *1: This is not used for FM-Y, CSA-Y. *2: The ground wire is connected to the earth bar. *3: The ground wire is connected to the earth terminal on site. Figure2.28 Wiring for serial communication cards IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  2-33 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> *1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 For 2ch 1 V1 + 2 V1 3 TxD1 + 4 TxD1 5 RxD1 + 6 RxD1 7 V2 + 8 V2 9 TxD2 + 10 TxD2 11 RxD2 + 12 RxD2 - 24V DC 5 V+ 6 V- (L) 1 RxD + 2 RxD 3 TxD + 4 TxD - (H) RS-422 24V DC D-sub9 pin male RS-232C D-sub9 pin male RS-232C 2 *4 5 V+ 6 V- (L) 1 RxD + 2 RxD 3 TxD + 4 TxD - (H) RS-422 *2 *1 *4 Communication converter *3 　K9806AS (rack-mounted type) 　K9806AT desk-top type) *2 *1: The ground wire is connected to the earth bar. *2: The ground wire is connected to the earth terminal on site. *3: Two communication converters are required for 2ch. *4: (a) shows cable connection of RS-232C communication. Please refer to the following for flow control setting. RS control: None, DR check: YES (Recommended), CD check: None If the instrument to be connected accepts NULL modem-type connection, wiring (b) is also applicable. Example: Regular personal computers, “FA-M3” (Yokogawa PLC). Communication converter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Instrument to be connected CD CD RD SD RD SD ER ER SG SG DR DR RS RS CS CS Communication converter 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 Instrument to be connected CD CD RD SD RD SD ER ER SG SG DR DR RS RS CS CS Figure2.29 Cable connector D-sub 9 pins (a) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Conector Shell Conector Shell Cable connector D-sub 9 holes socket (F) Fixing screw: inch 1 Cable connector D-sub 9 holes socket (F) Fixing screw: inch Cable connector D-sub 9 pins (b) Wiring for serial communication cards The serial communication card is labeled “COM”. The external I/O cutoff output (power cutoff signal) (L) is also wired. The shield is grounded at the earth bar in Figure 2.24. Remove the cover on the upper right of the electronics section and perform wiring. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  2-34 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> l Analog output (system isolation) (Code: 1) and analog output (channel isolation) (Code: 2) (J) 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 + + + + - 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 + + + + - (J) AO1 (J) AO2 (J) AO3 (J) AO4 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 (J) AO5 (J) AO6 (J) AO7 (J) AO8 *1 *1: The ground wire is connected to the earth bar. Figure 2.30 Wiring for an analog output card The analog output card is labeled “AO”. l Analog input (voltage) (Code: 3) and analog input (current) (Code: 4) (E) (L) 1 V1 + 2 V1 - *1 *2 *1 24V DC *1 Signal interrupter K9806AE (L) V+ V- 1 2 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 + + + + - AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 (E) 11 1+ 12 1- 1+ 21 1- 22 (E) 13 2+ 14 2- 2+ 23 2- 24 (E) 15 3+ 16 3- 3+ 25 3- 26 (E) 17 4+ 18 4- 4+ 27 4- 28 *1: This is not used for FM-Y, CSA-Y. *2: The ground wire is connected to the earth bar. *3: The ground wire is connected to the earth terminal on site. Figure 2.31 *3 Wiring for an analog input card The analog input card is labeled “AI”. The external I/O cutoff output (power cutoff signal) (L) is also wired. The shield is grounded at the earth bar in Figure 2.24. Remove the cover on the upper right of the electronics section and perform wiring. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  2-35 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> l Contact output (AC) (Code: 8) (G) (L) 1 V1 + 2 V1 - *1 24V DC *1 (L) Signal interrupter K9806AN V+ V- 2 1 2 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Figure 2.32 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 NO COM DO1 (G) NO COM DO2 (G) NO COM DO3 (G) NO COM DO4 (G) NO COM DO5 (G) DO1 11 NO 12 COM NO 31 DO1 COM 32 DO2 13 NO 14 COM NO 33 DO2 COM 34 DO3 15 NO 16 COM NO 35 DO3 COM 36 DO4 17 NO 18 COM NO 37 DO4 COM 38 DO5 21 NO 22 COM NO 41 DO5 COM 42 *1 *3 *4 *2 *1: This is not used for FM-Y, CSA-Y. *2: The ground wire is connected to the earth bar. *3: The ground wire is connected to the earth terminal on site. *4: The protection ground is connected to Class D ground (less than 100 Ω of grounding resistance), which is nearset to siganal interrupter. Wiring for a contact output card The contact output card is labeled “DO”. The external I/O cutoff output (power cutoff signal) (L) is also wired. The shield is grounded at the earth bar in Figure 2.24. Remove the cover on the upper right of the electronics section and perform wiring. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> 2-36 l Contact output (DC) (Code: 7) (G) (L) 1 V1 + 2 V1 - *1 24V DC *1 (L) Signal interrupter K9806AJ V+ V- 1 2 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Figure 2.33 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 NC COM NO NC COM NO NC COM NO NC COM NO NC COM NO DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 (G) (G) (G) (G) (G) 11 NC DO1 12 COM 13 NO 14 NC DO2 15 COM 16 NO 21 NC DO3 22 COM 23 NO 24 NC DO4 25 COM 26 NO 17 NC DO5 27 COM 18 NO NC 31 COM 32 NO 33 NC 34 COM 35 NO 36 NC 41 COM 42 NO 43 NC 44 COM 45 NO 46 NC 37 COM 47 NO 38 DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 *1 *2 *1: This is not used for FM-Y, CSA-Y. *2: The ground wire is connected to the earth bar. *3: The ground wire is connected to the earth terminal on site. *3 Wiring for a contact output card The contact output card is labeled “DO”. The external I/O cutoff output (power cutoff signal) (L) is also wired. The shield is grounded at the earth bar in Figure 2.24. Remove the cover on the upper right of the electronics section and perform wiring. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> 2-37 l Contact input (Code: A) (F) 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 + + + + - 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 + + + + - (F) DI1 (F) DI2 2 (F) DI3 (F) DI4 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 (F) DI5 (F) DI6 (F) DI7 (F) DI8 *1 *1: The ground wire is connected to the earth bar. Figure 2.34 Wiring for a contact input card The contact input card is labeled “DI”. l Contact input/output (AC) (Code: 6) (F) (G) (L) 1 V1 + 2 V1 - 1 2 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 *1 24V DC NO COM DO1 NO COM DO2 NO COM DO3 *1 (L) (G) (G) (G) *1 *2 21 22 Signal interrupter K9806AN V+ V- DO1 11 NO 12 COM NO 31 DO1 COM 32 DO2 13 NO 14 COM NO 33 DO2 COM 34 DO3 15 NO 16 COM NO 35 DO3 COM 36 *4 *3 23 24 25 26 21 22 23 24 25 26 + + + - DI1 DI2 DI3 *2 Figure 2.35 (F) (F) (F) *1: This is not used for FM-Y, CSA-Y. *2: The ground wire is connected to the earth bar. *3: The ground wire is connected to the earth terminal on site. *4: The protection ground is connected to Class D ground (less than 100 Ω of grounding resistance), which is nearset to siganal interrupter. Wiring for a contact input/output card IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  2-38 <2. Installation, Piping, and Wiring> The contact input/output card is labeled “DIO”. The external I/O cutoff output (power cutoff signal) (L) is also wired. The shield is grounded at the earth bar in Figure 2.24. Remove the cover on the upper right of the electronics section and perform wiring. l Contact input/output (DC) (Code: 5) (F) (G) (L) 1 V1 + 2 V1 - 1 2 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 NC COM NO NC COM NO NC COM NO *1 24V DC *1 V+ V- (L) 11 NC DO1 12 COM 13 NO 14 NC DO2 15 COM 16 NO 21 NC DO3 22 COM 23 NO (G) DO1 (G) DO2 (G) DO3 *1 *2 21 22 Signal interrupter K9806AJ NC 31 COM 32 DO1 NO 33 NC 34 COM 35 DO2 NO 36 NC 41 COM 42 DO3 NO 43 *3 23 24 25 26 21 22 23 24 25 26 + + + - DI1 DI2 DI3 *2 Figure 2.36 (F) (F) (F) *1: This is not used for FM-Y, CSA-Y. *2: The ground wire is connected to the earth bar. *3: The ground wire is connected to the earth terminal on site. Wiring for a contact input/output card The contact input/output card is labeled “DIO”. The external I/O cutoff output (power cutoff signal) (L) is also wired. The shield is grounded at the earth bar in Figure 2.24. Remove the cover on the upper right of the electronics section and perform wiring. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  3-1 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> 3. Basic Operation and Startup 3.1 Checking the pressure in the pressurized enclosure 3.1.1 How to check the Status Indication of the Protection System The LED (Green) of "POWER" is turned ON and the LED (Red) of "ALARM" is turned OFF when the pressure of the electronics section is in the normal condition. See Figure.3.1. The pressurized enclosure is divided into "Electronics section", “Isothermal oven”, and “programmed-temperature oven”. How to check the pressure in each enclosure is as follows. WARNING When the cover of the protection system is uninstalled, use a gas detector to check that the concentration of explosive gases in the ambient atmosphere is less than the allowable limit. The status of the protection system can be checked with the LEDs as shown in Figure 3.1. The meaning of each LED is written on the status display. POWER: ON when power is supplied to the protection system PRESSURE: ON when the specified internal pressure is applied to the electronics section. This LED is ON in the normal condition. If the internal pressure becomes low, it turns off. PURGING: ON when purging the electronics section. After purging, it turns off. When power is supplied and “PRESSURE” LED is on, this LED turns ON and purging begins. After the electronics section is purged for 21 ± 3 min, the LED turns off and power is supplied to the electronics section. The LED is OFF in the normal condition after purging. If purging ends incompletely, the status of purging is reset and purging begins again. OVERRIDE: ON when the override function is activated. , If the internal pressure in the isothermal oven becomes low, the following alarms appear on the operation panel. Top isothermal oven: Alarm for low internal pressure No. 112 “OVEN1 PRESS DOWN” Middle isothermal oven or programmed-temperature oven: Alarm for low internal pressure No. 113 “OVEN2 PRESS DOWN” Bottom isothermal oven: Alarm for low internal pressure No. 114 “OVEN3 PRESS DOWN” Alarms are displayed on the “ASET” PC software for the specification without the operation panel on GC8000. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 3  3-2 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> Protection system (Explosionproof / Flameproof enclosure) Cover Override switch Light sensor OVERRIDE SWITCH LABEL POWER PRESSURE PURGING OVERRIDE Status Display OVERRIDE LED (Yellow) PURGING LED (Red) PRESSURE LED (Green) Door of electronic section POWER LED (Yellow) Operating Display Electronics section (Pressurized enclosure) Cover of electronic section TIIS, FM-X, CSA-X, ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI Door of isothermal oven LED (Green) of "POWER" LED (Red) of "ALARM" LED (Green) of analysis "RUN" POWER ALARM RUN Electronic section (Pressurized enclosure) FM-Y, CSA-Y Figure 3.1 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  3.1.2 3-3 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> GC-HMI (Touch Panel) n Screen Layout The display screen consists of three display areas: (A) Caption banner: (B) Navigation bar: Shows various items of information on the GC-HMI. Displays controls to change to different screens on the contents area, and content types. Displays operations and status of the GC8000. (C) Contents area: (A) Caption banner (C) Contents area (B) Navigation bar Figure 3.2 F0401.ai Screen Layout (A) Caption banner This banner shows various items of information on the GC-HMI. It is displayed on almost all screens. (6) (1) Figure 3.3 (2) (3) (4) (5) (7) (8) (9) F0402.ai Items Displayed on the Caption Banner IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 3  3-4 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> Table 3.1 Items Displayed on the Caption Banner Symbol Item (1) Date/time (2) (3) Description Displays the current date and time (year, month, day, hour, minute) of the GC8000. This item is hidden when the EtherLCD is connected. Type of Indicates the type of the currently connected GC8000. connected Currently connected to the GC8000 equipped with the GC-HMI being operated on. analyzer (Note: This icon is also displayed when no analyzer is connected.) Currently connected to any other GC8000. Overall alarm Indicates an overall alarm. No alarm Level-1 alarm (blinking) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) Level-2 alarm (blinking) Tag name of Indicates the tag name of the currently connected GC8000. The name may be up to 16 GC8000 ASCII characters long. The tag name and analyzer number of the CG8000 are indicated while the GC8000 is connected. This item is hidden when no connection is made. Active GCM Indicates the active GCM number (GCM1 to GCM6). number This item is hidden when no connection is made. Analyzer Indicates the current operating status of the analyzer. This item is hidden when no status connection is made. Manual Process Operating Indicates the current operating mode. This item is hidden when no connection is made. mode Run Pause Stop DB changed Indicates that the initial database of the GC-HMI is different from the one set on the GC8000. (The indication blinks.) This item disappears when initial DB reload described in section 4.1.3 is executed. User level Indicates the user level (A, B, C, or C+). This item is hidden when the EtherLCD is connected. (B) Navigation bar The navigation bar allows for navigation between different screens. (2) Figure 3.4 (4) (6) (5) (7) (3) (1) (8) F0403.ai Navigation Bar IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  Table 3.2 Navigation Bar Symbol Description (1) Navigates to the setting screen. (2) Navigates to the analyzer overview screen. This item is only displayed when the GC8000 is connected. (3) Navigates to the analyzer map screen. This item is only displayed when the GC8000 is connected. (4) Navigates to the analyzer operation screen. This item is only displayed when the GC8000 is connected. (5) Navigates to the chromatogram screen. This item is only displayed when the GC8000 is connected. (6) Navigates to the analysis result screen. This item is only displayed when the GC8000 is connected. (7) Navigates to the alarm screen. This item is only displayed when the GC8000 is connected. (8) Navigates to the help screen. Provides a description of the icons displayed on the currently selected screen: one of (1) to (7). 3.1.3 3-5 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> Reference 4.1 Setting Screen 4.2 Analyzer Overview Screen 4.3 Analyzer Map Screen 4.4 Analyzer Operation Screen 4.5 Chromatogram Screen 4.6 Analysis Result Screen 4.7 Alarm Screen 4.8 Help Screen How to Check the Temperature at Each Part (1) When the icon (4) on the navigation bar is pressed (see Figure 3.4), the analyzer operation screen is displayed. (2) The SYS tab with the oven to be checked is selected. Tab Oven information display area F0305.ai Figure 3.5 SYS Tab Layout IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 3  3-6 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> (3) The temperature information can be checked. Refer to figure 3.6. Detector information Pressure information Temperature information (only with EPC) Temperature controller Pressure display information information F0306.ai Figure 3.6 Example of Oven Information Display Area (4) When is pressed, the set temperature, present temperature, and heater ON/OFF status of the isothermal oven (or programmed-temperature oven), LSV, and FPD, are indicated. Figure 3.7 3.1.4 How to Check the Operating Status of the Detector (1) The SYS tab with the detector to be checked is selected. (2) The detector information can be checked. Refer to figure 3.6. (3) When Input signal: is pressed, the following information are indicated The analog signal from the detector, which has been sampled every 40 msec, converted to digital values, and then averaged by the given sample rate IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  3-7 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> Filtered signal: Input signal, which has been filtered using the filter constant set as a detector signal parameter Standard deviation of signal: Standard deviation of input signal for the past 20 inputs Applied voltage: Bridge voltage of TCD (for TCD only) Current: Bridge current of TCD (for TCD only) Flame detection level: Set value of flame detection level (FID, FID-MC, FPD) Thermocouple signal: Thermocouple signal (FID, FID-MC, FPD) Flame detection status: Flame detection status (now burning/burning stopped) (FID, FIDMC, FPD) Methanizer voltage: Voltage of methanizer (for FID-MC only) Figure 3.8 3.1.5 How to Measure/Set the Pressure and Flow Rate of Various Gases The GC8000 uses gases such as a carrier gas, combustion gas for FID/FPD, and combustion air for FID/FPD. Normal analysis cannot be expected unless the specified value is set for each gas. While measuring the flow rate in a way described below, set the values according to the “Operation Data.” The pressure of each gas can be checked by pressure gauges on the Flow Control unit. The flow rate of each gas can be checked by the flow meter and adjusted by the pressure regulator or restrictor. With EPC (Electric Pressure Controller) (1) The SYS tab with the EPC to be checked is selected. (2) The pressure information can be checked. Refer to figure 3.6. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 3  <3. Basic Operation and Startup> 3-8 (3) When is pressed, the set pressure, present pressure, and EPC ON/OFF status of the Carrier n-n-1 to n-4 and Utility n-1 to n-4 are indicated. Figure 3.9 NOTE Measure the pressure and flow rate of each gas after the temperatures of the isothermal oven (or programmed-temperature oven) have fully stabilized. If the temperature is low, the pressure is likely to be higher. The time required for the temperature to stabilize depends on the set temperature: the isothermal oven (or programmed-temperature oven) with the temperature of below 146°C requires 2 to 4 hours, and the one with the temperature of at or above 146°C requires 4 to 8 hours. For the FID or FPD detector, the “Therm signal” on the Detector Status screen becomes 0 mV after the temperature of the isothermal oven (or programmed-temperature oven) has stabilized (see Figure 3.8). See Section 3.1.4, “How to Check the Operating Status of the Detector”. For the FID and FPD, a carrier gas, combustion gas, and combustion air are discharged together from the DET vent. Therefore, before measurement close the primary valves of cylinders of gases that are not to be measured. For the FID and FPD, supplying the gas may simply result in natural ignition. In the Flame on status, condensation forms on the vent line and the “Therm signal” on the Detector Status screen indicates 2 to 6 mV. Measure the gas flow rate under the condition that the “Therm signal” is 0 mV. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  3.1.6 3-9 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> How to Check the Analysis Result When the icon (6) on the navigation bar is pressed (see Figure 3.4), the analysis result screen is displayed. 3 Press this icon. F0472.ai Figure 3.10 Example of Analysis Result Screen The display screen consists of the following screens: Analysis result screen Concentration analysis history screen Retention time history screen Calibration factor history screen The above screens are displayed by pressing the corresponding buttons located in the lower left of the screen: Concentration analysis history Analysis result Figure 3.11 Calibration factor history Retention time history F0473.ai Buttons for Analysis Result Screens IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <3. Basic Operation and Startup> 3-10 n Analysis Result Screen Screen components are as shown below. Data display The analysis result screen Analysis result is currently displayed. data selector Figure 3.12 Auto update ON/OFF SYS change tab Table scroll button Display-item selector F0474.ai Analysis Result Screen Layout SYS change tab: Selects the SYS assigned to the active GCM and displays the analysis results on the SYS tab. Table scroll button: Scrolls through the display area. Auto update ON/OFF: When the auto update function is ON, the on-screen data is automatically updated with the latest data when the measurement finishes. When the auto update function is OFF, data update does not occur. Analysis result data selector: Allows for displaying past data. A dialog appears for selecting the start time of the analysis to be displayed. See (A) Selecting analysis result data. Display-item selector: A dialog appears, allowing to select which items to display in the data columns. See (B) Selecting display items. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <3. Basic Operation and Startup> 3-11 (A) Selecting analysis result data To select the data to be displayed, select the year/month/day, hour, and time from the dialog below. 3 Figure 3.13 (B) Selecting display items In the dialog below, select the items to be displayed as analysis result data, by adding a check mark. Figure 3.14 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  3-12 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> n Concentration Analysis History Screen, Retention Time History Screen, and Calibration Factor History Screen A common screen layout is used for the concentration analysis history screen, retention time history screen, and calibration factor history screen. These screens display the changes over time of concentration analysis data, retention time data, and calibration factor data, respectively, as measured by the active GCM. Each screen can contain up to 999 peaks. The maximum displayable number of analysis clock times is limited to 250 for concentration analysis history and retention time history, and to 100 for calibration factor history. Screen components are as shown below. Data display GCM/SYS change tabs Table scroll button History data selector In this condition, Auto update Graph display Graph setup concentration analysis history is displayed ON/OFF Figure 3.15 F0477.ai History Screen Layout GCM/SYS change tabs: Table scroll button: Auto update ON/OFF: Graph setup: Graph display: Either the whole of active GCM, or the SYS assigned to the active GCM, can be selected, so that the history data is displayed on the SYS tab. Scrolls through the display area. When auto update is ON, the on-screen data is automatically updated with the latest data when the measurement finishes. When auto update is OFF, data update does not occur. Sets up a graph of the data to be displayed. Displays the graph configured with the graph setup function. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  3.1.7 3-13 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> How to Check the Alarm There are three levels of alarms for the GC8000. These three levels are explained below. For details, refer to Section 7.1 "Alarm Message". l Level 1: An alarm if a system or hardware failure occurs. Once the alarm is generated, the alarm status will be held until the alarm is reset.If a level-1 alarm is generated during the Run mode, the operation mode changes to Stop after an ongoing measurement has been completed. l Level 2: An alarm if a failure in the measurement conditions occurs. Once the alarm is generated, the alarm status will be held until the alarm is reset. The analysis is ongoing. l Component: An alarm if a measurement result such as concentration and retention time becomes out of the specified range. Once the alarm is generated, the alarm status will be held until the alarm is reset. The analysis is ongoing. l Level 3: An alarm for signalling a minor error besides level-1 and level-2 alarms or for information. The alarm status is not be held. When the ALARM key is pressed, the Alarm Status screen (Figure 1.17) appears. Press this icon. F0481.ai Figure 3.16 Example of Alarm Screen The alarm screen consists of the following screens: Alarm status screen Alarm history screen Alarm details screen IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 3  3-14 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> n Alarm Status Screen Screen components are as shown below. GCM tab Alarm details Alarm status Table scroll button F0482.ai Figure 3.17 Pressing the alarm status button on the lower left of the screen causes a transition to the alarm status screen. This screen displays the alarms which are current with the GC8000, either for all GCMs or for each GCM. Pressing the table scroll button causes scrolling through the table display area. Pressing the alarm details button displays the alarm details screen. See 4.7.3 Alarm Details. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  3-15 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> n Alarm History Screen Screen components are as shown below. GCM tab Alarm details 3 Alarm history Table scroll button Clear alarm history F0483.ai Figure 3.18 Pressing the alarm history button on the lower left of the screen causes a transition to the alarm history screen. This screen displays a history of alarms which occurred with the GC8000 until the alarm display is requested, either for all GCMs or for each GCM. Pressing the table scroll button causes scrolling through table display area. Pressing the clear alarm history button erases the alarm history. This operation is available if the user level is set to B or higher. Pressing the alarm details button displays the alarm details screen. See Alarm Details. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  3-16 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> n Alarm Details The alarm details screen displays details of alarms. Figure 3.19 3.1.8 How to Check the Chromatogram When the icon (5) on the navigation bar is pressed (see Figure 3.4), the Chromatogram screen is displayed. Press this icon. F0457.ai Figure 3.20 Example of Chromatogram Screen IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  3-17 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> n Screen description Screen components are as shown below. Legend display Zoomed view Whole chromatogram 3 Pen selector Snapshot Clear snapshot Detail settings F0458.ai Figure 3.21 Chromatogram Screen Layout Legend display: Indicates pen color, chromatogram type, and detector number. Whole chromatogram display area: Displays the whole chromatogram, including portions which are not shown in the zoomed view. Pen selector: Configures the graph to be displayed. See 4.5.1 Pen Selector. Snapshot: Records the magnification and position of zoomed view. See 4.5.2 Snapshot. Detail settings: Provides detail settings of the chromatogram screen. See 4.5.3 Detail Settings. Zoomed view area: Displays a zoomed view of a selected part of the chromatogram. The chromatogram includes gate mark, peak mark, peak number, as well as the temperature and pressure data for the chromatogram. See 4.5.4 Zoomed View. 3.2 Startup 3.2.1 Preparation and check before the power is supplied Prepare and confirm the following items before the power is supplied. For the status of installation, wiring, piping, and the setting of operation conditions, see Chapter 2 Installation, Piping, and Wiring, the Delivery specifications, and the Operation data. (1) Checking the status of installation Confirm that the main body and the external sampling unit satisfy the requirements of Chapter 2 Installation, Piping, and Wiring. Confirm that there is no damage during transportation. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  3-18 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> (2) Preparation and check of accessory equipment Check accessory equipment required for operation, such as gas cylinders (carrier gas, combustion hydrogen or makeup gas, and standard gas), air, and steam. When the fill pressure of carrier gas, combustion hydrogen or makeup gas is 1 MPa or less, or that of standard gas is 5% or less of the maximum value, prepare a new cylinder. Confirm that utilities such as gases and protective gas (instrumental air) satisfy the requirements in the Delivery specifications. (3) Checking external piping • Connect a pipe after having let air flow through it (air purge) to confirm that there is no stain in it. • Confirm that the material and bore diameter of a pipe are equal to those described in the Installation manual. • Confirm that all piping is equal to that described in the Operation data. • Use leak detecting liquid (such as Snoop manufactured by Swagelok) to confirm that there is no leak from joints after piping. • Before heating a sample with steam, confirm that steam piping and thermal insulation have been attached properly to the sample piping. IMPORTANT Do not use a pipe or joint possibly stained with oil. Since stain such as metal powder may adhere in a pipe just after constructed, purge it thoroughly with air, etc. before connecting it to GC8000. The main body may be filled with gas to protect columns. When leaving the startup work up to service persons, do not remove the sealing plug from the main body. (4) Checking the status of wiring Confirm that power supply wiring, signal wiring, and earth wiring have been connected properly in reference to the terminal wiring chart in the Delivery specifications and Operation data. WARNING Always use attached cable packing fittings at the wiring work of the TIIS explosionproof specification. The use of fittings other than attached cable packing fittings does not satisfy the TIIS explosionproof specification. IMPORTANT During wiring work, take enough care to prevent a cable from touching a part (such as a relay) in the equipment to cause damage to it. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  3-19 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> CAUTION If the sealing at the inlet of a cable is not proper, the internal pressure of the pressurized enclosure does not rise and the power is not supplied to the electronics section. 3 (5) Mounting columns The equipment is shipped with a megabore column and capillary column removed to avoid damage during transportation. Mount a column delivered as an accessory. When mounting a column, do correct wiring in reference to the Operation data. Use leak detecting liquid (such as Snoop manufactured by Swagelok) to confirm that there is no leak from joints of the carrier gas line after carrier gas has been supplied. (6) Checking the inside Confirm that there is no loosening of piping, dropping-out of connectors, and loosening of screws in the main body. (7) Supplying air Start the supply of instrument air. IMPORTANT Confirm that the supply pressure is equal to the value described in the Specifications. If the supply pressure is low, the internal pressure of the pressurized enclosure does not rise and the power is not supplied to the electronics section. (8) Supplying steam Start the supply of steam if steam is used at the sample process section. Confirm that the steam pressure is equal to the value described in the Specifications. (9) Supplying gases Start the supply of gases (carrier gas, combustion hydrogen for FID or FPD, etc.) Confirm that the supply pressure is equal to the value described in the Specifications. After the indications of the pressure gauge, flow rate, and the temperature of the isothermal oven (or programmed-temperature oven) of GC8000 have become stable, confirm that they are equal to the values described in the Operation data. NOTE While the power supply is cut, the supply of hydrogen gas into the isothermal oven (or programmed-temperature oven) is stopped according to the explosionproof standard. To supply hydrogen gas, it is necessary to turn on the hydrogen limiting unit on the analyzer operation screen after the power has been supplied. Multiple hydrogen limiting units can be used depending on the specifications. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  3-20 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> IMPORTANT Since a pressure of higher than 1 MPa may damage GC8000, follow the procedure below when supplying gas from a cylinder: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) 3.2.2 Shut the regulator of the cylinder. Confirm that the secondary pressure of the regulator is zero. Open the main valve of the cylinder gradually. Set the secondary pressure of the regulator to 700 kPa. For hydrogen gas, set the secondary pressure of the regulator to 500 kPa. The explosionproof standard requires the supply pressure of hydrogen gas to be 500 kPa. Power supply Follow the procedure below when supplying the power. l FM-X, CSA-X, ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI, TIIS (1) Power is supplied to the protection system (flameproof enclosure). (2) Protective gas (instrumental air) is supplied to the protective gas (instrumental air) inlet. (3) When the internal pressure in the electronics section, which is both the control unit and oven unit, exceeds 392 (Pa), purging to the electronics section begins. (4) After 21 ±3 minutes purging, power is applied to the electronics section both of the control unit and oven unit. On the other hand, it does not be applied to the heater and detector in the oven yet. (5) When the internal pressure in the oven unit exceeds 392 (Pa), purging to the oven unit begins. (6) After the purging time as follows, power is applied to the heater and detector in the oven. The purging time depends on the flameproof certifications. FM, CSA, TIIS: 9 ±2.5 minutes ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI: 11 ±3 minutes l FM-Y, CSA-Y (1) (2) (3) (4) Protective gas (instrumental air) is supplied to the protective gas (instrumental air) inlet. The pressure value is checked if it is indicated the specified one at the pressure gauge. Power is supplied to the electronics section of the control unit. When the internal pressure in the electronics section, which is both the control unit and oven unit, exceeds 392 (Pa), purging to the electronics section begins. (5) After 21 ±3 minutes purging, power is applied to the electronics section both of the control unit and oven unit. On the other hand, it does not be applied to the heater and detector in the oven yet. (6) When the internal pressure in the oven unit exceeds 392 (Pa), purging to the oven unit begins. (7) After 9 ±2.5 minutes the purging, power is applied to the heater and detector in the oven. IMPORTANT Confirm as daily inspection that the pressure gauge of the electronics section in the pressure control section indicates the specified pressure. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  3-21 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> 3.2.3 Operation after supplying power This section describes preparatory work before measuring process or standard samples. (1) Setting day and hour Since GC8000* (in TIIS explosionproof specification) does not keep the day/hour settings, always set the day and hour after supplying power. l Setting hour The setting procedure is as follows: (1) Change the user level. (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) in the navigation bar on the analyzer operation screen. Press the Press EtherLCD in the General setting. Set the passward. Press Table and select the System setting. Enter the day and hour and press Set/Ent key. Press the key Close EtherLCD. (2) Checking the set values The set values are described in the Operation data. Confirm that all items are equal to the values described in the Operation data. l Checking the set values The procedure for confirming the set values is as follows: (1) Change the user level. (2) Press the (OPR) in the navigation bar on the analyzer operation screen. (3) Open the GCM tab. in the navigation bar on the analyzer operation screen. Press the Press EtherLCD in the General setting. Set the passward. Press Table. The set values are described along the items on the Table menu screen. Confirm that all items are set as described in the Operation data. (8) Press the key Close EtherLCD. (4) (5) (6) (7) NOTE When a set value has been changed, load the initial database again to make the set information of GC-HMI agree with that of GC8000. l Procedure to make the set information of GC-HMI agree with that of GC8000 The procedure to make the set information of GC-HMI agree with that of GC8000 is as follows: (1) Change the user level. in the navigation bar on the analyzer operation screen. (2) Press the (3) Press the Initial DB reload of GC8000 and the message “Do you execute the Initial DB reload?” appears on the screen, and then press Yes. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 3  3-22 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> (3) On/Off operation of the hydrogen limiting unit The procedure to supply hydrogen gas into the isothermal oven is as follows: l Turning on the hydrogen limiting unit (1) Change the user level. (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Press the (OPR) in the navigation bar on the analyzer operation screen. Open the GCM tab. Set the operation mode to Manual. Press GCM DET Control in the GCM tab. Press ON/OFF under HL* and the message “Turn on” appears on the screen, and then press Yes. Press ON/OFF again to turn it off. (4) Start/Stop operation of the temperature control The temperature control of isothermal oven, LSV, and FPD are off even after the power is supplied. However, the temperature control is turned on automatically after the power-on if the Automatic operation setting of the System setting has been set to Yes. The procedure to operate the temperature control is as follow: l Starting the temperature control (1) Change the user level. (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Press the (OPR) in the navigation bar on the analyzer operation screen. Open the GCM tab. Set the operation mode to Manual. Press the Temperature controller operation in the SYS tab. Press ON/OFF of the temperature controller to be started and the message “Turn on” appears on the screen, and then press Yes. Press ON/OFF again to turn it off. (5) Additional tightening of LSV Tighten LSV additionally by 1/8 turn with an LSV hook spanner wrench after the temperature of the isothermal oven has become stable. (6) Supplying combustion hydrogen or makeup gas and combustion air This applies to FID, FID with a methanizer, or FPD. Start the supply of combustion hydrogen or makeup gas and combustion air. Set the pressure according to 1.5 Methods of Measuring and Setting the Pressure and Flow Rate of Gases. Finally decide on pressure and flow rate after the temperature of the isothermal oven has become stable. NOTE While the power supply is cut, the supply of hydrogen gas into the isothermal oven (or programmed-temperature oven) is stopped according to the explosionproof standard. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  3-23 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> IMPORTANT Since a pressure of higher than 1 MPa may damage GC8000, follow the procedure below when supplying gas from a cylinder: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Shut the regulator of the cylinder. Confirm that the secondary pressure of the regulator is zero. Open the main valve of the cylinder gradually. Set the secondary pressure of the regulator to 700 kPa. For hydrogen gas, set the secondary pressure of the regulator to 500 kPa. The explosionproof standard requires the supply pressure of hydrogen gas to be 500 kPa. When using instrument air as combustion air, set the supply pressure 100 kPa higher than the set pressure of combustion air described in the Operation data. (7) Confirming flow rate of various gases Confirm that the flow rates of various gases are equal to the values described in the Operation data. 3.2.4 On/Off operation of detectors The detectors of GC8000 are off even after when the power is supplied. However, TCD and/or FID is turned on automatically after the power-on if the Automatic operation setting of the System setting (Figuere 5.52) has been set to Yes. The On/Off operation differs for each detector. The On/Off operation method and notes for each detector are as follows: Only TCD can be turned off. FID and FPD stop combustion and are turned off only when the supply of combustion hydrogen or combustion air is cut while the alarms of DET1-1 FRAME OUT, DET1-2 FRAME OUT, DET2-1 FRAME OUT, DET2-2 FRAME OUT, DET3-1 FRAME OUT, and DET3-2 FRAME OUT are raised. When using hydrogen as carrier gas, turn on the hydrogen limiting unit and then turn on the detector. The indication of input signals, filtered signals, and standard deviation of signals of the detector is updated only when the operation mode is Run or Manual run status. (1) TCD When TCD is turned on with air filled in the carrier gas line, the filament of TCD may burn out. Continue to let carrier gas flow for at least 10 minutes before turning on TCD. The output of TCD does not become stable until the temperature becomes stable (the baseline drifts). Do normal operation and calibration after at least 12 hours have elapsed after TCD was turned on. Procedure (1) Confirm that the temperature of the isothermal oven has become stable. (2) Check the temperatures on the Oven information display section in the User level SYS tab. (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Press the (OPR) in the navigation bar on the analyzer operation screen. Set the operation mode to Manual in the GCM tab. Press GCM Det Control in the GCM tab. Press ON/OFF under TCD. The message “Turn on” appears on the screen, and then press Yes. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 3  <3. Basic Operation and Startup> 3-24 (2) FID and FID with a methanizer Turn on (ignite) FID after the temperature of the isothermal oven has become substantially stable. Depending on the set temperature, it takes 2 to 4 hours for the temperature to become stable when the temperature of the isothermal oven is 145°C or less and 4 to 8 hours when the temperature of the isothermal oven is higher than 146°C. After the temperature of the isothermal oven has become stable, the Thermocouple signal on the Detector signal screen becomes 0 mV. After the power has been supplied, the temperature of the isothermal oven rises, and the Thermocouple signal changes from 0 mV → –3 to –2 mV → 0 mV until the temperature becomes stable. When FID is turned on (ignition) at the Thermocouple signal of –3 to –2 mV, the Thermocouple signal does not exceed the Flame detection signal level and remains at the Combustion stop though combustion occurs, and the alarms of DET1-1 FRAME OUT, DET1-2 FRAME OUT, DET2-1 FRAME OUT, DET2-2 FRAME OUT, DET3-1 FRAME OUT, and DET3-2 FRAME OUT are risen. FID is ignited with a platinum coil. Only the supply of carrier gas, combustion hydrogen or makeup gas, and combustion air may cause self-ignition by catalysis of the platinum coil. Selfignition can be detected by water drops attached to the vent line. When FID is turned on under self-ignition, peaks may not appear on the chromatogram and only the baseline may be output. When self-ignition occurred, turn on FID after having set the Flame detection level in the Detector signal setting to the value of the Thermocouple signal +0.5 mV. The procedure to turn on FID is as follows: (1) Confirm that the temperature of the isothermal oven has become stable. (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Press the (OPR) in the navigation bar on the analyzer operation screen. Check the temperatures on the Oven information display section in the User level SYS tab. Set the operation mode to Manual in the GCM tab. Press GCM Det Control in the GCM tab. Confirm that the Thermocouple signal of FID is 0 ± 0.1 mV. Press ON/OFF under FID. The message “Turn on” appears on the screen, and then press Yes. CAUTION When self-ignition occurred (the Thermocouple signal becomes higher than 2 to 3 mV), turn on FID after having set the Flame detection level to the value of the Thermocouple signal +0.5 mV. (9) The indication remains OFF until FID becomes Combustion. When ignition failed, the alarms of DET1-1 FRAME OUT, DET1-2 FRAME OUT, DET2-1 FRAME OUT, DET2-2 FRAME OUT, DET3-1 FRAME OUT, and DET3-2 FRAME OUT are raised. In this case, restart the procedure from the beginning. (10) When FID becomes Combustion, the indication changes from OFF → ON. (3) FPD Turn on (ignite) FPD after the temperature of the isothermal oven has become substantially stable. It takes 2 to 4 hours for the temperature to become stable (the maximum temperature of the isothermal oven is 145°C). After the temperature of the isothermal oven has become stable, the Thermocouple signal on the Detector signal screen (see Figure 3.8) becomes 0 mV. After the power is supplied, the temperature of the isothermal oven rises, and the Thermocouple signal changes from 0 mV → –3 to –2 mV → 0 mV until the temperature becomes stable. When FPD is turned on (ignition) at the Thermocouple signal of –3 to –2 mV, the Thermocouple signal does not exceed the Flame detection signal level and remains at the Combustion stop though combustion occurs, and the alarms of DET1-1 FRAME OUT, DET2-1 FRAME OUT, and DET3-1 FRAME OUT are risen. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  3-25 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> FPD is ignited with a platinum coil. Only the supply of carrier gas, combustion hydrogen, and combustion air may cause self-ignition by catalysis of the platinum coil. Self-ignition can be detected by water drops attached to the vent line. When FPD is turned on under self-ignition, peaks may not appear on the chromatogram and only the baseline may be output. When selfignition occurred, turn on FPD after changing the Flame detection level in the Detector signal setting. The procedure to turn on FPD is as follows: (1) Confirm that the temperature of the isothermal oven has become stable. (2) Set the pressure of combustion air to twice as large as the value described in the Operating condition setting in the Operation data. (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Press the (OPR) in the navigation bar on the analyzer operation screen. Check the temperatures on the Oven information display section in the User level SYS tab. Set the operation mode to Manual in the GCM tab. Press GCM Det Control in the GCM tab. Confirm that the Thermocouple signal on the Detector signal screen (see Figure 3.8) is 0±0.1 mV. (8) Press ON/OFF under FPD. (9) The message “Turn on” appears on the screen, and then press Yes. CAUTION When self-ignition occurred (the Thermocouple signal becomes higher than 2 to 3 mV), set the Flame detection level to the value of the Thermocouple signal +0.5 mV. (10) The indication remains OFF until FPD becomes Combustion. When ignition failed, the alarms of DET1-1 FRAME OUT, DET2-1 FRAME OUT, and DET3-1 FRAME OUT are raised. In this case, restart the procedure from the beginning. (11) When FPD becomes Combustion, the indication changes from OFF → ON. (12) Return the Flame detection level to the value described in the Operating condition setting in the Operation data. (13) After one minute has elapsed after FPD became Combustion, return the pressure of combustion air to the value described in the Operating condition setting in the Operation data. (4) Checking the baseline To confirm that the detector operates normally, press the (CHROM) in the navigation bar on the analyzer operation screen and display the baseline on the Chromatogram screen and compare it with the chromatogram in the Operation data. If the signal level and noise of the baseline significantly differ from those of the chromatogram in the Operation data, there may be something wrong with the detector, detector card, or wiring. 3.2.5 Measuring the standard sample (gas or liquid) CAUTION Always measure the standard sample after installation to confirm that nonconformity has not occurred with equipment by transportation, installation work, or others. The measurement result at the factory is attached to the Operation data; compare it with the measurement result of the standard sample. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 3  3-26 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> (1) Connecting a standard gas cylinder or standard liquid pump Connect a standard gas cylinder or a standard liquid pump to the standard sample line. If there are two or more streams of the standard sample line, connect a standard gas cylinder properly according to the Stream setting and Individual peak setting in the Operation data. When a smallsized standard liquid pump is connected to the standard sample line, the capacity of the standard liquid may become short. In such a case, remove the joint of the pipe connecting the sample process section with the isothermal oven (or programmed-temperature oven) and connect a standard liquid pump. (2) Substituting the standard sample line Measure the standard sample after thoroughly substituting the sample stream according to the following procedure: l The automatic stream valve (1) Change the user level. (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) Press the (OPR) in the navigation bar on the analyzer operation screen. Open the GCM tab. Set the operation mode to Manual. Press GCM VLV Control in the GCM tab. Press ON/OFF under Str VLV. Confirm that all stream valves are closed. Select the number of the valve to be operated and press OK. The message “Turn on the stream valve number *” appears on the screen, and then press Yes. (10) The stream valve switches. (11) Control the throttle valve of the sample process section, let the standard sample flow and substitute the standard sample line. (12) After the substitution of the standard sample is finished, operate the stream valve again and turn it off. l The manual stream valve (1) Confirm that all stream valves are closed. (2) Open the stream valve of the sample process section manually. (3) Control the throttle valve of the sample process section, let the standard sample flow and substitute the standard sample line. (4) After the substitution of the standard sample is finished, operate the stream valve again and turn it off. (3) Measuring the standard sample Measure the standard sample according to the following procedure. When the operation mode is other than Stop, follow the following procedure after changing the operation mode to Stop: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Press the (OPR) in the navigation bar on the analyzer operation screen. Check the temperatures on the Oven information display section in the User level SYS tab. Set the operation mode to Process in the GCM tab. Press the Stream specification. Press the Stream specification of the standard sample. Select the Stream number, enter any number in the Repetition number of times, and press OK. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <3. Basic Operation and Startup> 3-27 (7) Press Run. The operation mode becomes Run and the measurement of the standard sample starts. (8) Press Stop. After the present measurement is finished, the operation mode becomes Stop and the measurement of the standard sample stops. 3 Figure 3.22 Stream specification screen IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  3.2.6 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> 3-28 Calibration Although calibration with the standard sample is conducted at the factory, it is recommended to conduct calibration with the standard sample at startup. After the start of continuous operation of process measurement, it is recommended to conduct calibration once a month to a half year. (1) Type of calibration method For a method of calculating concentration from the area or height obtained in the chromatogram, see the Appendix E Mechanism of Calculation. A method of calculating concentration differs depending on the Process specification in the Individual peak setting. When the Process specification is the External third (external standard), conduct calibration with the standard sample. The following are the equation of concentration by External third: C = RK (α Si / Sb) (A (αSi / Sb) 2 + B (αSi / Sb) + 1) C: concentration α: calibration factor Sb: reference area or height Si: measured area or height R: measuring range K: factor A: factor B: factor If the area or height is confirmed to be proportional to the concentration, the following equation applies: K=1, A=0, and B=0 C = RαSi / Sb If the user want to calculate concentration and enter the calibration value by yourself, first obtain the calibration factor or the reference area (height) by using the area (height) measured with the standard sample and the above equation, and then enter the value in the Peak Setup-Specific screen (Figure 3.23). You can also enter the value in the Peak Setup-Specific screen (Figure 5.79). For more information about the entering method, see the Individual peak specification by EtherLCD. 11/03/22 15:15:45 Peak Setup-Specific (1/5) Stream #1 Peak #1 Using/Assigned peak num 1/10 > - Process (Type) Peak - Process (Detail) External 3rd - Name PK1-1 - Execution Excuted - Synchronize to #00 #000 - Output flag Provided (31001) - Range number ** - Auto gain value 0 Menu Copy1 Copy2 Atm Strm# Peak# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 3.23 Example of calibration peak setting screen GC8000 has two automatic calibration methods. Both automatically change the Reference area or the Calibration factor based on a set value in the Calibration factor range in the Common peak setting (Figure 3.24). IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  3-29 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> 11/03/22 15:15:45 Peak Setup-General GCM #1 > - Conc calc req Standard - Det slope ratio 1.00 - Calib range 0.500 - Calib repeat range 2.000 - Calib coef range 4.000 - #1 Tickmark setup None - #2 Tickmark setup None - Peak detect err set Executed 3 Menu Gate F1 F2 Figure 3.24 Valve Atm DO GCM# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of Common peak setting screen l The method of changing the Reference area Setting the Calibration factor range to 0 changes the Calibration factor in the Peak SetupSpecific screen (Figure 3.23) to 1 after the calibration and also changes the Reference area to the value obtained by calculation. In this method, values are changed regardless of the value of the Reference area obtained, so the automatic calibration finishes normally and the calibration value is updated even if the measurement result of the standard sample is abnormal. Therefore, from the set values of the Calibration range and the Calibration repetition range, decide by the following method if the calibration result should be reflected. When the Calibration range has been set to α and the measurement result of the standard sample is out of the Reference concentration ± the Measuring range × α, an alarm message appears and the calibration result is not reflected. When the Calibration repetition range has been set to α and the variation coefficient obtained from n times of measurement results of the standard sample is larger than α, an alarm message appears and the calibration result is not reflected. A variation coefficient is a value obtained by the division of a standard deviation by a measuring range. For the equation, see the Appendix E Calculation. This method is not suitable for the history management of calibration. A method of changing the Calibration factor, described below, is recommended to normal calibration. At the factory, calibration has been conducted according to the method of changing the Reference area. l The method of changing the Calibration factor Setting the Calibration factor range to other than 0 does not change the Reference area in the Peak Setup-Specific screen (Figure 3.23) but changes the Calibration factor to the value obtained by calculation. In this method, decide by the following method if the calibration result should be reflected from the Calibration factor. At the same time, use the Calibration range and the Calibration repetition range. When the Calibration factor range is set to α and the obtained Calibration factor is between 1 – α and 1 + α, the calibration result is reflected. If the obtained Calibration factor is smaller than 1 – α or larger than 1 + α, an alarm message appears and the calibration result is not reflected. For example, when the Calibration factor range is set to 0.1 and the obtained Calibration factor is between 0.9 and 1.1, the calibration result is reflected. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <3. Basic Operation and Startup> 3-30 (2) Calibration method If the stream valve on the standard sample stream is automatic, automatic calibration and semiautomatic calibration can be selected. If the stream valve is manual, only manual calibration can be selected. For the contents of calibration methods, see 5.1.4 Operation of Calibration and Validation. (3) Checking parameter settings Before giving a calibration command, confirm the setting of the preset calibration stream number, the pre-calibration (post-calibration) validation stream number, and the pre-calibration (postcalibration) validation stream number of times. See the EtherLCD calibration setting screen. (a) Cal/Val Setup screen (1) Display the Cal/Val Set (Main) screen of the EtherLCD. The procedure is as follows: in the navigation bar on the analyzer operation screen to display the setting • Press the screen. • Press General Setting. • Press EtherLCD. • • • • Press Table key. Press Next key. Confirm that the cursor (>) is on the left to the Cal/Val Setup. Press Set/Ent key. (2) Items of the Cal (Val) method See the Operation data for the values set at shipment. When the stream valve on the standard sample stream is an automatic valve, either Auto cal or Semi-auto can be selected. When the stream valve is a manual valve, only Manual cal can be selected. For specific calibration methods, see 5.1.4 Operation of Calibration and Validation. (3) Other items When the Auto is selected in the Cal (Val) method, the periodic calibration is automatically conducted. In the case of Auto cal, set the following items. 1. Auto start date sets the starting day of calibration 2. Auto start time sets the starting time of calibration (24-hour clock) 3. Time interval sets the interval of calibrations 4. Confirm Executing is displayed in the Auto cal status. Pressing F2 (Start) or F3 (Stop) alternates Executing and Stopping in the Auto cal status. When the power is turned on, Auto cal status will be set to Stopping, so set it to Executing again. NOTE If Auto start date and Auto start time are set to a time in the past, auto calibration will be performed in the nearest future at a point that is an integer multiple of the time interval from the Auto start time. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <3. Basic Operation and Startup> 3-31 IMPORTANT In the case of Auto cal, set the respective items on Cal/Val Set (Main) screen and then Auto cal status to Executing. Automatic calibration starts according to the settings. Any change after that is not reflected. 3 Figure 3.25 Calibration (validation) Method Setting Screen (b) Calibration setting screen (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Press F4 key (Cal) on the Cal/Val Set (Main) screen. (The screen of Figure 3.26 appears.) Cal stream sets the calibration stream to be measured. Cal times sets the number of times of measurement of the calibration stream. Auto cal sets whether the calibration of this calibration number is conducted or not at automatic calibration (effective only for the automatic calibration). ValStr# before Cal sets the number of the validation stream to be measured before measuring the calibration stream. ValStr# after Cal sets the number of the validation stream to be measured after measuring the calibration stream. Val before Cal times sets the number of times of measurement of the validation stream before measuring the calibration stream. Val after Cal times sets the number of times of measurement of the validation stream after measuring the calibration stream. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  3-32 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> 11/03/22 15:15:45 Calibration Setup GCM #1 Cal #1 > - Cal stream 1 - Cal times 2 - Auto cal Unexecuted - ValStr# before Cal 0 - ValStr# after Cal 0 - Val before Cal times 0 - Val after Cal times 0 Menu Peak Stop Main GCM# Cal# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 3.26 Example of calibration setting screen (4) Calibration command Give a calibration command after finishing the procedure in 3.2.5 Parameter Setting. The procedure is as follows: (a) Auto calibration (1) Change the user level. (2) (3) (4) (5) Press the (OPR) in the navigation bar on the analyzer operation screen. Set the operation mode to Process. Display the EtherLCD screen and display the Calibration Set screen. Confirm the set values of the Cal/Val Setup screen. IMPORTANT If the operation mode is Run at the time set in Auto start time, calibration starts after the measurement of the stream. After the calibration, the mode returns to Run and the measurement restarts. (b) Semi-auto calibration (1) Connect a cylinder or a pump to the standard sample stream in reference to Connecting a Standard Gas Cylinder or Standard Liquid Pump. (2) Change the user level. (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Press the (OPR) in the navigation bar on the analyzer operation screen. Open the GCM tab, and set the operation mode to Process. Select Semi-auto in the Cal (Val) method screen (see Figure 3.25) and press OK. Select a desired calibration number in the Cal (Val) method screen and press OK. After the calibration stream and the validation stream are measured according to the settings, the calibration finishes. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <3. Basic Operation and Startup> 3-33 NOTE To cancel the Cal (Val) command during the continuous measurement, press the Specification Cancel button in the GCM tab. However, the command cannot be canceled after the measurement of the calibration stream has started. If the measurement status before calibration is Stream sequence or Stream (continuous) and the operation mode is Run, the status returns to the original status and the operation mode returns to Run after the calibration and the measurement restarts. If the operation mode is Stop or Pause, the status returns to the original status after the calibration and the operation mode becomes Stop. (c) Manual calibration (1) Connect a cylinder or a pump to the standard sample stream in reference to Connecting a Standard Gas Cylinder or Standard Liquid Pump. (2) Change the user level. (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Press the (OPR) in the navigation bar on the analyzer operation screen. Open the GCM tab, and set the operation mode to Process. Press Cal (Val) button. Select a desired calibration number in the Cal (Val) screen and press OK. Close all open stream valves. Manually open the stream valve on the standard sample stream of the sample process section. (9) Adjust the throttle valve of the sample process section, let the standard sample flow, and substitute the standard sample line. NOTE To cancel the Cal (Val) command during the continuous measurement, press the Specification Cancel button in the GCM tab. To cancel it after the continuous measurement, press Cal (Val) Stop and then press Yes. (10) After finishing the substitution of the standard sample, press Cal (Val) start button and then press Yes. (11) After the measurement of the calibration stream and the validation stream according to the settings, the calibration finishes and Calibration (validation) Stop in the GCM tab becomes active. Press it and then press Yes. (12) Manually close the stream valve on the standard sample stream of the sample process section. 3.3 Normal operation (continuous measurement of process sample) After finishing the procedures above, do the normal operation. 3.3.1 Setting Stream sequence Unless otherwise specified, streams are set at the factory in descending order in Stream sequence 1. To change the number of times, order, etc. of the stream to be measured, change the setting of Stream sequence. For the change method, see “4.4.1 GCM Tab g. Str. Sequence Set.” IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 3  3.3.2 3-34 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> Setting pressure and flow rate of process samples Set the pressure and flow rate of a sample in each stream according to the following procedure. For set values of pressure and flow rate, see the Operation data. l Automatic stream valve (1) Change the user level. (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Press the (OPR) in the navigation bar on the analyzer operation screen. Open the GCM tab. Set the operation mode to Manual. Press GCM VLV Control in the GCM tab. Press ON/OFF under Str VLV. Press ON and select the number of the valve to be operated, and then press OK. The message “Turn on the stream valve number *” appears on the screen, and then press Yes. (9) The stream valve switches. (10) Adjust the throttle valve of the sample process section and set the pressure and flow rate of the process sample. Repeat steps (7) to (10) to set the pressure and flow rate of all process sample streams. (11) After finishing the setting of the pressure and flow rate of the process samples, operate the stream valve again to turn it off. l Manual stream valve (1) (2) (3) (4) Confirm that the operation mode is not Run. Confirm that all stream valves are closed. Manually open the stream valve of the sample process section. Adjust the throttle valve of the sample process section to set the pressure and flow rate of the process sample. Repeat steps (2) to (4) to set the pressure and flow rate of all process sample streams. (5) Open only the stream valve to be used, and confirm the pressure and flow rate of process samples. 3.3.3 Starting operation Start operation according to the following procedure. When the operation mode is not Stop, change the operation mode to Stop and follow the procedure below: (1) Change the user level. (2) Press the (OPR) in the navigation bar on the analyzer operation screen. (3) Open the GCM tab, and set the operation mode to Process. (4) Press Stream sequence and select a Stream sequence number to be measured, and then press OK. (5) Press Run in Operation mode. The operation mode becomes Run and the measurement of the sample in the specified stream starts. 3.3.4 Stopping operation Stop operation according to the following procedure: (1) Change the user level. (2) Press the (OPR) in the navigation bar on the analyzer operation screen. (3) Open the GCM tab. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  3-35 <3. Basic Operation and Startup> (4) Press Stop in Operation mode. After the measurement of the stream is finished, the operation mode becomes Stop and the measurement of the sample of the specified stream stops. To cancel the Stop mode, press Cancel button. IMPORTANT To stop supplying the power after the operation stops, follow the procedure below. Otherwise, it may damage the detectors, columns, etc. (1) As for TCD, turn off TCD and leave it for at least four hours until it cools. For this procedure, see 3.2.4 On/Off operation of detectors. As for FID, FID with a methanizer, or FPD, stop the supply of combustion hydrogen or nitrogen and combustion air (close the main valve of the cylinder) while continuing the supply of carrier gas. Leave the detector for at least four hours after combustion stops. (2) Turn off the heaters of the isothermal oven, LSV, and FPD while continuing the supply of carrier gas. For this procedure, see Procedure to Turn off the Heater below. Leave the isothermal oven for at least one hour until it cools. (3) Stop the power supply. Continue the supply of carrier gas. l Procedure to Turn off the Heater (1) Change the user level. (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 3.3.5 Press the (OPR) in the navigation bar on the analyzer operation screen. Open the GCM tab. Set the operation mode to Manual. Open the SYS tab. Press Temperature Controller. When the ON/OFF button is pressed, the message “Are you sure you want to turn off the temperature controller?” appears on the screen, and then press Yes. Checking data in upper systems If GC8000 communicate with or transfer signals to/from upper systems, confirm that the measured value of GC8000 is identical to the indication of the system. 3.3.6 Storing parameters Read parameters from the GC8000 settings and store the initial parameters at startup. 3.3.7 Precautions for long-term operation stop When GC8000 is not used for a long time, stop the supply of power and air according to 3.4 Operation Stop. Continue the supply of carrier gas with the pressure of 1/10 the set value. If the supply of carrier gas is also stopped, close the main valve of the carrier gas cylinder by sealing the vent lines to be pressurized. If carrier gas is hydrogen, the power and protective gas (instrumental air) must be supplied and the hydrogen limiting unit must be turned on. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 3  4. 4-1 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> GC-HMI (Touch Panel) n Screen Layout The display screen consists of three display areas: (A) Caption banner: (B) Navigation bar: Shows various items of information on the GC-HMI. Displays controls to change to different screens on the contents area, and content types. Displays operations and status of the GC8000. (C) Contents area: (A) Caption banner (C) Contents area (B) Navigation bar Figure 4.1 F0401.ai Screen Layout (A) Caption banner This banner shows various items of information on the GC-HMI. It is displayed on almost all screens. (6) (1) Figure 4.2 (2) (3) (4) (5) (7) (8) (9) F0402.ai Items Displayed on the Caption Banner IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 4  4-2 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> Table 4.1 Items Displayed on the Caption Banner Symbol Item (1) Date/time (2) (3) Type of connected analyzer Description Displays the current date and time (year, month, day, hour, minute) of the GC8000. This item is hidden when the EtherLCD is connected. Indicates the type of the currently connected GC8000. Currently connected to the GC8000 equipped with the GC-HMI being operated on. (Note: This icon is also displayed when no analyzer is connected.) Currently connected to any other GC8000. Overall alarm Indicates an overall alarm. No alarm Level-1 alarm (blinking) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) Level-2 alarm (blinking) Tag name of Indicates the tag name of the currently connected GC8000. The name may be up to 16 GC8000 ASCII characters long. The tag name and analyzer number of the CG8000 are indicated while the GC8000 is connected. This item is hidden when no connection is made. Active GCM Indicates the active GCM number (GCM1 to GCM6). number This item is hidden when no connection is made. Analyzer Indicates the current operating status of the analyzer. This item is hidden when no status connection is made. Manual Process Operating Indicates the current operating mode. This item is hidden when no connection is made. mode Run Pause Stop DB changed Indicates that the initial database of the GC-HMI is different from the one set on the GC8000. (The indication blinks.) This item disappears when initial DB reload described in section 4.1.3 is executed. User level Indicates the user level (A, B, C, or C+). This item is hidden when the EtherLCD is connected. (B) Navigation bar The navigation bar allows for navigation between different screens. (2) Figure 4.3 (4) (6) (5) (7) (3) (1) (8) F0403.ai Navigation Bar IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  Table 4.2 4-3 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> Navigation Bar Symbol Description (1) Navigates to the setting screen. (2) Navigates to the analyzer overview screen. This item is only displayed when the GC8000 is connected. (3) Navigates to the analyzer map screen. This item is only displayed when the GC8000 is connected. (4) Navigates to the analyzer operation screen. This item is only displayed when the GC8000 is connected. (5) Navigates to the chromatogram screen. This item is only displayed when the GC8000 is connected. (6) Navigates to the analysis result screen. This item is only displayed when the GC8000 is connected. (7) Navigates to the alarm screen. This item is only displayed when the GC8000 is connected. (8) Navigates to the help screen. Provides a description of the icons displayed on the currently selected screen: one of (1) to (7). Reference 4.1 Setting Screen 4.2 Analyzer Overview Screen 4.3 Analyzer Map Screen 4.4 Analyzer Operation Screen 4.5 Chromatogram Screen 4.6 Analysis Result Screen 4.7 Alarm Screen 4.8 Help Screen (C) Contents area This area displays operations and status of the GC8000. Different screens are displayed by pressing the corresponding button icons on the navigation bar. Setting screen Allows for making various settings. (See 4.1 Setting Screen.) Analyzer overview screen Indicates the measurement status of each GCM. (See 4.2 Analyzer Overview Screen.) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 4  4-4 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> Analyzer Map Screen Displays the GCM and SYS definitions, as well as the equipment configuration including ovens, detectors, and valves. (See 4.3 Analyzer Map Screen.) Analyzer operation screen Allows for controlling and monitoring the operating status of the active GCM. (See 4.4 Analyzer Operation Screen.) Chromatogram screen Displays the chromatogram for the active GCM. (See 4.5 Chromatogram Screen.) Analysis Result Screen Displays the analysis results (latest analysis results, concentration analysis history, retention time history, and calibration factor history) obtained from the active GCM. (See 4.6 Analysis Result Screen.) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-5 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> Alarm screen Displays the alarm status of the GC8000. (See 4.7 Alarm Screen.) 4 Help screen Displays on-line help for each screen. (See 4.8 Help Screen.) 4.1 Setting Screen The setting screen is used to change the settings of the GC-HMI and the currently connected GC8000. Press the on the navigation bar to display the setting screen. Press this icon. F0404.ai Figure 4.4 Setting Screen IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> Table 4.3 Setting Screens and User Levels Setting screen User Level Setting General Setting Analyzer Setting EhteLCD Network Settings Display Setting GC-HMI Setting GC-HMI Reset Communication Management Reload Initial Database GC8000 Setting Parameter Import Parameter Export Alarm Setting Clear Alarm Status Alarm Popup Restriction —: 4.1.1 4-6 A User level B C C+ Reference 4.1.1 General Setting — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 4.1.2 GC-HMI Setting — 4.1.3 GC8000 Setting — — — — — 4.1.4 Alarm Setting — Cannot be selected. General Setting This section describes the General Setting of the setting screen. Figure 4.5 General Setting n User Level Setting User levels are set to define the scope of operations allowed for each user. The default setting is user level A, which only allows the user to view screens. The user levels for analyzer operation data display and EtherLCD are independent from each other, and they must be set separately. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-7 Current user level (A in this case) 4 F0406.ai Figure 4.6 User Level There are four user levels: A, B, C, and C+. A password must be entered to change to any user levels other than A. Figure 4.7 Password Entry See Table 4.4 User Level and Permission for the scopes of operations permitted to different user levels for analyzer operation data display. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-8 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> Table 4.4 User level A B C C+ User Level and Permission Permissions Only viewing operating status and analysis results. Analyzer operations are not permitted. Limited analyzer operations: changing operating modes, changing measurement status (except for cancelling specified measurement), and changing the range. Viewing and setting all analyzer operations. Reanalysis of chromatogram is not permitted. Permissions granted to C plus clearing alarm status, stopping analysis operations, editing and deleting user programs, setting passwords, and reanalyzing chromatograms. Password Not required (default) 1192 1603 1702 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-9 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> l Changing a user level Enter the password for the user level to be changed to 4 After entering the password, push the OK button. The user level has been changed to B. A wrong password was entered. Current user level (B in this case) If user level is C: If user level is C+: F0408.ai Figure 4.8 Example of Changing a User Level IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-10 n Selecting an Analyzer In the Analyzer Setting screen, select the GC8000 you want to connect, and then establish a connection or forced connection. Figure 4.9 Example of Analyzer Setting Screen Connect: This option makes a communication connection with the analyzer selected by the Analyzer Setting function. A communication connection attempt fails if the target analyzer is already connected with a PC or any other GC-HMI. Forced Connect: Even if the target analyzer is already connected with a PC or any other GC-HMI, this option breaks that connection and forces a connection with the analyzer. To register an analyzer, add, change, or delete its analyzer ID and IP address. Analyzer ID: Set the ID for the analyzer (GC8000) to be connected to. Setting conditions: • Up to eight analyzers (GC8000s) can be set: one analyzer (GC8000) equipped with GC-HMI, plus seven external analyzers (GC8000s). The analyzer (GC8000) equipped with GC-HMI cannot be left unset. Setting range: 001 to 240, and unset Default settings: The analyzer (GC8000) equipped with GC-HMI is defaulted to 001, and external analyzers (GC8000s) are defaulted unset. IP address: Set the IP address corresponding to the analyzer ID. Setting conditions: • Up to eight analyzers (GC8000s) can be set: one analyzer (GC8000) equipped with GC-HMI, plus seven external analyzers (GC8000s). Setting range: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.254 (where 0.0.0.0 indicates unset state). Default settings: The analyzer (GC8000) equipped with GC-HMI is defaulted to 192.168.1.1, and external analyzers (GC8000s) are defaulted to 0.0.0.0 (unset). IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-11 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> n EtherLCD This option displays the EtherLCD screen. See Chapter 5 for a description of EtherLCD. Status Menu (1/2) 4 A/I Status A/O Status D/I Status D/O Status Remote A/O Status Remote D/O Status Revision number Ethernet Status Alarm Status Figure 4.10 4.1.2 Example of EtherLCD Screen GC-HMI Setting This section describes the GC-HMI Setting of the setting screen. Figure 4.11 GC-HMI Setting IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-12 n Network Settings This option sets the IP address and subnet mask of the GC-HMI. TIP Restart the GC-HMI after finishing the setting. Without restarting the GC-HMI, data will not be displayed correctly. Network setting can made with user level C or higher. Figure 4.12 Example Network Settings IP address: Setting range: Default setting: Subnet mask: Setting range: Default setting: Default gateway: Setting range: Default setting: 0.0.0.1 to 255.255.255.254 192.168.1.65 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.1 to 255.255.255.254 192.168.1.254 n Display Settings This option sets the screen brightness and backlight saver functions. TIP This parameter is available if the user level is set to B or higher. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-13 4 Figure 4.13 Example of Display Settings Brightness: Set the backlight brightness. Setting range: 1 (darkest) to 10 (brightest) Default setting: 5 Backlight saver time: Set the transit time to backlight saver mode. The touch panel transits to the backlight saver mode if this transit time elapses since the last screen operation (or alarm popup). Select from 5 min, 10 min, 30 min, and 1 h. The default is 5 min. To recover from the power saving mode, touch the screen. Backlight saver restore: Determine how to restore from the backlight saver mode. Select Display touch or Display touch and Alarm popup. The default is Display touch and Alarm popup. TIP • Even if the screen turns on with an alarm popup, it transits to the backlight saver mode after the transit time elapses again. • The alarm levels to be displayed in the alarm popup are set as described in ## Alarm Popup Restriction in 4.1.4 Alarm Setting. Background Color: Setting range: Default setting: Set the background color. Select Positive or Negative. Positive IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-14 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> n GC-HMI Reset This option resets the GC-HMI. Selecting the GC-HMI Reset option displays a confirmation screen. Figure 4.14 GC-HMI Reset The GC-HMI behaves as follows: (1) Disconnects communication with the GC8000. (2) Restarts the GC-HMI. (3) Attempts an analyzer operation data display connection to the analyzer (GC8000) which was connected before the GC-HMI resetting. The user levels for the GC-HMI is changed to level A automatically. TIP This parameter is available if the user level is set to C or higher. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4.1.3 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-15 GC8000 Setting This section describes the GC8000 Setting of the setting screen. 4 Figure 4.15 GC8000 Setting n Reload Initial Database When the parameter settings is changed at the EtherLCD, the icon mean DB changed blinks on the caption banner. This is when this option reloads the initial database and matches the setting information of GC-HMI to the setting information of the GC8000. IMPORTANT When you change parameters from PC or GC-HMI of another GC8000, make sure to execute “Reload Initial Database” command in GC-HMI. TIP This option is available if the user level is set to B or higher. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  Figure 4.16 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-16 Reload Initial Database n Parameter Import This option stores parameter settings in the internal memory of HMI, in order to make a backup of all parameter settings of GC8000. TIP This option is available if the user level is set to C or higher. Selecting the Parameter Import option displays a confirmation screen. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-17 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4 Figure 4.17 4.1.4 Parameter Import Alarm Setting Figure 4.18 Alarm Setting n Clear Alarm Status This option clears the alarm status. If ALL GCMs are selected for alarm status display, the alarm status for all GCMs is cleared. If a particular GCM (one of GCM1 to GCM6) is selected, the alarm status for that GCM is cleared. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-18 TIP This option is available if the user level is set to C+. Selecting the Clear Alarm Status option displays a confirmation screen. Figure 4.19 Clear Alarm Setting n Alarm Popup Restriction Select the desired restriction for alarm popup display. Only the alarms defined here will be popped up. TIP This option is available if the user level is set to C or higher. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-19 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4 Figure 4.20 Alarm Popup Restriction Display level All Alarm Display: Displays an alarm popup whenever any alarm occurs. This is the default setting. Level 1 and 2 Alarm Display: Displays an alarm popup when an alarm of level 1 or 2 occurs. Level 1 Alarm Display: Displays an alarm popup when an alarm of level 1 occurs. No Display: Displays no alarm popup. Display when released Yes: An alarm pop-up is displayed when an alarm is released. No: An alarm pop-up is not displayed when an alarm is released. 4.2 Analyzer Overview Screen The overview screen displays the status of GCMs (GCM modules) of the currently connected GC8000, allowing to control their operation. Press the on the navigation bar to display the overview screen (the same default screen as appears upon startup). IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-20 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> GCM information SYS information Active GCM when the ↓ Listed in order of GCM number background is blue Not active GCM when the background is other than blue Press this to display the overview screen. Figure 4.21 F0421.ai Example of Overview Screen n Description of icons and buttons The icons and buttons provided on the overview screen are as described below. (5) (2) (3) (4) (6) (1) (7) (8) (9) Figure 4.22 Overview Screen Display Elements Table 4.5 Description of Overview Screen Display Elements Symbol (1) Item Active GCM change button GCM alarm indicator (11) F0422.ai Description Indicates the GCM number. Also used to set the GCM as an active GCM. Indicates the alarm status of the GCM. No alarm (2) Level-1 alarm generated (blinking) GCM operating status indicator (3) GCM operating mode indicator (4) (10) Level-2 alarm generated (blinking) Indicates the operating status of the GCM. Manual Process Indicates the operating mode of the GCM. Run Pause Stop IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-21 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> (5) (6) (7) (8) Operating status change button for all GCMs GCM operating status change button Indicators of GCM measurement status, stream number, and method number. SYS number indicator SYS operating status indicator (9) (10) (11) Elapsed time bar graph Elapsed time/SYS analysis Changes the operating status of GCMs. All GCMs Each GCM Indicates the stream sequence, stream number, and method number of the GCM. Indicates the SYS number (1 to 6) assigned to the GCM. Indicates the operating mode of the SYS. Run Pause Stop Indicates the elapsed time on a bar graph. Indicates the elapsed time per interval as a numerical value. n Changing the Active GCM Example: To make GCM2 active, follow this procedure: (1) Press the GCM change button of GCM2, which is not currently active. (2) When a confirmation screen appears, press Yes. Figure 4.23 Changing the Active GCM (3) GCM2 has been made active. This is indicated as the background of the GCM2 line turns blue and the active GCM number on the caption banner shows GCM2. n Changing the operating mode TIP This operation is available if the user level is set to B or higher. The forced stop function is enabled only for user level C+. The operating mode can be changed separately for each GCM, or for all GCMs at once. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 4  <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-22 l To change the operating mode of each GCM Press the operating status change button for the desired GCM. The screen displays the operating status change dialog for GCM1. Figure 4.24 Example of Changing the GCM Operating Mode (for GCM1) l To change the operating mode of all GCMs Press the operating status change button for all GCMs . The screen displays the operating status change dialog for all GCMs. Figure 4.25 Changing the Operating Mode of All GCMs IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-23 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> For operating modes, see “l Operating mode” on page 4-27. 4.3 Analyzer Map Screen The analyzer map screen displays the GCM/SYS/stream configuration in GC8000, as well as the status of valves and detectors. This analyzer map screen consists of two tabs: GCM Map tab and Stream Map tab. Press the on the navigation bar to display the analyzer map screen. 4 Press this icon. F0426.ai Figure 4.26 4.3.1 Analyzer Map Screen GCM Map Tab The GCM map tab displays the following information. • • • • • • • • List of valves and detectors assigned to GCM-SYS. List of valves and detectors associated with each oven. Type of oven: I for isothermal oven, P for programmed-temperature oven Status of stream valves: Streams 1 to 31, or OFF Presence and status of atmospheric pressure balancing valve Presence of EPC: Carrier n-1 to n-2, and Utility n-1 to n-4 (where n is oven number) Types of detectors: TCD, FID, FID-MC, FPD Presence and status of hydrogen limiting units: HLn (where n is oven number) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-24 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> GCM Map Tab F0427.ai Figure 4.27 4.3.2 Example of GCM Map Tab Stream Map Tab The stream map tab identifies the stream numbers (1 to 31) assigned to GCMs. Stream Map Tab F0428.ai Figure 4.28 4.4 Example of Stream Map Tab Analyzer Operation Screen The analyzer operation screen is used to view and operate on each GCM and SYS of connected analyzers. This screen consists of the active GCM tab and its subordinate SYS tab (oven tab). The information displayed here is updated every second. Press the on the navigation bar to display the analyzer operation screen. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-25 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4 Press this icon. F0429.ai Figure 4.29 4.4.1 Example of Analyzer Operation Screen GCM Tab The GCM tab displays information about the active GCM. Screen components are as shown below. (A) GCM general information display area (B) Elapsed time bar indicator Tab (C) GCM operating status display area F0430.ai Figure 4.30 GCM Tab Layout IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  (A) 4-26 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> GCM general information display area This area displays general information about GCM. Current stream valve number of GCM Current ON/OFF status of atmospheric pressure balancing valve of GCM F0431.ai Figure 4.31 Example of GCM General Information Display Area l Method number indicator Indicates the method number (1 to 6). The indication is blank when the GCM is in manual or process - stop state. l Stream valve indicator Indicates the stream valve status, either in terms of stream valve number or OFF. l Atmospheric balanced valve indicator Indicates the status (ON or OFF) of the atmospheric pressure balancing valve. This indication is hidden if an atmospheric pressure balancing valve not available. (B) Elapsed time bar indicator This area indicates the elapsed time of GSM and its subordinate SYS, as well as the ON/OFF timings of stream valve and atmospheric pressure balancing valve. GCM elapsed time SYS interval division line SYS elapsed time bar Stream valve ON/OFF bar Atmospheric balanced valve ON/OFF bar F0432.ai Figure 4.32 Display Example of Elapsed Time Bar The GCM elapsed time is indicated in terms of the elapsed time (in seconds) since the beginning of analysis, and the ratio (percentage) of elapsed time to the analysis interval. When the GCM is in manual mode, the time axis is automatically adjusted, so that the elapsed time is indicated in terms of the ratio (percentage) to the full scale. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  (C) 4-27 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> GCM operating status display area Buttons for moving to a dialog for changing GCM settings GCM control buttons Buttons for changing GCM operating status/mode Figure 4.33 GCM detector/valve control buttons F0433.ai Example of GCM Operating Status Display Area (1) Changing the operating status This section describes how to change the operating status (GCM status/operating mode) of the active GCM or of each SYS. l GCM status Select the GCM status Process or Manual. Process: Status for performing measurement and calibration. Manual: Status for performing manual operation. TIP This operation is available if the user level is set to C or higher. Status change is only possible when the operating mode is Stop. l Operating mode Select the desired operating mode of the active GCM or of each SYS from the following: Run: Runs measurement. Pause: Pauses the run. Stop: Stops the run. Cancel command: Cancels the operating mode command. Forced stop: Forces operating mode to stop. TIP • • • • The Run, Pause, Stop, and Cancel command actions are enabled for user level B or higher. The Forced stop action is enabled for user level C+. The Pause action is enabled only for the active GCM. It is disabled for each SYS. The operating mode can be set on the analyzer overview screen and the analyzer operation screen. The Forced stop action can only be executed on the analyzer operation screen. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 4  4-28 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> (2) GCM control buttons Control the active GCM settings. Stream sequence: The settings in the specified stream sequence are applied. After the selection, set the sequence number (1 to 8). Figure 4.34 Specify str: Set the stream to be measured. After the selection, set the stream number (1 to 31) and the number of repetitions (0 for continuous, or 1 to 9999). Figure 4.35 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> Cal (Val): Start cal (val): Finish cal (val): Cancel spec.: Cal (val) method: 4-29 Set the calibration (validation) number to execute (1 to 3 for calibration or 1 to 3 for validation). Ensure that the calibration (validation) number is the stream number. Starts the calibration (validation). Finishes the calibration or validation. Cancels the parameter settings for changing the measurement status. Set the desired mode of calibration or validation: manual, semi-auto, or auto. 4 Figure 4.36 Auto: Calibration or validation is executed automatically according to the set values of start time and time interval. Semi-auto: When a calibration or validation number is specified, the stream valve on the calibration or validation stream automatically opens, followed by calibration or validation. Manual: When a calibration or validation number is specified, all stream valves close, allowing a standard sample to flow. Then, calibration or validation can be performed manually. Start/stop auto cal: Starts/stops automatic calibration. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-30 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> Figure 4.37 TIP • The selections Str. Sequence, Specify str., Cal (Val), Start cal (val), and Finish cal (val) are enabled for user level B or higher. • The selections Cancel spec., Cal (val) method, and Start/stop auto cal are enabled for user level C or higher. • If Cal (Val) method is set to Manual or Semi-auto for all calibration/validation numbers, the Start/stop auto cal parameter cannot be set. • Stream sequence, Stream Select, Cal (Val), Start cal (val), and Finish cal (val) cannot be controlled when the GCM status is Manual. (3) Changing GCM settings a. Peak Setting Set parameters related to peak recognition. TIP • This operation is available if the user level is set to C or higher. • The stream number, SYS number, and peak number assigned to the active GCM are selectable here. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-31 4 Figure 4.38 Peak Settings l Peak Name Set the name for the peak of the specified stream number, SYS number, and peak number. The name can be entered using up to eight ASCII alphanumeric characters. Figure 4.39 l Peak std time/Gate times Set the gate ON time, gate OFF time, and peak standard time for the peak of the specified stream number, SYS number, and peak number. The setting ranges are each 0.0 to 99999.9 seconds. The actual upper limit is time of its cycle time. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-32 Figure 4.40 l Measuring unit/Measuring range Set the measuring unit and measuring range for the peak of the specified stream number, SYS number, and peak number. Figure 4.41 Measuring range: Measuring unit: Select No unit, %, or PPM. Measuring range: 0.000 to 9999.999. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-33 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> l Ref stream/Peak set Set the reference stream number and reference peak number for the peak of the specified stream number, SYS number, and peak number. 4 Figure 4.42 Specific items to be set (peak 1 - ref stream number/peak 2 - ref stream number /peak 1 - ref peak number/peak 2 - ref peak number) depend on the process assignment defined by stream number/peak number. Process assignment is external cubic: Peak 1 only Process assignment is external linear: Peaks 1 and 2 Otherwise: No peak Setting range: Peak 1 - Ref. stream number: 1 to 31 Peak 2 - Ref. stream number: 1 to 31 Peak 1 - Ref. peak number: 1 to 999 (only the peak number assigned to the reference stream number can be selected) Peak 2 - Ref. peak number: 1 to 999 (only the peak number assigned to the reference stream number can be selected) l Gate /Integ. Set Set the gate cut method and integration method for the peak of the specified stream number, SYS number, and peak number. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-34 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> Figure 4.43 Setting range: Gate cut method: Select Time gate, Slope gate, Slope/Time, Time/Slope, or Zone. Integ method: Select Skimming or Vertical. l Calib Settings Set the standard concentration, standard area, and calibration factor for the peak of the specified stream number, SYS number, and peak number. These settings apply only to the calibration stream. Figure 4.44 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-35 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> Setting range: Std conc: Std area: Calib factor: 0.000 to 9999.999 0.000 to 40000.000 0.000 to 9999.999 b. Range Settings Set the range for the peak of the specified stream number, SYS number, and peak number. The setting range can be selected from the range of 1 to 31. TIP • This operation is available if the user level is set to B or higher. • The stream number, SYS number, and peak number assigned to the active GCM are selectable here. Figure 4.45 c. Stream Valve ON/OFF setting Set the status (ON/OFF timing) of the stream valve. Figure 4.46 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 4  <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-36 Setting range: Select ON or OFF. The stream valve number is in the range of 1 to 31. TIP • This operation is available if the user level is set to C or higher. • Set the GCM status to manual. • Only the stream valve number assigned to the active GCM is selectable. d. Valve ON/OFF setting Select the valve setting: ON/OFF timing. TIP • This operation is available if the user level is set to C or higher. • Set the GCM status to manual. • Only the valve assigned to the specified SYS can be set here. Figure 4.47 e. ATM balanced Valve ON/OFF setting Select the status of atmospheric pressure balancing valve from ON or OFF. TIP • This operation is available if the user level is set to C or higher. • Set the GCM status to manual. • Only the atmospheric pressure balancing valve assigned to the active GCM is selectable. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-37 4 Figure 4.48 f. Peak Tracking Enable or disable peak tracking for the SYS assigned to the active GCM. Do this by selecting ON or OFF. TIP • This operation is available if the user level is set to C or higher. • Only the SYS number assigned to the active GCM is selectable. Figure 4.49 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-38 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> g. Str. Sequence Set Configure the stream sequence for each stream sequence number. Figure 4.50 Setting range: Str. Sequence No.: 1 to 8 Str. Sequence: #1 to #31 Setting range: Str. No.: Select either the stream number assigned to the GCM, or 0 (no stream). ON/OFF: Select ON or OFF. TIP • This operation is available if the user level is set to B or higher. • The changes to the stream sequence settings are applied when you press OK in the lower right of the screen and then press Yes in the “Do you want to change the setting?” dialog box that appears. Each time you change the settings of a stream sequence, be sure to perform this procedure. If you select another stream sequence number before applying the settings, the changes will be canceled. For example, after changing the settings of stream sequence number 1, if you select stream sequence number 2 without applying the settings, the settings of stream sequence number 1 will be returned to the original values, and the changes will be canceled. 4.4.2 SYS Tab The SYS tab displays information about the SYS assigned to the active GCM. Screen components are as shown below. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-39 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> (A) GCM general information display area (B) SYS chromatogram display area Tab (C) Oven information display area (D) SYS operating status display area F0451.ai Figure 4.51 (A) SYS Tab Layout GCM general information display area This is identical to the GCM general information display area described in Section 4.4.1. (B) SYS chromatogram display area This area displays the elapsed time of the SYS selected on the SYS tab, as well as the chromatogram, and the ON/OFF timings of stream valve and atmospheric pressure balancing valve of the GCM. Information on chromatogram display detector SYS elapsed time SYS interval division line SYS chromatogram Stream valve ON/OFF bar Atmospheric balanced valve ON/OFF bar F0452.ai Figure 4.52 (C) Example of SYS Chromatogram Display Area Oven information display area This area displays information about the oven used by the SYS selected on the tab. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 4  4-40 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> Detector information Oven tab Valve ON/OFF timing bar Gate ON/OFF timing bar Pressure information Temperature information (only with EPC) Hydrogen limiting Temperature controller Pressure display information unit indicator information Figure 4.53 F0453.ai Example of Oven Information Display Area Valve ON/OFF timing bar Indicates the status (ON or OFF) of valves as a bar graph. Hydrogen limiting unit indicator Indicates the status (ON or OFF) of the hydrogen limiting unit. This indication is hidden if a hydrogen limiting unit is not available. Detector information Displays information about the detector. Type: TCD, FID, FID-MC (FID with methanizer), FPD, None ON/OFF: ON/OFF status of detector Peak No.: Number of the currently detected peak Peak Name: Name of the currently detected peak Signal: Detector signal in mV. displays the following information: The analog signal from the detector, which has been sampled every 40 msec, converted to digital values, and then averaged by the given sample rate Filtered signal: Input signal, which has been filtered using the filter constant set as a detector signal parameter Standard deviation of signal: Standard deviation of input signal for the past 20 inputs Applied voltage: Bridge voltage of TCD (for TCD only) Current: Bridge current of TCD (for TCD only) Flame detection level: Set value of flame detection level (FID, FID-MC, FPD) Thermocouple signal: Thermocouple signal (FID, FID-MC, FPD) Flame detection status: Flame detection status (now burning/burning stopped) (FID, FIDMC, FPD) Methanizer voltage: Voltage of methanizer (for FID-MC only) Temperature information Pressing the Input signal: Indicates the oven temperature information (OVEN, LSV, FPD) of the selected SYS. Unit: deg C and deg F. Temperature controller information Indicates the SV value, PV value, and ON/OFF status for the isothermal oven (or programmed-temperature oven), LSV, and FPD, of the selected SYS. Press . IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-41 4 Figure 4.54 Pressure information Displays pressure information of EPC (Carrier n-1 to n-2, and Utility n-1 to n-4 (where n is oven number)) inthe selected oven. Pressure display information Displays the SV value, PV value, and ON/OFF status, for Carrier n-1 to n-2 and Utility n-1 to n-4, of the selected oven. Press . Figure 4.55 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  (D) 4-42 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> SYS operating status display area This area displays SYS operating mode and operating status. It also displays, and allows operation of, the detector and valve of SYS. SYS operating status indicators SYS operating mode indicators SYS detector/valve indicators and controls F0456.ai Figure 4.56 4.5 Example of SYS Operating Status Display Area Chromatogram Screen This screen displays a chromatogram of the data which is being measured or have been measured by the GC8000. A chromatogram stored in a file can be analyzed to recalculate concentration values. The result of this reanalysis can be transferred to CG8000s and applied to subsequent measurements. Press the on the navigation bar to display the chromatogram screen. Press this icon. F0457.ai Figure 4.57 Example of Chromatogram Screen IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-43 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> n Screen description Screen components are as shown below. Legend display Zoomed view Whole chromatogram 4 Pen selector Snapshot Clear snapshot Detail settings F0458.ai Figure 4.58 Chromatogram Screen Layout Legend display: Indicates pen color, chromatogram type, and detector number. Whole chromatogram display area: Displays the whole chromatogram, including portions which are not shown in the zoomed view. Pen selector: Configures the graph to be displayed. See 4.5.1 Pen Selector. Snapshot: Records the magnification and position of zoomed view. See 4.5.2 Snapshot. Detail settings: Provides detail settings of the chromatogram screen. See 4.5.3 Detail Settings. Zoomed view area: Displays a zoomed view of a selected part of the chromatogram. The chromatogram includes gate mark, peak mark, peak number, as well as the temperature and pressure data for the chromatogram. See 4.5.4 Zoomed View. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4.5.1 4-44 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> Pen Selector (1) Press the pen selector button . (2) A dialog opens for assigning a graph to a pen. Show/hide button Pen color Chromatogram type selector F0459.ai Figure 4.59 Example of Pen settings (3) Enable the show/hide button to show the chromatogram. Alternatively, disable the button to hide the chromatogram. (4) Use the chromatogram type selector to select the type of data to be displayed. Clicking the detail selection button displays a diagram that selects information to be displayed for each chromatogram. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-45 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> Detail selection 4 F0460.ai Figure 4.60 Example of Chromatogram Selector Options Listed below are the chromatograms that can be displayed. Last Chrom.: Prev. Chrom.: Saved Chrom.: Hist. Chrom.: Diff. Chrom.: The chromatogram for the current measurement. The chromatogram for the previous analysis. A chromatogram which a user saved in the GC8000. A chromatogram which was automatically saved in the GC8000. A chromatogram representing differences between two chromatograms. A differential chromatogram itself cannot be selected as a differentiation object. Baseline Chrom.: A chromatogram which a user saved as a baseline chromatogram in the GC8000 unit. Temp./Press Graph: Temperature or pressure graph associated with the chromatogram. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-46 l Last Chrom. From Det No., select the detector number that you want to display the last chromatogram for. Figure 4.61 Example of Last Chromatogram Selection Screen l Prev. Chrom. From Det No., select the detector number that you want to display the previous chromatogram for. Figure 4.62 Example of Previous Chromatogram Selection Screen IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-47 l Saved Chrom. From Det No. and then Saved Chrom. Name, select the saved chromatogram the you want to display. 4 Figure 4.63 Example of Saved Chromatogram Selection Screen l Hist. Chrom. From Det No., YYY-MM-DD, Hour and then File Name, select the history chromatogram the you want to display. Figure 4.64 Example of History Chromatogram Selection Screen IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-48 l Diff. Chrom. From Graph 1 and Graph 2, select the chromatograms that you want to display the difference of. Figure 4.65 Example of Difference Chromatogram Selection Screen l Baseline Chrom. From Det No. and then Baseline Chrom. Name, select the baseline chromatogram the you want to display. Figure 4.66 Example of Baseline Chromatogram Selection Screen IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-49 l Temp./Press Graph From Temp./Press Graph, select the chromatogram that includes the temperature/pressure data that you want to display. 4 Figure 4.67 Example of Temperature/Pressure Graph Selection Screen l None A “Chromatogram is not set. Is it OK?” alert dialog box appears. To specify none, press Yes. Figure 4.68 No Pen Selection Confirmation IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-50 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4.5.2 Snapshot The snapshot function records the magnification and position of a zoomed view and displays its result on the screen. Press the snapshot button once to record the magnification and position. Press it again to display the recorded magnification and position. Note that the temperature/pressure axis will not be recorded. Snapshot (before recording) Snapshot (after recording) To clear the recorded magnification and position, press the clear snapshot button 4.5.3 . Detail Settings (1) Press the detail settings button . (2) A dialog opens for changing detail settings of the screen. Figure 4.69 Timing Mark (1) Press the Timing Mark button. (2) A dialog opens for showing/hiding mark information and additional information in each chromatogram. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-51 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4 Figure 4.70 (3) The mark settings include those listed below, which can be set for each graph to be displayed. Peak ON/OFF: Enable or disable the check mark to show or hide, respectively, the mark. Gate ON/OFF: Enable or disable the check mark to show or hide, respectively, the mark. Start Mark: Enable or disable the check mark to show or hide, respectively, the mark. (4) Items that can be displayed as additional information include those listed below, which can be set for each graph to be displayed. None, Component name, Gain, Range, Std. Conc., and (Relative) Peak No. TIP The mark settings are not available if Temperature or Pressure is selected from the pen selector. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-52 Figure 4.71 Grid display Show or hide the grid in the zoomed view area by enabling or disabling, respectively, the check mark. Figure 4.72 Auto gain display Turn on or off the auto gain display by enabling or disabling, respectively, the check mark. When the auto gain display is turned on, the chromatogram provides a magnified display of voltage values based on the gain settings of each peak. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-53 4 Figure 4.73 Multiple-chromatogram display Select the SYS Cycle or Main Cycle radio button. SYS Cycle: Main Cycle: Displays a single chromatogram for each analysis interval which is defined as a parameter of the SYS method. Displays as many chromatograms side by side as the GCM method analysis intervals which are defined as a parameter of the SYS method. When you switch between SYS Cycle and Main Cycle, a “This operation will clear the current display. Continue operation?” alert dialog box will appear. To switch the display, press Yes. TIP • This settings is common to all chromatograms. It cannot be set separately for each chromatogram. • The SYS Cycle/Main Cycle function supports the last chromatograms, previous chromatograms, and history chromatograms. It does not support the saved chromatograms. The differential chromatograms are supported if chromatograms displayed side-by-side are selected. • The Temp./Pressure function supports the SYS Cycle/Main Cycle of last chromatograms, previous chromatograms, and history chromatograms. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-54 Figure 4.74 SYS method analysis cycle Figure 4.75 Example of SYS Cycle IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-55 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> GCM method analysis cycle SYS method analysis cycle 4 Start mark Figure 4.76 Example of Main Cycle Temperature/pressure axis scales Select the temperature or pressure axis scale by selecting the Temperature axis scale or Pressure axis scale radio button. Saving chromatograms Save the currently displayed chromatograms in the GC8000. • File names are automatically generated. • Last chromatogram, previous chromatogram, history chromatogram, and baseline chromatogram: Select a pen number. • All SYS1 Chrom. to All SYS6 Chrom.: Select the SYS number assigned to the active GCM. • For Main Cycle, only All GCM Chrom., and All SYS1 Chrom. to All SYS6 Chrom. can be selected. Selection by pen number is not possible. TIP This operation is enabled for user level B or higher. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-56 Figure 4.77 Deleting saved chromatograms Delete a saved chromatogram from the GC8000. • Select delete Chrom.: Select the saved chromatogram you want to delete. TIP This operation is enabled for user level C or higher. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-57 4 Figure 4.78 Deleting a Saved Chromatogram TIP This operation is enabled for user level C or higher. Saving baseline chromatograms Save the currently displayed chromatograms in the GC8000. • File names are automatically generated. • Last chromatogram, previous chromatogram, history chromatogram, and baseline chromatogram: Select a pen number. • All SYS1 Chrom. to All SYS6 Chrom.: Select the SYS number assigned to the active GCM. • For Main Cycle, only All GCM Chrom., and All SYS1 Chrom. to All SYS6 Chrom. can be selected. Selection by pen number is not possible. TIP This operation is enabled for user level C or higher. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-58 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> Figure 4.79 4.5.4 Zoomed View Screen components are as shown below. The latest chromatogram is updated every second. Differential chromatograms are not updated even if the Update the latest chromatogram subject to differentiation parameter is enabled. Move X axis, and unit Move Y axis, and unit Move temperature/ pressure axis, and unit Auto scale ON/OFF Scale up/down Scale Y axis up/down X axis Figure 4.80 X axis scale: Scale up/down X-Y axes Show whole of Scale up/down X-Y axes temperature/pressure axis F0471.ai Example of Zoomed View Represents the elapsed time of chromatogram. Unit: seconds. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-59 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> Y axis scale: Represents the electromotive force of chromatogram. Unit: mV for mV representation, or magnification for gain representation. Temperature/pressure axis scale: Temperature data is in units of deg C and deg F. Pressure data is in units of kPa and psi. Scale up/down X axis buttons, scale up/down Y axis buttons: These buttons scale up /down the X and Y axes, respectively. Scale up/down X-Y axis buttons: Scales up/down the X and Y axes simultaneously. Show whole button: Displays the whole of the chromatogram. Auto scale button: Turns on/off the auto scale function. When this function is turned on, scale up/down settings do not work. Scale up/down temperature/pressure axis button: Scales up/down the temperature and pressure axes. 4.6 Analysis Result Screen This screen displays the measurement results (in graph form, when you select) taken with the active GCM. Press the on the navigation bar to display the analysis result screen. Press this icon. F0472.ai Figure 4.81 Example of Analysis Result Screen The display screen consists of the following screens: Analysis result screen Concentration analysis history screen Retention time history screen Calibration factor history screen The above screens are displayed by pressing the corresponding buttons located in the lower left of the screen: IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 4  <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> Concentration analysis history Analysis result Figure 4.82 4.6.1 4-60 Calibration factor history Retention time history F0473.ai Buttons for Analysis Result Screens Analysis Result Screen Screen components are as shown below. Data display The analysis result screen Analysis result is currently displayed. data selector Figure 4.83 Auto update ON/OFF SYS change tab Table scroll button Display-item selector F0474.ai Analysis Result Screen Layout SYS change tab: Selects the SYS assigned to the active GCM and displays the analysis results on the SYS tab. Table scroll button: Scrolls through the display area. Auto update ON/OFF: When the auto update function is ON, the on-screen data is automatically updated with the latest data when the measurement finishes. When the auto update function is OFF, data update does not occur. Analysis result data selector: Allows for displaying past data. A dialog appears for selecting the start time of the analysis to be displayed. See (A) Selecting analysis result data. Display-item selector: A dialog appears, allowing to select which items to display in the data columns. See (B) Selecting display items. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-61 (A) Selecting analysis result data To select the data to be displayed, select the year/month/day, hour, and time from the dialog below. 4 Figure 4.84 (B) Selecting display items In the dialog below, select the items to be displayed as analysis result data, by adding a check mark. Figure 4.85 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4.6.2 4-62 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> Concentration Analysis History Screen, Retention Time History Screen, and Calibration Factor History Screen A common screen layout is used for the concentration analysis history screen, retention time history screen, and calibration factor history screen. These screens display the changes over time of concentration analysis data, retention time data, and calibration factor data, respectively, as measured by the active GCM. Each screen can contain up to 999 peaks. The maximum displayable number of analysis clock times is limited to 250 for concentration analysis history and retention time history, and to 100 for calibration factor history. Screen components are as shown below. Data display GCM/SYS change tabs Table scroll button History data selector In this condition, Auto update Graph display Graph setup concentration analysis history is displayed ON/OFF Figure 4.86 F0477.ai History Screen Layout GCM/SYS change tabs: Table scroll button: Auto update ON/OFF: Graph setup: Graph display: Either the whole of active GCM, or the SYS assigned to the active GCM, can be selected, so that the history data is displayed on the SYS tab. Scrolls through the display area. When auto update is ON, the on-screen data is automatically updated with the latest data when the measurement finishes. When auto update is OFF, data update does not occur. Sets up a graph of the data to be displayed. Displays the graph configured with the graph setup function. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-63 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> (A) Graph setup Press . Set up a graph as desired. The dialog consists of two pages. 4 Figure 4.87 Page 1 (1) Display Upper/Lower Limit Show or hide the upper limit and lower limit by enabling or disabling, respectively, their check marks. (2) Upper/lower limit settings Set the values of upper limit and lower limit. The setting ranges are as follows: Upper limit: 0 to 12000 Lower limit: 0 to 10000 TIP The upper limit must be greater than the lower limit. (3) Legend Display Define what information to include in legends, by selecting Str.#-Peak#-Peak Name (Unit) or Only Peak Name (Unit). (4) Peak Select Up to six peaks can be displayed. At least one peak must be selected. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  Figure 4.88 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-64 Page 2 (1) Time Axis Range Select the horizontal axis (i.e., time axis) of the graph from the radio buttons: Auto, Man. (Start-End), Man. (Time Span), or Man. (Ana. Times). • Man. (Start-End) Start Time: Press the ▼ button and select the analysis start time (the time to start drawing a graph) from the displayed values. End Time: Press the ▼ button and select the analysis end time (the time to end drawing a graph) from the displayed values. Note: The start time must be earlier than the end time. • Man. (Time Span) End Time: Press the ▼ button and select the analysis end time (the time to end drawing a graph) from the displayed values. Time (Hour): Press the ▼ button and select from the range of 1 to 72 (hours). • Man. (Ana. Times) End Time: Press the ▼ button and select the analysis end time (the time to end drawing a graph) from the displayed values. Ana. Times Press the ▼ button and select from the range of 1 to 250 (analysis times). (2) Vert. Axis Scale Select the vertical scale from the radio buttons: Auto, Man., or Man. (Center Value). • Man: Set the Max. Value and Min. Value. The setting ranges are as follows: Max. Value: 0 to 12000, Min. Value: –2000 to 10000 TIP The upper limit must be greater than the lower limit. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-65 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> • Man. (Center Value) Set the Range, Center Value, and Range (+–,%). The setting ranges are as follows: Range: 0.001 to 9999.999 Center Value: 0.001 to 9999.999 Range (+–,%): 0.01 to 50.00 Vert. Axis Unit: (B) Graph display 4 The graph is displayed based on the setup made in “(A) Graph setup”. Figure 4.89 4.7 Alarm Screen This screen displays information about the alarms that occurred with the GC8000. Press the on the navigation bar to display the alarm screen. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-66 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> Press this icon. F0481.ai Figure 4.90 Example of Alarm Screen The alarm screen consists of the following screens: Alarm status screen Alarm history screen Alarm details screen 4.7.1 Alarm Status Screen Screen components are as shown below. GCM tab Alarm details Alarm status Table scroll button F0482.ai Figure 4.91 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4-67 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> Pressing the alarm status button on the lower left of the screen causes a transition to the alarm status screen. The figure in the column of “GCM” indicates the number of GC module to be occurred the alarm. The brank means the entire hardware alarms are occurred. Pressing the table scroll button causes scrolling through the table display area. Pressing the alarm details button displays the alarm details screen. See 4.7.3 Alarm Details. 4.7.2 Alarm History Screen Screen components are as shown below. Alarm details Alarm history 4 GCM tab Table scroll button Clear alarm history F0483.ai Figure 4.92 Pressing the alarm history button on the lower left of the screen causes a transition to the alarm history screen. The figure in the column of “GCM” indicates the number of GC module to be occurred the alarm. The brank means the entire hardware alarms have been occurred. Pressing the table scroll button causes scrolling through table display area. Pressing the clear alarm history button erases the alarm history. This operation is available if the user level is set to B or higher. Pressing the alarm details button displays the alarm details screen. See 4.7.3 Alarm Details. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4.7.3 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> 4-68 Alarm Details The alarm details screen displays details of alarms. Figure 4.93 4.7.4 Alarm Popup Screen This screen appears automatically when an alarm occurs. Figure 4.94 The user can configure which alarm level triggers the alarm popup screen. See “n Alarm Popup Restriction” on page 4-18. The display sequence is not related to alarm levels. The newest occurrence is added to the top of the table. The table contains a maximum of ten latest alarm occurrence. The table content is updated upon occurrence of an additional alarm. Pressing the Check all button recalls the screen that was displayed immediately before the alarm popup. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  4.8 4-69 <4. GC-HMI (touch panel)> Help Screen The help screen displays explanations of buttons and icons displayed on various screens. 4 Figure 4.95 Example of Help Screen (Analyzer Overview Screen) The help screen can be accessed from the screens listed below. Click the screen. on the respective Analyzer overview screen Analyzer operation screen Analysis result screen Chromatogram Screen Alarm screen Analyzer map screen Setting screen Pressing the BACK button recalls the original screen. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-1 <5. EtherLCD> 5. EtherLCD This section describes the EtherLCD, the general setting of the GC-HMI. EtherLCD consolidates the settings for display of I/O and Ethernet connection status of analyzers under connection; operation of I/O, user program, and detectors; and parameters of hardware configuration, analysis method, and I/O, which are mainly used for maintenance among the general settings from the GC-HMI. This is equivalent to the functions of EtherLCD (display and operation), which is the humanmachine interface of GC1000 Mark II, excluding operation and display of analysis data. Therefore, this function is also called EtherLCD for GC8000. IMPORTANT When you change parameter settings, make sure to push the “Close LCD Emulator” before resetting the analyzer. By closing EtherLCD, the parameters are stored into non-volatile memories. Moreover, when turning off the power after changing the parameter settings, wait at least 1 minute in the Stop mode before doing so. This also applies when the parameter settings are changed from another interface. Status Menu (1/2) A/I Status A/O Status D/I Status D/O Status Remote A/O Status Remote D/O Status Revision number Ethernet Status Alarm Status Figure 5.1 Example of the screen display IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 5  <5. EtherLCD> 5-2 n Overall LCD screen layout The screen display consists of the following five display areas: (a) Time of day area (b) Title area (c) Miscellaneous information area (d) Message, input prompt, input data echo back area (e) Function key description area (b) Title area (a) Time of day area (c) Miscellaneous information area (d) Message, input prompt, input data echo back area (e) Function key description area F0402_1.ai Shared information (a) ＃１/＃２/＃３ ＃４：＃５：＃６ (b) （＃７/＃８）　or (Changes pages with or NEXT （　→） （←→） （←　） PREV key.) (Changes displays with scroll keys and . F0402_2.ai l Display data list table Display item #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 Description Current time: year Current time: month Current time: day Current time: hour Current time: minute Current time: second Current page number Total page number Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit Remarks Year Lower 2 digits of the year 99 00 Month 12 1 Day 31 1 Hour 23 00 Minute 59 00 Second 59 00 Note 1: If display data is outside the limits or unknown, “?” appears in all digits of the item. Note 2: If display data is shown based on certain values (conditions) and the values are outside the limits or unknown, “?” appears in all digits of the item, too. Description of the screen examples on and after the following pages: • Display items vary depending on the setting. • Only EtherLCD screen is displayed. • Only specified function keys whose names are shown above F1 to F6 keys on the screen are available. The number of the keys varies depending on the setting. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5.1 5-3 <5. EtherLCD> User Level Switching Before conducting any settings, the user level requires to be changed. NOTE The user level settings for the Analyzer Operation Data Display and EtherLCD are independent and need to be set separately. Press among menu keys. is pressed when the current user level is A (default), the screen shown in Figure 5.2 is If displayed. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 User Level Switching Password * * * * F1 F2 Figure 5.2 F3 F4 F5 F6 User level switching screen (when the current level is A) This screen is displayed in remote mode. A four-digit numeric password must be entered. (Press key to complete.) (1) When the user level B password (1192) is entered - The user level is set to B. (2) When the user level C password (1603) is entered - The user level is set to C. When displayed. Table 5.1 User level A B C C+ is pressed after entering a password with numeric keys, the following screen is User levels and authorities Authorities Password Only viewing the operation status and analysis results is Not required (default) possible. Analyzer control is not allowed. 1192 Of the available analyzer controls, changing the operation mode, changing the measurement status (excluding command cancellation), and changing the range are possible. Viewing and setting of all analyzer control items are 1603 possible except reanalyzing chromatograms. 1702 Permissions granted to C as well as clearing alarm status, stopping analysis operations, editing and deleting user programs, setting passwords, and reanalyzing chromatograms. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 5  5-4 <5. EtherLCD> If the user level is other than A, the screen shown in Figure 5.3 is displayed. This example shows the case where the current user level is C. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 User Level Switching User Level B User Level A by SET/ENT pressing F1 F2 Figure 5.3 F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the user level switching screen (when the current level is other than A) This screen is displayed in local mode. is pressed, the user level is changed to A. When Passwords can be changed. See the 5.3.11 Password Setting for details. 5.2 Status Display Screen When screen. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 is pressed on the EtherLCD screen, the screen navigates to the Status Display Status Menu 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 (1/2) > - A/I Status - A/O Status - D/I Status - D/O Status - Remote A/O Status - Remote D/O Status - Revision number - Ethernet Status - Alarm Status F1 F2 Figure 5.4 F3 F4 F5 Status menu screen (2/2) > - Standard B.P data - Operation Status F6 The following menu screen is displayed after To display the Status Menu (1/2), press Status Menu F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 is pressed. . TIP • If the AI, AO, D/I and D/O cards are not inserted, the associated menu cannot be selected. • If the Analog output num is 0 on the GCCU Setup screen, the Remote A/O status cannot be selected. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-5 <5. EtherLCD> 5.2.1 A/I Status To display the Analog Input (A/I) status, move the cursor (>) with and press or to the A/I Status row . 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 A/I Status Slot # 1 AI# Name Value 1 a1 0.000 2 0.000 3 0.000 4 0.000 5 Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.5 Table Slot# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the A/I status screen F1 (Menu): F4 (Table): F6 (Slot #): Displays the Status Menu screen. Displays the A/I Setup screen (see the 5.4.18 A/I Setting). Sets a slot number (applicable only when multiple analog input cards are inserted). TIP • On the initial screen, the smallest slot number among those of the A/I cards inserted is displayed. • For the slot number setting, only slot numbers of A/I cards can be accepted. • The Value data are refreshed automatically at a fixed interval (1 second). If no A/I cards are inserted, the Status Menu screen displays “Not load” on the bottom. Display Item Name Slot # Slot number AI # A/I channel number Name A/I name Value A/I value Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 5 1 4 -0.25 1.25 Unit Remarks Absolute slot number Relative channel number 8 single-byte alphanumeric characters If the value stored in the database is 10000, it is shown as 1.0000. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-6 <5. EtherLCD> 5.2.2 A/O Status To display the Analog Output (A/O) status, move the cursor (>) with row and press or to the A/O Status . 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 A/O Status Slot # 1 AO# Output item Value 1 Det 1-1 AO Chromatogram 0.000 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0.000 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0.000 4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0.000 5 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0.000 6 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0.000 7 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0.000 8 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0.000 Menu Table Slot# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.6 Example of the A/O status screen F1 (Menu): F4 (Table): F6 (Slot #): Displays the Status Menu screen. Displays the A/O Setup screen. Sets a slot number (applicable only when multiple analog output cards are inserted). TIP • The Value data are refreshed automatically at a fixed interval (1 second). • On the initial screen, the smallest slot number among those of the A/O cards inserted is displayed. • For the slot number setting, only slot numbers of A/O cards can be accepted. If no A/O cards are inserted, the Status Menu screen displays “Not load” on the bottom. Display Item Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Slot # Slot number 1 5 AO # A/O channel number 1 8 Stream number on 1 31 the output Peak number on the 1 999 output Output item A/O output peak name Analysis results on 0.000 999.999 the output 0.000 9999.999 Analysis value unit on the output Detector number Value A/O value -0.25 1.25 Unit Remarks Absolute slot number Relative channel number Relative peak number 8 single-byte alphanumeric characters When the unit is % For other units * The number of effective digits is 6. See the Measuring unit of the Peak Setup-Specific screen. * Only the upper 5 characters are displayed. None, 1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 2-2, 3-1, 3-2 * Oven number and relative detector number If the value stored in the database is 10000, it is shown as 1.0000. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-7 <5. EtherLCD> 5.2.3 D/I Status The D/I (contact input) status is displayed on the screen. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/I Status Slot # 1 DI# Name Value Processing name 1 a1 Open Stream sequence 2 Open No assignment 3 Open No assignment 4 Open No assignment 5 Open No assignment 6 Open No assignment 7 Open No assignment 8 Open No assignment Menu Table Slot# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.7 Example of the D/I status screen F1 (Menu): F4 (Table): F6 (Slot #): TIP • • • • 5 Displays the Status Menu screen. Displays the D/I Setup screen. Sets a slot number. The Value data are refreshed automatically at a fixed interval (1 second). On the initial screen, the smallest slot number among those of the D/I cards inserted is displayed. For the slot number setting, only slot numbers of D/I or DI/O cards can be accepted. Up to CH3 are displayed for DI/O cards. If no D/I cards are inserted, the Status Menu screen displays “Not load” on the bottom. Display Item Name Slot # Slot number DI # D/I contact number Name D/I name Status Processing name Status Processing name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 5 1 8 Unit Remarks Absolute slot number Relative channel number 8 single-byte alphanumeric characters Open/Close No assignment, Stream sequence, Stream, Range change Cal/Val, Operation mode change, Alarm process IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-8 <5. EtherLCD> 5.2.4 D/O Status n D/O Status screen (Normal Output) The D/O (contact output) status is displayed on the screen. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/O Status Slot # 1 DO# Output item Status 1 Stream STR1 Off 2 No processing Off 3 No processing Off 4 No processing Off 5 No processing Off Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.8 F1 (Menu): F4 (Table): F6 (Slot #): TIP • • • • Table Slot# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the D/O status screen Displays the Status Menu screen. Displays the D/O Setup screen. Sets a slot number. The Status is refreshed automatically at a fixed interval (1 second). On the initial screen, the smallest slot number among those of the D/O cards inserted is displayed. For the slot number setting, only slot numbers of D/O or DI/O cards can be accepted. Up to CH3 are displayed for DI/O cards. If no D/O cards are inserted, the Status Menu screen displays “Not load” on the bottom. n D/O Status screen (Stream Identification) 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/O Status Slot # 1 DO# Output item Status 1 Stream identifying flag Off 2 Stream identification Off 3 Stream identification Off 4 No processing Off 5 No processing Off Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.9 F1 (Menu): F4 (Table): F6 (Slot #): Table Slot# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the D/O Status screen (Stream Identification) Displays the Status Menu screen. Displays the D/O Setup screen. Sets a slot number. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-9 <5. EtherLCD> TIP • • • • • • The Status is refreshed automatically at a fixed interval (1 second). On the initial screen, the smallest slot number among those of the D/O cards inserted is displayed. For the slot number setting, only slot numbers of D/O cards can be accepted. Up to CH3 are displayed for DI/O cards. One GCM stream identifying signal can be applied to multiple D/O cards. In the case where the Stream identification has been set on the GCM Setup screen, the D/O is used for that purpose. Example: Stream identification setup for the GCM1 (where the first number of the stream identification D/O is 1) Slot Stream identification 1 DO1 Stream Up to 3 streams identifying flag Stream Up to 7 streams identifying flag Stream Up to 15 streams identifying flag Stream Up to 31 streams identifying flag DO2 Stream identification Stream identification Stream identification Stream identification Display Item Name Slot # Slot number DO # D/O contact number Output item Status Note: DO3 Stream identification Stream identification Stream identification Stream identification 2 DO4 DO5 DO1 Normal output Normal output Normal output Stream identification Stream identification Stream identification Normal output Normal output Stream identification Stream identification Normal output Stream identification Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit Remarks 1 5 Absolute slot number 1 5 Number Relative contact number No assignment Stream sequence Stream Operation mode Alarm Timing Cal/Val Str valve select * See Note. Off, On 1: The selected GCM number and stream sequence number are displayed. 2: The selected stream number is displayed 3: The selected GCM number and operation mode are displayed. 4: The selected GCM number and alarm level/concentration alarm are displayed. 5: The selected SYS number, SYS method and sequence order selection are displayed. 6: The selected GCM number and calibration/validation number are displayed. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 5  <5. EtherLCD> 5.2.5 5-10 Remote A/O Status The remote A/O status is displayed. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Remote A/O Status (1/5) R-AO# Output item Value 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0.000 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0.000 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0.000 4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0.000 5 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0.000 6 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0.000 7 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0.000 8 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0.000 Menu Table F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Note: Figure 5.10 F1 (Menu): F4 (Table): Example of the remote A/O status screen Displays the Status Menu screen. Displays the Remote A/O Setup screen. TIP • If the Analog output num is 0 on the GCCU Setup screen, this screen will not be displayed. • Only the Value data are refreshed automatically at a fixed interval (1 second). When the A/O output is updated (i.e., the A/O screen update flag is 1), all the data are refreshed. • If an unassigned stream number or an unassigned peak number is specified, “?” appears in all digits of the peak number, output item, analysis result value and its unit of the stream. Display Item Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit Remarks R-AO # Remote A/O channel 1 36 Number Channel number number Stream number on 1 31 Number the output Peak number on the 1 999 Number output Display item Remote A/O output Alphanumeric: 8 charactors (8 peak name bytes) Analysis result value 0.000 999.999 % When the unit is % on the output 0.000 9999.999 ppm When the unit is ppm 0.000 9999.999 No unit * The number of effective digits is 6. Analysis result value 0.000 999.999 When the unit is % on the output 0.000 9999.999 For other units * The number of effective digits is 6. Value Remote A/O value –0.25 1.25 If the value stored in the database is 10000, it is shown as 1.0000. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-11 <5. EtherLCD> 5.2.6 Remote D/O Status The remote D/O status is displayed. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Remote D/O Status (1/4) R-DO# Status 1 Off 2 Off 3 Off 4 Off 5 Off 6 Off 7 Off 8 Off Menu F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.11 Example of the remote D/O status screen F1 (Menu): 5 Displays the Status Menu screen. TIP The Status is refreshed automatically at a fixed interval (1 second). Display Item Name R-DO # Remote D/O contact number Status 5.2.7 Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit Remarks 1 32 Number Contact number Off, On Revision Number The revisions of the main CPU and the HMI are displayed. n Revision Number screen (Main) To display the revisions of the main CPU and the HMI. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Revision number Main CPU (CPLD) Rev 0.00.01 (Rev -.- -) HMI Rev -. - -. - - Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.12 F1 (Menu): F2 (Main): I/O Oven F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the revision number screen (Main) Displays the Status Menu screen. Displays the Revision Number screen (Main). IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <5. EtherLCD> 5-12 F3 (I/O): Displays the Revision Number screen (I/O). F4 (Oven): Displays the Revision Number screen (Oven). F6 (Oven #): Display Item Main CPU HMI Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 0.01.01 9.99.99 Main CPU (CPLD) 0.01 Unit Remarks The revision number for the HMI is not stored in the database. If the revision data is not existed, the revision number is shown with “-”. If the revision data is not existed, the revision number is shown with “-”. Unit Remarks Not provided, DI, DO, DI/O, AI, AO, COM, UP The revision number for the HMI is not stored in the database. If the revision data is not existed, the revision number is shown with “-”. 9.99 n Revision Number screen (I/O) To display the revision numbers of the I/Os, press F3 (I/O). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Revision number Slot 1 ( UP ) Rev 0.00.01 (Rev -.- -) Slot 2 ( AO ) Rev -. - -. - - (Rev 0.01) Slot 3 ( NONE ) Rev -. - -. - - (Rev -.- -) Slot 4 ( NONE ) Rev -. - -. - - (Rev -.- -) Slot 5 ( NONE ) Rev -. - -. - - (Rev -.- -) Menu Main Oven F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.13 Example of the revision number screen (I/O) Display Item Name Slot1 to Slot5 Names of Slot1 to Slot5 Rev *1 (Rev ) *2 *1: *2: Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 0.01.01 0.01 9.99.99 99.99 The CPU revision is displayed for a COM or UP card. The CPLD revision is displayed for an A/I card. The CPU revision is displayed for an A/O card. No revision is displayed for a D/I, D/O, or DI/O card (there are no revisions). IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-13 <5. EtherLCD> n Revision Number screen (Oven) The revision number of the oven (isothermal oven or programmed-temperature oven) is displayed. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Revision number Oven # 1 CPU (CPLD) Rev 0.00.01 (Rev -.- -) TEMP (CPLD) (Rev -.- -) Det 1 (FPGA) (Rev -.- -) Det 2 (FPGA) (Rev -.- -) 5 Menu Main I/O Oven# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.14 Example of the revision number screen (Oven) To display the revision number of the other oven, press F6 (Oven #). Press the Set/Ent key after entering the oven number with numeric keys. Display Item Name Oven # Oven number Oven CPU Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 3 CPU (CPLD) Oven CPU (CPLD) TEMP (CPLD) DET1 (FPGA) DET2 (FPGA) 5.2.8 Unit Remarks The revision number for the HMI is not stored in the database. If the revision data is not existed, the revision number is shown with “-”. If the revision data is not existed, the revision number is shown with “-”. Ethernet Status F1 (Menu): F4 (Modbus): F5 (TCP): F6 (MAC): Displays the Status Menu screen. Displays the Modbus IP Address screen. Displays the TCP/IP Address screen. Displays the MAC Address screen. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-14 <5. EtherLCD> n TCP/IP Address screen The TCP/IP address is displayed. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Ethernet Status TCP PCAS1/TCP1 PCAS1/TCP2 PCAS2/TCP1 PCAS2/TCP2 Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.15 Disconne Disconne Disconne Disconne 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 (1/2) 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0 0 0 0 Ethernet Status (2/2) TCP HMI/TCP1 Disconne 0. 0. 0. 0 HMI/TCP2 Disconne 0. 0. 0. 0 EtherLCD Disconne 0. 0. 0. 0 GCCU Disconne 0. 0. 0. 0 MODBUS MAC Menu F3 F4 F5 F6 F1 Example of the TCP/IP address screen F2 F3 MODBUS F4 F5 MAC F6 TIP The TCP/IP address is refreshed automatically at a fixed interval (1 second). Display Item Name TCP TCP connection flag Set Lower Limit Upper Limit TCP/IP address Unit Remarks Disconnected Connected (normal) Connected (forced) n MODBUS IP Address screen To display the MODBUS IP address, press F4 (Modbus). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Ethernet Status (1/4) MODBUS SERVER MODBUS-1 Disconne 0. 0. 0. 0 MODBUS-2 Disconne 0. 0. 0. 0 MODBUS-3 Disconne 0. 0. 0. 0 MODBUS-4 Disconne 0. 0. 0. 0 Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.16 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Ethernet Status (2/4) MODBUS CLIENT MODBUS-1 None 0. 0. 0. 0 MODBUS-2 None 0. 0. 0. 0 MODBUS-3 None 0. 0. 0. 0 MODBUS-4 None 0. 0. 0. 0 MODBUS-5 None 0. 0. 0. 0 MODBUS-6 None 0. 0. 0. 0 MODBUS-7 None 0. 0. 0. 0 MODBUS-8 None 0. 0. 0. 0 TCP MAC Menu F3 F4 F5 F6 F1 Example of the Modbus IP address screen F2 F3 F4 TCP F5 MAC F6 TIP The MODBUS IP address is refreshed automatically at a fixed interval (1 second). IP addresses for up to MODBUS-20 are displayed (four pages in total). The MODBUS communication status with the registered GC is displayed together with the IP address of the GC. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-15 <5. EtherLCD> Display Item Name MODBUS MODBUS client connection status Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit MODBUS IP address Remarks None Connected Disconnected n MAC Address screen To display the MAC address, press F6 (MAC). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Ethernet Status MAC MAC address A 00 : 00 : 00 : 00 : 00 : 00 MAC address B 00 : 00 : 00 : 00 : 00 : 00 Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.17 Display Item MAC address A, MAC address B 5.2.9 5 MODBUS TCP F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the MAC address screen Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit Remarks Alarm Status The detailed contents of the alarm can be indicated at the GC-HMI.(Refer to “4.7 Alarm Screen”) Pressing the function key “F2” causes a transition to the alarm history screen. TIP • The screen for GCM#1 to 6 indicates the alarm to be occurred at each GC module. It for GCM#0 displays the entire hardware alarm. • The display can be scrolled vertically by the alarm row using the vertical scroll keys. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-16 <5. EtherLCD> n Alarm Status screen 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Alarm Status Total 1 GCM # 0 ALM # Contents Date Time 31 Card ID error 11/11 14:10 Menu History GCM# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.18 Example of the alarm status screen F1 (Menu): Displays the Status Menu screen. F2 (History): Displays the Alarm Historical Record screen. F6 (GCM #): Specifies a GCM number. TIP This operation is possible in Manual status. Alarms for the entire unit can be cleared when all the GCMs are in Manual status. TIP • The alarms are indicated in numerical order. Display Item Name Total Total number of the current alarms GCM # GCM number ALM # Alarm number Contents Date Time Date Time: Month Date Time: Day Date Time: Hour Date Time: Minute Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 0 1 6 400 1 1 00 00 12 31 23 59 Unit Remarks 0: Alarm for the entire unit Refer to “7.1.4 Alarm Contents” Month Day Hour Minute IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-17 <5. EtherLCD> n Alarm Historical Record To display the alarm history, press F2 (History). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Alarm Historical Record Total 1 GCM # 0 Date Time ALM # Contents 11/11 14:10 1 31 Card ID error 10 5 Alarm F1 F2 Figure 5.19 Auto Clean GCM# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the alarm historical record F1 (Alarm): F3 (Auto): F5 (Clean): Displays the Alarm Status screen. Starts to refresh the alarm status automatically at an interval of 1 second. Flushes the alarm history buffer and starts the Auto refresh. For this operation, the user level C or higher is required. F6 (GCM #): Specifies a GCM number. TIP • The newer data are shown in upper rows in order. • Auto refresh is executed as long as the top data is the newest upon the occurrence of an alarm incident. • Between the Date Time and ALM #, the alarm status is shown as 1 (On) or 0 (Off). Display Item Name Total Total number of alarms in the history data table GCM # GCM number Date Time Date Time: Month Date Time: Day Date Time: Hour Date Time: Minute Alarm status ALM # Alarm number Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 0 1 1 00 00 6 12 31 23 59 1 600 Unit Remarks Month Day Hour Minute 0: Alarm for the entire unit 1: Alarm activated, 0: Alarm deactivated Refer to “7.1.4 Alarm Contents” Alphanumeric: 12 characters Contents Alarm information 1 Alarm information 2 0 0 0xFFFF 0xFFFF * The first 12 characters are shown when the length exceeds the limit. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <5. EtherLCD> 5.2.10 5-18 Standard B.P data 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Standard B.P data 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Standard B.P data (2/7) Stream # 1 Stream # 1 % Elapsed time B.P % Elapsed time B.P % Elapsed time B.P % Elapsed time B.P 0.5 64.0 77.1 8 126.8 153.3 16 157.9 177.9 24 184.9 196.6 1 79.7 100.3 9 130.8 156.8 17 162.5 181.1 25 187.4 198.3 2 86.9 114.7 10 135.8 161.0 18 165.8 183.4 26 190.4 200.3 3 98.8 128.2 11 139.0 163.6 19 167.8 184.8 27 193.3 202.3 4 104.6 133.5 12 142.9 166.7 20 170.6 186.8 28 195.2 203.6 5 109.7 138.2 13 147.8 170.5 21 174.0 189.1 29 196.8 204.7 6 115.7 143.6 14 151.7 173.5 22 178.3 192.1 30 198.6 205.9 7 122.5 149.5 15 154.8 175.7 23 182.1 194.7 31 200.8 207.4 Menu GCM# Menu GCM# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.20 Example of the standard B.P data screen F1 (Menu): (1/7) Displays the Status Menu screen. • Display data are not refreshed automatically. Display Item Name Stream # Stream number % Distill % Elapsed time B.P 5.2.11 Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit Remarks 1 31 0.5 99.5 % 0.5, 1 to 99 and 99.5 0.0 21600.0 Seconds –999.9 9999.9 The unit depends on the Temperature unit set on the SIMDIS Setup screen. Reference: The actual possible value range is from –259.0οC to 1013.0οC or –434.2οF to 1855.4οF. * οF = 1.8 × οC + 32 Operation Status To show the Status Menu (1/2), press . n Operation Status screen (Total Operation Time) 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Operation Status > - Total operation time 0 h Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.21 Oven StrV Det F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the operation status screen (Total Operation Time) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-19 <5. EtherLCD> F1 (Menu): F3 (Oven): F4 (StrV): F5 (Det): Displays the Table Menu screen. Displays the Valve Operation Count screen. Displays the Stream Valve Operation Count screen. Displays the Detector Operation Count screen. TIP • Display data are not refreshed automatically. • For the operation, the user level C or higher is required. Display Item Total Operation Time Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit 0 99999999 Hours ○ Remarks 5 n Operation Status screen Press F3 (Oven). l Valve Operation Count 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Operation Status (1/2) Oven #1 > - Valve 1-1 0 - Valve 1-2 * * * * * * * * - Valve 1-3 * * * * * * * * - Valve 1-4 * * * * * * * * - Valve 1-5 * * * * * * * * - Valve 1-6 * * * * * * * * - Valve 1-7 * * * * * * * * Menu GC F1 F2 Figure 5.22 F1 (Menu): F2 (GC): F4 (StrV): F5 (Det): F6 (Oven #): 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Operation Status (2/2) Oven #1 > - ATM 1-1 0 - ATM 1-2 * * * * * * * * - P. Valve for Cooling * * * * * * * * - Vortex 0 StrV Det Oven# Menu GC F3 F4 F5 F6 F1 F2 Example of the valve operation count screen F3 StrV F4 Det F5 Oven# F6 Displays the Table Menu screen. Displays the Total Operation Time screen. Displays the Stream Valve Operation Count screen. Displays the Detector Operation Count screen. Specifies an oven number. If no valves are installed, the data will be shown as * (asterisk). TIP • Display data are not refreshed automatically. • For the operation, the user level C or higher is required. Display Item Name Oven # Oven number Valve N-1 to Valve N-1 Valve N-7 Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit 1 3 0 99999999 Times ○ Remarks IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-20 <5. EtherLCD> l Valve Operation Count (others) To show the Operation Status screen (2/2), press . TIP • Display data are not refreshed automatically. • For the operation, the user level C or higher is required. • If no ATM valve, P. valve for cooling or vortex is installed, the data will be shown as * (asterisk). Display Item Name Oven # Oven number ATM valve N-1, N-2 P. valve for cooling Vortex Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit 1 3 0 99999999 Times ○ ○ 0 99999999 Times ○ 0 99999999 Hours Remarks n Operation Status screen (Stream Valve Operation Count) Press F4 (StrV). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Operation Status StrV # 1 > - Stream valve 0 Menu GC F1 F2 Figure 5.23 F1 (Menu): F2 (GC): F3 (Oven): F5 (Det): F6 (StrV #): Oven Det StrV# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the operation status screen (Stream Valve Operation Count) Displays the Table Menu screen. Displays the Total Operation Time screen. Displays the Valve Operation Count screen. Displays the Detector Operation Count screen. Specifies a stream valve number. TIP • Display data are not refreshed automatically. • For the operation, the user level C or higher is required. Display Item Name StrV # Stream valve number Stream valve Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 31 ○ 0 99999999 Unit Remarks Times IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-21 <5. EtherLCD> n Operation Status screen (Detector ON Time) Press F5 (Det). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Operation Status Oven #1 Det #1 > - 1st action time 0 h - 2nd action time * * * * * * * * 5 Menu GC F1 F2 Figure 5.24 F1 (Menu): F2 (GC): F3 (Oven): F4 (StrV): F5 (Oven #): F6 (Det #): Oven StrV Oven# Det# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the operation status screen (Detector ON Time) Displays the Table Menu screen. Displays the Total Operation Time screen. Displays the Valve Operation Count screen. Displays the Stream Valve Operation Count screen. Specifies an oven number. Specifies a detector number. TIP Display data are not refreshed automatically. If the detector type is TCD or FID, the 2nd action time will be shown as * (asterisk). • If no detectors are installed, the data will be shown as * (asterisk). Display Item Name Oven # Oven number Det # Detector number 1st action time, 2nd action time Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit 1 3 1 2 0 99999999 Hours ○ Remarks IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5.3 5-22 <5. EtherLCD> Operation Display screen Pressing the Operation menu key navigates to the Operation Display screen. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Operation Menu (1/2) > - A/O Chromatogram Operation - A/O Operation - D/O Operation - Remote A/O Operation - Remote D/O Operation - User Program Operation - SD card Operation - Auto Tuning Operation - Det Adjustment F1 F2 Figure 5.25 F3 F4 F5 Operation menu screen 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Operation Menu (2/2) > - Status Switching - Password Setup F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 To show the Menu screen below, press the Next key. TIP A/O Operation, D/O Operation, Remote A/O Operation, Remote D/O Operation, SD Card Operation and Auto Tuning Operation are selectable only when all the GCMs are in Manual status and in Stop mode. • The Det Adjustment screen for the detector with the smallest number is displayed. • If the Analog output num is 0 on the GCCU screen, the Remote A/O Operation status cannot be selected. • During auto tuning, the screen navigates automatically to the Auto Tuning Operation screen. 5.3.1 A/O Chromatogram Operation 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 A/O Chromatogram Operation Oven #1 Det #1 ( TCD ) Auto gain None Whole gain value 0 Auto zero Off Auto zero value 0.0000 mV Auto zero time 0.0 s Menu A.Zero C.Zero Table Oven# Det# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.26 Example of the A/O chromatogram operation screen F1 (Menu): F2 (A.Zero): F3 (C.Zero): F4 (Table): F5 (Oven #): F6 (Det #): Displays the Operation Menu screen. Executes the Manual zero. Clears values to zero. Displays the Det Status Setup screen. Sets an oven number. Sets a detector number. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-23 <5. EtherLCD> • Pressing F2 (A.Zero) sets the current detector output value to 0 mV exclusively for the A/O chromatogram. The screen then displays “Auto zero executed.” • Pressing F3 (C.Zero) displays “Zero value clear executed.” • The screen for Oven 1 and Det 1 is displayed as the initial screen. Display Item Name Oven # Oven number Det # Detector number Detector type Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 3 1 2 Auto gain ○ Whole gain value Auto zero ○ Auto zero value Auto zero time 5.3.2 0 15 –1000.0000 1000.0000 0 21600.0 Unit Remarks None TCD FID FID-MC FPD None (default) Individual gain Whole gain* * Exclusively for the A/O chromatogram Automatic feed (default) Auto zero value Disabled Former chromatogram standard value If the value is 0.0 seconds, the value is set to the zero value automatically obtained at the start of the analysis cycle A/O Operation Navigating to the A/O Operation screen sets the mode to A/O Manual and all the outputs of 32 A/O channels become 4 mA. On the A/O Operation screen, setting commands are available for any of the up to 32 A/O channels. Navigating to other screens cancels the A/O Manual mode, and according to the settings, outputs are made from each A/O channel. To set the output value of an AO, select the A/O number with the cursor, enter the set value and press the Set/Ent key. Note that this operation must be done in Manual status and in Stop mode. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 A/O Operation Slot #1 AO# Set value > - 1 0.0000 - 2 0.0000 - 3 0.0000 - 4 0.0000 - 5 0.0000 - 6 0.0000 - 7 0.0000 - 8 0.0000 Menu Slot# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.27 Example of the A/O operation screen F1 (Menu): F6 (Slot#): Displays the Operation Menu screen. Sets a slot number. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 5  <5. EtherLCD> 5-24 TIP For this operation, the user level C or higher is required. • On the initial screen, the smallest slot number among those of the A/O cards inserted is displayed. • For the slot number setting, only slot numbers of A/O cards can be accepted. Display Item Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit Remarks Slot Slot number 1 5 Absolute slot number AO # A/O channel number 1 8 Number Relative channel number Set value ○ –0.2500 1.2500 After the value is set, 0 to 1 is output as 4 to 20 mA. 5.3.3 D/O Operation Navigating to the D/O Operation screen sets the mode to D/O Manual and all the D/O contacts (up to 25) are turned off. On the D/O Operation screen, both the On and Off commands are available. Navigating to other screens cancels the D/O Manual mode, and according to the settings, each D/O contact is turned On or Off. To change the D/O status to On or Off, select the D/O number with the cursor and press the Set/ Ent key. Note that this operation must be done in Manual status and in Stop mode. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/O Operation Slot #1 DO# Status > - 1 On - 2 Off - 3 Off - 4 Off - 5 Off Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.28 F1 (Menu): F6 (Slot #): Slot# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the D/O Operation screen Displays the Operation Menu screen. Sets a slot number. TIP For this operation, the user level C or higher is required. • On the initial screen, the smallest slot number among those of the D/O cards inserted is displayed. • For the slot number setting, only slot numbers of D/O cards can be accepted. Display Item Name Slot Slot number DO # D/O contact number Status Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit Remarks 1 5 Absolute slot number 1 5 Number Relative D/O contact number ○ Off, On IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <5. EtherLCD> 5.3.4 5-25 Remote A/O Operation Navigating to the Remote A/O Operation screen sets the mode to Remote A/O Manual and the outputs of all 36 remote A/O channels become 4 mA. On the Remote A/O Operation screen, a command to set values between 0 and 1 is available for each of the up to 36 remote A/O channels. Navigating to other screens cancels the Remote A/O Manual mode, and according to the settings, outputs are made from each remote A/O channel. To set the output value of a remote AO, select the remote A/O number with the cursor, enter the set value and press the Set/Ent key. Note that this operation must be done in Manual status and in Stop mode. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Remote A/O Operation (1/1) R-AO# Set value > - 1 0.0000 - 2 0.0000 - 3 0.0000 - 4 0.0000 - 5 0.0000 - 6 0.0000 - 7 0.0000 - 8 0.0000 - 9 0.0000 Menu F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.29 Example of the remote A/O operation screen F1 (Menu): 5 Displays the Operation Menu screen. TIP For this operation, the user level C or higher is required. • If the Analog output num is 0 on the GCCU Setup screen, this screen will not be displayed. Display Item Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit Remarks R-AO # Remote A/O channel 1 36 Number Remote A/O channel number number Set value ○ –0.2500 1.2500 After the value is set, 0 to 1 is output as 4 to 20 mA. * Internally, the value is written in the MODBUS remote A/O data table. * The initial value is 0.0000. 5.3.5 Remote D/O Operation Navigating to the remote D/O Operation screen sets the mode to Remote D/O Manual and all the remote D/O contacts are turned Off. On the Remote D/O Operation screen, both the On and Off commands are available. Navigating to other screens cancels the Remote D/O Manual mode, and according to the settings, all remote D/O contacts are turned On or Off. To change the remote D/O status to On or Off, select the remote D/O number with the cursor and press the Set/Ent key. Note that this operation must be done in Manual status and in Stop mode. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-26 <5. EtherLCD> 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Remote D/O Operation (1/1) R-DO# Status > - 1 On - 2 Off - 3 Off - 4 Off - 5 Off - 6 Off - 7 Off - 8 Off - 9 Off Menu F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.30 Example of the remote D/O operation screen F1 (Menu): Displays the Operation Menu screen. TIP For this operation, the user level C or higher is required. Display Item Name R-DO # Remote D/O contact number Status 5.3.6 Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit Remarks 1 32 Number Up to 32 contacts ○ ○ Off, On User Program Operation n User Program Operation screen The screen displays the execution status and current status of the user program (end of peak detect script). The change of the execution status and the forced stop of the script are also possible via this screen. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 User Program Operation (1/9) Enable Status > - SYS#1 Disable Stopping - SYS#2 Disable Stopping - SYS#3 Disable Stopping - SYS#4 Disable Stopping - SYS#5 Disable Stopping - SYS#6 Disable Stopping Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.31 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 User Program Operation (2/9) Enable Status > - Period#1 Disable Stopping - Period#2 Disable Stopping - Period#3 Disable Stopping - Period#4 Disable Stopping - Period#5 Disable Stopping - Period#6 Disable Stopping - Period#7 Disable Stopping - Period#8 Disable Stopping Edit Stop Menu F3 F4 F5 F6 F1 F2 Example of the user program operation screen Edit F3 F4 Stop F5 F6 The screen displays the execution status and current status of the user program (period script). The change of the execution status and the forced stop of the script are also possible via this screen. F1 (Menu): F3 (Edit): Displays the Status Menu screen. Displays the User Program Edit screen. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-27 <5. EtherLCD> F5 (Stop): Executes the forced stop command. • After selecting a SYS number, the option displayed is Enable if the execution status is currently disabled, and Disable if it is currently enabled. • Pressing F5 (Stop) displays Input script number (SYS #). Entering the target script number for the end of peak detect executes the forced stop command. TIP The Status is refreshed automatically at a fixed interval (1 second). Display Item Enable Name Status Set Lower Limit Upper Limit ○ ○ Unit Disable Enable Stopping Executing Remarks 5 n User Program Edit screen Press F3 (Edit). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 User Program Edit Type #1 NO #1 - AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA - AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA - AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA - AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA - AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA - AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA - AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA - AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA > - AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA Main Save Add Del Type# NO# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.32 Example of the user program edit screen F1 (Menu): F2 (Save): F3 (Add): F4 (Del): F5 (Type #): F6 (No #): Displays the Operation Menu screen. Saves the script file. Add a command line. Delete a command line. Specifies a type number. Specifies a SYS number for the end of peak detect script type; or a period script number for the period script type. TIP • For this operation, the user level C+ is required. • The following values can be entered: 0 to 9, A to Z, ( ) * / + – =, space and backspace. • • Type number 1: End of peak detect script 2: Period script Up to 8 lines each of which consists of 32 characters are displayed. Note that the maximum number of characters per line of a script is 128; therefore, if a script line contains over 32 characters, it is split into two or more lines on the display. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <5. EtherLCD> 5-28 • Both 0x0A and 0x0D0A can be used for script delimiters. • Scripts can be scrolled with the Up/Down keys. • Pressing the Set/Ent key or F3 (Save) after setting the cursor on the target row when the execution status is enabled, the screen displays the error message “No execution because of executing.” Display Item Name Type # Type Number Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 2 No # Script ○ 1 1 6 64 Unit Remarks End of peak detect script Period script For the type number 1 For the type number 2 Alphanumeric: 32 characters Edit examples: (1) Displays a script. Figure 5.33 User program edit screen (Example of editing 1) (2) Presses the Set/Ent key. Figure 5.34 User program edit screen (Example of editing 2) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <5. EtherLCD> 5-29 (3) Moves the cursor to the left. (V key) 5 Figure 5.35 User program edit screen (Example of editing 3) (4) Edits the script. Figure 5.36 User program edit screen (Example of editing 4) (5) Then, presses the Set/Ent key. Figure 5.37 User program edit screen (Example of editing 5) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <5. EtherLCD> 5-30 (6) Edits the script. Figure 5.38 User program edit screen (Example of editing 6) (7) Then, presses the Set/Ent key. Figure 5.39 User program edit screen (Example of editing 7) (8) Presses F4 to delete a line. Figure 5.40 User program edit screen (Example of editing 8) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-31 <5. EtherLCD> (9) Presses F3 to add a line. 5 Figure 5.41 5.3.7 User program edit screen (Example of editing 9) SD Card Operation 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 SD card Operation Is the SD card formatted? Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.42 Format F3 F4 F5 SD card operation screen F6 F1 (Menu): Displays the Operation Menu screen. F3 (Format): Executes the SD card formatting. TIP For this operation, the user level C or higher is required and the operation mode is in Stop mode. • Pressing F3 (Format) executes formatting. If it is finished successfully, the screen displays “It succeeded in the format”; otherwise “It failed in the format.” IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-32 <5. EtherLCD> 5.3.8 Auto Tuning Operation 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Auto Tuning Operation Auto Tuning Stopping > - Oven number ? - SYS number 0 - SYS Method 0 Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.43 F1 (Menu): F3 (Start): F4 (Stop): Start Stop F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the auto tuning operation screen Displays the Operation Menu screen. Starts auto tuning. Ends auto tuning. TIP • For this operation, the user level C or higher is required. • The operation is possible when all the GCMs are in Manual status and the operation mode is Stop. In addition, the temperature controller of the associated oven needs to be On. • During auto tuning, the oven number, SYS number and SYS method cannot be changed. • After "Stopping" message is outputted, temperature may exceed preset temperature temporarily. • At the start of auto tuning, a validation check is implemented on the oven number and the SYS number and method. If any invalidity is found, auto tuning will not be executed. The screen then displays the message “The setting is different.” * If the SYS number does not belong to the specified oven, it results in an error. * Even when both the SYS number and method are zero, auto tuning will still be executed. • If the temperature controller of the oven is off when auto tuning is started by pressing F3 (Start), the screen displays the error message “Cannot start auto tuning.” During auto tuning, pressing F1 (Menu) will not navigate to the Operation Menu screen. It displays the message “Cannot operate because of Auto Tuning.” Display Item Auto tuning Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Oven number SYS number ○ ○ 1 (0), 1 3 6 SYS method ○ (0), 1 6 Unit Remarks Stopping, Executing * If the operation mode for the SYS number is Auto Tuning, “Executing” is displayed. SYS numbers that are not registered in the GCM cannot be entered. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5.3.9 5-33 <5. EtherLCD> Detector Adjustment n Detector type: TCD - Reset screen 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Det Adjustment Oven # 1 Det # 1 ( TCD ) > - Det operation Off Reset status Initialized 5 Menu Adjust Reset Oven# Det# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.44 Example of the detector type: TCD - reset screen F1 (Menu): F2 (Adjust): F4 (Reset): Displays the Table Menu screen. Displays the Det Adjustment (Execution) screen. Initializes voltage values. Pressing F4 displays the options Abort and Initialize. If the Set/Ent key is pressed after the selection of Initialize, the TCD voltage value is set to its minimum value 5.0 V. F5 (Oven #): Sets an oven number. F6 (Det #): Sets a detector number. • The TCD voltage value is read at a one-second interval, when, if the value is 0.0 V, the status is refreshed with Initialized; otherwise Setting done. • The Det operation is refreshed at a one-second interval. • The numbers of ovens to which no detectors are installed cannot be set via F5. Display Item Name Oven # Oven number Det # Detector number Detector type Det operation Reset status Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 3 1 2 ○ ○ Unit Remarks TCD Off, On * For this operation, the user level C or higher is required and the operation mode must be Stop in Manual status. Initialized, Setting done * If the voltage value is zero, Initialized is displayed; otherwise Setting done. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <5. EtherLCD> 5-34 n Detector type: TCD - Execution screen Press F2 (Adjust). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Det Adjustment Oven # 1 Det # 1 ( TCD ) > - Det operation Off Voltage value 0.0 V Cuttent value 0.0 mA - Target current Main << < > >> F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.45 Example of the detector type: TCD - execution screen F2 (Main): F3 (<<): F4 (<): F5 (>): F6 (>>): Displays the Det Adjustment (Reset) screen. Decreases the value by 16 steps within the range of 0 to 255 (for the TCD, by approximately 0.94 V within the range of 5.0 V to 20.0 V). Decreases the value by 1 step within the range of 0 to 255 (for the TCD, by approximately 0.06 V within the range of 5.0 V to 20.0 V). Increases the value by 1 step within the range of 0 to 255 (for the TCD, by approximately 0.06 V within the range of 5.0 V to 20.0 V). Increases the value by 16 steps within the range of 0 to 255 (for the TCD, by approximately 0.94 V within the range of 5.0 V to 20.0 V). • To toggle the Det On/Off status, set the cursor on the Det operation and press the Set/Ent key. The screen displays “Setting succeeded” or “Setting failed” in the second line on the bottom. • If the Up/Down command keys are pressed to adjust the value within the range of 0 to 255 and the command is successfully sent internally, “Setting succeeded” is displayed. Users can confirm the results with the voltage value and current value refreshed every second. • Selecting the Target current displays Target current (AAA/BB):. If the value 250/10 is entered, it will be shown as 250+/–10 mA, 250 as 250+/– mA and 50/5 as +/–5 mA. • The numbers of ovens to which no detectors are installed cannot be set via F5. TIP The Det operation, Voltage value and Current value are refreshed at a one-second interval. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-35 <5. EtherLCD> Display Item Name Oven # Oven number Det # Detector number Detector type Det operation Voltage value Current value Target current Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 3 1 2 Unit ○ ○ 0.0 0.0 20.0 500.0 V mA Remarks TCD Off, On * For this operation, the user level C or higher is required and the operation mode must be Stop in Manual status. Numeric, period “.” and slash “/” are enabled: 16 characters Input format: AA.A/B.B Output format: AA.A+/–B.B mA n Detector type: FID-MC - Reset screen Press F2 (Adjust). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Det Adjustment Oven # 1 Det # 1 ( FID-MC ) > - Det operation Off Reset status Initialized Menu Adjust Reset Oven# Det# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.46 Example of the detector type: FID-MC - reset screen F1 (Menu): F2 (Adjust): F4 (Reset): Displays the Table Menu screen. Displays the Det Adjustment (Execution) screen. Initializes a voltage value. Pressing F4 displays the options “Abort” and “Initialize.” If the Set/Ent key is pressed after the selection of “Initialize,” the MC voltage value is set to its minimum value 10.0 V. F5 (Oven #): Sets an oven number. F6 (Det #): Sets a detector number. • Pressing F4 displays the options “Abort” and “Initialize” in the second line on the bottom. If the Set/Ent key is pressed after the selection of “Initialize,” the MC voltage value is set to its minimum value 10.0 V. • The MC voltage value is read at a one-second interval, when, if the value is 0x0, the status is refreshed with “Initialized”; otherwise Setting done. • The Det operation is refreshed at a one-second interval. • The numbers of ovens to which no detectors are installed cannot be set via F5. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 5  5-36 <5. EtherLCD> Display Item Name Oven # Oven number Det # Detector number Detector type Det operation Reset status Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 3 1 2 Unit Remarks FID-MC Off, On * For this operation, the user level C or higher is required and the operation mode must be Stop in Manual status. Initialized, Setting done If the voltage value is zero, Initialized is displayed; otherwise Setting done. ○ ○ n Detector type: FID-MC – Execution screen 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Det Adjustment Oven # 1 Det # 1 ( FID-MC ) > - Det operation Off MC voltage value 0.0 V - Target MC current Main << < > >> F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.47 Example of the detector type: FID-MC – execution screen F2 (Main): F3 (<<): F4 (<): F5 (>): F6 (>>): Displays the Det Adjustment (Reset) screen. Decreases the value by 16 steps within the range of 0 to 255 (for the MC, by approximately 0.75 V within the range of 10.0 V to 22.0 V). Decreases the value by 1 step within the range of 0 to 255 (for the MC, by approximately 0.05 V within the range of 10.0 V to 22.0 V). Increases the value by 1 step within the range of 0 to 255 (for the MC, by approximately 0.05 V within the range of 10.0 V to 22.0 V). Increases the value by 16 steps within the range of 0 to 255 (for the MC, by approximately 0.75 V within the range of 10.0 V to 22.0 V). • To toggle the Det On/Off status, set the cursor on the Det operation and press the Set/Ent key. The screen displays “Setting succeeded” or “Setting failed” in the second line on the bottom. • If the Up/Down command keys are pressed to adjust the value within the range of 0 to 255 and the command is successfully sent internally, “Setting succeeded” is displayed. Users can confirm the results with the voltage value and current value refreshed every second. • Selecting the Target MC voltage displays Target MC voltage (AA.A/B.B):. If the value 17.5/0.5 is entered, it will be shown as 17.5+/–0.5 V, 5.0 as 5.0+/– V and 2/1 as 2.0+/– 1.0 V. • The numbers of ovens to which no detectors are installed cannot be set via F5. TIP The Det operation, MC voltage value are refreshed at a one-second interval. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-37 <5. EtherLCD> Display Item Name Oven # Oven number Det # Detector number Detector type Det operation MC voltage value Target MC voltage Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 3 1 2 Unit ○ 0.0 20.0 V ○ Remarks FID-MC Off, On * For this operation, the user level C or higher is required and the operation mode must be Stop in Manual status. Numeric, period “.” and slash “/” are enabled: 16 characters Input format: AA.A/B.B Output format: AA.A+/–B.B mA n Detector type: FID or FPD 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Det Adjustment Oven # 1 Det # 1 ( FID ) > - Det operation Off Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.48 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Det Adjustment Oven # 1 Det # 1 ( FPD ) > - Det operation Off Oven# Det# Menu F3 F4 F5 F6 F1 F2 F3 Example of the detector adjustment screen (FID or FPD) F4 Oven# F5 Det# F6 F1 (Menu): Displays the Table Menu screen. F5 (Oven #): Sets an oven number. F6 (Det #): Sets a detector number. • The Det operation is refreshed at a one-second interval. • The numbers of ovens to which no detectors are installed cannot be set via F5. Display Item Name Oven # Oven number Det # Detector number Detector type Det operation Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 3 1 2 ○ Unit Remarks FID FPD Off, On * For this operation, the user level C or higher is required and the operation mode must be Stop in Manual status. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 5  5-38 <5. EtherLCD> 5.3.10 Status Switching 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Status Switching GCM # 1 > - Status Process Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.49 GCM# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the status switching screen F1 (Menu): Displays the Operation Menu screen. F6 (GCM #): Sets a GCM number. • The status is refreshed every one second. Display Item Name GCM # GCM number Status 5.3.11 Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 6 ○ Unit Remarks Process, Manual Password Setup 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Password Setup > - User Level B - - - - User Level C - - - - User Level C+ - - - - Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.50 F1 (Menu): F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the password setup screen Displays the Operation Menu screen. TIP • For this operation, the user level C+ is required. • All zeros and passwords used for other user levels cannot be accepted. • The password length is fixed at four digits. • The password will not be displayed on the screen. • The entered value is shown. (Numeric only) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-39 <5. EtherLCD> Display Item User level B User level C User level C+ 5.4 Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit ○ ○ ○ Unit Remarks Numeric: 4 characters Numeric: 4 characters Numeric: 4 characters Table screen To navigate to the Table Menu screen, press the menu key 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Table Menu (1/3) > - System Settings - Operation Parameters - Temperature Setup - Detector Setup - Method Setup - Stream Setup - Stream Sequence - Peak Setup-General - Peak Setup-Specific F1 F2 F3 Table Menu (2/3) > - Cal/Val Setup - Multirange Setup - Alarm Setup - Peak Assigments - Communications Setup - D/O Setup - D/I Setup - A/O Setup - A/I Setup F4 F5 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Table Menu > - Network Setup - GCCU Setup - Remote A/O Setup - GCM Setup - SYS Setup - User Programming - SIMDIS Setup - Units Setup (User Defined) - MODBUS CLIENT Setup F1 F2 Figure 5.51 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 . F3 F4 F5 Table menu screen F6 F1 F2 F3 5 F4 F5 F6 (3/3) F6 • The menu items D/O Setup, D/I Setup, A/O Setup and A/I Setup are display-only when the associated cards are not installed. Selecting any of them displays the error message. • The menu item User Programming is display-only when it is not installed. Selecting it displays the error message. • The menu item SIMDIS Setup is visible when the Distillation is set on for at least one GCM on the GCM Setup (2/2) screen. • If the Analog output num is 0 on the GCCU Setup screen, the Remote A/O Setup cannot be selected. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-40 <5. EtherLCD> 5.4.1 System Settings 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 System Settings (1/2) > - Analyzer name abc - Analyzer ID 001 - Tag number tag-123 - KGC number KGC00001 - Current date 2011/11/22 - Current time 15:15:45 - Language English Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.52 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 (2/2) > - Auto start setup Unexecuted - #1 Auto start delay 0 s - #2 Auto start delay 0 s - #3 Auto start delay 0 s - Start alarm mask Unexecuted Menu F3 F4 F5 F6 F1 Example of the system settings screen F1 (Menu): System Settings F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Displays the Table Menu screen. TIP • The date and time displayed at the top left of the screen are updated when the Current date and Current time are set. • The KGC number is shown as a five-digit number with zero padding. For example, if the value is 8924, the KGC number is displayed as KGC08924. Display Item Name Analyzer name Analyzer ID Tag number Tag number KGC Number Current date Analysis start year Analysis start month Analysis start day Current time Analysis start hour Analysis start minute Language Auto start setup Auto start time Start alarm mask *: Set Lower Limit Upper Limit ○ ○ ○ ○ 1 240 1 99999 ○ 2000 1 1 0 0 2099 12 31* 23 59 0 10000 ○ ○ ○* 1st auto-start time 2nd auto-start time 3rd auto-start time ○* ○ Unit Remarks Alphanumeric: 8 characters Alphanumeric: 16 characters The fixed string KGC is attached as a prefix. Year In four digits Month * Subject to change depending Day on the month. Hour Minute English, Japanese, Chinese, French, Russian Executed, Unexecuted Seconds Unexecuted, Executed The settings are valid after rebooting or turning off/on its power. Auto-start do not work for FPD correctly. Please do not set “ON”. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-41 <5. EtherLCD> 5.4.2 Operation Parameters 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Operation Parameters (1/8) Oven # 1 Carrier gas # 1 > - Carrier gas type - - - Carrier gas pressure 0.0 kPa Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.53 5 Oven# Gas# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the operation parameters screen (1/8) F1 (Menu): Displays the Table Menu screen. F5 (Oven #): Specifies an oven number. F6 (Gas #): Specifies a carrier gas number. TIP The oven numbers set to Not provided or programmed-temperature oven on the Temperature Control Set cannot be selected. • The initial screen displays the smallest oven number among those assigned to isothermal ovens on the Temperature Control Set. Display Item Name Oven # Oven number Carrier gas # Carrier gas number Carrier gas Carrier gas type types Carrier gas pressure *: Carrier gas pressure Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 3 1 2 ○* ○ 0 0.0 490 71.0 Unit kPa psi Remarks --H2 He Ar N2 * --- indicates not used. Numeric entry Can be input by the 10 kPas (1.0 psi). psi (May not selectable due to local regulations) 500 kPa = 72.5 psi The settings are valid after rebooting or turning off/on its power. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-42 <5. EtherLCD> 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Operation Parameters (2/8) Oven # 1 Utility gas # 1 > - Detector number - - - Utility gas function - - - Utility gas type - - - Utility gas pressure 0.0 kPa - Utility gas flowrate Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.54 Oven# Gas# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the operation parameters screen (2/8) F1 (Menu): Displays the Table Menu screen. F5 (Oven #): Selects an oven number. F6 (Gas #): Selects a utility gas number. TIP • If the detector number is set to --- (not used), the Utility gas function and the Utility gas type are shown as ---. • The oven numbers set to Not provided or programmed-temperature oven on the Temperature Control Set cannot be selected. • The detector numbers set to Not provided on the Detector Set screen cannot be selected. • The initial screen displays the smallest oven number among those assigned to isothermal ovens on the Temperature Control Set. Display Item Name Oven # Oven number Utility gas # Utility gas number Detector number Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 3 1 4 ○ Utility gas function Utility gas function Utility gas type Utility gas type Utility gas pressure Utility gas pressure ○ Utility gas flow rate Utility gas flow rate ○ *: Unit ○ ○* 0 0.0 490 71.0 kPa psi Remarks --1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 2-2, 3-1, 3-2 * --- indicates not used. --Burner fuel Burner air Make up * The initial value is ---. --- (not used) H2 He Ar N2 Air * The initial value is ---. * The value becomes effective by turning power Off and then On. Numeric entry Can be input by the 10 kPas (1.0 psi). Limits vary depending on the unit (see left). psi (May not selectable due to local regulations) Alphanumeric: 10 characters e.g., 100 ml/s, 0.5 μl/s, etc. The settings are valid after rebooting or turning off/on its power. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-43 <5. EtherLCD> 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Operation Parameters Oven # 1 Det # 1 Carrier gas number - - > - Vent-D ( FID ) flowrate - VENT-REF flowrate Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.55 (3/8) Oven# Det# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the operation parameters screen (3/8) 5 F1 (Menu): Displays the Table Menu screen. F5 (Oven #): Specifies an oven number. F6 (Det #): Specifies a detector number. TIP • The oven numbers set to Not provided or programmed-temperature oven on the Temperature Control Set cannot be selected. • The detector numbers set to Not provided on the Detector Set screen cannot be selected. • The initial screen displays the smallest oven number among those assigned to isothermal ovens on the Temperature Control Set. Display Item Name Oven # Oven number Det # Detector number Carrier gas Carrier gas number number Vent-D flow rate Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 3 1 2 ○ Detector type Vent-REF ○ Unit Remarks --1-1 1-2 2-1 2-2 3-1 3-2 * --- indicates not used. Alphanumeric: 10 characters * The detector type is displayed. TCD/FID/FID-MC/FPD None TCD FID FID-MC FPD Alphanumeric: 10 characters IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-44 <5. EtherLCD> 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Operation Parameters Oven # 1 Vent # 1 > - Carrier gas number - - - Vent type - - - Vent flowrate Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.56 (4/8) Oven# Vent# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the operation parameters screen (4/8) F1 (Menu): Displays the Table Menu screen. F5 (Oven #): Specifies an oven number. F6 (Vent #): Specifies a vent number. TIP • The oven numbers set to Not provided or programmed-temperature oven on the Temperature Control Set cannot be selected. • Only carrier gas numbers for which a gas type is set on the Operation Parameters screen (1/8) can be selected. • The initial screen displays the smallest oven number among those assigned to isothermal ovens on the Temperature Control Set. Display Item Name Oven # Oven number Vent # Vent number Carrier gas Carrier gas number number Vent type Vent type Vent flow rate Vent flow rate Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 3 1 6 ○ ○ Unit Remarks --1-1 1-2 2-1 2-2 3-1 3-2 * --- indicates not used. The value is set on the Detector Set screen. --BF FF Split * --- indicates not used. Alphanumeric: 10 characters IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <5. EtherLCD> 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Operation Parameters 5-45 (5/8) > - Pressure unit kPa - Vent flowrate unit ml/min - Sample volume unit ml Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.57 F1 (Menu): 5 F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the operation parameters screen (5/8) Displays the Table Menu screen. TIP If the pressure unit is changed, the gas pressure value including the one set to EPC controlled will be converted according to the new unit. For example, if the unit is changed from kPa (the value range is set to 0 to 500 kPa) to psi (the value range 0 to 72.5 psi), 250 kPa is converted to and displayed as 36.25 psi. Display Item Pressure unit Vent flow rate unit Sample volume unit 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit ○ ○ ○ Operating Parameters Oven # 1 Valve # 1 > - Valve type Other - Sample phase Gas - Sample pressure - Sample flowrate - Sample volume Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.58 Unit Remarks kPa psi (May not selectable due to local regulations)) ml/min ml micro-l (6/8) Oven# Valve# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the operating parameters screen (6/8) F1 (Menu): Displays the Table Menu screen. F5 (Oven #): Specifies an oven number. F6 (Valve #): Specifies a valve number. TIP • The oven numbers set to Not provided or programmed-temperature oven on the Temperature Control Set cannot be selected. • The valve numbers set to Not provided on the Valve Set screen cannot be selected. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-46 <5. EtherLCD> • The initial screen displays the smallest oven number among those assigned to isothermal ovens on the Temperature Control Set. Display Item Name Oven # Oven number Valve # Valve number Valve type Valve type Sample phase Sample pressure Sample flow rate Sample volume 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 3 1 7 ○ Unit Remarks Sample phase ○ Sample pressure ○ Other Sample * The valve type for Valve #7 is fixed to 0 (Other). Liquid Gas Alphanumeric: 10 characters Sample flow rate ○ Alphanumeric: 10 characters Sample volume ○ Alphanumeric: 10 characters Operation Parameters (7/8) > - SV air press - Elec Purge press Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.59 F1 (Menu): Display Item SV air press Elec purge press F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the operation parameters screen (7/8) Displays the Table Menu screen. Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit ○ ○ Unit Remarks Alphanumeric: 18 characters Alphanumeric: 18 characters 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Operation Parameters (8/8) Oven # 1 > - Oven air Press - TPM Vortex press * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * - FPD Vortex press Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.60 Oven# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the operation parameters screen (8/8) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-47 <5. EtherLCD> F1 (Menu): Displays the Table Menu screen. F6 (Oven #): Selects an oven number. TIP • oven numbers set to Not provided or programmed-temperature oven on the Temperature Control Set cannot be selected. • The initial screen displays the smallest oven number among those assigned to isothermal ovens on the Temperature Control Set. Display Item Name Oven # Oven number Oven air press TPM vortex press FPD vortex press 5.4.3 Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 3 ○ Unit Remarks Alphanumeric: 18 characters ○ Alphanumeric: 18 characters ○ Alphanumeric: 18 characters Temperature Setup 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Temperature Setup Oven # 1 > - Oven max temp 60.0 degC - Oven temp setpoint 60.0 degC - LSV temp setpoint 60.0 degC - FPD temp setpoint 0.0 degC Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.61 Oven# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the temperature setup screen F1 (Menu): Displays the Table Menu screen. F6 (Oven #): Specifies an oven number. • If the LSV and FPD are not installed, the pertinent values are shown as * (asterisk). • If the Temp type is set to Not provided on the Temperature Control Set, the temperature setup is not available. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 5  5-48 <5. EtherLCD> Display Item Name Oven # Oven number Oven max temp Oven temp setpoint LSV temp setpoint FPD temp setpoint 5.4.4 Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 3 ○ 5 See Remarks. ○ 5 ○ 60 ○ 0 Oven max temp See Remarks. 60 Unit Remarks degC No explosion: 320°C T1: 320°C T2: 225°C T3: 145°C T4: 95°C * The value varies depending on the explosionproof specification. degC degC No explosion: 250°C T1: 250°C T2: 225°C T3: 145°C T4: 95°C degC Detector Setup 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Detector Setup (1/2) Oven # 1 Det # 1 ( TCD ) > - Filtering const Off - Sample rate 20 ms - Square root calc req * * * * * - Flame detect level * * * * * - Sense set Equal - Input resistor * * * * * * * * * * Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.62 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Detector Setup (2/2) Oven # 1 Det # 1 ( TCD ) > - Auto gain setting None - Full scale value 0 - Auto zero Off - Auto zero value 0.0000 mV - Auto zero time 0.0 s Oven# Det# Menu F3 F4 F5 F6 F1 Example of the detector setup screen F2 F3 F4 Oven# F5 Det# F6 F1 (Menu): Displays the Table Menu screen. F5 (Oven #): Sets an oven number. F6 (Det #): Sets a detector number. TIP • The oven numbers set to Not provided on the Temperature Control Set cannot be selected. • If the Detector type has been set to None on the Detector Set screen, all the options are shown as * (asterisk). IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-49 <5. EtherLCD> Display Item Name Oven # Oven number Det # Detector number Detector type Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 3 1 2 Filtering const Sample rate ○ ○* Square root calc req ○ Flame detect level ○ 0.001 –20 Sense set Input resistor *: ○ Unit None TCD FID FID-MC FPD 1.000 20 Remarks mV 20 ms 40 ms 80 ms 160 ms The value is shown except when the FPD is installed. No Yes * The square root of the area value The item is displayed only when the FID, FPD or FID-MC is installed. No amplification (Tenfold) 1 Mohm 6 Mohm 20 Mohm 60 Mohm 200 Mohm 600 Mohm 1 Gohm 2 Gohm The settings are valid after rebooting or turning off/on its power. F1 (Menu): Displays the Table Menu screen. F5 (Oven #): Sets an oven number. F6 (Det #): Sets a detector number. TIP • The oven numbers set to Not provided on the Temperature Control Set cannot be selected. • If the Detector type has been set to None on the Detector Set screen, all the options are shown as * (asterisk). • The initial screen displays Oven number 1 and Det number 1. • When A/O chromatogram is set to None, items for Auto gain and Whole gain value are displayed but an asterisk is given for set value. • The initial screen displays the smallest oven number among those set in the isothermal ovens (or programmed-temperature oven) on the Temperature Control Set. • The initial screen displays Oven number 1 and Det number 1. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 5  5-50 <5. EtherLCD> Display Item Name Oven # Oven number Det # Detector number Detector type Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 3 1 2 Auto gain setting ○ Full scale value ○ Auto zero ○ Auto zero value Auto zero time 5.4.5 0 15 ○ −1000.0000 1000.0000 ○ 0 21600 Unit Remarks 0) None 1) TCD 2) FID 3) FID-MC 4) FPD 0) None (default) 1) Individual gain 2) Whole gain *1 *1 Only for the A/O chromatogram 0(default) *1 Only for the A/O chromatogram 0)Automatic feed (default) 1)Auto zero value 2)Off * If the value is Automatic feed, the value is set to the zero value automatically obtained at the auto zero time. * If the value is Auto zero value, the value is set to the auto zero value at the start of the analysis. Former chromatogram standard value If the value is 0.0 seconds, the value is set to the zero value automatically obtained at the start of the analysis cycle. * Upper Limit will use the shortest analysis cycle for the SYS analysis cycle that the detector belongs to. Method Setup n GCM Method Setup Screen (Main) 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 GCM Method Setup GCM #1 / Method #1 > - Main cycle 60.0 s - Warming up time 5.0 s - Stream valve ON time -5.0 s - Stream valve OFF time 0.0 s - Pause time 55.0 s Main Seq F1 F2 Figure 5.63 F1(Menu): F2(Seq): F3(SYS): F4(Copy): Sys Copy GCM# Method# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the GCM Method setup screen Displays the Table Menu screen. Displays the GCM Sequential screen. Displays the SYS Method screen. Displays the GCM method copy screen. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <5. EtherLCD> 5-51 F5(GCM #): Specifies the GCM number. F6(Method #): Specifies the Method number. • Pressing F3 (SYS) displays the SYS Method Setup screen with the smallest number among the SYS numbers set to GCM. • Pressing F5 (GCM #) displays GCM number: in the second line on the bottom. Entering the method number reflects the GCM number in the second line on the top and displays the GCM method setup assigned to that number. • Pressing F6 (Method #) displays Method number: in the second line on the bottom. Entering the method number reflects the method number in the second line on the top and displays the GCM method setup assigned to that number. Display Item Name GCM # GCM number Method # Method number Main cycle Warming up time Stream valve ON time Stream valve OFF time Pause time Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit Remarks 1 6 1 6 ○ 10 See right seconds Upper Limit will depend on sample rate When 20 ms: 2700 seconds When 40 ms: 5400 seconds When 80 ms: 10800 seconds When 160 ms: 21600 seconds * The smallest sample rate set for the detector used by the SYS belonging to the relevant GCM. ○ 5.0 9999.9 seconds ○ ○ ○ −Warming up time 0.0 Main cycle ‒600 0.0 seconds Main cycle seconds −2 Main cycle seconds −2 n GCM Method Copy Screen Press F4 (Copy). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 GCM method copy Source GCM #1 / Method #1 > - Destination GCM number 0 - Destination Method number 0 Menu Main Exec F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.64 Example of the GCM method copy screen F1(Menu): F2(Main): F5(Exec): Displays Table Menu screen. Displays GCM Method Setup screen. Executes the GCM method copy. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 5  5-52 <5. EtherLCD> Display Item Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit GCM # Copy source GCM 1 6 number Method # Copy source method 1 6 number Destination ○ 1 6 GCM number Destination ○ 1 6 Method number Unit Remarks (1) Just prior to navigating to this screen, the number on the GCM Method screen when F4 (Copy) was pressed is displayed as the copy source for GCM number and method number. (2) Navigating to this screen displays the initial number for the Destination GCM number and method number are 0. (3) Selecting the Destination GCM number displays Destination GCM number: in the second line on the bottom. The Destination GCM number must be entered here. (4) Selecting the Destination method number displays Destination method number: in the second line on the bottom. The Destination method number must be entered here. (5) Pressing F5 (Exec) executes the method copy. The GCM number and method number of the Destination are then displayed again as 0. TIP If the SYS numbers of the copy source and the copy target are different, copy cannot be executed. (6) If the copy fails (If the SYS numbers of the copy source and the copy target are different), “Copy not executed” is displayed in the second line on the bottom. The GCM method copy executes both the GCM method and SYS method. For that reason, the copy can be executed only when the numbers of SYS are equal. n GCM Sequential Display Screen Press F2( Seq). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 GCM Sequential Display GCM #1 / Method #1 Time Action -5.0 StrV on time 0.0 StrV off time 50.0 S1 Peak detect end 55.0 Pause time Main F1 F2 Figure 5.65 F1(Main): F3(StrV): StrV F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the GCM sequential display screen Displays GCM Method (Main) screen. Displays Stream Valve Set screen. Displays the sequence of the GCM method and the SYS method set in the GCM. When newly displayed, the sequential display from the first sequence is displayed. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-53 <5. EtherLCD> However, SYS sequence set to No for the SYS usage set is not displayed. Display Item Name GCM # GCM number Method # Method number Time Action Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 6 1 6 Unit Remarks Pause time S1 to S6 Peak detect end StrV on time, StrV off time l Stream Valve Set Screen Press F3 (StrV). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Stream valve Set GCM #1 / Method #1 > - Stream valve ON time -5.0 s - Stream valve OFF time 0.0 s 5 Seq F1 F2 Figure 5.66 F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the stream valve set screen F1(Seq): Displays Sequential Display screen. Display Item Name GCM # GCM Number Method # Method number Stream valve ON time Stream valve OFF time Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit 1 6 1 6 ○ −Warming 0.0 seconds up time ○ 0.0 Main cycle seconds −2 Remarks n SYS Method Setup Screen (Main) Press F3 (SYS). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 SYS Method Setup GCM #1 / SYS #1 / Method #1 > - Execution On - Cycle time 60.0 s - End of peak detect 50.0 s - Tracking exec Not executed - Tracking coef updating Updating GCM Seq F1 F2 Figure 5.67 Temp EPC Copy SYS# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the SYS method setup screen IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-54 <5. EtherLCD> F1(GCM): F2(Seq): F3(Temp): F4(EPC): F5(Copy): F6(Sys#): Returns to GCM Method Setup screen. Displays SYS Sequential Display screen. Displays Oven Program Set screen. Displays Pressure Program Set screen. Displays Copy screen of the SYS method. Specifies the SYS number. The GCM number and the method number displayed in the second line on the top will succeeds the setup of the GCM method screen. Pointing the cursor to each setup and pressing ENT display each name in the second line on the bottom. Enters the time using the tenkey. Pressing F2(Seq) navigates to the SYS sequential screen display. Pressing F3(Temp) navigates to the heating program set screen. Pressing F4(EPC) navigates to the pressure rise program set screen. Pressing F5 (Copy) navigates to the copy screen display for the SYS method. Pressing F6 (SYS #) displays SYS number: in the second line on the bottom. Pressing SET/ENT on the tenkey navigates to that SYS number. Only the SYS number set in the GCM can be selected, “Over upper/lower limit” is displayed in the second line on the bottom when anything else is entered. Pressing F1 (GCM) navigates to the GCM method selection screen. F4 (EPC) is available only when EPC has been set. Usage set, tracking exec and tracking coef updating share one setup in the SYS. In other words, changing the method number after a set change is made by one SYS method displays the changed setup. Display Item Name GCM # GCM number SYS # SYS number Method # Method number Usage set Cycle time End of peak detect Tracking exec Tracking coef updating Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 6 1 6 1 6 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 10.0 5.0 Unit Remarks Not used Used When SYS is not used, stop status (no action) will occur during run. Main cycle seconds Some data are invalid. Analysis seconds Some data are invalid. cycle Not executed/executed No updating/updating IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-55 <5. EtherLCD> n SYS Method Copy Screen Press F5 (Copy). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 SYS method copy Source GCM #1 / SYS #1 / Method #1 > - Destination SYS number 0 - Destination Method number 0 5 Menu Main Exec F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.68 Example of the SYS method copy screen F1(Menu): F2(Main): F5(Exec): Displays Table Menu screen. Displays SYS Method Setup screen (Main). Executes the method copy. (1) Selecting the Destination method number displays Destination method number: in the second line on the bottom. Then enters the Destination method number. (2) Pressing F5 (Exec) executes the method copy under the normal operation and displays COPY END in the second line on the bottom. SYS number and method number of the copy target are displayed as 0. • The set range for Destination SYS number is the SYS number belonging to the assigned GCM. • Usage set, tracking exec and tracking coef updating share one setup in the SYS. In other words, the SYS method copy is not applicable. • Before copying the SYS method, confirm the analysis cycle and the main cycle. • When the analysis cycle of copy source is greater than (>) the main cycle of copy target, a copy failed message is output. • The heating program will not be copied. Display Item Name Copy source GCM number GCM # SYS # SYS number Method # Method number Destination GCM number Destination Method number Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 6 ○ 1 1 1 6 6 6 ○ 1 6 Unit Remarks n Oven Program Setup Screen This screen is displayed when programmed-temperature oven has been set. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-56 <5. EtherLCD> 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Oven program Setup (1/2) GCM #1 / SYS #1 / Method #1 > - Initial temp setpoint NNNdegC - #1 Temp ramp start time ZZZZN.Ns Total run-time ZZZZN .Ns 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Oven program Setup (2/2) GCM #1 / SYS #1 / Method #1 > - #1 Temp ramp rate ZN.NdegC/min - #1 Temp hold setpoint ZZNdegC - #1 Temp hold time ZZZZN.Ns - #2 Temp ramp rate ZN.NdegC/min - #2 Temp hold setpoint ZZNdegC - #2 Temp hold time ZZZZN.Ns - #3 Temp ramp rate ZN.NdegC/min - #3 Temp hold setpoint ZZNdegC - #3 Temp hold time ZZZZN.Ns Main F1 F2 Figure 5.69 F1(Main): Main F3 F4 F5 F6 F1 Example of the Oven Program Setup Screen F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Navigates to SYS Method Setup screen (Main). • Executing ENT with a cursor pointing at each set displays the cursor in the second line on the bottom. Enter a time with a tenkey. • The GCM number, SYS number, and method number displayed in the second line on the top will succeed the setup of the SYS method screen. • Displays total time of the heating program. Initial time setpoint + Σi (Temp hold setpoint i − Temp hold setpoint i − 1)/Temp ramp rate + Temp hold time) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-57 <5. EtherLCD> Display Item Name GCM # GCM number SYS # SYS number Method # Method number Initial temp setpoint #1 Temp ramp start time Total run-time Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 6 1 6 1 6 ○ 5 Upper oven temperature limit ○ 0 Analysis cycle 0 Analysis cycle Unit Remarks degC Some data are invalid. s Some data are invalid. Displays total time of the heating program. Initial time setpoint + Σi (Temp hold setpoint i − Temp hold setpoint i − 1)/Temp ramp rate i + Temp hold time i) * When the temp ramp rate is zero, only temp hold time is added. * When all data is invalid, the program time is displayed as 0 s. degC/ Some data are invalid. min 1st to 3rd temp ramp rate 1st to 3rd temp hold setpoint ○ 0.0 30.0 ○ 5 *1 Upper oven temperature limit 1st to 3rd temp hold time ○ 0 Analysis cycle degC Some data are invalid. *1:The lower limit of the 1st temp hold setpoint is set to the initial temp setpoint. The lower limit of the 2nd temp hold setpoint is set to the 1st temp hold setpoint. The 3rd temp hold setpoint is set to the 3rd temp hold setpoint. s Some data are invalid. n EPC Program Set Screen This screen is displayed when EPC has been set. Press F4 (EPC). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 EPC program Set (1/2) GCM #1 / SYS #1 / Method #1 / Gas #1-#1 > - Initial Press setpoint ZZZZN.NAAA - #1 Press ramp start time ZZZZN.Ns Total run-time ZZZZN.Ns 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 EPC program Set (2/2) GCM #1 / SYS #1 / Method #1 / Gas #1-#1 > - #1 Press ramp rate ZZN.NAAA/min - #1 Press hold setpoint ZZZZN.NAAA - #1 Press hold time ZZZZN.Ns - #2 Press ramp rate ZZN.NAAA/min - #2 Press hold setpoint ZZZZN.NAAA - #2 Press hold time ZZZZN.Ns - #3 Press ramp rate ZZN.NAAA/min - #3 Press hold setpoint ZZZZN.NAAA - #3 Press hold time ZZZZN.Ns Main F1 F2 Figure 5.70 F1(Main): F5(Oven#): F6(Gas#): Oven# Gas# Main F3 F4 F5 F6 F1 Example of the EPC program set screen F2 F3 F4 Oven# F5 Gas# F6 Navigates to SYS Method Setup screen (Main). Specifies an oven number. Specifies a carrier gas number IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 5  5-58 <5. EtherLCD> • Only the gas belonging to the relevant SYS can be set with F6 (Gas#). Display Item GCM # SYS # Method # Gas # − # Name GCM number SYS number Method number Carrier gas number Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 2 Unit Initial press setpoint ○ 0 0.0 490 71.0 kPa psi #1 Press ramp start time EPC program time ○ 0 Analysis cycle s 0 Analysis cycle 1st to 3rd press ramp rate ○ 0.0 0.0 490 71.0 1st to 3rd press hold setpoint ○ 0.0 *1 0.0 *1 490 71.0 1st to 3rd press hold time ○ 0 Analysis cycle Remarks Provides two each to Ovens 1, 2 & 3. Pressure unit is set in the operating parameters screen. Can be input by the 10 kPas (1.0 psi). (May not selectable due to local regulations) Some data are invalid. Some data are invalid. Displays total time of oven program. Initial time setpoint + Σi (Press hold setpoint i − Press hold setpoint i − 1)/Press ramp rate + Temp hold time) * When the temp ramp rate is zero, only temp hold time is added. * When data is all invalid, displays program time as 0s. kPa/min Pressure unit is set in the psi/min operating parameters screen. Can be input by the 10 kPas (1.0 psi). (May not selectable due to local regulations) Some data are invalid. kPa Pressure unit is set in the psi operating parameters screen. Can be input by the 10 kPas (1.0 psi). (May not selectable due to local regulations) Some data are invalid. *1:The minimum set of the 1st press hold setpoint is set to the initial press setpoint, the minimum set of the 2nd press hold setpoint is set to the 1st press hold setpoint, the minimum set of the 3rd press hold setpoint is set to the 3rd press hold setpoint. s Some data are invalid. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-59 <5. EtherLCD> n SYS Sequential Display Screen Press F2 (Seq). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 SYS Sequential Display GCM #1 / SYS #1 / Method #1 / Stream #1 Time Action 0.0 V1- 1 1st on 5.0 V1- 1 1st off 5 Main Gate Valve AtmV DO Strm# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.71 Example of the SYS sequential display screen F1(Main): F2(Gate): F3(Valve): F4(AtmV): F5(DO): F6(Strm#): Displays SYS Method Setup screen (Main). Displays Action Set (gate) in the action set screen. Displays ON/OFF time screen in a valve (1st, 2nd & 3rd of the maximum No. 1 to No. 18). Displays ON/OFF time screen of ATM Valve (1st, 2nd & 3rd). Displays D/O Setup screen in the action set screen. Specifies a stream number. • Stream number is assigned with F6 (Stm #). Only the stream number being used by the relevant GCM number can be set. The smallest stream number is displayed in the initial display. • Up to 512 sequences can be displayed. • SYS sequence with SYS usage set as “Not executed” is also displayed. • Gate ON/OFF time for the peak not executed is not displayed. • Base/signal/noise level and A/I signals 1 to 4 of the action time are displayed. • When D/O is not installed, F5 (DO) is not displayed. • When any peak is not assigned, selecting F2 (gate) displays the message “No assignment peak of request tream.” Display Item GCM # SYS # Method # Stream # Time Action Name GCM number SYS number Method number Stream number Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 31 Unit Remarks IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-60 <5. EtherLCD> n Gate Action Setting Screen Press F2 (Gate). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Gate Action Setting GCM #1 / SYS #1 / Method #1 / Stream #1 Peak number 1 > - Gate ON time 1.0 s - Gate OFF time 5.0 s Seq F1 F2 Figure 5.72 Valve AtmV DO Peak# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the gate action setting screen F1(Seq): F3(Valve): F4(AtmV): F5(DO): F6(Peak#): Displays SYS Sequential Display screen. Displays Valve screen of the action set screen. Displays ON/OFF time screen of ATM Valve (1st, 2nd & 3rd). Displays D/O Setup screen in the action set screen. Specifies a peak number (relative peak number). • Sets possible for User Level C and above. • Only the peak belonging to the relevant SYS can be selected. Default displays the peak with the smallest number belonging to the SYS. Display Item GCM # SYS # Method # Stream # Peak number Name GCM number SYS number Method number Stream number Peak number Gate ON time Gate ON time Gate OFF Gate OFF time time Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 31 1 Assigned peak number ○ ○ 0.0 *1 21600.0 Unit Remarks Default displays peak number 1. After that, the previous peak number is displayed. seconds Some data are invalid. *1: Upper limit varies depending on the sample rate of the detector number set for the relevant peak. Sample rate Max 20 ms 2700.0 s 40 ms 5400.0 s 80 ms 10800.0 s 160 ms 21600.0 s IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-61 <5. EtherLCD> n Valve Action Setting Screen Press F3 (Valve). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Valve Action Setting GCM #1 / SYS #1 / Method #1 Valve number 1-1 > - 1st ON time 0.0 s - 1st OFF time 5.0 s - 2nd ON time * * * * * * * s - 2nd OFF time * * * * * * * s - 3rd ON time * * * * * * * s - 3rd OFF time * * * * * * * s 5 Seq Gate AtmV DO Valve# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.73 Example of the valve action setting screen F1(Seq): F2(Gate): F4(AtmV): F5(DO): F6(Valve#): Displays SYS Sequential Display screen. Displays Gate screen of the action set screen Displays ON/OFF time screen of ATM Valve (1st, 2nd & 3rd). Displays D/O Setup screen in the action set screen. Specifies a using valve number. • Sets possible for User Level C and above. Pressing F6 (Valve #) displays Oven number in the second line on the bottom. After selecting an oven number, Valve number is displayed. Selecting the valve number and pressing ENT sets the valve ON/OFF time of that number. Executing ENT with a cursor pointing at each set displays the cursor in the second line on the bottom. Enter a time with a tenkey. Pressing F1 (Seq) navigates to the SYS sequential display screen. Only valves belonging to the relevant SYS can be set by F6 (Valve#). Display Item GCM # SYS # Method # Valve Number 1st to 3rd ON Time 1st to 3rd OFF Time Name GCM number SYS number Method number Valve number Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 6 1 6 1 6 1−1 3−7 ○ 0 ○ ON time Unit Remarks 0: None 1 to 3 Oven 1 to 7 Valve Analysis seconds Valve time set cycle − 2 Some entry data are invalid. Cycle Time seconds * When ON time is invalid, OFF time cannot be set. −2 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-62 <5. EtherLCD> n ATM Action Setting Screen Press F4 (AtmV). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 ATM Action Setting GCM #1 / SYS #1 / Method #1 ATM valve 1-1 > - 1st ON time * * * * * * * s - 1st OFF time * * * * * * * s - 2nd ON time * * * * * * * s - 2nd OFF time * * * * * * * s - 3rd ON time * * * * * * * s - 3rd OFF time * * * * * * * s Seq Gate Valve DO F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.74 Example of the ATM action setting screen F1(Seq): F2(Gate): F3(Valve): F5(DO): Displays SYS sequential Display screen. Displays Gate of the action set screen. Displays ON/OFF time screen of a valve (1st, 2nd & 3rd of maximum No. 1 to 18). Displays D/O Setup screen in the action set screen • ATM valve number set in GCM setup is displayed for ATM valve number (display only). Functions of the function keys F2, F3 and F5 are the same as those in SYS method setup (Part 1; Main). Display Item GCM # SYS # Method # ATM valve 1st to 3rd ON time 1st to 3rd OFF time Name GCM number SYS number Method number ATM valve number Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 6 1 6 1 6 0 3−2 ○ ○ −Warming up time Analysis cycle − 2 Unit Remarks 0: None 1 to 3 Oven 1 to 2 ATM valve seconds ATM valve time setup Some entry data are invalid. seconds IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <5. EtherLCD> 5-63 n D/O Action Setting Screen Press F5 (DO). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/O Action Setting GCM #1 / SYS #1 / Method #1 > - 1st DO ON time * * * * * * * s - 1st DO OFF time * * * * * * * s - 2nd DO ON time * * * * * * * s - 2nd DO OFF time * * * * * * * s - 3rd DO ON time * * * * * * * s - 3rd DO OFF time * * * * * * * s 5 Seq Gate Valve AtmV F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.75 Example of the D/O action setting screen F1(Seq): F2(Gate): F3(Valve): F4(AtmV): Displays SYS Sequential Display screen. Displays Gate of the action set screen. Displays ON/OFF time screen of a valve (1st, 2nd & 3rd of the maximum No. 1 to No. 18). Displays ON/OFF time screen of ATM valve (1st, 2nd & 3rd). Display Item Name GCM # GCM number SYS # SYS number Method # Method number 1st to 3rd ON Time 1st to 3rd OFF Time 5.4.6 Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit Remarks 1 6 1 6 1 6 ○ 0 Analysis seconds D/O time setup cycle − 2 Some entry data are invalid. ○ ON time Analysis seconds * When ON time is invalid, the minimum OFF time is 0. cycle − 2 Stream Setup 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Stream Setup Stream # 1 > - Name of stream - Str valve number 0 - Type of stream Measurement - Normalization * * * * * * * * * * - Total value 100.0 % - Base line corr Unexecuted - GCM number 1 - Method number 1 - Cal run stream 2 Menu INIT Strm# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.76 Example of the stream setup screen F1 (Menu): F4 (INIT): Displays Table Menu screen. Initializes the tracking factors. F6 (Strm #): Specifies a stream number (1 to 31). Note: When initializing the tracking factors, set the operation mode to stop. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-64 <5. EtherLCD> • The SIMDIS calib stream item is displayed only when distillation is set to Yes in the GCM setup (2/2) screen for the GCM specified by the GCM number. Displays a stream type when it is a sample run. • In the case of the area correction percentage for GCM, normalization for the stream belonging to that GCM is displayed by an asterisk. Display Item Name Stream # Stream number Stream name Stream valve number Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 31 ○ ○ 0 31* Stream type ○ Normalization ○ Total value Base line corr GCM number Method number Cal run stream ○ ○ ○ ○ 0.1 100.0 1 1 6 6 ○ 0 31 5.4.7 Unit Remarks Alphanumeric: 8 characters 0: No stream valve * Only stream valve number belonging to the GCM can be set (GCM setup screen). Measurement, Cal, Val, Calibration run (only when distilling), Sample run (only when distilling) Not executed, Executed * When the GCM of the relevant stream is configured with multiple SYS, Executed cannot be set. unexecuted, Executed Stream Sequence 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 Stream Sequence (1/4) (2/4) 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Stream Sequence GCM # 1 Seq # 1 GCM # 1 Seq # 1 > - #01 Stream 1 ( s1 ) - Executed - #10 Stream ** (* * * * * * * *) - Unexecuted - #02 Stream ** (* * * * * * * *) - Unexecuted - #11 Stream ** (* * * * * * * *) - Unexecuted - #03 Stream ** (* * * * * * * *) - Unexecuted - #12 Stream ** (* * * * * * * *) - Unexecuted - #04 Stream ** (* * * * * * * *) - Unexecuted - #13 Stream ** (* * * * * * * *) - Unexecuted - #05 Stream ** (* * * * * * * *) - Unexecuted - #14 Stream ** (* * * * * * * *) - Unexecuted - #06 Stream ** (* * * * * * * *) - Unexecuted - #15 Stream ** (* * * * * * * *) - Unexecuted - #07 Stream ** (* * * * * * * *) - Unexecuted - #16 Stream ** (* * * * * * * *) - Unexecuted - #08 Stream ** (* * * * * * * *) - Unexecuted - #17 Stream ** (* * * * * * * *) - Unexecuted - #09 Stream ** (* * * * * * * *) - Unexecuted - #18 Stream ** (* * * * * * * *) - Unexecuted Menu GCM# Seq# Menu GCM# Seq# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.77 Example of the stream sequence set (1/4) screen F1(Menu): F5(GCM#): F6(Seq#): Displays Table Menu screen. Specifies GCM number. Specifies a stream sequence number (1 to 8). Same for pages 2, 3, and 4 (up to 31 streams can be set). Streams other than that of the relevant GCM cannot be set. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-65 <5. EtherLCD> Display Item GCM # Seq # nn (AAAA) Name Number of pages Stream sequence number Stream number (Stream name) Interval Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 4 1 6 1 8 ○ 1 Unit 31 Remarks Scheduling for up to 31 streams When the interval is Not executed, an asterisk is displayed. * Only stream belonging to the GCM can be set. Stream name cannot be set. Displays in 8 alphanumeric characters. unexecuted, Executed ○ 5 5.4.8 Peak Setup-General 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Peak Setup-General GCM #1 > - Conc calc req Corr area norm - Det slope ratio 0.00 - Calib range 0.500 - Calib repeat range 2.000 - Calib coef range 4.000 - #1 Tickmark setup None - #2 Tickmark setup None - Peak detect err set Executed Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.78 F1(Menu): F6(GCM#): Display Item GCM # Conc cal req Det slope ratio Calib range Calib repeat range Calib coef range #1 Tickmark setup #2 Tickmark setup Peak detect err set GCM# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of the peak setup-general screen Displays Table Menu screen Specifies GCM number. Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 6 ○ ○ 0.00 9.99 ○ ○ 0.000 0.000 1.000 2.000 ○ 0.000 4.000 ○ Unit Remarks 0: Standard, 1: Correction area fraction ○ None, Start, 10s, Start − 10s, 60s, Start − 60s, 10s to 60s, Start −10s to 60s None, Gate, Peak, Gate to Peak ○ unexecuted, Executed IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-66 <5. EtherLCD> 5.4.9 Peak Setup-Specific 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Peak Setup-Specific (1/5) Stream #1 Peak #1 Using/Assigned peak num 1 / 10 > - Process (Type) Peak - Process (Detail) Indirect - Name A - Execution Not excuted - Synchronize to #01 #001 - Output flag Provided (31001) - Range number 0 - Auto gain value 0 Menu Copy1 Copy2 Strm# Peak# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Peak Setup-Specific (3/5) Stream #1 Peak #1 Indirect > - Gate ON time 1.0 s - Gate OFF time 5.0 s - A/H req Area - Normalization * * * * * * * * * * * * - Response factor 2.000 - Min peak width * * * * * * - Min peak height * * * * * * - Min peak area * * * * * * Menu F1 Copy1 F2 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Copy2 F3 F4 Strm# F5 Peak Setup-Specific Stream #1 Peak #1 Indirect > - Linear calc 1 factor 0.0000 - Linear calc 2 factor 0.0000 - Linear calc 3 factor 0.0000 - Linear calc 4 factor 0.0000 - Linear calc 5 factor 2.0000 Peak# F6 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Peak Setup-Specific (2/5) Stream #1 Peak #1 Indirect > - Detector number 1-1 - Measuring unit 1 ( ) - Measuring range 1.000 - Gate cut method Time gate - Integ method Skimming - Peak polarity Positive - Detected slope * * * * * * * * - Tangent corr Not executed Menu F1 Copy1 F2 Copy2 F3 F4 Strm# F5 Peak# F6 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Peak Setup-Specific (4/5) Stream #1 Peak #1 Indirect > - Auto tracking req Tracking std - Peak std time 100.0 s - Tracking coef a 0.965 - Tracking coef b 0.0 Menu F1 Copy1 F2 Copy2 F3 F4 Strm# F5 Peak# F6 (5/5) Menu Copy1 Copy2 Strm# Peak# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.79 Example of peak setup-specific screen F1 (Menu): F2 (Copy1): F3 (Copy2): F5 (Strm#): F6 (Peak#): Displays the Table Menu screen. Displays the Peak copy 1 screen. Displays the Peak copy 2 screen. Specifies the Stream number. Specifies the Peak number. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-67 <5. EtherLCD> • When using F1 (Menu) to move to other screen and then return to the Peak Setup-Specific screen again, the screen for the previously displayed stream number and peak number appears. However, when peak assignment has been changed in the Peak Assigments screen, the screen for Stream 1/Peak 1 appears. Table 5.2 Process (Type) Distillation Peak Calculation Heating value AI Program output No processing Process (Detail) Std B.P proc, RVP proc, Distill % proc External 3rd, External linear, Indirect • When "Distillation" or "Corr area norm" is set, only "Indirect" is available. Base level, Signal level, Noise level, Deviation calc, Linear 1, Linear 2, Linear 3, Linear 4, Linear 5, Ratio, Separation cape, Divisor A1-Calorific val, A1-Spec gravity, A1-Compress fact, A1-Wobbe index, A2-Heating v/vol, A2-Heating v/mas, A2-Relative dens, A2-Density, A2-Compress fact, A2Wobbe index, J-Calorific val, J-Spec gravity, J-Compress fact, J-Wobbe index, I-CalorificV/mol, I-CalorificV/mas, I-CalorificV/vol, I-Relative dens, I-Density, I-Compress fact, I-Wobbe index A/I signal 1, A/I signal 2, A/I signal 3, A/I signal 4, A/I signal 5, A/I signal 6, A/I signal 7, A/I signal 8, A/I signal 9, A/I signal 10, A/I signal 11, A/I signal 12, A/I signal 13, A/I signal 14, A/I signal 15, A/I signal 16 Program output IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 5  Display Item Stream # Peak # Using peak number Assigned peak number Process (Type) Name Display/ Setting stream number Display/ Setting peak number Process (Indication) Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 31 1 999 0 0 999 999 ○ ○ Peak name Execution Synchronize to ○ ○ ○ 1(0) 31 ○ 1(0) 999 Synchronized stream number Synchronized peak number Unit Remarks Indication only. Process (Detail) Output flag Range number 5-68 <5. EtherLCD> ○ ○ Distillation, Peak, Calculation, Heating value, AI, Program output, No processing Type: "Distillation" Std B.P proc, RVP proc, Distill % proc Type: "Peak" External 3rd, External linear, Indirect • When "Distillation" or "Corr area norm" is set, only "Indirect" is available. Type: "Calculation" Base level, Signal level, Noise level, Deviation calc, Linear 1, Linear 2, Linear 3, Linear 4, Linear 5, Ratio, Separation cape, Divisor Type: "Heating value" A1-Calorific val, A1-Spec gravity, A1-Compress fact, A1-Wobbe index, A2-Heating v/vol, A2-Heating v/mas, A2Relative dens, A2-Density, A2-Compress fact, A2Wobbe index, J-Calorific val, J-Spec gravity, J-Compress fact, J-Wobbe index, ICalorificV/mol, I-CalorificV/ mas, I-CalorificV/vol, I-Relative dens, I-Density, I-Compress fact, I-Wobbe index Type: "AI" A/I signal 1, A/I signal 2, A/I signal 3, A/I signal 4, A/I signal 5, A/I signal 6, A/I signal 7, A/I signal 8, A/I signal 9, A/I signal 10, A/I signal 11, A/I signal 12, A/I signal 13, A/I signal 14, A/I signal 15, A/I signal 16 Type: "Program output" Program output A(8) Not executed, Executed When "0" is entered to both stream number and peak number, synchronism is dissolved. [0xFFFF] is set to the data. It is not available to setting to own peak number. None, Provided • When the type of stream is calibrating, the range number will be shown as * (asterisk). IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  Display Item Auto gain value Detector number 5-69 <5. EtherLCD> Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit ○ ○ Unit Remarks 2 to the n th power ---, 1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 2-2, 3-1, 3-2 • Only the detector that belong to the SYS that belong to the GCM is available. No unit, %, ppm, ppb, wt%, wtppm, wtppb, vol%, volppm, volppb, mol%, molppm, molppb, (space), (User definition) Measuring unit ○ 1 100 Measuring range Gate cut method ○ ○ 0.000 9999.999 Integ method Peak polarity Detected slope ○ ○ ○ 0.0 999.9999 Tangent corr ○ Auto tracking req ○ Area % ○ 0.5 99.5 0% value 100% value ○ ○ -999.999 -999.999 9999.999 9999.999 Std B.P Set up Conc. Section set stop ○ ○ -999.9 0.00000 0.0 999.9 1.00000 Peak detection stop time Action time ○ 0.0 or 5.0 21600.0 * second * The upper limit value depends on the sampling rate of the detector. Sampling rate Upper limit 20 ms 2700.0 s 40 ms 5400.0 s 80 ms 10800.0 s 160 ms 21600.0 s • Minimum value is 5.0 seconds for noise level. Peak std time Gate ON time Gate OFF time ○ ○ ○ 0.0 0.0 0.0 21600.0 * 21600.0 * 21600.0 * A/H req Normalization Response factor f Min peak width Min peak height Min peak area ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ -9999.999 0.2 0.008 9999.999 30.0 128.0 second * The upper limit value depends on the sampling second rate of the detector. second Sampling rate Upper limit 20 ms 2700.0 s 40 ms 5400.0 s 80 ms 10800.0 s 160 ms 21600.0 s Area, Height Not executed, Executed Time gate, Slope gate, Slope/ Time, Time/Slope, Zone Skimming, Vert method Positive, Negative mV/sec • When Detected slope is 0.000, the gate ON/OFF timing is same as the peak ON/OFF timing. Not executed, Executed • Available the setting if the "Slope gate”, “Time/Slope”, or “Zone” is selected in Gate cut method, or “Skimming” is selcted in Integ method. No tracking, Tracking exec, Tracking std • Base level/Noise level: "No tracking and "Tracking exec" are available. A/I signal 1 to 16 mV mVs 0.2, 1.0, 2.0, 5.0, 10.0, 30.0 0.008, 0.016, 0.031, 0.063, 0.125, 0.250, 0.500, 1.000, 2.000, 4.000, 8.000, 16.00, 32.00, 64.00, 128.0 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 5  5-70 <5. EtherLCD> Display Item Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit RVP coef A RVP coef B ○ ○ -9999.999 -9999.999 9999.999 9999.999 Factor K Factor A Factor B Std conc Std area Calib factor Ref peak ○ -9999.999 -9999.999 -9999.999 0.000 0.000 0.000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9999.999 9999.999 9999.999 9999.999 40000.000 9999.999 31 999 31 999 31 999 31 999 Ref peak Ref peak 2 Std peak Stream number Peak number Stream number Peak number Stream number Peak number Stream number Peak number ○ ○ ○ ○ Linear calc 1 factor Linear calc 2 factor Linear calc 3 factor Linear calc 4 factor Linear calc 5 factor ○ -9999.999 -9999.999 -9999.999 -9999.999 -9999.999 9999.999 9999.999 9999.999 9999.999 9999.999 Tracking coef a Tracking coef b Factor a Factor b Auto gain value Ref peak nume Ref peak deno Ref peak l Ref peak m Total Std area ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0.500 -21600.0 -9999.999 -9999.999 0 1 1 1 1 0.000 2.000 21600.0 9999.999 9999.999 15 31 999 31 999 40000.000 ○ ○ ○ ○ -9.9999 -9.9999 1 9.9999 999.99 6 Stream number Peak number Stream number Peak number H2 peak no Compress fact.(air) Temp.(degC) SYS number Unit Remarks Available for “Calibration” or “Calibration run”. 2 to the n th power Ratio (numerator) Ratio (denominator) Separation capacity (component l) Separation capacity (component m) • The SYS that belong to the GCM that belong to the stream is available. Note: Gate ON/OFF time can be changed in the run mode. If the time is changed before the warming up time of the next stream, it is applied to the next stream. However, if there is overlap in the gate ON/OFF times, operation will stop. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. When 0 is entered for both stream and peak number, synchronization is released. Individual peak number cannot be set. Setting synchronized peak of parent peak is invalid. Cannot set peak within the same stream to synchronized destination. Cannot set peak within calibration stream to synchronized destination. Calibration run stream cannot be set for synchronization. Only sample run streams can be set up for synchronization. Distillation analysis stream and normal analysis stream can be synchronized. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-71 <5. EtherLCD> Table 5.3 Synchronization rules table Destination Measurement Source Measurement ○ Cal ▲ Val ○ Calibration run × Sample run × Cal Val × × × × × ○ ▲ ○ × × Calibration run × × × × × Sample run × × × × ○ ○, ▲: Synchronization possible, see Synchronize items for synchronization items. *: The ▲ symbol in the Synchronization Rules Table signifies (Cal →Measurement, Cal →Val) and he synchronization items ▲ (process assignment, reference peak, etc.) cannot be synchronized. ×: Cannot be synchronized. The following is an example of setting error. Synchronized destination: Stream 2ーPeak 1 5 Indirect synchronization Stream 1ーPeak 1 Stream 1ーPeak 2 F0502.ai Contradicts the rule “Cannot set peak within the same stream to synchronized destination.” IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  Table 5.4 5-72 <5. EtherLCD> Peak synchronization and peak copy items Name Absolute peak number 1 Peak name Stream number Relative peak number Peak execution Detector number or SYS number Process assign DCS output flag Ref Peak 1 Stream number Peak number Ref Peak 2 Stream number Peak number Measuring range Unit Normalization Factor 1 <1000-fold data> Factor K, Factor a, Factor f <10000-fold data> Compress fact.(air) <100-fold data> Temp.(degC) Factor 2 <1000-fold data> Factor A, Factor b, RVP coef A, 0% value, Area %, Std B.P Factor 3 <1000-fold data> Factor B, RVP coef B, 100% value Factor 4 <1000-fold data> Std conc <100000-fold data> Set up Conc. Range number Gate cut method Auto tracking req Peak polarity Detected slope Tangent corr A/H req Integ method Cal method req Chrom gain req (Auto gain value) Peak std time Gate ON Time Gate OFF Time Linear Calc 1 factor Linear Calc 2 factor <10000-fold data> Section set stop Linear Calc 3 factor Linear Calc 4 factor Linear Calc 5 factor <10000-fold data> Calib factor, Response factor Std area Min peak width Min peak height Min peak area Modbus address Tracking Factor a Tracking Factor b Peak Synchronization ○ Peak Copy × × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ▲ × × × *1 Always set copy target to Not executed. ○ ○ × ○ ▲ ▲ ○ ○ ▲ ▲ ▲ ○ ▲ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ▲ ○ ▲ ○ ▲ ○ ▲ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ▲ ▲ × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ▲ ▲ ▲ ○ ○ ○ ▲ ○ ○ ○ × × × ○ × × × × × × IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-73 <5. EtherLCD> l Peak copy 1 Press F2 (Copy1). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Peak Copy 1 (1/4) Total Assign # 30 Strm# Stream name Assign Peak num 1 A1 10 1 2 A2 10 5 3 10 5 4 0 0 5 0 0 6 0 0 7 0 0 8 0 0 Menu PeakSet Copy F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.80 Example of peak copy 1 (1/4) screen 5 F1 (Menu): Displays the Table Menu screen. F2 (PeakSet): Displays the Peak Setup-Specific screen. F6 (Copy): Executes copy after entering Source stream and Destination stream. • Copy destination peak must be an independent peak. • See Peak synchronization and peak copy items regarding data for copy. Display Item Name Total Assign # Total assign Strm# Stream number Stream name Assign Peak num Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 0 999 1 31 0 0 999 999 Unit Remarks Total assigned peak of all streams Total assigned peak of stream Total used peak number of stream 1. 2. 3. Copy peak assigned to stream source and destination. When stream source and destination of assignment number are different, use the stream with the smaller assignment number as the standard. When the assignment number of either the stream source or destination is zero, error will occur and copy cannot be made. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-74 <5. EtherLCD> 4. Copy rules for synchronized peaks. Destination Independent peak Parent peak Source Independent peak Copy as is (change copy Maintain destination peak item) in independent peak and synchronize (comply with synchronization rules to change synchronization items). Parent peak Child peak 5. Cannot copy Convert to independent peak and copy (change copy item). Cannot copy Convert to independent peak and synchronize (comply with synchronization rules to change synchronization items). Child peak Assess using peak synchronizing rules. When synchronization is not possible, maintain independent peak and synchronize. When synchronization is possible, set synchronization as synchronization target of copy destination = synchronization target of copy source. Cannot copy Assess using peak synchronizing rules. When synchronization is not possible, maintain independent peak and synchronize. When synchronization is possible, set synchronization as synchronization target of copy destination = synchronization target of copy source. Copy items: Copy stream number in peak process-specific setup part (T19) and parts other than relative peak number l Peak copy 2 Press F3 (Copy 2). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Peak Copy 2 (1/2) Stream # 1 Use num # 1 Assign # 10 Peak# Name Usage Process (Detail) 1 P1 On Base level 2 Off Indirect 3 Off Indirect 4 Off Indirect 5 Off Indirect 6 Off Indirect 7 Off Indirect 8 Off Indirect Menu PeakSet Copy F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.81 Example of peak copy 2 screen F1 (Menu): Displays the Table Menu screen. F2 (PeakSet): Displays the Peak Setup-Specific screen F6 (Copy): Executes copy after entering Source peak and Destination peak. • Stream number for display and setting becomes the stream number in the peak setupspecific screen when relevant screen is requested. • Copy destination peak must be an independent peak. • See Peak synchronization and peak copy items regarding data for copy. • When Process (Type) is set to No processing, Process (Detail) displays No processing. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-75 <5. EtherLCD> Display Item Name Stream # Stream number Use num # Use Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 31 0 999 Assign # Assign 0 999 Peak # Relevant stream peak number Peak/Processing name Peak usage status 1 999 Name Usage Process (Detail) 5.4.10 Unit Remarks Number of peaks in the relevant stream Number of assigned peaks in the relevant stream Eight one-bite characters ON when in use, OFF when not in use 5 Cal/Val Setup 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Cal/Val Setup (Main) GCM # 1 > - Cal(Val) method Semi-auto - Auto start date 2011/11/22 - Auto start time 00:00 - Time interval 000 day:00:05 Auto cal status Stopping Menu Start Stop Cal Val GCM# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.82 Example of Cal/Val Set (main) screen F1 (Menu): F2 (Start): F3 (Stop): F4 (Cal): F5 (Val): F6 (GCM #): Displays the Table menu screen. Executes the Auto cal start command. Executes the Auto cal stop command. Displays the Calibration set screen. Displays the Validation Set screen. Specifies a GCM Number. • In the case of auto cal, when auto calibration is started using the F2 (Start) auto calibration start command, the message “Operation change selected” is displayed. When measurement status is executing calibration, validation or auto-calibration status, the message “Operation change not selected” is displayed. • In the case of auto cal, auto cal is stopped using the F3 (Stop) auto cal stop command, the message “Operation change selected” is displayed. When measurement status is stopping calibration, validation or auto-calibration status, the message “Operation change not selected” is displayed. • When auto-calibration start command is executed using F2 (Start), and where Cal/Val setting for auto cal and auto val is not set to execute, the message “Auto cal or val has not been set yet” is displayed. • When auto cal status is executing and Cal (Val) method is changed to semi-auto or manual, the auto cal status is changed to stopping. However, for calibration that is already in session, the analysis is performed until the main cycle ends. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-76 <5. EtherLCD> Display Item GCM # Cal (Val) method Auto start date Name Auto start time Time interval Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit Remarks ○ Manual, Semi-auto, Auto ○ 2000 to 2099, Jan to Dec, 1st to 31st* * Upper Limit will differ depending on the month 0 to 23 hours, 0 to 59 minutes ○ ○ Auto cal status 0 to 255 days, 0 to 23 hours, 0 to 59 minutes Date, Hour, and Min cannot be set to all 0. Stopping, Executing l Calibration set Press F4 (Cal). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Calibration Setup GCM # 1 Cal # 1 > - Cal stream 2 - Cal times 1 - Auto cal Unexecuted - ValStr# before Cal 0 - ValStr# after Cal 0 - Val before Cal times 1 - Val after Cal times 1 Menu Peak Main GCM# Cal# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.83 Example of calibration set screen F1 (Menu): F2 (Peak): F4(Main): F5 (GCM #): F6 (Cal #): Displays the Table Menu screen. Displays the calibration peak set screen. Displays the Cal/Val Set (main) screen. Specifies a GCM number. Specifies a Cal number. When ValStr # before Cal and ValStr # after Cal are set to 0, Val stream is not executed. • When a GCM number is changed, the Cal number is allowed to return to 1. • A Cal stream can be set to Cal only when a stream type is set to Cal. When the setting is attempted with a stream type other than Cal, the message “The kind of stream is incorrect” is displayed. When it does not exist in the relevant GCM, the message “The stream doesn’t exist in GCM” is displayed. • A ValStr # before Cal and a ValStr # after Cal can only be set when the stream type is Val. When the stream type is other than Val, the message “The kind of stream is incorrect” is displayed. When it does not exist in the relevant GCM, the message “The stream doesn’t exist in GCM” is displayed. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-77 <5. EtherLCD> Display Item Name GCM # Cal # Cal Number Cal stream Set Lower Limit Upper Limit ○ 0 0 6 31* Cal times ○ 0 30 Auto cal specification ValStr # before and after cal Val before and after cal times ○ ○ 0 31** ○ 0 30 Unit Remarks * Only stream numbers and cal streams belonging to GCM can be set. (Stream setup screen ) Cal times + Val before cal times + Val after cal times must not exceed 31. Unexecuted, Executed ** Only stream numbers and Val streams belonging to GCM can be set. (Stream setup screen) Cal times + Val before cal times + Val after cal times must not exceed 31. l Calibration peak set Press F2 (Peak). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Calibration Peak Setup Peak # 1 > - Peak name - Execution Executed - Measuring unit 1 ( ) - Measuring range 1.000 - Std conc 1.000 - Std area 950.000 - Calib factor 2.063 Cal F1 F2 Figure 5.84 Peak# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of calibration peak set screen F2 (Cal): Displays the calibration set screen F6 (Peak #): Specifies a peak number. • Displays the stream peak set in Cal stream. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 5  5-78 <5. EtherLCD> Display Item Name Peak # Peak number Peak name Execution Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 999 ○ ○ Measurement unit ○ 1 100 Measuring range Std conc Standard area Calibration factor ○ 0.000 9999.999 ○ ○ 0.000 0.000 9999.999 40000.000 ○ 0.000 9999.999 Unit Remarks Alphanumeric: 8 characters Executed Not executed 1( ) 2 (%) 3 (ppm) 4 (ppb) 5 (wt.%) 6 (wt.ppm) 7 (wt.ppb) 8 (vol.%) 9 (vol.ppm) 10 (vol.ppb) 11 (mol.%) 12 (mol.ppm) 13 (mol.ppb) 14 and over ( ) l Validation Set Press F5 (Val). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Validation Setup GCM # 1 Val # 1 > - Val stream 3 - Val times 1 - Auto val Unexecuted Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.85 F1 (Menu): F4(Main): F5 (GCM #): F6 (Val #): Main GCM# Val# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of validation set screen Displays the Table menu screen. Displays the Cal/Val Set (main) screen. Specifies a GCM number. Specifies a Val number. • Validation stream can only be set when stream type is Val. When stream type is other than Val, the message “The kind of stream is incorrect” is displayed. When it does not exist in the relevant GCM, the message “The stream doesn’t exist”in GCM is displayed IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-79 <5. EtherLCD> Display Item Name GCM # Val # Val number Validation stream Validation times Auto validation specification 5.4.11 Set Lower Limit Upper Limit ○ 1 0 6 31* ○ 0 30 Unit Remarks * Only val streams belonging to GCM can be set. (Stream setup screen ) ○ Unexecuted, Executed Multirange Setup When using peak setup-specific to set a range number, the multirange setup is made effective. When synchronizing the data in the range number with peak setup-specific, changes can be made bidirectionally. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Multirange Setup Range # 1 > - Process (Type) Distillation - Process (Detail) Std B.P proc Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.86 Get Range# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of multirange setup screen F1 (Menu): F4(Get): Displays the Table Menu screen. Gets the set values of the Process assign, measurement unit, measurement range, etc. of the specified peak. F6 (Range #): Specifies a range number (1 to 31). Stream type Measurement Calibration Range synchronization — Valid Invalid Validation Valid Calibration run Invalid IM 11B08A01-01E Sample run Invalid 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 5  5-80 <5. EtherLCD> Display Item Name Range # Range number Process (Type) Process (Detail) Measurement Unit Measuring range Ref peak number Ref peak 1, 2 0, 100% value 5.4.12 Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 31 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Unit Remarks See the Display Data List for Peak setup-specific screen. See the Display Data List for Peak setup-specific screen. See the Display Data List for Peak setup-specific screen. See the Display Data List for Peak setup-specific screen. ○ ○ Alarm Setup 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Alarm Setup GCM # 1 Set # 1 > - Stream number 2 Peak number 1 - Check item Conc - Maximum 0.000 - Minimum 0.000 Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.87 GCM# Set# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of alarm setup screen F1 (Menu): Displays the Table Menu screen. F5 (GCM #): Specifies a GCM number. F6 (Set #): Sets an alarm number. • When a stream and a peak number in database are both zero, they are assessed as no settings and all data is displayed with * (asterisk). IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-81 <5. EtherLCD> Display Item GCM # Set # Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Stream number Peak number ○ Check items ○ Maximum, Minimum ○ 5.4.13 (0), 1 31 (0), 1 999 Unit Remarks Relevant set number (1 to 32), 32 per GCM (Total 192) 99 can also be entered. When a stream number is 99, all streams belonging to GCM is applicable and a relative peak number is assigned to the peak number. Assign 0 to the stream number and the peak number to enable setting invalid data. Alarm check items, Density, R. Time, Vari coeff, Tailing coeff Density: −999.999 to 9999.999 (Process assign is A/I signal), 0.000 to 9999.999 (Process assign is other than A/I signal) R. Time:0.000 to 21600.0 sec Vari coeff: 0.000 to 1.999 Tailing coeff: 0.000 to100.000 Peak Assignments 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Peak Assigments (1/4) Total assign 30 unassign 969 Strm# Name Assign Use GCM num 1 A1 10 0 1 2 A2 10 5 1 3 10 5 1 4 0 0 1 5 0 0 1 6 0 0 1 7 0 0 1 8 0 0 1 Menu Exec Assign F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.88 Example of peak assignments (1/4) screen F1 (Menu): F4 (Exec): F6 (Assign): Displays the Table menu screen. Executes configuration change of peak table. Sets stream numbers and assign numbers for the setting. The setting is enabled only when all GCMs are in stop mode. The total usage of peak table is set per stream. When a stream set in GCM is selected, the GCM number is displayed in the GCM number area. When a stream that is not set in GCM is selected, the GCM number area is blank. Stream numbers and relative peak numbers are reset by executing F4 (Exec). Execution is initialized to Off. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 5  5-82 <5. EtherLCD> Display Item Name Total assign Total assigned peak Unassign Unassigned peak number Stream # Stream number Stream name Assignment number Usage GCM Number 5.4.14 Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 0 999 0 999 Relevant stream peak assign number Relevant stream peak usage 1 31 0 999 0 999 1 6 Unit Remarks If any stream name or set name exists, the table content is directly shown. Settable Communications Setup 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Communications Setup COM # 1 > - Type DCS - Protocol MODBUS - Trans contents * * * * * * * * * * - Recep contents * * * * * * * * - Trans speed 9600bps - Procedure * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * - Parity Odd - Com mode RTU mode - Scaling coef Real Menu COM# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.89 Examples of communications setup screen F1 (Menu): Displays the Table menu screen. F6 (COM #): Sets a communication port number. • Modbus protocol can be set to both COM1 and COM2. However, GCCU and GCCU or Y-Protocol (GC1000/GC8, GC6, GCHC) and Y-Protocol cannot be set to COM1 and COM2 respectively. • Items that cannot be set due to types and protocols are displayed with * (asterisk). Type Protocol Trans contents Recep contents Trans speed Procedure Parity Com mode Scaling coef NA × × × × × × × × MODBUS × × ○ × ○ ○ ○ DCS GC1000/GC8 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × GC6 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × GCHC ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × GCCU × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × For the Y-Protocol, refer to “n Serial Communication (Y-Protocol)” of page App.D-21 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <5. EtherLCD> Display Item COM # Type Protocol Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 2 ○* ○* Trans contents Recep contents Trans speed ○* Procedure ○* Parity Com mode Scaling coef ○* ○* ○* *: ○* ○* Unit 5-83 Remarks None, DCS, GCCU None, DCS, GCCU MODBUS, GC1000/GC8, GC6, GCHC * Only when the type is DCS Analyzed value, Alarm, All data None, Command, All data, GC8 type 1200 bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 9600 bps, 19200 bps, 38400 bps Without procedure, With procedure None, Odd, Even RTU mode, ASCII mode Real, 9999, 65535 The settings are valid after rebooting or turning off/on its power. 5.4.15 D/O Setup 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/O Setup Slot # 1 DO # 1 > - Process assign Operation mode - GCM number 1 - Operation mode Stop Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.90 F1 (Menu): F3 (Status): F5 (Slot #): F6 (DO #): Status Slot# DO# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of D/O setup screen Displays the Table menu screen. Displays the D/O status screen. Specifies a slot number. Specifies a D/O number. • A D/O contact number displays the relative number of each SLOT. • When F5 (Slot #) is pressed, Slot #: is displayed at the bottom line. When a slot number is entered and SET/ENT key is pressed, the set value of the specified slot number is displayed. • When setting the slot number, if a card other than D/O or DI/O is installed in the relevant slot, any entry is not accepted. • When F6 (DO#) is pressed, DO #: is displayed at the bottom line (the default is 1). When D/O number is entered and SET/ENT key is pressed, the set value of the specified D/O number is displayed. • When any D/O number is used for stream identification on the GCM setup screen , the Process assign displays ****** and not selectable. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 5  5-84 <5. EtherLCD> 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 D/O Setup (1/2) (2/2) 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/O Setup Slot # 1 DO # 1 Slot # 1 DO # 1 > - Process assign Stream sequence > - Stream sequence 7 AAAAAAA - GCM number 1 - Stream sequence 8 AAAAAAA - Stream sequence 1 AAAAAAA - Stream sequence 2 AAAAAAA - Stream sequence 3 AAAAAAA - Stream sequence 4 AAAAAAA - Stream sequence 5 AAAAAAA - Stream sequence 6 AAAAAAA Menu Status Slot# DO# Menu Status Slot# DO# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.91 Example of D/O setup screen (setting the Process assign to stream sequence) When the stream sequence is set in the Process assign, items to set up specified output of each stream sequence are added, and all two pages are displayed. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/O Setup Slot # 1 DO # 1 > - Process assign Stream - Stream 1 (GCM 1) Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.92 Status Slot# DO# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of D/O setup screen (setting the Process assign to stream) • The GCM number displayed on the screen cannot be set. • When an Over limit value is set as the stream, “Over limit” is displayed in the bottom line and the set value is not shown. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/O Setup Slot # 1 DO # 1 > - Process assign Operation mode - GCM number 1 - Operation mode Stop Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.93 Status Slot# DO# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of D/O setup screen (setting the Process assign to 0peration mode) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <5. EtherLCD> 5-85 • When an Over limit value is set as a GCM number, “Over limit” is displayed in the bottom line and the set value is not shown. • Warming up time for the currently operated stream is not included in case of Run. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/O Setup Slot # 1 DO # 1 > - Process assign Alarm - GCM number 1 - Alarm level 1 AAAAAAA - Alarm level 2 AAAAAAA - Composition Alarm AAAAAAA 5 Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.94 Status Slot# DO# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of D/O setup screen (setting the Process assign to Alarm) • When an Over limit value is set, “Over limit” is displayed in the bottom line and the value is ignored. • Alarm Number Alarm level 1 Alarm level 2 Composition Alarm 1 to 200 201 to 400 ( include 291 to 294) 291 to 294 • GCM number 0 is relevant to alarms that are common for all the GCMs. • In case GCM number 9 is selected, all the alarms in any of 0 to 6 GCMs will triggers the DO. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/O Setup Slot # 1 DO # 1 > - Process assign Timing - SYS number 1 (GCM 1) - SYS Method 1 - First time AAAAAA - Second time AAAAAA - Third time AAAAAA Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.95 Status Slot# DO# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of D/O setup screen (setting the Process assign to Timing) • Any SYS number that is not set in GCM cannot be set. • When an Over limit value is set as a SYS number, “Over limit” is displayed in the bottom line and the set value is not shown. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-86 <5. EtherLCD> 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 D/O Setup (1/2) (2/2) 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/O Setup Slot # 1 DO # 1 Slot # 1 DO # 1 > - Process assign Cal/Val > - Validation 1 AAAA - GCM number 1 - Validation 2 AAAA - Calibration 1 AAAA - Validation 3 AAAA - Calibration 2 AAAA - Validation 4 AAAA - Calibration 3 AAAA - Validation 5 AAAA - Calibration 4 AAAA - Validation 6 AAAA - Calibration 5 AAAA - Calibration 6 AAAA Menu Status Slot# DO# Menu Status Slot# DO# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.96 Example of D/O setup screen (setting the Process assign to Cal/Val) • When an Over limit value is set as a GCM number, “Over limit” is displayed in the bottom line and the set value is not shown. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/O Setup Slot # 1 DO # 1 > - Process assign Str valve select - Str valve number 1 Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.97 Status Slot# DO# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of D/O setup screen (setting the Process assign to Str valve select) • The Str valve select is a function to operate stream selection valves, and is operated according to the Stream valve ON/OFF time in the Method. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <5. EtherLCD> Display Item Slot # DO # Process assignment Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 5 1 5 ○ GCM number ○ Stream sequence 1 to 8 ○ Stream number Operation mode Alarm level 1, 2, Composition alarm SYS Number SYS method 1st to 3rd times Cal 1 to 6 Val 1 to 6 Stream valve number ○ 5.4.16 1, (0*) 1 6, (9*) 31 ○ ○ ○ ○ Remarks Limited Limited No process, Stream sequence, Stream, Operation mode, Alarm, Timing, Cal/Val, Str valve select Setting possible only when 1 to 6, process assign entails stream sequence, cal (val), operation mode and alarm. * GCM number 0 is relevant to alarms that are common for all the GCMs. In case GCM number 9 is selected, all the alarms in any of 0 to 6 GCMs will triggers the DO. Off,On Initial value for stream sequence 1 only has Output. Others have No output. Run, Run (including warming up time), Stop, Pause Off,On ○ ○ ○ ○ Unit 5-87 1 1 1 6 6 31 Limited Limited Off,On Off,On Off,On D/I Setup 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/I Setup Slot # 1 DI # 1 > - Signal name - Process assign Range Select - Stream number 1 (GCM 1) Peak number 1 - Range number 1 Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.98 F1 (Menu): F3 (Status): F5 (Slot#): F6 (DI#): Status Slot# DI# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of D/I setup screen Displays the Table menu screen. Displays the D/I status screen. Sets a slot number. Sets a D/I number. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 5  <5. EtherLCD> 5-88 * Press F5 (Slot#), and Slot No. is displayed in the second line below. Use the numeric keypad to select slot number and press Set/Ent to set the slot number. When the selected slot is not DI, the message “Cannot select” is displayed in the second line below. * Press F6 (DI#) and D/I number is displayed in the second line below. Use the numeric keypad to select contact number and press Set/Ent to set the contact number. When the selected contact number exceeds the limits, “Over limit” is displayed in the second line below. * When stream sequence is set in the Process assign, items to select stream sequence are added. * When stream is set in the Process assign, items to select a Stream number and the Number of times and a GCN number display are added. The displayed GCN number cannot be set. * When Over limit numerical values are selected for the Stream number and the Number of times, “Over limit” is displayed in the second line below and the numerical values that were set are not reflected. * When Range select is set in the Process assign, items to select a range assigned stream, a range assigned peak and a range number for Range select and a GCN number are additionally displayed. The displayed GCN number cannot be set. * When Over limit numerical values are selected for a range assigned stream, a range assigned peak and a range number, “Over limit” is displayed in the second line below and the numerical values that were set are not reflected. * When Cal (Val) is set in the Process assign, selection items for Cal (Val) and a GCM number are added. * When Over limit numerical values are selected for a GCM number, “Over limit” is displayed in the second line below and the numerical values that were set are not reflected. * When Operation mode is set in the Process assign, selection items for operation mode and a GCM number are added. * When Over limit numerical values are selected for a GCM number, “Over limit” is displayed in the second line below and the numerical values that were set are not reflected. * When Alarm process is set in the Process assign, selection items for an alarm level and a message are added. * When the set numerical values are Over limit of the alarm level or a set message has more than 22 characters, “Over limit” is displayed in the second line below and the numerical values that were set are not reflected. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-89 <5. EtherLCD> Display Item Slot # DI # Signal name Process assign Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 5 1 8 ○ ○ GCM number ○ Stream sequence Stream number Number of times Peak number Range number Cal/Val number ○ 1 8 ○ 1 31 ○ 0 999 ○ ○ 1 1 999 31 Operation mode Alarm level Cal 1, Cal 2, Cal 3, Cal 4, Cal 5, Cal 6, Val 1, Val 2, Val 3, Val 4, Val 5, Val 6 Run, Stop, Pause ○ ○ ○ 2 or 3 201 to 232 (in the case of alarm level 2), 401 to 432 (in the case of alarm level 3) Alphanumeric: 22 characters Message 5.4.17 Remarks Limited Limited Alphanumeric: 8 characters No process, Stream sequence, Stream, Range select, Cal/Val, Operation mode, Alarm process Setup possible when 0 to 6, process assign entails Stream sequence, Cal (Val) and Operation mode. * In the case of zero, applicable to all GCM. When process assign entails alarm, applicable to alarms for all GCM and equipment. 0: Consecutive, 1 to 999: times ○ Alarm number Unit A/O Setup When #1 Output stream is set at 99, the analyzed value of all streams belonging to GCM are read out. In this case, the setup for #2 Output stream and #2 Output peak become invalid. This setup can be done independently for each A/O. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 A/O Setup Slot # 1 AO # 1 > - GCM number 1 - AO Chromatogram Det 1-1 - #1 Output stream * * #1 Output peak * * * - #1 Percent span offset * * * * * - #1 Percent zero offset * * * * * Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.99 F1 (Menu): F3 (Status): F5 (Slot #): F6 (AO #): (1/2) 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 A/O Setup Slot # 1 AO # 1 > - #2 Output stream * * #2 Output peak * * * - #2 Percent span offset * * * * * - #2 Percent zero offset * * * * * Status Slot# AO# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of A/O setup screen Menu F1 F2 Status F3 F4 Slot# F5 (2/2) AO# F6 Displays the Table menu screen. Displays the A/O status screen. Sets a Slot number. Sets a A/O number. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 5  5-90 <5. EtherLCD> • When A/O chromatogram output is set, other items are displayed with * (asterisk). • #1 Output stream and #2 Output stream cannot be set in the same Stream. If this setup is attempted, the error message “Already assigned in request stream” is displayed. • If a detector that does not exist is selected in the setting of the A/O chromatogram, the error message “Not load the detector” is displayed. Display Item Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit Remarks Slot# Slot number 1 5 AO # A/O channel number 1 8 GCMNumber ○ 1 6 AO ○ Normal output, Det1-1, Det1-2, Chromatogram Det2-1, Det2-2, Det3-1, Det3-2 * Multiple OA channels can be assigned to the same detector. However, up to a maximum of 8 channels. #1 Output ○ (0), 1 (99), 31 Lower Limit (0) cancels the stream output of the relevant peak. Upper Limit (99) gives output of analyzed values of all streams. ○ (0), 1 31 Lower Limit (0) cancels the #2 Output stream output of the relevant peak. #1, #2 Output ○ (0), 1 999 Lower Limit (0) cancels the peak output of the relevant peak. #1, #2 Partial ○ 0.001 1.000 hi #1, #2 Partial ○ 0.000 0.999 low 5.4.18 A/I Setup 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 A/I Setup Slot # 1 AI # 1 > - Signal name AA - Filter const 1.000 Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.100 Status Slot# AI# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of A/I setup screen F1 (Menu): F3 (Status): F5 (Slot#): F6 (AI#): Display Item Slot # AI # Signal Name Filtering const Displays the Table menu screen. Displays the A/I status screen. Sets a Slot number. Sets an A/I number. Name Slot number A/I input number A/I signal name A/I filtering constant Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 5 1 4 ○ ○ 0.001 1.000 Unit Remarks Alphanumeric: 8 characters IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <5. EtherLCD> 5.4.19 5-91 Network Setup Set up IP addresses and networks. NOTE The new setting will be enabled after rebooting (power OFF/ON) the analyzer. Then, HMI and PC software cannot connect the analyzer with old setting. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Network Setup Main > - PHY-A IP address 192. 168. 1. 1 - Gateway IP_A 192. 168. 1. 250 - Subnet mask 255. 255. 255. 0 - PCAS config Single - ASGW config Single - DCS config Single - Scaling coef Real Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.101 5 Redundant Dual_ip F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of network setup (Main) screen F1 (Menu): Displays the Table menu screen. F4 (Redundant): Displays the Redundant setup screen. • F4 (Redundant) is valid only when the Ethernet (ch2) is installed. l Redundant setup screen Execute the redundant setup. Press F4 (Redundant). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Network Setup Redundant > - Virtual IP address 192. 168. 1. 1 - PHY-B IP address 0. 0. 0. 0 - Gateway IP_B 0. 0. 0. 0 - Diag Interval 500 ms Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.102 F1 (Menu): F3 (Main): Main Dual_ip F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of network setup (Redundant) screen Displays the Table menu screen. Displays the Main screen. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-92 <5. EtherLCD> l Dual_ip setup screen Execute the dual_ip setup only when the Ethernet (ch2) is installed. Press F4 (Dual_ip). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Network Setup Dual IP > - IP for dual 1 0. 0. 0. 0 > - IP for dual 2 0. 0. 0. 0 > - IP for dual 3 0. 0. 0. 0 > - IP for dual 4 0. 0. 0. 0 > - IP for dual 5 0. 0. 0. 0 > - IP for dual 6 0. 0. 0. 0 > - IP for dual 7 0. 0. 0. 0 > - IP for dual 8 0. 0. 0. 0 Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.103 Main Redundant F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of network setup (Redundant) screen F1 (Menu): F3 (Main): F4 (Redundant): Displays the Table menu screen. Displays the Main screen. Displays the Redundant setup screen. * The redundant application will launch only when the Ethernet (ch2) is installed. Display Item PHY-A IP address Gateway IP_A Subnet mask PCAS config Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit ○* ○* ○* ○* DCS config ○* Scaling coef Virtual IP address PHY-B IP address Gateway IP_B Diag Interval IP for dual ○ ○* Remarks ○* ASGW config *: **: Unit None, Single, Dual, Twin ** ● Dual or twin can be selected only when Ethernet (ch2) is installed. None, Single, Ddual ** ● Dual can be selected only when Ethernet (ch2) is installed. None, Single, Twin ** ● Twin can be selected only when Ethernet (ch2) is installed. Real, 9999, 65535 ○* ○* ○* ○* 500 0 3000 254 ms The settings are valid after rebooting or turning off/on its power. Dual is a physically redundant network in which virtual IP addresses are used to communicate. If a fault occurs in one route, the other route is automatically used to continue communication. Twin is a physically redundant network in which channel 1 uses physical IP address A and channel 2 physical IP address B. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-93 <5. EtherLCD> 5.4.20 GCCU Setup 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 GCCU Setup - Analog num 1 - Analog hold output Provided - Analog serial output None - Bit parallel output None - Digital input None - Alarm Contact Normal open Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.104 F1 (Menu): F3 (R-AO): F4 (R-DO): Display Item Analog num 5 R-AO R-DO F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of GCCU setup screen Displays the Table menu screen. Display Remote AO status Display Remote DO status Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 0 36 Analog hold output Analog serial output Bit parallel output Digital input Alarm Contact 5.4.21 Unit Remarks Factory set value. Analog output number +4, in case of Analog serial output. None, Provided None, Provided None, Provided (GC6), Provided (GC8) None, Provided Normal open, Normal close Remote A/O (GCCU) Set 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Remote A/O (GCCU) Set (1/2) R-AO # 1 GCM number 1 > - #1 Output stream 1 (A1 ) #1 Output peak 5 ( ) - #1 Partial hi 1.000 - #1 Partial low 0.000 Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.105 Status R-AO# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of GCCU setup screen 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Remote A/O (GCCU) Set (2/2) R-AO # 1 > - #2 Output stream * * ( ) #2 Output peak * * * ( ) - #2 Partial hi 1.000 - #2 Partial low 0.000 Menu F1 F2 Status F3 F4 F5 R-AO# F6 F1 (Menu): Displays the Table menu screen. F3 (Status): Display Remote AO status F6 (R-AO#): Setting of Remote AO number IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  Display Item R-AO# GCM number #1 Output stream #2 Output stream #1, #2 Output peak #1, #2 Partial hi #1, #2 Partial low 5.4.22 5-94 <5. EtherLCD> Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 (5) ○ 0, 1 (99), 31 ○ 0, 1 31 0, 1 999 ○ 0.001 1.000 ○ 0.000 0.999 Unit Remarks GCM Setup 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 GCM Setup (1/2) GCM # 1 > - SYS 1 Yes - SYS 2 No - SYS 3 No - SYS 4 No Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.106 GCM# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of GCM setup screen 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 GCM Setup (2/2) GCM # 1 > - ATM valve number 1-1 Strm identifying None - 1st num StrIdentify DO Slot #5 -#1 - 1st num StrValve 0 - Stream valve num 0 - Distillation Provided Menu F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 GCM# F6 F1 (Menu): Displays the Table menu screen. F6 (GCM #): Specifies a GCM number. When F6 (GCM #) is pressed, GCM No. appears in the second line below. When the numeric keypad is used to select the GCM number and Set/Ent is pressed, the GCM setup of that number is selected. The following ovens can be set by SYS. Up to 2 SYSs can be set for one oven. Up to 4 SYSs can be set for two ovens. Up to 6 SYSs can be set for three ovens. Once one of SYSs is set to Yes and you move to other GCM numbers, ***** is displayed, and “Already set in other GCM” is displayed in the second line below and it cannot be set for any other GCM even though the SYS is about to be selected again. When more than the maximum amount of SYSs is about to be selected, “Cannot select any more” is displayed in the second line below and any more SYS cannot be selected. On the fundamental system set screen, when the stream valve kind is set to Binary Output (Air), only GCM 1 can be set. When the ATM valve number area is selected and the Set/Ent key is pressed, an ATM valve number is displayed in the second line below (1-1 to 3-2). Use the up and down key to select it and press the Set/Ent key, and the number is reflected. On the ATM valve setup screen, when an ATM valve that has not been set to installed is selected, “Not installed” is displayed. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-95 <5. EtherLCD> When the stem identifying area is selected and the Set/Ent key is pressed, a strm identifying set number is displayed in the second line below (from none up to Stream 31). Use the up and down key to select the number and press the Set/Ent key, and the number is reflected. • Setup for Distillation (setting possible per GCM) is as shown below. (1) When distillation is set to Yes for more than one GCM, the SIMDIS Setup items on the Table Menu (3/4) screen is shown. (2) Distillation is added to the stream peak process (type) for the GCM with the Yes distillation. (3) Setting in the distillation screen is enabled for the GCM with the Yes distillation. • When an over limit value is set as a GCM number, “Over limit” is displayed in the line below and the set value is not reflected. • ATM valve selection is only possible for an ATM valve that can be set by GCM from oven that belongs to SYS and which belongs to GCM. When an ATM valve that is set by another GCM is specified, the error message “Already set in another GCM” is displayed. Display Item GCM # SYS1 to 6 ATM valve number Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit ○* ○* Strm identifying ○ DO first number for stream identification ○ Stream valve first number ○ Number of stream valves ○ Distillation *: ○* Unit Remarks No (default), Yes None, 1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 2-2, 3-1, 3-2 * On the ATM valve setup screen, only the number set to Installed is selected and displayed. None, up to 3 streams, up to 7 streams, up to 15 streams, up to 31 streams (Slot number) − (relative D/O number), (0), 1 to 5, When 0 is entered in slot number and relative D/O number, 0 is set in the database and asterisk is displayed. 0 to total of stream valves, the total stream valves are set on the fundamental system settings screen. 0 to total of stream valves, the total stream valves are set on the fundamental system setting screen. It is necessary that stream valve first number + the number of stream valves is less than or equal to the total number of stream valves. Not provided, Provided The settings are valid after rebooting or turning off/on its power. (Example) GCM 1 = up to 7 streams, stream identification read signal of 1-bit, 3-bit (111) D/O first number 1 for stream identification DO 1: GCM 1 stream identification read signal DO 2 to 4: GCM 1 stream identification signal GCM 2 = up to 15 streams, stream identification read signal of 1-bit, 4-bit (1111) D/O first number 1 for stream identification DO 1: GCM 1 stream Identification read signal DO 2 to 5: GCM 1 stream identification signal IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 5  5-96 <5. EtherLCD> 5.4.23 SYS Setup l Valve set 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 SYS Setup SYS # 1 Oven # 1 Valve > - Valve 1-1 Yes - Valve 1-2 - - - Valve 1-3 - - - Valve 1-4 - - - Valve 1-5 - - - Valve 1-6 - - - Valve 1-7 - - - Menu F1 F2 F3 F4 (1/4) SYS# F5 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 SYS Setup SYS # 1 Oven # 1 EPC > - Carrier 1-1 - - - Carrier 1-2 - - - Utility 1-1 - - - Utility 1-2 - - - Utility 1-3 - - - Utility 1-4 - - Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.107 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 SYS Setup SYS # 1 Oven # 1 Det > - Det 1-1 ( TCD ) Yes - Det 1-2 ( TCD ) - - - Oven# F6 (3/4) Menu F1 F2 F3 (2/4) SYS# F5 F4 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 SYS Setup SYS # 1 Oven > - Oven 1 ( Isothermal ) Yes - Oven 2 ( Program ) No - Oven 3 ( Not provided ) - - - SYS# Oven# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of SYS setup screen Menu F1 F2 F3 F4 Oven# F6 (4/4) SYS# F5 F6 F1 (Menu): Displays the Table menu screen. F5 (Sys #): Specifies a SYS number. F6 (Oven #): Specifies an Oven number. Press F5 (SYS#), and “SYS No.:” is displayed in the second line below. Use the numeric keypad to input the number and press the Set/Ent key, and the SYS contents of the number is shown. Press F6 (Oven#), and “Oven No.” is displayed in the second line below. Use the numeric keypad to select the number and press the Set/Ent key, and it is reflected in the second line above, and the valve set of the specified oven is completed. Point a cursor to the valve and press the Set/Ent key, and options are displayed in the second line below. Select either Yes or No (No is default) Not installed valves are displayed as ----. When any of the Not installed valves is used by other SYS, **** is displayed. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <5. EtherLCD> 5-97 In some SYSs, when a valve is set to Yes and other SYS is selected, **** is displayed, “Already set in other SYS” is displayed in the second line below and it cannot be set again even though it is selected. • Any SYS number that does not exist in F5 (SYS#) cannot be entered. • Any oven number that does not exist in F6 (Oven#) cannot be entered. l Detector Setup Press F5 (SYS#), and “SYS No.” is displayed in the second line below. Use the numeric keypad to input the number and press the Set/Ent key, and it is reflected in the second line above and the SYS contents of the number is shown. Press F6 (Oven#), and “Oven No.” is displayed in the second line below. Use the numeric keypad to select the number and press the Set/Ent key, and it is reflected in the second line above, and the valve set of the specified oven is completed. Point a cursor to a detector and press the Set/Ent key, and options are displayed in the second line below. Select either Yes or No. Not installed detectors are displayed as ----. When any of the Not installed detectors is used by other SYS, **** is displayed. In some SYSs, when a detector is set to Yes and other SYS is selected, **** is displayed, “Already set in other SYS” is displayed in the second line below and it cannot be set again even though it is selected. l EPC Setup Press F5 (SYS#), and “SYS No.:” is displayed in the second line below. Use the numeric keypad to select the number and press the Set/Ent key, and the SYS contents of the number is shown. Press F6 (Oven#), and “Oven No.:” is displayed in the second line below. Use the numeric keypad to select the number and press the Set/Ent key, and it is reflected in the second line above and the valve set of the specified oven is completed. Point a cursor to EPC and press the Set/Ent key, and options are displayed in the second line below. Point a cursor to an item and press the Set/Ent key, and options are displayed in the second line below. Select either Yes or No and press the Set/Ent key, and the setting is done. When Yes is selected for either EPC: CarrierN-1 or CarrierN-2 that is set in the Program on the EPC setup screen, EPC program set in the SYS method set is available. (When Yess are selected for EPC: CarrierN-1, CarrierN-2, and Utility N-1 to N-4 that are set to Constant in the EPC setup screen Yes, enter set values in the Operating Parameters.) Not installed EPCs are displayed as ----. When any of the Not installed EPC is used by other SYS, **** is displayed. In some SYSs, when an EPC is set to Yes and other SYS is selected, **** is displayed, “Already set in other SYS” is displayed in the second line below and it cannot be set again even though it is selected. • Up to 2 carrier gases set in the program can be set for one SYS. l Oven Setup Press F5 (SYS#) and “SYS No.:” is displayed in the second line below. Use the numeric keypad to select the number and press the Set/Ent key, and the SYS contents of the number is shown. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 5  5-98 <5. EtherLCD> Point a cursor to selection and press the Set/Ent key, and options are displayed in the second line below. Select either Yes or No. Display Item Name SYS # Oven # Valve Valve set detector Detector type Display Detector Setup Carrier Utility Oven *: EPC Setup Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 6 1 3 ○* Unit ○* ○* ○* ○* Remarks No (default), Yes Some inputs disabled No (default), Yes Some inputs disabled No (default), Yes Some input disabled No (default), Yes The settings are valid after rebooting or turning off/on its power. 5.4.24 User Programming 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 User Programming Period # 1 > - GCM number 1 - Auto start Off - Exec interval Day - Interval (Day) 1 - Interval (Hour) * * * - Interval (Min) * * * * - Interval (Sec) * * * * - Exec SYS number * Menu Calend Delete Period# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.108 Example of User Programming screen (Period script) F1 (Menu): F2 (Calend): F3 (Delete): F6 (Period #): Displays the Table menu screen. Displays the User Programming screen (End of peak detection script). Displays the period script delete screen. Specifies a Period script number. • If a peak is not assigned to the stream set for the specified GCM number, an error occurs when period script is executed. • When a GCM number is 0, all set values including the GCM number are displayed as * (asterisk). IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-99 <5. EtherLCD> Display Item Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Period # Period script Number 1 64 GCM Number ○ 0 6 Auto Start ○* Exec Interval ○ Interval (Date) Interval (Hour) Interval (Minute) Interval (Second) Exec SYS Number ○ ○ ○ 1 1 1 31 148 1440 ○ 1 3600 ○ 1 6 *: Unit Remarks Not done (not executable) Done (executable) Date Hour Minute Second Ana end Date When not selected by Cycle Hour Time Unit, please display with Minute asterisk. However, leave internal data as they are. Second Only SYS numbers belonging to relevant GCM can be selected. When Ana end is not selected in the Cycle Time Unit, display * (asterisk). * When Exec interval is Ana end, the relevant period script is executed at the time of Ana end for the specified SYS number. The settings are valid after rebooting or turning off/on its power. l User Program Delete Screen (Period script) Press F3 (Delete). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 User Program Delete Period # 1 > - User Program Delete Not deleted Menu Main Period# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.109 Example of User Program Delete (Period script) screen F1 (Menu): Displays the Table menu screen. F2 (Main): Displays the User Programming screen (Period script). F6 (Period #): Specifies a Period script number. • The operation accepts user level above C+ only. • When Delete is selected in the User Program Delete, the relevant period script file is deleted. When a script is deleted, the auto start of the script is automatically changed to NA. Any period script in the status Enable cannot be deleted (an error message is displayed). • When the execution status is Enable and the user program is about to be deleted, the error message “No execution because of executing” is displayed. • Even when the user program is deleted, the script file in the SD card is not deleted. However, the script on the user program is deleted. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 5  5-100 <5. EtherLCD> Display Item Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Period # Period script Number 1 64 User Program ○ Delete Unit Remarks Do not delete Delete l User Programming Screen (End of peak detection script) Press F2 (Calend). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 User Programming SYS # 1 > - Auto start Off Menu Period Delete SYS# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.110 Example of User Programming screen (end of peak detection script) F1 (Menu): F2 (Period): F3 (Delete): F6 (SYS #): Displays the Table menu screen. Displays the User programming screen (Period script). Displays the end of peak detection script delete screen. Specifies an End of peak detection script number • Any SYS # number that does not exist in F6 (SYS #) cannot be entered. Display Item SYS # Auto Start Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit ○ Unit Remarks Not done (not executable) Done (executable) l User Program Delete Screen (End of peak detection script) 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 User Program Delete SYS # 1 > - User Program Delete Not deleted Menu Main SYS# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.111 Example of User Program Delete screen (End of peak detection script) F1 (Menu): Display the Table menu screen. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  5-101 <5. EtherLCD> F2 (Main): F6 (SYS #): Display the User Programming screen(period script). Specifies an End of peak detection script number • The operation accept user level above C+ only. • When Delete is selected for User Program Delete, the relevant end of peak detection script file is deleted. When a script is deleted, the auto start of the script is automatically changed to NA. Any peak detection script in the status Enable cannot be deleted (an error message is displayed). • When the execution status is Enable and the user program is about to be deleted, the error message “No execution because of executing” is displayed. • Even when the user program is deleted, the script file in the SD card is not deleted. However, the script on the user program is deleted. Display Item SYS # Delete User Program 5.4.25 Name Set Lower Limit Upper Limit ○ Unit Remarks Do not delete Delete SIMDIS Setup 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 SIMDIS Setup GCM # 1 > - Temperature unit deg C - Det number of SIMDIS None - Response factor updating Manual - Section set updating Auto - Calib curve updating Auto Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.112 Curve GCM# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of SIMDIS Setup screen F1 (Menu): Displays the Table menu screen. F4 (Convert): Displays the SIMDIS Calib Data Set screen. F6 (GCM #): Specifies a GCM number. When setting an over limit value as a GCM number, the message “Over limit” is displayed in the bottom line and the set value is not reflected. For GCM set as NA for distillation on the GCM setup (2/2) screen, “No distillation analysis” is displayed at the bottom line and setting is not reflected. When the response factor updating is set to Yes, the response factor f on the peak setup-specific screen of the cal run stream used by the set GCM is automatically updated. If the calibration factor goes outside the range while executing, the response factor is not updated. If the peak concentration is 0, the area is negative, or a peak fails to be detected, the response factor of the corresponding peak is set to 1.0. When the section updating is set to Yes, the Section set end on the peak set-up specific screen of the cal run stream used by the set GCM is automatically updated. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 5  5-102 <5. EtherLCD> When the calib curve updating is set to Yes, the calib curve coef a and the calib curve coef b on the SIMDIS Calib Data Set screen are automatically updated. • Det number of SIMDIS Only detectors assigned to relevant GCM can be set up. On the GCM setup screen, the SYS number belonging to each GCM is detectable and the detector number belonging to each SYS on the SYS setup screen (2/5) can be detected. Display Item GCM # Temp Unit Name GCM Number Det number of SIMDISM Response factor updating Section updating Calilb curve updating Set Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit Remarks ○ degC degF (May not selectable due to local regulations) 1-1 ○ Manual, Auto ○ ○ Manual, Auto Manual, Auto l SIMDIS Calib Data Setup Press F4 (Curve). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 SIMDIS Calib Data Setup (1/3) (2/3) 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 SIMDIS Calib Data Setup GCM # 1 / SYS # 1 / Method # 1 GCM # 1 / SYS # 1 / Method # 1 > - Data acquisition str 0 > - Data acquisition peak3 0 - Calib curve coef a 1.000 - Elapsed time 3 0.0 s - Calib curve coef b 1.000 - Std B.P 3 0.0 - Data acquisition peak1 0 - Data acquisition peak4 0 - Elapsed time 1 0.0 s - Elapsed time 4 0.0 s - Std B.P 1 0.0 - Std B.P 4 0.0 - Data acquisition peak2 0 - Data acquisition peak5 0 - Elapsed time 2 0.0 s - Elapsed time 5 0.0 s - Std B.P 2 0.0 - Std B.P 5 0.0 Dist SYS# Method# Dist SYS# Method# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 5.113 Example of SIMDIS Calib Data Set (1/3) screen F1 (Dist): F5 (SYS #): Displays the SIMDIS Setup screen. Specifies a SYS number. When F5 (SYS #) is pressed, “SYS No.:” is displayed on the second line below. Use the numeric keypad to enter the number and press the SET/ENT key, and a cursor jumps to the SYS number. Only the SYS numbers set in GCM is selectable. When any other number is entered, “Over limit” is displayed on the second line below. • F6 (Method #): Specifies a Method number. • The GCM number displayed on the second line above is the same as the one set on the SIMDIS Setup screen. • Data acquisition streamSet the cal run stream number acquired for acquiring data to compile a SIMDIS calib curve. On the stream setup screen, when a stream number with other stream type than Cal run is about to be set, the error message “No cal run stream” is displayed on the second line below. • Calib curve coef a & b IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <5. EtherLCD> 5-103 Linear ramp a & slice b of a SIMDIS Calib curve. Auto updating and manual entry are possible. • Data acquisition peak 1 to 8 Set peak number of the cal run stream to acquire data used to compile a SIMDIS calib curve. • Elapsed Time 1 to 8, Standard B.P. 1 to 8 Curve data of a SIMDIS Calib curve. Auto updating and manual entry are possible. • When GCM cal run stream set to Yes for calib curve updating on the SIMDIS Setup screen is executed, the peak retention time acquired by executing cal run stream and Standard B. P. data on the corresponding peak set-up specific screen are used to calculate time date beyond Elapsed Time 6 set in the SYS method (from cal setup screen the corresponding stream number can identify SYS method number) to update the calib curve coef a and the calib curve coef b. Again, the retention time acquired through the activated cal run stream is set to Elapsed Time and the standard B.P. set in Peak Setup-Specific is updated to the Standard B.P. When F5 (SYS #) is pressed, “SYS Number:” is displayed on the second line below. Use the numeric keypad to enter the number and press the SET/ENT key, and a cursor jumps to the SYS number. However, only SYS numbers set in GCM are selectable, when any other number is entered, “Over limit” is displayed on the second line below. F6 (Method #): Specifies a Method number. Display Item Name GCM # GCM Number SYS # SYS Number Method # Method number Data acquisition stream Calib curve coef a Calib curve coef b Data acquisition peak 1 to 8 Elapsed Time1 to 8 Standard B.P.1 to 8 5.4.26 Set Lower Limit Upper Limit ○ ○ ○ 0 31 ○ ○ ○ −9.999 −999.999 0 9.999 999.999 999 ○ ○ 0.0 −9999.9 21600.0 9999.9 Unit Remarks Units Setup (User Defined) 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Units Setup (User Defined) Unit # 21 > - Unit name aaaaaaaa Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.114 F1 (Menu): F6 (Unit #): Unit# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of User Setup (User Defined) screen Displays the Table menu screen. Enters User defined unit numbers. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 5  5-104 <5. EtherLCD> Display Item Name Unit # User defined unit number Unit Name Unit name 5.4.27 Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 21 100 Unit ○ Remarks 8 one-bite alphanumeric characters MODBUS CLIENT Setup 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 MODBUS CLIENT setup MODBUS # 1 > - IP address 0.0.0.0 - Flag Disconnect Menu F1 F2 Figure 5.115 MODBUS# F3 F4 F5 F6 Example of MODBUS Client Setup screen F1 (Menu): Displays the Table menu screen. F6 (MODBUS): Sets a MODBUS number. Up to 20 GCs which enable communication between GC are able to be registered on the LCD screen. The procedure is as follows. 1. 2. Press F6 (Modbus #), and the setup screen is selected. Set the IP address of the GC of the connection destination and change the flag to Connect. Note: While the GC of the connection destination remains Connect, it cannot be re-registered on another setup screen. A message advising that the same GC cannot be registered is displayed. Display Item Name MODBUS # MODBUS Number IP address Flag *: Set Lower Limit Upper Limit 1 20 ○* ○* Unit Remarks Disconnect, Connect The settings are valid after rebooting or turning off/on its power. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6. 6-1 <6. Maintenance> Maintenance Instrument modification or part replacement must be conducted by the personnel of Yokogawa or its assigned representative only. The contents of this chapter must be conducted by Yokogawa service staff or a person with a proper training. 6.1 Maintenance and Inspection Before opening the door or cover of the explosionproof section for maintenance and inspection, be sure to turn off the power and wait for at least 25 minutes. After completing inspections, close the door or cover tightly, check that the specified explosionproof performance is ensured, and then turn on the power. 6.1.1 Explosion-protection Structure When performing maintenance, first inspect the system according to the instructions given in Table 6.1 before operating, in order for the explosionproof performance to be maintained. If the following damages occurred, contact Yokogawa service center: (1) Damage around the screws on the protection system (flameproof structure). (2) Damage to any enclosure surface or transparent part. (3) Any crack or excessive deformation to any of the gaskets. Table 6.1 Maintenance and Inspection Item Enclosure Touch panel surface Setscrew Method Visual Visual Gaskets * Cable inlet Terminal *: 6.1.2 No damage No damage Criterion Corrective Action Contact YOKOGAWA Contact YOKOGAWA Visual and by touch No looseness, dust or rust Retighten and clean, and contact YOKOGAWA Visual No cracks or excessive deformation Contact YOKOGAWA Visual and by touch No damage, deterioration or looseness Retighten or replace Visual and by touch No looseness or dirt on insulators Retighten , parts change and clean For the maintenance of bushings in isothermal ovens, refer to 6.1.7. Stopping the system Unless in case of an emergency, stop the system according to “3.3.4 Stopping operation” and then turn off the power. 6.1.3 Routine Inspection The routine maintenance inspection must be done according to Table 6.2. In the inspection, confirm that all of the readings are consistent with the values indicated in the operation data. These readings, if previously entered on the Operation Condition display menu, can also be confirmed on the screen as well. Since these inspection items vary depending on the instrument specifications, select as required according to the specifications. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 6  6-2 <6. Maintenance> Table 6.2 Inspection Items Recommended Interval Reading of pressure gauge on carrier gas cylinder 24 hours Reading of carrier-gas pressure gauge 24 hours Reading of sample-gas pressure gauge 24 hours Reading of sample-gas flowmeter 1 to 7 days Reading of sample-gas bypass flowmeter 1 to 7 days Reading of protective gas (instrumental air) pressure gauge 24 hours Readings of pressure gauges on the hydrogen gas for combustion and nitrogen gas cylinders 1 to 7 days Readings of pressure gauges for hydrogen gas for combustion and nitrogen gas 1 to 7 days Reading of pressure gauge for combustion air 24 hours Current temperatures of isothermal ovens, etc. 1 to 7 days Calibration coefficient 1 to 7 days LSV sample leak 7 days Steam temperature adjustment at the sampling section 7 days Item 6.1.4 Cylinder After replacing the cylinders for carrier gas, FID or FPD hydrogen gas for combustion, air, or standard gas, always perform a leak test on the couplings around the regulators on the cylinder. The leak test must be conducted two or three times every day, for the three days after replacing a cylinder. Ensure that the air is discharged from the system when replacing a cylinder. The installation of a valve for discharging air is recommended. 6.1.5 Leak Test After replacing or repairing any of the parts for pipes located inside or outside the instrument, always check the connections for possible leaks. This checkup procedure is called a leak test. During a leak test, keep the pipes pressurized, apply soap water (Snoop or equivalent) to the connections and check for possible leaks. If a leak is found, retighten the connection or replace any defective parts and conduct leak test again. Wipe off soap water after the test. Please note that any leak in the plumbing parts or connections may not only cause bad analysis results or increase the gas consumption, but also could result in safety issues. 6.1.6 Insulation Resistance Test Please confirm that insulation resistance shows 10 MΩ or higher between L - N and Ground (test voltage 250 V DC). In this case, L and N terminal should be shortened with jumper cable and this test must be confirmed before turn power on. After this test, please do not forget to remove the jumper cable. Before turn power on, please confirm the L and N terminal is not shortened. 6.1.7 Maintenance of Bushings in Isothermal Ovens Bushings in isothermal ovens need inspection and maintenance because they are exposed to high temperatures over a long time and thus tend to contract, which may affect the performance of the ovens. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <6. Maintenance> 6-3 In case that setting temperature of the isothermal oven of gas chromatography is relatively high, bushings (or the seal on the potting material) with a crack or clear deformation may cause the internal pressure of the isothermal oven to fall, the power not to be supplied to the oven, and any of the low internal pressure alarms (No. 112 to 114) to be issued. However, even if there is no crack or clear deformation on bushings (or the seal on the potting material), when starting up from a low temperature such as after inspection and maintenance, the internal pressure of the isothermal oven may not rise enough, a low internal temperature alarm (No. 112 to 114) may be issued and not deactivated, and power may not be fed to the oven. However, this is not an instrument failure. In this case, supply power to the isothermal oven referring the following “● Procedure to start up the isothermal oven by controlling the supply pressure of protective gas.” If this method fails, the bushing must be replaced and potting agent must be applied *1. Please contact Yokogawa service center. When the temperature set for isothermal ovens exceeds 180ºC, it is necessary to periodically replace the bushings and apply potting agent on them (recommended cycle: 5 years *2) even if there is no abnormality such as cracks and deformation on a bushing and low internal pressure. Please contact Yokogawa service center. *1: *2: The type and number of bushings vary depending on the specifications. The recommended cycle of 5 years is only a reference value and is not guaranteed. The cycle varies depending on the operating environment and the frequency of power down. l Procedure to start up the isothermal oven by controlling the supply pressure of protective gas (1) Supply a protective gas (instrument air) and a carrier gas. (2) Supply power to the protection system (flameproof enclosure). (3) After purging the electrical circuit unit is completed (21±3 minutes), power is supplied to the electrical circuit unit. Check that the operation panel (human machine interface: HMI) starts. (4) If any of the low internal pressure alarms (No. 112 to 114) appears on the operation panel (HMI) and power is not supplied to the isothermal oven, supply power to the isothermal oven as follows. (5) Remove the cover from the pressure controller and check the setting pressure of the regulator for supplying protective gas (purging air) (in the case of multiple isothermal ovens, repeat this step for each oven). (6) Set the pressure of the regulator to 350 – 450 kPa, and check that the low internal pressure alarm is deactivated. (7) After purging each isothermal oven is completed (9±2.5 minutes), power is supplied to each oven. Turn on the heater for the oven. (8) After the temperature of the isothermal oven becomes stable, set the pressure of the regulator back to the value checked at step (5). (9) Check that low internal pressure alarms are not issued, and then put the cover of the pressure controller back in place. 6.1.8 Checking Chromatograms After replacing any of the parts of the system, resume operation, record chromatograms several times and compare the results with those shown in the Operation Data to ensure that the system continues normal operations. 6.1.9 Recommended Parts List for Periodical Replacement Table 6.3 is a list of parts that will require periodical replacement and their standard replacement interval. The replacement interval differs depending on the process sample specifications and the condition of use. Replace parts according to the adequate cycle to your GC8000. The replacement interval is just a guide line. The actual replacement timing should be determined by the customer’s experience in operating the system. The replacement interval does not mean that the system is under warranty during the interval. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 6  6-4 <6. Maintenance> Table 6.3 Item Rotary Valve Recommended Parts List for Periodical Replacement Name Valve Seat Rubber Belows Valve Gland Liquid Sampling Seal Element Valve O-ring Filter Element Gasket Stream Switching Diaphragm Valve Oven Heater Turbine Packing Vortex tube Part Number K9409ZA K9034FF K9409ZE K9409ZD K9409ZC K9409ZB K9034FR K9402XX K9034FL K9034FK K9034FJ K9034FH L9819AC K9034BA K9034BP K9034BJ K9034BH K9034BG K9034BB K9034GX K9034GV K9034GS K9034GR K9034GN K9402VG K9402VH K9402UN L9862AG L9862AC L9862AD K9192WL K9192WV K9409GE K9409GN K9409GF K9409GP K9409GG K9409GB K9409GH K9409GC K9409GS K9409GT K9409GU K9409GV K9809CK K9809CL K9809CM K9809CN K9809CF K9809CG K9809CH K9809CJ K9400FA K9803SX K9803SW K9400VZ Replacement Interval 100,000 cycles 100,000 cycles or 1-year, whichever comes earlier 5-years 50,000 cycles 2-years 1-year 1-year 3-years 5-years 2-years 5-years 5-years 5-years Note CSW (Rulon) (2xK9034DN) 0.33 μL (Rulon) 1 μL (Rulon) (2xK9034DS) 2 μL (Rulon) (2xK9034DR) 3 μL (Rulon) (2xK9034DQ) Over 10 μL (Rulon) (2xK9034DP) CSW (Teflon) 0.33 μL (Teflon) 1 μL (Teflon) 2 μL (Teflon) 3 μL (Teflon) Over 10 μL (Teflon) CSW (SUS316) 0.33 to 3 μL (SUS316) 10 μL (SUS316) 25 μL (SUS316) 50 μL (SUS316) 360 μL or more (SUS316) CSW (Hastelloy C) 0.33 to 3 μL (Hastelloy C) 25 μL (Hastelloy C) 50 μL (Hastelloy C) 360 μL or more (Hastelloy C) Rulon Teflon Viton + Teflon Silicone + Teflon Isothermal Oven, 100 V, 110 °C or below Isothermal Oven, 100 V, over 110 °C Isothermal Oven, 110 V, 110 °C or below Isothermal Oven, 110 V, over 110 °C Isothermal Oven, 115 V, 110 °C or below Isothermal Oven, 115 V, over 110 °C Isothermal Oven, 120 V, 110 °C or below Isothermal Oven, 120 V, over 110 °C Isothermal Oven, 200 V Isothermal Oven, 220 V Isothermal Oven, 230 V Isothermal Oven, 240 V Type 4 isothermal oven, 200 V Type 4 isothermal oven, 220 V Type 4 isothermal oven, 230 V Type 4 isothermal oven, 240 V Programmed-temperature oven, 200 V Programmed-temperature oven, 220 V Programmed-temperature oven, 230 V Programmed-temperature oven, 240 V For large isothermal oven For standard isothermal oven For FPD, for programmed-temperature oven IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6.2 6-5 <6. Maintenance> Procedure for Replacing Parts l Precautions for Parts Replacement (1) Always observe the instructions in this manual when replacing parts. (2) When disconnecting pipes, do not allow any oil or moisture to get inside the pipes. (3) When cleaning inside of a pipe, do not use any solvent containing non-volatile impurities, as they will contaminate inside of the pipe and will prevent normal analysis. This contamination might necessitate parts replacement to restore the system to normal. When the pipes need to be cleaned, use highly-pure acetone. (4) After replacing piping parts, always perform leak tests. This section shows the replacement procedures for the maintenance (replacement) parts that are used in the following sections of GC8000. 1. Protection system 2. Electronics section 3. Pressure and flow control section 4. Oven (isothermal, programmed-temperature) 5. Sample processing section (GCSMP) Protection system B (1) Protection System (2) Electronics section 6 Protection system A Control Unit Display Status LED (3) Pressure Control Section (4) Isothermal Oven (5) Sample Processing Section (2) EPC Box (2) Oven Unit 1 Large Isothermal Oven Oven Unit 2 Isothermal or programmedtemperature oven Control Unit Electronics section Control Unit Pressure and Flow Control Section Oven Unit 1 Electronics section Oven Unit 1 Pressure and Flow Control Section Oven Unit 2 Electronics section (3) Pressure and Flow Control Section Oven Unit 2 Pressure and Flow Control Section Analyzer Base Sampling Unit (GCSMP) Figure 6.1 Confirm the location of each replacement part referring to Figure 6.1. 6.2.1 Parts for the Protection system The instructions for replacing parts in the protection system are explained. (1) Pressure switch (2) Fuse (3) Relay and Relay board There are 2 types of protection systems depending on type of GC8000, as shown in Figure 6.2. No enclosure is mounted for FM/CSA explosionproof Y-purge type. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <6. Maintenance> (a) One enclosure Figure 6.2 6-6 (b) Two enclosures (1) Pressure Switch for Detecting Internal Pressure This pressure switch detects the pressure inside the electronics section. The pressure switch is installed on the protection system and set to turn off at 392 Pa. (1) Stop the operation (See “3.3.4 Stopping operation” for this procedure). (2) Stop the supply of power. (3) Confirm that the LED (Green) of “POWER” is OFF. CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (4) Turn off the protective gas (instrumental air). (5) Loosen the locknuts on the cover for the protection system A of the right side and remove the cover. (6) Remove the protection-film cover for wiring, and disconnect the customer wiring. Then remove the screws and washers, disconnect the wires, and remove the bracket. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <6. Maintenance> 6-7 Locknut Wires Bracket Screws Washer Protection-film cover for wiring 6 (7) Remove the cover, stud, and screws as shown below. Cover Screw Stud IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-8 <6. Maintenance> (8) Remove the screws shown below. Two screws (9) Remove the two screws shown below to disconnect wiring from the pressure switch. Remove the screw, the pipe, and then the pressure switch. Pressure Switch Screw Screw Bushing Wiring (10) Replace the pressure switch, and follow directions (6) to (9) in the reverse order. (11) Remove a pin from the bushing of the pressure switch to install a new pressure switch. Insert the pipe straight into the bushing so as not to deform it. Confirm that the piping and wiring are correct. (12) Install the cover on the protection system. Rotate the cover until it stops, and then tighten the locknut. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-9 <6. Maintenance> K9800RX (FM, CSA, TIIS) K9800MX (ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI) Figure 6.3 6 Pressure Switch for Detecting Internal Pressure (2) Fuses The fuses discussed here are installed in the power line to the protection system. They are housed in the container of the protection system A on the right side. (1) Stop the operation (See “3.3.4 Stopping operation” for this procedure). (2) Stop the supply of power. (3) Confirm that the LED (Green) of “POWER” is OFF. CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (4) Loosen the locknut on the cover for the protection system A on the right side and remove the cover. (5) The fuses are located on the front side, as shown in Figure 6.4. (6) Use a flathead screwdriver to rotate the fuse holder cap counterclockwise and remove it from the fuse holder. (7) Replace the fuse in the fuse holder cap with a new one. Fuse rating Dimensions: ø5.2 × 20 mm Rated voltage: 250 V AC Rated current: 1.25 A Fusing time: Time-delay fusing type (8) Confirm that the fuses are securely installed in the cap. (9) Push the cap into the fuse holder until secured. (10) Confirm that the cap is firmly installed on the fuse holder. (11) Install the cover on the protection system. Rotate the cover until it stops, then tighten the locknut. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <6. Maintenance> 6-10 A1423EF 2 pieces Fuses Figure 6.4 (3) Relays and Relay boards There are two types of relays depending on the specifications. • One protection system (see Figure 6.2 (a)) The relays are installed on the relay board in the protection system A. See “A. Relay board” below to replace the relay board. • Two protection systems (see Figure 6.2 (b)) The relays are installed inside the protection system B on the left side. See “A. Relay board” and “B. Relays” below to replace the relay board and the relay. A. Relay board (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 Stopping operation” for this procedure). (2) Stop the supply of power. (3) Confirm that the LED (Green) of “POWER” is OFF. CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (4) Loosen the locknut on the cover for the protection system A on the right side and remove the cover. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-11 <6. Maintenance> (5) Remove the protection-film cover for wiring, and disconnect the customer wiring. Then remove the screws, disconnect the wires, and remove the bracket. Locknut Wires Bracket Screws Washer Protection-film cover for wiring 6 (6) Disconnect the connectors from the board. Remove the screws. Slide out the sheet metal part to remove. Connectors Screw Slide IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <6. Maintenance> 6-12 (7) Remove the screws shown below and remaining connecters, if any, to remove the board from the assembly. Screws (8) Remove the two screws shown below to disconnect the connectors between the boards. Insulation Sheet Screws Safety Board 1 Safety Board 2 (9) After replacing the board, follow steps (5) to (8) in the reverse order. (10) Confirm that the connectors are placed in the correct locations. (11) Install the cover on the protection system. Rotate the cover until it stops, then tighten the locknut. K9800SB 100 V Specification (Safety board 1) K9800TB 100 V/200 V Specification (Safety board 2) K9800SD 200 V Specification (Safety board 1) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <6. Maintenance> 6-13 B. Relays (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 Stopping operation” for this procedure). (2) Stop the supply of power. (3) Confirm that the LED (Green) of “POWER” is OFF. CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (4) Loosen the locknut on the cover for the protection system B on the left side and remove the cover. (5) Remove the screws shown below. Disconnect the wires and remove the bracket. Locknut Wires Bracket Washer Screws Protection-film cover for wiring (6) Remove the wires for the relays and the bracket. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 6  <6. Maintenance> 6-14 (7) Remove the screws shown below and replace the relay. Screws Relay (8) Follow steps (5) and (6) in the reverse order, and install wires on the bracket. (9) Install the cover on the protection system. Fully rotate the cover until it stops, then tighten the locknut. A1852MR (100 V) A1853MR (200 V) Figure 6.5 6.2.2 Components for Electronics section The instructions for replacing parts in the electronics section are explained. (1) Miscellaneous cards (2) HMI unit (3) Fuse (4) Solenoid valve (5) Pressure switch (6) EPC IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-15 <6. Maintenance> (1) Miscellaneous Cards Replacement cards are pre-adjusted before shipment and should be installed as received. Follow the procedures below when replacing cards. (1) Stop the operation (See “3.3.4 Stopping operation” for this procedure). (2) Stop the supply of power. (3) Open the control unit door or the cover for the electronics section for the oven unit, depending on the card to be replaced. Use a key or hexagon wrench included in the accessory kit to open the door or the cover. CAUTION • • • • Replacement card should be the same P/N as operation data. Never remove or insert cards while the power is ON, as it may cause malfunctions. Always hold the handle of the card when removing or inserting it. If replace the control CPU card, download of parameter and user program script is necessary. Please follow the download procedure in ASET IM (IM 11B06C01-01E). • IP address of control CPU is 192.168.1.1 as preset value. After the parameter download and GC power OFF/ON, the IP address is changed to new data in parameter file. Only the new IP address will be valid for connection after this IP address change. Please pay attention to this matter. • Detector current adjustment is necessary after TCD card replacement. Please refer the procedure to “5.3.9 Detector Adjustment”. • Voltage adjustment is necessary after FID card (with methanizer) replacement. Please refer the procedure to “5.3.9 Detector Adjustment”. NOTE Cards are installed within the pressurized enclosure. They must be installed in the original condition to ensure explosionproof functionality. (4) Disconnect the cables to the card, if any. (5) Loosen the two screws to remove the card stopper. (6) Hold the handle of the card and pull it out from the rack. NOTE • Always install a new card in the place of the card being replaced. • The name of the card is labeled on the upper section of the rack. Insert the card into the correct slot. • Never customize by replacing with different function cards etc. (7) Install a new card in the place of the card being replaced. (8) Mount the card stopper and tighten the two screws. (9) Close the control unit door and the electronics section cover for the oven unit. (10) Reconnect cables, if any. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 6  <6. Maintenance> 6-16 Item No. Board Name 1 Control CPU Card 2 Control Section 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Oven 16 17 18 19 Part Number (AS) K9802AA K9802AB K9802AC K9802AD K9802AE K9802AF K9802AG K9802AK COM Card K9802CA K9802CB User Programming Card K9802DA AI Card K9802EA K9802EB AO Card K9802FA K9802FB DIO Card K9802GA K9802GB DI Card K9802HA DO Card K9802JA K9802JB Safety Board 3 K9802LA K9802LB K9802LC K9802LD K9802LE K9802LF Status Board K9802MA CTRL EV Board K9802NA Media Converter K9634WA Oven CPU Card K9804AA K9084AB K9804AC K9804AD K9804AE K9804AF K9804AG K9804AK TCD Card K9804BA FID Card K9804CA K9804CB K9804CC K9804CD K9804CE K9804CF K9804CG K9804DA K9804DB K9804DC K9804DD K9804DE K9804DF K9804DG TEMP Card K9804FA K9804FB K9804FC K9804FD FPD Card K9804GA Oven EV Board K9804JA K9804JB Safety Board 4 K9804LA K9804LB K9804LC K9804LD Note (1x Ethernet, SHDSL, except TIIS) (2x Ethernet, except TIIS) (1x Opt, except TIIS) (2x Opt, except TIIS) (1x Ethernet, SHDSL, TIIS) (2x Ethernet, TIIS) (1x Opt, TIIS) (2x Opt, TIIS) (2 ports) (1 port) (Voltage) (Current) (Channel isolated) (System isolated) (DC) (AC) (DC) (AC) (Type 3, X Purge) (Type 3, Y Purge) (Type 2, X Purge) (Type 2, Y Purge) (Type 1, X Purge) (Type 1, Y Purge) (I. Oven, T1) (I. Oven, T2) (I. Oven, T3) (I. Oven, T4) (P. Oven, T1) (P. Oven, T2) (P. Oven, T3) (P. Oven, T4) (6M, Methanizer) (20M, Methanizer) (60M, Methanizer) (200M, Methanizer) (600M, Methanizer) (1G, Methanizer) (2G, Methanizer) (6M) (20M) (60M) (200M) (600M) (1G) (2G) (T1) (T2) (T3) (T4) (I. Oven) (P. Oven) (LSV, FPD) (Oven) (ATEX, LSV, FPD) (ATEX, Oven) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <6. Maintenance> Item No. Board Name 20 Safety Board 1 Pressurized 21 Safety Board 2 22 Surge Protector Board Part Number (AS) K9800SA K9800SB K9800SC K9800SD K9800TA K9800TB K9800QM 6-17 Note (100 V, ATEX) (100 V, TIIS·FM) (200 V, ATEX) (200 V, TIIS·FM) (ATEX) (TIIS·FM) Replacement cards locations are shown in Figures 6.6 to 6.9. Locking Bracket 6 1 10 12 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 F0608.ai Figure 6.6 11 9 F0609.ai Figure 6.7 14 15 17 16 13 19 18 F0610.ai Figure 6.8 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-18 <6. Maintenance> 21 22 20 F0611.ai Figure 6.9 (2) HMI Unit (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Stop the operation and the supply of power. Open the door of the electronics section using a key included in the accessory kit. Loosen a screw of the HMI unit cover on the back of the door to remove the cover. Remove three cable connectors attached to the HMI unit and one connector attached to the status board. Remove eight screws around the HMI unit, and remove it with the bracket. Confirm that the rubber is securely fitted in the groove on the door. Install a new HMI unit by following steps (2) to (3) in the reverse order. Plug the three cable connectors back in their original positions. Attach the HMI unit cover using the screw. Close and lock the door of the electronics section. K9802QA (for TIIS) K9802QB (except for the TIIS specification) K9802QC (for Y purge system) HMI Unit Cover Screw HMI Unit Cover Screws (8 places) F0614.ai Figure 6.10 (3) Fuses As shown in Figure 6.11, there are two types of fuses in the electronics section. The ratings for both fuses are listed in Table 6.4. Table 6.4 Fuse of electronics section Part Number A1463EF A1598EF Rated Voltage 250 VAC Rated Amperage 6.3 A 30 A Fusing Characteristics Time-delay Normal IM 11B08A01-01E Notes 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-19 <6. Maintenance> Follow the procedures below to replace. l For A1463EF (1) Stop the operation and the supply of power. (2) Confirm that the LED (Green) of “POWER” is OFF. (3) Open the door of the electronics section, using a key included in the accessory kit. (4) Remove the fuse holder cap by rotating it counterclockwise. (5) Remove the fuse from the cap and install a new one. (6) Push and rotate a cap equipped with a fuse clockwise to install it in the fuse holder. (7) Close and lock the electronics section door. l For A1598EF (1) Stop the operation and the supply of power. (2) Confirm that the LED (Green) of “POWER” is OFF. (3) Open the door of the electronics section, using a key included in the accessory kit. (4) Replace the fuse. Fuse can be pulled out. For Y purge type, the locking bracket must be removed. After replacing the fuse, attach the locking bracket. (5) Close and lock the electronics section door. Locking Bracket A1463EF A1598EF (2 pieces or 4 pieces) Figure 6.11 (4) Solenoid Valves (1) Stop the operation and the supply of power. (2) Turn off the protective gas (instrumental air). (3) When replacing a solenoid valve for the control unit, open the control unit door using a key included in the accessory kit. Remove the two screws to remove the cover. When replacing the solenoid valve for the electronics section for the oven unit, remove the cover of the electronics section located to the right side of the oven unit by removing the six screws using a hexagon wrench included in the accessory kit. Disconnect the tube from the solenoid valve by pulling it while pressing the black part of the connector. (4) Disconnect the connector at the end of the cable of the solenoid valve from the terminal. Remove the black tube that is connected to the solenoid valve you want to replace. You can remove the tube by pressing on the black section where the tube is inserted and pulling the tube toward you. (5) Label the new solenoid valve with the number of the replacing solenoid valve. Place a marking decal on the connector at the end of the cable. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 6  <6. Maintenance> 6-20 (6) Remove the two screws on the front side of the solenoid valve and remove the solenoid valve. (7) Replace the solenoid valve and gasket with new ones. (8) Confirm that the two screws on the front side of the solenoid valve are securely fastened. (9) Securely reconnect the connector at the end of the cable of the solenoid valve to its original location. Be sure to attach the connector with the correct polarity. NOTE When connecting the connector to the terminal, check the polarity of red (+) and black (–) cables. (10) Perform the reverse order of step (3). K9630TU Terminal Solenoid valve of the oven electronics section Solenoid valve for the control unit electronics section F0616.ai Figure 6.12 (5) Pressure Switch for Carrier Gas (1) Stop the operation and the supply of power. (2) Stop the supply of carrier gas. (3) Remove the cover of the electronics section located at the right side of the oven unit by removing the six screws with a hexagon wrench included in the accessory kit (Take care not to get the cover upside down). (4) Disconnect the connector at the end of the cable for the pressure switch you want to replace from the oven CPU board. (5) Remove the cover by removing the two screws of the pressure/flow control section. (6) Remove the pressure switch. Remove the carrier gas pipe first and then the nut holding the pressure switch. (7) Install a new pressure switch in the reverse order of step (6). (8) Reconnect the connector at the end of the cable of the pressure switch to its original location. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-21 <6. Maintenance> (9) Firmly tighten all the six screws for the cover of the electronics section of the oven unit to maintain explosionproof condition. (10) Close the over of the pressure/flow control section of the oven unit. K9630LA K9803VJ (for ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI) Pressure Switch for Carrier Gas 2 Pressure Switch for Carrier Gas 1 6 Figure 6.13 (6) EPC (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 Stopping operation” for this procedure). (2) Stop the supply of power. (3) Turn off the supplies of the carrier gas, utility gases (FID hydrogen gas (or nitrogen) for combustion, FID combustion air) and supply of samples. (4) Open the door for the isothermal oven of the oven unit. (5) Loosen the four screws on the EPC container cover (front right side of the isothermal oven) using a hexagon wrench and remove the cover. (6) Remove the couplings to the inlet (IN) and outlet (OUT) of the EPC (see Figure 6.14). Label the couplings for ease of identification later. (7) Disconnect the connector of the cable for EPC from the EPC card. (8) Remove the two screws which fix the EPC. (9) Install a new EPC in the reverse order of steps (6) to (8). (10) Reinstall the EPC box cover. Firmly tighten all of the four screws on the EPC box cover to maintain the explosionproof condition. (11) Close the door to the isothermal oven. (12) Turn on the power. (13) Start supplying FID hydrogen (or nitrogen) for combustion, FID combustion air, and carrier gas. Perform a leak test around the couplings. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-22 <6. Maintenance> K9630KS EPC Box Inlet Side Outlet Side EPC for Carrier Gas 1 EPC for Carrier Gas 2 EPC for FID Hydrogen (or Nitrogen) 1 for combustion EPC for FID Combustion Air 1 EPC for FID Hydrogen (or Nitrogen) 2 for combustion EPC for FID Combustion Air 2 EPC Support Screw (two) Figure 6.14 6.2.3 Components for Pressure/Flow Control Section The instructions for replacing the following parts in the Pressure/Flow Control section are explained. Isothermal oven components (1) Regulator valve for carrier gas (2) Regulator valve for utility gas (3) Regulator valve for protective gas (instrumental air) and solenoid valve air (4) Vortex tube (5) Hydrogen Limiting Unit Programmed-temperature oven components (6) Protective gas (instrumental air), regulator valve for solenoid valve air (7) Air-operated valve for rapid cooling (8) Vortex tube (1) Regulator for Carrier Gas This regulator is installed in the isothermal oven and used to control the carrier gas pressure (see Figure 6.15). (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 (2) Stop the supply of power. Stopping operation” for this procedure). IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <6. Maintenance> 6-23 CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (3) Turn off supplies of carrier gas, utility gases (FID hydrogen gas for combustion and FID combustion air) and samples. (4) Open the control unit door using a key included in the accessory kit. And remove the cover by removing the two screws of the pressure/flow control section. (5) Remove the couplings connected to the inlet (IN) and outlet (OUT) of the regulator. See Figure 6.15. Label the couplings with “IN” and “OUT” for ease of identification later. NOTE 6 Remove any metal flakes off the couplings. (6) (7) (8) (9) Remove the stem lock. Remove the mounting locknut and the regulator. Install a new regulator in the reverse order of steps (5) through (7). Start supplying the carrier gas and other gases and perform a leak test around the couplings. (10) Set the carrier gas pressure to the value indicated in the operation data. Adjust and set the pressure by loosening the stem lock nut and rotating the stem. After completing the setting, fix the stem with the locknut. (11) Close the isothermal oven door and the cover of the pressure/flow control section. IMPORTANT After the temperature of the isothermal oven in the oven unit becomes substantially stable, set the pressure of the carrier gas again according to the Operation data. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-24 <6. Maintenance> Applicable Temperature Range O-ring Material K9409AW 180 °C or less Viton K9409AV 225 °C or less Kalrez Regulator for Carrier Gas Isothermal Oven Door Regulator for Carrier Gas Inside Wall of the Isothermal Oven Outside Wall of the Pressure Control Chamber Nut Stem Lock IN Couplings Stem OUT Figure 6.15 Regulator for carrier gas (2) Regulator for Utility Gases These regulators are installed in the upper front side of the isothermal oven for the respective oven unit and used to control the pressures of the FID hydrogen (or nitrogen) for combustion and FID combustion air (see Figure 6.16). (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 (2) Stop the supply of power. Stopping operation” for this procedure). CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (3) Turn off the supplies of the FID hydrogen (or nitrogen) gas for combustion, FID combustion air, and carrier gas. (4) Open the door of the isothermal oven section in the oven unit as well as the door above it. (5) Remove the front panel of the regulator by loosening the two screws. (6) Remove the couplings connected to the inlet (IN) and outlet (OUT) of the regulator. See Figure 6.16. Label the couplings with “IN” and “OUT” for ease of identification later. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <6. Maintenance> 6-25 NOTE Remove any metal flakes off the couplings. (7) Remove the stem lock. (8) Remove the mounting locknut. (9) Remove the upper two screws and loosen the lower two screws of the board on which the gauge and regulator are mounted. (10) Slide the board to remove the regulator. (11) Install a new regulator in the reverse order of steps (6) to (10). (12) Reinstall the front panel of the regulator in its original position. (13) Start supplying the FID hydrogen (or nitrogen) gas for combustion, FID combustion air and carrier gas, then perform a leak test around the couplings. (14) Set the pressure of the line where the regulator has been replaced to the value indicated in the operation data (attached). Adjust and set the pressure by loosening the stem lock and rotating the stem. After completing the setting, fix the stem with the locknut. (15) Close the door of the isothermal oven for the oven unit. IMPORTANT After the temperature of the isothermal oven in the oven unit becomes substantially stable, set the pressure of the carrier gas again according to the Operation data. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 6  <6. Maintenance> 6-26 K9409AW Regulator for Utility Gas Front Panel Regulator Attaching Screw Isothermal Oven Door Regulator for Utility Gas Regulator for Utility Gas Stem Lock OUT IN Stem Lock Figure 6.16 Nut Front Panel Attachment plate Nut Coupling Regulator for Utility Gases (3) Regulator for Protective gas (instrumental air) and Air for Solenoid Valves This regulator is a manifold style regulator used to adjust pressure of protective gas (instrumental air) and air for solenoid valves, and is located in the pressure/flow control section (see Figure 6.17). (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 (2) Stop the supply of power. Stopping operation” for this procedure). CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <6. Maintenance> 6-27 (3) Turn off the supply of the protective gas (instrumental air). (4) Remove the cover by removing the two screws of the pressure/flow control section. (5) Disconnect all of the tubes connected to the manifold regulator. When disconnecting the tubes, label those for ease of identifying the connections later. To remove the tube, press on the black section where the tube is inserted and pull the tube toward you. (6) Remove the two screws on the mounting bracket which fix the manifold regulator. (7) Remove the two screws on the backside of the mounting bracket which fix the manifold valve to the mounting bracket. (8) Install a new regulator in the reverse order of steps (5) to (7). When reinstalling the conversion coupling, always use a sealing tape. (9) After confirming that the pipe connections are correct, check the piping for leaks. (10) Set the pressures of the protective gas (instrumental air) and the solenoid-valve air to the values indicated in the operation data. Adjust and set the pressure by unlocking the knob and then rotating it. The knob locks when it is pressed in, and unlocks when it is pulled out. (11) Install the cover which has been removed in step (4). K9801JP 3-valves K9801JQ 4-valves K9801JR 5-valves Mountung Bracket Knob Tube F0621.ai Figure 6.17 Regulator for Protective gas (instrumental air) and Solenoid-Valve Air (4) Vortex Tube (for FPD) See Figure 6.18. (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 (2) Stop the supply of power. Stopping operation” for this procedure). CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (3) Turn off the supply of the protective gas (instrumental air). Remove banding band, tape, and insulator (a) surround the vortex tube. (4) Remove the two screws and pull out the two tubes from regulator. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 6  6-28 <6. Maintenance> (5) Pull out the tube from the vortex tube assembly. (6) Remove the two screws of the mounting bracket. (7) Remove the two screws which are fixing the mounting bracket and vortex tube. (8) Remove tube connector from vortex tube IN, OUT. (9) Install a new vortex tube in the reverse order of steps (3) to (8). When reinstalling the adapter coupling always use brand new sealing tape. (10) Confirm that there are no leaks. K9400VZ Vortex Tube Assembly Insulation (b) Tape (surface) Insulation (a) Banding band Vortex Tube Adapter Couplings Mounting Screw (two) Regulator Connecting Tube Regulator Connecting Tube Mounting Screw (two) Figure 6.18 Mounting Bracket Mounting Screw (two) Vortex Tube (5) Hydrogen Limiting Unit The hydrogen limiting unit comprises of a mass-flow controller and pneumatic valve. This unit can regulate or completely shut off the flow of hydrogen. The flow of hydrogen is regulated to 300 ml/min by the mass-flow controller. In addition, if the system cannot maintain the required protection (if the internal pressure cannot be maintained at the specified level), it actuates the pneumatic valve per signal from the main unit and shut off the hydrogen supply. (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 (2) Stop the supply of power. Stopping operation” for this procedure). CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (3) Turn off the supplies of the FID hydrogen (or nitrogen) gas for combustion, FID combustion air, and carrier gas. (4) Remove the cover by removing the two screws of the pressure/flow control section. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-29 <6. Maintenance> (5) Remove two coupling nuts connected to the IN and OUT ports of hydrogen limiting unit, as well as the tube connected to the pneumatic valve. (6) Remove the two screws which fix the hydrogen limiting unit. (7) Install a new hydrogen limiting unit in the reverse order of steps (3) and (4). Replace the entire hydrogen limiting unit (part number: K9803WK). (8) Confirm that the pipe connections are correct. Then check the piping for leaks. (9) Set the pressure of hydrogen fed into the hydrogen limiting unit to 500 ±20 kPa. K9803WK Outlet Side 6 Plumbing Nut (two) Mass Flow Controller Mounting Screw (two) Pneumatic Valve Inlet Side Figure 6.19 Hydrogen Limiting Unit (6) Protective Gas (Instrumental Air) and Regulator Valve for Solenoid Valve Air in Programmed-Temperature Oven For details on how to replace the protective gas (instrumental air) and regulator valve for solenoid valve air, see “(3) Regulator for Protective gas (instrumental air) and Air for Solenoid Valves”. (7) Air-Operated Valve for Rapid Cooling See Figure 6.20. (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 (2) Stop the supply of power. Stopping operation” for this procedure). CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <6. Maintenance> 6-30 (3) Turn off the supply of the protective gas (instrumental air). Remove all four tubes from the air-operated valve for rapid cooling. (4) Remove the two screws from the air-operated valve for rapid cooling. (5) Remove the four connectors from the air-operated valve for rapid cooling. (6) Install a new air-operated valve for rapid cooling by reversing steps (3) to (5). When reinstalling the connectors, always use a sealing tape. (7) After confirming that the pipe connections are correct, check the piping for leaks. L9860AY (with booster) Air-operated valve for rapid cooling Connectors Tubes Mounting screws (two) Figure 6.20 Air-Operated Valve for Rapid Cooling (8) Vortex Tube (for Programmed-Temperature Oven) See Figure 6.21. (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 (2) Stop the supply of power. Stopping operation” for this procedure). CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (3) Turn off the supply of the protective gas (instrumental air). Remove the tape and insulator (a) from the vortex tube. Do not remove insulator (b). (4) Remove the two screws and pull out the two tubes from regulator. (5) Pull out the tube from the vortex tube assembly. (6) Remove the two screws from the mounting bracket. (7) Remove the two screws that are fixing the vortex tube to the mounting bracket. (8) Remove tube connector from vortex tube IN, OUT. (9) Install a new vortex tube by reversing steps (3) to (8). When reinstalling the adapter coupling always use brand new sealing tape. (10) Confirm that there are no leaks. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-31 <6. Maintenance> K9400VZ Insulation (b) Tape (surface) Insulation (a) Adapter couplings Tube Vortex tube Mounting screws (two) Mounting bracket screws (two) Regulator screws (two) Tube Figure 6.21 6.2.4 Vortex Tube (for Programmed-Temperature Oven) Oven (Isothermal, Programmed-Temperature) Components The instructions for replacing the following parts in the isothermal oven are explained. Isothermal oven components (1) Heater (2) Sensor (3) TCD (4) FID (5) Methanizer (6) Rotary valve and valve seat (7) LSV (8) Restrictor (9) Column (10) Flame Arrestor (11) Gasket (12) Air Turbine Programmed-temperature oven components (13) Heater (14) Sensor (15) Column (16) Gasket (17) Air turbine IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 6  6-32 <6. Maintenance> (1) Heater for Isothermal Oven The heater uses a nichrome wire to control the temperature of the isothermal oven. (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 Stopping operation” for this procedure). (2) Stop the supply of power. (3) Confirm that the LED (Green) of “POWER” is OFF. CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (4) Turn off the protective gas (instrumental air) supply. (5) Open the door of the isothermal oven section using a key included in the accessory kit. (6) Disconnect the wiring to the heater from the terminal block on the right side in the isothermal oven. (7) Remove the four screws to remove the heater cover. IMPORTANT • Do not touch the end of two temperature sensors. • Do not bend the wiring to the heater. (8) Remove the two nuts mounting the end terminals on both ends of the heater. Then, pull out the heater from the heater guide while removing two temperature sensors. IMPORTANT When securing and removing the nuts, do not apply any load to the ceramic plate on which the terminals of the heater are fixed. (9) Pull both ends of the new heater and stretch it to about 500 mm long. Ensure that the heater is stretched evenly (see Figure 6.22). (10) Confirm that the heater is not sagging and is stretched evenly. (11) Reinstall the heater cover with the four screws. Confirm the temperature sensors are in place. (12) Reconnect the wiring which has been disconnected in step (5) to the terminal block. (13) Close the door of the isothermal oven. Supply voltage K9409GN 100 V AC (for isothermal oven temperature of over 110°C) K9409GE 100 V AC (for isothermal oven temperature of 110°C or below) K9409GP 110 V AC (for isothermal oven temperature of over 110°C) K9409GF 110 V AC (for isothermal oven temperature of 110°C or below) K9409GB 115 V AC (for isothermal oven temperature of over 110°C) K9409GG 115 V AC (for isothermal oven temperature of 110°C or below) K9409GC 120 V AC (for isothermal oven temperature of over 110°C) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <6. Maintenance> K9409GH 120 V AC (for isothermal oven temperature of 110°C or below) K9409GS 200 V AC K9409GT 220 V AC K9409GU 230 V AC K9409GV 240 V AC K9809CK 200 V AC (type 4 isothermal oven) K9809CL 220 V AC (type 4 isothermal oven) K9809CM 230 V AC (type 4 isothermal oven) K9809CN 240 V AC (type 4 isothermal oven) Mounting Screw (4) Heater cover Heater 6-33 Heater guide 6 Heater terminal Heater cover Nut Washer Heater About 50 mm Heater Figure 6.22 Heater for Isothermal Oven (2) Temperature Sensor for Isothermal Oven A single oven unit has two temperature sensors: For control: controlling the temperature of the isothermal oven For protection: detecting abnormally high temperature The temperature sensor for the isothermal oven is a platinum resistance temperature detector (Pt100 ohm). (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 (2) Stop the supply of power. Stopping operation” for this procedure). IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-34 <6. Maintenance> CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (3) (4) (5) (6) Turn off the protective gas (instrumental air) supply. Open the control unit door using a key included in the accessory kit. Remove the terminals for the temperature sensor from the terminal block. To replace the temperature sensor for protection, the heater cover must be removed by unscrewing the four screws on it with a hex key. The temperature sensor for control can be removed from the heater cover simply by sliding it. (7) Reinstall a new sensor. (8) Reinstall the fan cover and the heater cover in the reverse order of steps (4) to (6) and rewire as before. Ensure that the temperature sensor is in the correct location, before reinstalling the heater cover. IMPORTANT The tip of the temperature sensor is fragile. Do not touch it. K9803VC For control (black) K9803VD For temperature protection (white) Tip 700 mm Figure 6.23 Temperature Sensor (3) Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD) There are two types of thermal conductivity detector: the low temp. type (for 135 °C max. isothermal oven temp.) and the high temp. type. The low temp. type comes in four types depending on the material and sensitivity. Figure 6.24 shows the external view of a thermal conductivity detector. l Low-temp. type TCD (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 (2) Stop the supply of power. Stopping operation” for this procedure). CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <6. Maintenance> 6-35 (3) Turn off the supplies of the protective gas (instrumental air), carrier and sample gas. Open the isothermal oven door of the oven unit. (4) Open the control unit door using a key included in the accessory kit. (5) Remove the two screws to remove the TCD cover. (6) Remove the insulator. (7) Remove the four couplings connected to the TCD. When removing the couplings, label them for ease of identifying the connections later. (8) Remove the four wires connected to the TCD terminals. IMPORTANT The direction of the TCD depends on the type of carrier gas. See the inscription on the TCD. Carrier gas H2, He N2, Ar Inscription HN NH 6 (9) Remove the two screws which fix the TCD. (10) Install a new TCD. Align the inscription with the TCD depending on the carrier gas in use. (11) Reconnect the wires and pipes in the reverse order of steps (4) to (9). Confirm wiring and perform a leak test. l High-temp. type TCD (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 (2) Stop the supply of power. Stopping operation” for this procedure). CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (3) Turn off the supplies of the protective gas (instrumental air), carrier and sample gas. Open the isothermal oven door of the oven unit and the electronics section cover on the right side. (4) Open the control unit door using a key included in the accessory kit. (5) Remove the two screws to remove the TCD cover. (6) Remove the insulator. (7) Remove the wires connected to the TCD card from the connectors, and pull into the isothermal oven through the bushing holes. (8) Remove the six screws from the cover of the electronics section in the oven unit by using a hex wrench (an accessory) and open the cover. (9) Remove the four couplings connected to the TCD. When removing the couplings, label them for ease of identifying the connections later. (10) Remove the two screws which fix the TCD. (11) Install a new TCD. (12) Reconnect the wires and pipes in the reverse order of steps (4) to (8). Confirm wiring and perform a leak test. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-36 <6. Maintenance> Low temp. type K9192QA K9192QB K9192QJ K9192QL For normal usage (Aluminum) Corrosion-resistant type (SUS316) High-sensitivity type (Aluminum) High-sensitivity and corrosion-resistant type (SUS316) High temp. type K9803UA For DET1 (SUS316) For DET2 (SUS316) K9803UB 1 2 3 4 5 Mounting Screws Wiring Screws Mounting Screws General-use type Figure 6.24 High-temp. type F0228.ai TCD (4) Flame Ionization Detector (FID) There are two types of flame ionization detector, low temp. type (145 °C max. isothermal oven temp.) and high temp. type. Both types have the corrosion-resistant variants. Figure 6.25 shows the external view of a low temp. type flame ionization detector. l Low-temp. type FID (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 (2) Stop the supply of power. Stopping operation” for this procedure). CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (3) Turn off the supplies of the protective gas (instrumental air), carrier gas, hydrogen (or nitrogen) gas for combustion, combustion air, and sample gas. Open the isothermal oven door of the oven unit. (4) Open the control unit door using a key included in the accessory kit. (5) Remove the three couplings connected to the FID. When removing the couplings, label them for ease of identifying the connections later. (6) Remove the four wires connected to the FID. (7) Remove the two setscrews which fix the FID. (8) Install a new FID. (9) Reconnect the wires and pipes in the reverse order of steps (4) to (7). Confirm wiring and perform a leak test. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-37 <6. Maintenance> l High-temp. type of FID (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 (2) Stop the supply of power. Stopping operation” for this procedure). CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (3) Turn off the supplies of the protective gas (instrumental air), carrier gas, hydrogen (or nitrogen) gas for combustion, combustion air, and sample gas. Open the isothermal oven door of the oven unit and the electronics section cover on the right side. (4) Open the control unit door using a key included in the accessory kit. (5) Remove the three couplings connected to the FID. When removing the couplings, label them for ease of identifying the connections later. (6) Remove the six screws from the cover of the electronics section in the oven unit by using a hex wrench (an accessory) and open the cover. (7) Remove the wires connected to the FID card from the connectors, and pull into the isothermal oven through the bushing holes. (8) Remove the two screws which fix the FID. (9) Install a new FID. (10) Reconnect the wires and pipes in the reverse order of steps (5) to (8). Confirm wiring and perform a leak test. Low temp. type K9194XA For normal usage Corrosion-resistant type (Hastelloy C) K9194XB (SUS316) High temp. type K9803UN For normal usage Corrosion-resistant type (Hastelloy C) K9803UQ (SUS316) Mounting screws Low temp. type Figure 6.25 High temp. type F0229.ai FID (5) Methanizer The methanizer is used in conjunction with the FID to measure low-concentration carbon monoxide or dioxide. See Figure 6.26. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 6  <6. Maintenance> (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 (2) Stop the supply of power. 6-38 Stopping operation” for this procedure). CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (3) Turn off the supplies of the protective gas (instrumental air), carrier gas, hydrogen (or nitrogen) gas for combustion, combustion air, and sample gas. Open the isothermal oven door of the oven unit. (4) Open the control unit door using a key included in the accessory kit. (5) Remove the two couplings connected to the methanizer. When removing the couplings, label them for ease of identifying the connections later. (6) Remove the two wires connected to the terminals of the methanizer. (7) Remove the two screws to remove the methanizer. (8) Install a new methanizer. (9) Reconnect the wires and pipes in the reverse order of steps (4) to (7). Confirm wiring and perform a leak test. K9192TG Screw Inlet Heater terminals Outlet G Install so that the G mark is on the lower side. Screw Figure 6.26 F0230.ai Methanizer (6) Rotary Valve and Valve Seat The rotary valve located in the isothermal oven is used as a sampling valve and a column switching valve. The valve has two types: general type and high temp. type. The specifications for the rotary vale used are listed in the parts list in the operation data. Check against the code chart (Table 6.5) and replace as required. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-39 <6. Maintenance> Table 6.5 Model Suffix code GCRV •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• Bellows -G material -M O-Ring B material K Valve material A B C D E F Sheet material R T Grand material S H Sample volume of B side N C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Sample volume of A side N C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Purge/Suction N Yes/No P E Option code ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• Description Rotary valve Rubber Metal Viton Kalrez Gas sampling Liquid sampling Back flash & column switching Gas sample (for GC6) Liquid sample (for GC6) Back flash & column switching (for GC6) Rulon Teflon SUS316 Hastelloy C Not provided Switching valve Liquid sample: 0.33 μl Liquid sample: 1 μl Liquid sample: 2 μl Liquid sample: 3 μl Gas sample: 10 μl Gas sample: 25 μl Gas sample: 50 μl Gas sample: more than 100 μl Not provided Switching valve Liquid sample: 0.33 μl Liquid sample: 1 μl Liquid sample: 2 μl Liquid sample: 3 μl Gas sample: 10 μl Gas sample: 25 μl Gas sample: 50 μl Gas sample: more than 100 μl Not provided Purge Suction l Rotary valve (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 Stopping operation” for this procedure). (2) Turn off the supply of the sample. (3) If the sample is liquid, purge the sample line with the purge gas (nitrogen gas or instrument air). • When the stream switching valve is a pneumatic valve, change the analyzer status to Manual and turn on the stream switching valve on the sample line to let the purge gas flow in. • When the stream switching valve is a stop valve, close all the stop valves and open the stop valve on the sample line to let the purge gas flow in. (4) Close all the stream switching valves. IMPORTANT • During the purge, purge gas may flow into the sample return line, causing pressure fluctuation. Prepare the sample return line and collection tank, if necessary. • Prepare the sample return line so that the sample does not return. (5) Stop the supply of power. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 6  <6. Maintenance> 6-40 CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (6) Turn off the supply of the protective gas (instrumental air) and carrier gas. For a detection system with an FID, turn off the supply of hydrogen (or nitrogen) gas and combustion air as well. Open the isothermal oven door of the oven unit. (7) Open the control unit door using a key included in the accessory kit. (8) Remove the couplings connected to the rotary valve. When removing the couplings, label them for ease of identifying the connections later. The rotary valve is either a single-sleeve or double-sleeve type, depending on the specifications. Each type comprises four to six pipes extending from the sleeve. (9) Remove the two screws which are not painted with red enamel to disassemble the rotary valve. Do not touch the two screws which are painted red. (10) Install a new rotary valve. When installing it, it is necessary to bend pipes as shown in Figure 6.27. When bending a pipe, use another pipe that is approximately 10mm in diameter to support it and avoid excessive force applied on the root of the pipe. The cap nuts at the tip of the pipes are inscribed with numbers. Engage these cap nuts according to the pre-labeled numbers or per column system diagram in the operation data. (11) Perform a leak test on the piping. ø1.6 mm tubes ø10 mm pipe Do not loosen the screws with red enamel paint. Sample valve Figure 6.27 Rotary valve mounting screws Column switching valve Backflush valve F0231.ai Replacing rotary valves l Gland assembly See Figure 6.28. (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 Stopping operation” for this procedure). (2) Turn off supply of the sample. (3) If the sample is liquid, purge the sample line with the purge gas (nitrogen gas or instrument air). • When the stream switching valve is a pneumatic valve, change the analyzer status to Manual and turn on the stream switching valve on the sample line to let the purge gas flow in. • When the stream switching valve is a stop valve, close all the stop valves and open the stop valve on the sample line to let the purge gas flow in. (4) Close all the stream switching valves. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-41 <6. Maintenance> IMPORTANT • During the purge, purge gas may flow into the sample return line, causing pressure fluctuation. Prepare the sample return line and collection tank, if necessary. • Prepare the sample return line so that the sample does not return. (5) Stop the supply of power. CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (6) Turn off the supply of the protective gas (instrumental air) and the carrier gas. For a detection system with an FID, turn off the supply of hydrogen (or nitrogen) gas and the combustion air as well. Open the isothermal oven door of the oven unit. (7) Open the control unit door using a key included in the accessory kit. (8) Remove the coupling connected to the rotary valve. When removing the couplings, label them for ease of identifying the connections later. The rotary valve is either a single-sleeve or double-sleeve valve, depending on the specifications. Each type comprises four to six pipes extending from the sleeve. (9) Remove the two screws which are not painted with red enamel in order to disassemble the rotary valve. Do not touch the two screws which are painted red. (10) Remove two nuts to remove the gland assembly. (11) Install a new gland assembly. (12) Reinstall the rotary valve in the reverse order of steps (8) and (9). Reconnect the pipes. (13) Perform a leak test on the piping. K9034BP for liquid samples (sample volume: 3 μl or less), SUS316 K9034BJ for gas samples (sample volume: 10 μl), SUS316 K9034BH for gas samples (sample volume: 25 μl), SUS316 K9034BG for gas samples (sample volume: 50 μl), SUS316 K9034BB for gas samples (sample volume: 360 μl or more), SUS316 K9034BA for switching valve, SUS316 K9034AW for plug K9034GV for liquid samples (sample volume: 3 μl or less), Hastelloy C K9034GS for gas samples (sample volume: 25 μl), Hastelloy C K9034GR for gas samples (sample volume: 50 μl), Hastelloy C K9034GN for gas samples (sample volume: 360 μl or more), Hastelloy C K9034GX for switching valve, Hastelloy C IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 6  6-42 <6. Maintenance> For the following glands, contact Yokogawa. 1. When replacing gland with the nut and the sleeve (The glands listed above do not have a nut and a sleeve). 2. When replacing the gland with sample volume of less than 360μl. 3. When gland with engraving is required (Replacement glands do not have the engravings). l Valve seat for rotary valve See Figures 6.32 and 6.33. (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 Stopping operation” for this procedure). (2) Turn off the supply of the sample. (3) If the sample is liquid, purge the sample line with the purge gas (nitrogen gas or instrument air). • When the stream switching valve is a pneumatic valve, change the analyzer status to Manual and turn on the stream switching valve on the sample line to let the purge gas flow in. • When the stream switching valve is a stop valve, close all the stop valves and open the stop valve on the sample line to let the purge gas flow in. (4) Close all the stream switching valves. NOTE When purging a sample line, the gas may flow into the sample return line and cause the pressure to fluctuate. Insert a provisional collection tank in the sample return line if necessary. Also make sure that the sample does not back flow from the sample return line. (5) Stop the supply of power. CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (6) Turn off the supply of the protective gas (instrumental air) and the carrier gas. For a detection system with an FID, turn off the supply of hydrogen (or nitrogen) gas and the combustion air as well. Open the isothermal oven door of the oven unit. (7) Open the control unit door using a key included in the accessory kit. (8) Manually loosen the nut and remove it. IMPORTANT The gland assembly is a vulnerable part. Please handle it with care. (9) Remove the two screws not coated with red enamel and then remove the rotary valve. Do not loosen the screws coated with red enamel. (10) Remove the gasket, gland assembly, and the valve seat, in this sequence. Do not remove the washer and the coil spring (see Figure 6.28). (11) As shown in Figure 6.29, the valve seat and gland assembly have a specific location to install. Insert these components in the correct location using the location notch. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-43 <6. Maintenance> (12) Reassemble the components in the reverse order of steps (7) to (9). Firmly tighten the nut by fingers. Do not allow oil or grease to adhere to the seat. K9034FF sample volume: 0.33 μl, Rulon K9034DS * sample volume: 1 μl, Rulon K9034DR * sample volume: 2 μl, Rulon K9034DQ * sample volume: 3 μl, Rulon K9034DP * sample volume: 10 μl or more, Rulon K9034DN * for switching valve, Rulon K9034DM for plug J9201HY sample volume: 0.33 μl, Teflon K9034FL sample volume: 1 μl, Teflon K9034FK sample volume: 2 μl, Teflon K9034FJ sample volume: 3 μl, Teflon K9034FH sample volume: 10 μl or more, Teflon K9034FR for switching valve, Teflon * 6 When ordering * items, the following P/N should be specified. K9409ZE (2 pcs. of K9034DS) K9409ZD (2 pcs. of K9034DR) K9409ZC (2 pcs. of K9034DQ) K9409ZB (2 pcs. of K9034DP) K9409ZA (2 pcs. of K9034DN) Remove the two screws not coated with red enamel (for valve replacement only. Do not remove them when replacing valve seat only.) Do not loosen the screws coated with red enamel. Coil Spring (Does not have to be removed) Do not loosen these screws Valve Seat Gasket Washer (Does not have to be removed) Gland Assembly Plumbing tube Nut F0232.ai Figure 6.28 Rotary Valve IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-44 <6. Maintenance> (a) Seat for sample valve Groove for gland assembly clocking Pin Groove for valve seat clocking Rotor section Valve seat for gas Rotor section Valve seat for liquid (b) Seat for switching valve Top mark Bearing Top mark Pin Valve seat Rotor section Figure 6.29 F0233.ai Valve Seat l Rubber Bellows See Figure 6.30. (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 Stopping operation” for this procedure). (2) Turn off the supply of the sample. (3) When the stream switching valve is a pneumatic valve, change the analyzer status to Manual, and turn on the stream switching valve on the sample line to let the purge gas flow in. (4) If the sample is liquid, purge the sample line with the purge gas (nitrogen gas or instrument air). (5) Close all the stream switching valves. (6) Stop the supply of power. CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (7) Turn off the supply of the protective gas (instrumental air) and carrier gas. For a detection system with an FID, turn off the supply of hydrogen (or nitrogen) gas and combustion air as well. Open the isothermal oven door of the oven unit. (8) Remove the couplings connected to the rotary valve. When removing the couplings, label them for ease of identifying the connections later. The rotary valve is either a single-sleeve or double-sleeve type, depending on the specifications. Each type comprises four to six pipes extending from the sleeve. (9) Remove the two screws which are not painted with red enamel to disassemble the rotary valve. Do not touch the two screws which are painted red. (10) Remove two nuts to remove the gland assembly. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <6. Maintenance> 6-45 (11) Remove the two screws from the base on the bottom side of the rotary valve that has been removed. (12) Remove the base. (13) Remove the screw from the bellows. * The spring washer, plate, rubber bellows, piston, O-ring, and washer will come off due to the force of the spring. (14) Remove the spring washer and then the plate. (15) Remove the rubber bellows and install a new one. Apply HP-500 (fluorinated grease; part number: C2080FD) thinly over the entire rubber bellows. (16) Reinstall the parts that have been removed by reversing steps (10) to (14). * If the valve seat and related parts came off when you removed the gland assembly, reinstall them by referring to “Valve seat for rotary valve.” (17) Reinstall the rotary valve by reversing steps (8) and (9), and then reconnect the pipes. (18) Perform a leak test on the piping. L9819AC Rubber bellows Screws (not coated with red enamel) Spring Washer O-ring Piston Rubber bellows (Apply grease.) Plate Spring washer Rubber bellows screw Base Base screws Figure 6.30 Valve and Rubber Bellows IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 6  6-46 <6. Maintenance> (7) Liquid-sample Valve (LSV) The liquid-sample valve is used when the sample is a liquid. See Figure 6.31. The specifications for the liquid sample valve used are listed in the parts list in the operation data. Check against the code chart (Table 6.6) and replace as required. Table 6.6 Model Suffix code Option code GCLV •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• Sample volume -1 ••••••••••••••••• -2 ••••••••••••••••• -3 ••••••••••••••••• -4 ••••••••••••••••• -5 ••••••••••••••••• -6 Wetted material S ••••••••••••••••• H ••••••••••••••••• Insert material M ••••••••••••••••• G ••••••••••••••••• C ••••••••••••••••• J ••••••••••••••••• Sealing material R ••••••••••••••••• T ••••••••••••••••• Column connection A ••••••••••••••••• B ••••••••••••••••• C ••••••••••••••••• D ••••••••••••••••• Split/Leakage back flash N ••••••••••••••••• 1 ••••••••••••••••• 2 ••••••••••••••••• Description Liquid sampling valve 0.1 μl 0.25 μl 0.5 μl 1 μl 2 μl 3 μl SUS316 Hastelloy C SUS316 Glass (straight) Glass (cup) Glass (with neck) Rulon Teflon 1/8" 1/16" Capillary Mega-bore None 1/8" 1/16" l Seal kit (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 Stopping operation” for this procedure). (2) Turn off the supply of the sample. (3) If the sample is liquid, purge the sample line with the purge gas (nitrogen gas or instrument air). • When the stream switching valve is a pneumatic valve, change the analyzer status to Manual and turn on the stream switching valve on the sample line to let the purge gas flow in. • When the stream switching valve is a stop valve, close all the stop valves and open the stop valve on the sample line to let the purge gas flow in. (4) Close all the stream switching valves. IMPORTANT • During the purge, purge gas may flow into the sample return line, causing pressure fluctuation. Prepare the sample return line and collection tank, if necessary. • Prepare the sample return line so that the sample does not return. (5) Stop the supply of power. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-47 <6. Maintenance> CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (6) Turn off the supply of the protective gas (instrumental air) and the carrier gas. For a detection system with an FID, turn off the supply of hydrogen (or nitrogen) gas and the combustion air as well. (7) Remove the cover or insulator attached to LSV, if any. (8) Remove the four couplings connected to the outside of the isothermal oven. When removing the couplings, label them for ease of identifying the connections later. (9) Turn the locknut to LSV counterclockwise with the coil over wrench for LSV to remove it. Slowly pull off the cylinder of LSV. (10) Remove the seal kit. When it is difficult to remove the seal kit, first remove the four screws on the locknut-clamp fitting. Remove any stain or the like from the stem, making sure you do not damage the stem. If you cannot remove the stain, replace with a new one. (11) Install a new seal unit. Then reinstall the cylinder part in the reverse order of step (9). Tighten the locknut as far as it will go by hand. Then use the coil over wrench for LSV to turn it a quarter of a turn. NOTE • • • • If any deposit cannot be removed from the stem, replace the stem with a new one. Take care not to damage the stem. Disc springs of the spring assembly should be stacked face-to-face. Manually fasten the locknut of LSV. Then give it a 1/4 clockwise turn with the coil over wrench for LSV. (12) Reconnect the pipes in the reverse order of step (8). (13) Perform a leak test on the piping. Increase the LSV temperature, and then use the coil over wrench for LSV to turn it oneeighth of a turn. If there is leakage into the sample oven (carrier line) (check the chromatogram baseline fluctuation), turn it anther one-eighth of a turn. NOTE After the isothermal oven temperature become stable at the preset level, rotate the locknut by another 1/8 turn to fasten it. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 6  6-48 <6. Maintenance> l Heater or temperature sensor (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 (2) Stop the supply of power. Stopping operation” for this procedure). CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (3) Open the control unit door using a key included in the accessory kit. (4) Remove the terminal block cover and disconnect the wires (two for the heater and four for the temperature sensor) connected to the component from the terminal block. (5) Remove the screws on the heater and the temperature sensor. (6) Pull out the parts to replace. (7) Install a new component and fix it with the screws. (8) Reconnect the wires. Reinstall the terminal cover in its original location. Increase the LSV temperature, and then use the coil over wrench for LSV to turn it oneeighth of a turn. If there is leakage into the sample oven (carrier line) (check the chromatogram baseline fluctuation), turn it anther one-eighth of a turn. l LSV (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 Stopping operation” for this procedure). (2) Turn off the supply of the sample. (3) If the sample is liquid, purge the sample line with the purge gas (nitrogen gas or instrument air). • When the stream switching valve is a pneumatic valve, change the analyzer status to Manual and turn on the stream switching valve on the sample line to let the purge gas flow in. • When the stream switching valve is a stop valve, close all the stop valves and open the stop valve on the sample line to let the purge gas flow in. (4) Close all the stream switching valves. IMPORTANT • During the purge, purge gas may flow into the sample return line, causing pressure fluctuation. Prepare the sample return line and collection tank, if necessary. • Prepare the sample return line so that the sample does not return. (5) Stop the supply of power. CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <6. Maintenance> 6-49 (6) Turn off the supply of the protective gas (instrumental air) and the carrier gas. For a detection system with an FID, turn off the supply of hydrogen (or nitrogen) gas and the combustion air as well. (7) Open the control unit door using a key included in the accessory kit. (8) Remove the terminal block cover and disconnect the wires (two for the heater and four for the temperature sensor) connected to the component from the terminal block. (9) Remove the fittings and nuts from IN and OUT pipes for carrier gas in the isothermal oven. (10) If the LSV has a cover or thermal insulation, remove it. Unfasten the screws and remove the heater and temperature sensor from the LSV. (11) Remove the six couplings connected to the LSV. When removing the couplings, label them for ease of identifying the connections later. (12) Remove the four screws which fix the LSV to the outside of the isothermal oven. (13) Install a new LSV. (14) Reconnect the pipes in the reverse order of step (7) and (12). Confirm the wiring and perform a leak test on the piping. Increase the LSV temperature, and then use the coil over wrench for LSV to turn it oneeighth of a turn. If there is leakage into the sample oven (carrier line) (check the chromatogram baseline fluctuation), turn it anther one-eighth of a turn. 1 K9402WA K9402WB K9402WC K9402WD K9402WE K9402WF K9402WG K9402WH K9402WJ K9402WK K9402WL K9402WM 2 K9402VG K9402VH 3 K9402VA K9402VB K9402VC K9402VD 4 K9402QA K9402QB 5 K9402QG K9402QH K9402QJ K9402QK K9402QL K9402QM 6 K9402UG K9402UH 7 K9402UN 8 K9400XU K9400XX K9400XY 9 K9402VJ Stem (sample volume: 0.1µl, material: SUS316) Stem (sample volume: 0.25µl, material: SUS316) Stem (sample volume: 0.5µl, material: SUS316) Stem (sample volume: 1µl, material: SUS316) Stem (sample volume: 2µl, material: SUS316) Stem (sample volume: 3µl, material: SUS316) Stem (sample volume: 0.1µl, material: Hastelloy C) Stem (sample volume: 0.25µl, material: Hastelloy C) Stem (sample volume: 0.5µl, material: Hastelloy C) Stem (sample volume: 1µl, material: Hastelloy C) Stem (sample volume: 2µl, material: Hastelloy C) Stem (sample volume: 3µl, material: Hastelloy C) Seal element (Rulon) Seal element (Teflon) Insert (SUS16) Insert (Glass, straight) Insert (Glass, with cup) Insert (Glass, with neck) Temperature Sensor (PT100Ω, oven temp.: 145 °C or less) Temperature Sensor (PT100Ω, oven temp.: 145 °C or more) Heater (for 100V) Heater (for 110V) Heater (for 115V or 120V) Heater (for 200V) Heater (for 220V) Heater (for 230V or 240V) Sample Tube (SUS316) Sample Tube (Hastelloy C) O-Ring (Kalrez) Connector (for Mega-bore column or capilary column) Connector (for 1/8”) Connector (for 1/16”) Spring assembly IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 6  <6. Maintenance> Bracket Seal kit Cylinder Seal element Screw (nut) ① 6-50 Flange ⑨ ② ③ ⑦ ⑧ Screw for the heater and temperature sensor ⑥ ④ Figure 6.31 ⑤ F0234.ai Liquid Sampling Valve (LSV) (8) Restrictors There are two types of restrictors: low temp. type for isothermal oven temperature of 145 °C max. and high temp. type. for over 145°C. Between these two types, the O-ring material for the restrictor is different. (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 (2) Stop the supply of power. Stopping operation” for this procedure). CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (3) Turn off the supplies of the protective gas (instrumental air), carrier gas, hydrogen (or nitrogen) gas for combustion, combustion air, and sample gas. Open the isothermal oven door of the oven unit. (4) Open the control unit door using a key included in the accessory kit. And remove the cover by removing the two screws of the pressure/flow control section. (5) Remove the two couplings connected to the restrictor. When removing the couplings, label them for ease of identifying the connections later. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-51 <6. Maintenance> (6) Remove the two screws on the end of nuts at the pressure control chamber side and pull out its fixture. (7) Hold the restrictor both from inside the isothermal oven and from the pressure controller side using a set of tools, and remove the locknuts on the pressure controller side, then the restrictor itself. (8) Install a new restrictor in the reverse order of step (4) to (7). Set the values described in the Operation data by using the control knob of the restrictor and perform the leak test on the piping. IMPORTANT After the isothermal temperature of the oven unit becomes substantially stable, again set the flow rate of the restrictor according to the Operation data. 6 The nuts and sleeves are not included. K9409CA For low-temperature applications K9409CB For high-temperature applications IN OUT Pipe IN Restrictor F0235.ai Figure 6.32 Restrictor (9) Columns in Isothermal Oven (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 Stopping operation” for this procedure). (2) Turn off the detector. Then leave it for at least four hours. • TCD: Turn off the detector on Manual operation display. • FID, FPD: When using hydrogen as the carrier gas, turn off the supplies of combustion air and nitrogen or helium gas for make-up. When using carrier gas other than hydrogen, turn off the supply of hydrogen gas for combustion. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-52 <6. Maintenance> (3) Turn off the heater. Turn off the heaters for the isothermal oven, LSV and FPD, from the Manual operation display. (See “3.3.4 Stopping operation” for this procedure). Wait until the PV (Present Value) on the Temperature Status display decreases to ambient temperature. (4) Stop the supply of power. CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (5) Turn off the supply of the protective gas (instrumental air), carrier gas. Wait until the pressure of carrier gas decreases to 0 kPa. Open the isothermal oven door of the oven unit. (6) Open the control unit door using a key included in the accessory kit. (7) Remove the screw and then remove the fixture for the column. (8) Remove the column by loosening two locknuts on both ends of the column. When removing it, it is recommended to keep a note of the numbers labeled on the column and pipes to avoid mixing up during installation. (9) Remove the plug and install the new column. When installing it, check the numbers of the column and pipes listed in the operation data (column system) or the note taken at step (8). When treating mega-bore or capillary columns made from fused silica or metal, handle it with care as follows and see How to Attach Fused Silica (or Metal) Capillary Column in the operation data. (A) • Do not pull the column hard. • Do not twist the column. • Do not scratch the column surface. • Do not apply an impact on the column. (B) When mounting on the gas chromatograph, keep at least 10 cm of curvature radius. Bending at a smaller radius could result in column breakage. Pay extra attention when connecting to LSV. The curvature radius tends to be less than 10 cm. See Figure 6.33 Push against the end Approx. 5 mm Necked insert 20 to 25 mm Straight insert F0236.ai Figure 6.33 (C) When connecting to rotary valves, insert the tip of the column approximately 5 mm into the connector. (D) When connecting a column, adjust the direction of the column ring on the column hanger or the position of SUS piping to prevent the column from getting undue stress. After passing the column tip through the column nut and the graphite ferrule, cut off the column tip by 2 to 3 mm to avoid graphite dust from attaching to the tip. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <6. Maintenance> 6-53 (E) When cutting a column, use the dedicated column cutter and avoid squashing the cut end. Make sure that the metal flakes will not get inside the column. For the fused silica column, make sure that the cut end is smooth. (10) Supply the carrier gas. (11) Confirm that there is no carrier gas leakage from the column fittings. (12) In order to remove air and water that entered inside the column, flow the carrier gas through the column for about one hour at room temperature. Calibration must be conducted after the oven temperature has stabilized. n Cautions for storage IMPORTANT • Store columns in a desiccator where temperature can be controlled. The desiccator must be placed in a location where temperature will not drop below 0 °C. • For a long-term storage, check for the following once every month. - Packed column: sealed plugs are secured. - Mega-bore or Capillary columns: silicone rubber plugs are in place. (10) Flame Arrester (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 (2) Stop the supply of power. Stopping operation” for this procedure). CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (3) Turn off the supplies of the protective gas (instrumental air), carrier gas, hydrogen (or nitrogen) gas for combustion, combustion air, and sample gas. (4) Open the control unit door using a key included in the accessory kit. (5) Remove all of the couplings (two to eight) connected to the flame arrester. When removing the couplings, label them for ease of identifying the connections later. (6) Remove the flame arrester. If the flame arrester is threaded through the wall of the isothermal oven, pull it out. (7) Install a new flame arrester in the reverse order of steps (5) and (6). (8) Perform a leak test on the piping. The nuts and sleeves are not included. K9407QN K9407QS For normal usage (SUS316) Corrosion-resistance type (Hastelloy C) F0237.ai Figure 6.34 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 6  <6. Maintenance> 6-54 (11) Isothermal Oven Gasket (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 (2) Stop the supply of power. Stopping operation” for this procedure). CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (3) Turn off the supply of the protective gas (instrumental air). (4) Open the control unit door using a key included in the accessory kit. (5) The gasket lines the edges of the inner walls of the isothermal oven. Separate the gasket from the edges and gently pull it away from the oven walls. (6) Line a new gasket along the edges of the inner walls, gently pressing its grooves to fit over the edges. (7) After replacement, confirm that the gasket is fitting over the edges properly without any gaps. K9803SX For large isothermal oven K9803SW For isothermal oven Gasket for large isothermal oven Figure 6.35 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <6. Maintenance> 6-55 (12) Air Turbine for Agitator Fan (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 (2) Stop the supply of power. Stopping operation” for this procedure). CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (3) Turn off the supply of the protective gas (instrumental air). (4) Open the control unit door using a key included in the accessory kit. (5) Remove the wiring to the heater from the terminal block on the right side of the isothermal oven. (6) Remove the four screws, two temperature sensors, and heater cover. (7) Remove the four screws to remove the heater cover. (8) Remove the two screws to remove the fan. (9) Remove twelve screws to remove the gasket and the gasket-holding plate. (10) Remove three screws to remove the air turbine for the agitator fan. (11) Install a new air turbine for the agitator fan. (12) Reinstall the gasket, gasket-holding plate, fan and heater cover in the reverse order of steps (4) to (9). Before installing the heater cover, confirm that the temperature sensor is in place. K9400FA Turbine K9400FU Gasket Screws for Agitator Fan Air Turbine F0239.ai Figure 6.36 Air Turbine for Agitator Fan IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 6  <6. Maintenance> 6-56 (13) Programmed-Temperature Oven The heater uses a nichrome wire to control the temperature of the programmed-temperature oven. See Figure 6.37. (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 (2) Stop the supply of power. Stopping operation” for this procedure). CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (3) Turn off the protective gas (instrumental air) supply. (4) Remove the four screws from the fan cover. (5) Remove the temperature sensor from the heater cover, and bend the sensor so that the heater cover can be removed. (6) Remove the four screws from the heater cover. (7) Remove the nut holding the terminal from each end of the heater. Then, pull out the heater from the heater guide. (8) Pull both ends of the new heater and stretch it to about 500 mm long. Ensure that the heater is stretched evenly. (9) Reinstall the new heater. Confirm that the heater is not sagging. (10) Install the five heater extension locking brackets (K9407MZ). Extension locking brackets (five) (11) Reinstall the heater cover, temperature sensor, and fan cover by reversing steps (4) to (6). Make sure that the temperature sensor does not touch the fan or fan cover. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-57 <6. Maintenance> Supply voltage K9809CF 200 V AC K9809CG 220 V AC K9809CH 230 V AC K9809CJ 240 V AC Fan cover Heater cover Fan cover screws (four) 6 Heater cover screws (four) Temperature sensor Figure 6.37 Programmed-Temperature Oven Turbine (14) Temperature Sensor for Programmed-Temperature Oven The temperature sensor for the programmed-temperature oven is a platinum resistance temperature detector (Pt100 ohm). (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 (2) Stop the supply of power. Stopping operation” for this procedure). CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (3) Turn off the protective gas (instrumental air) supply. (4) Remove the four screws from the fan cover. (5) Remove the temperature sensor from the heater cover, and bend the sensor so that the heater cover can be removed. (6) Remove the four screws from the heater cover. (7) Remove the nuts holding the heater cable terminals on the programmed-temperature oven side. (8) On the electronics section side, remove the heater cable terminals and the temperature sensor connector. (9) Remove the screws from the cover with the packing, and remove the cover. (10) To remove the temperature sensor for the programmed-temperature oven and heater cable, remove the relevant insulators. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-58 <6. Maintenance> (11) Remove the two screws from the programmed-temperature oven side, remove the cable fixing plate, and pull out the cable. (12) Reinstall a new temperature sensor. (13) Reinstall the heater cover, temperature sensor, and fan cover by reversing steps (4) to (6). Make sure that the temperature sensor does not touch the fan or fan cover. K9803VH Programmed -temperature oven side Insulation O.CPU-CN7 Electronics section side Figure 6.38 Cover Insulation Temperature Sensor for Programmed-Temperature Oven and Heater Cable (15) Columns in Programmed-Temperature Oven The column installation procedure varies depending on the application, so see the Operation Data. (16) Programmed-Temperature Oven Gasket (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 (2) Stop the supply of power. Stopping operation” for this procedure). CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (3) Turn off the protective gas (instrumental air) supply. (4) Remove the programmed-temperature oven door. (5) Remove the four screws from inside the programmed-temperature oven door. Remove the gasket and gasket-holding plate. (6) Install a new gasket. (7) Reinstall the gasket-holding plate. Make sure that the gasket is not loose or bent. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-59 <6. Maintenance> K9400LJ Gasket Gasket-holding plate Screws (four) Figure 6.39 Programmed-Temperature Oven Gasket (17) Air Turbine for Agitator Fan in Programmed-Temperature Oven (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 (2) Stop the supply of power. Stopping operation” for this procedure). CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (3) Turn off the protective gas (instrumental air) supply. (4) Remove the four screws from the fan cover. (5) Remove the temperature sensor from the heater cover, and bend the sensor so that the heater cover can be removed. (6) Remove the four screws from the heater cover. (7) Remove the two screws to remove the fan. (8) Remove 12 screws to remove the gasket and the gasket-holding plate. (9) Remove three screws to remove the air turbine for the agitator fan. (10) Install a new air turbine for the agitator fan. (11) Reinstall the gasket, gasket-holding plate, fan, heater cover, temperature sensor, and fan cover by reversing steps (4) to (8). Make sure that the temperature sensor does not touch the fan or fan cover. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 6  6-60 <6. Maintenance> K9400FA Turbine K9400FU Gasket Screws for agitator fan air turbine (three) Figure 6.40 6.2.5 Air Turbine for Agitator Fan Components in the Sample Processing System The instructions for replacing parts in the sample processing system are explained. (1) Sample processing system (2) Atmospheric pressure balancing valve or flow rate control needle valve (3) Flowmeter (4) Pressure gauge (5) Pneumatic valve for actuating external air supply (6) Stream switching valve or pneumatic valve for atmospheric balance (1) Sample Processing System The sample processing system is a train of filter, regulator for samples, stop valve, stream switching valve and needle valve. Some systems may not comprise all of these components depending on the specifications. To replace any of these components, follow the steps below. (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 Stopping operation” for this procedure). (2) Turn off the supply of the sample. (3) If the sample is liquid, purge the sample line with the purge gas (nitrogen gas or instrument air). • When the stream switching valve is a pneumatic valve, change the analyzer status to Manual and turn on the stream switching valve on the sample line to let the purge gas flow in. • When the stream switching valve is a stop valve, close all the stop valves and open the stop valve on the sample line to let the purge gas flow in. (4) Close all the stream switching valves. IMPORTANT • During the purge, purge gas may flow into the sample return line, causing pressure fluctuation. Prepare the sample return line and collection tank, if necessary. • Prepare the sample return line so that the sample does not return. (5) Stop the supply of power. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-61 <6. Maintenance> CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (6) Remove the two pipes connected to the needle valve shown on the far left of Figure 6.41. (7) Remove the nut on the outside of the analyzer unit. (8) Remove the sample processing system from the analyzer. (9) Remove the component and install a new component. (10) Reassemble the sample processing system in the reverse order of steps (7) to (9). When installing a replacement component, always use sealing tape. (11) Confirm that there are no leaks in the piping. K9193HH Needle valve K9192WA Stream switching valve (Diaphragm: Teflon, Wetted surface: Viton) K9192WB Stream switching valve (Diaphragm: Teflon, Wetted surface: Silicone) L9805ZF Regulator valve for samples (Diaphragm: Teflon, Liner: SUS) L9862AB Filter Stream switching valve Needle valve Regulator for samples Cap nut Filter Nut Figure 6.41 Example of Sample Processing System (May contain a Stop Valve depending on the system) l Filter element (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 Stopping operation” for this procedure). (2) Turn off the supply of the sample. (3) If the sample is liquid, purge the sample line with the purge gas (nitrogen gas or instrument air). • When the stream switching valve is a pneumatic valve, change the analyzer status to Manual and turn on the stream switching valve on the sample line to let the purge gas flow in. • When the stream switching valve is a stop valve, close all the stop valves and open the stop valve on the sample line to let the purge gas flow in. (4) Close all the stream switching valves. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 6  6-62 <6. Maintenance> IMPORTANT • During the purge, purge gas may flow into the sample return line, causing pressure fluctuation. Prepare the sample return line and collection tank, if necessary. • Prepare the sample return line so that the sample does not return. CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (5) (6) (7) (8) Remove the cap nut (see Figure 6.42). Replace the internal filter element and the gaskets with a new one. Firmly tighten the cap nut. Confirm that there are no leaks. L9862AG Filter element L9862AC Gasket 1 L9862AD Gasket 2 Bushing Gasket 1 Nut Filter Element Gasket 2 Body F0245.ai Figure 6.42 (2) Atmospheric Pressure Balancing Valve and/or Needle Valve for Controlling Flow Rate See Figure 6.43. (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 (2) Stop the supply of power. Stopping operation” for this procedure). IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-63 <6. Maintenance> CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (3) Turn off the supply of the protective gas (instrumental air). (4) If the sample is liquid, purge the sample line with the purge gas (nitrogen gas or instrument air). • When the stream switching valve is a pneumatic valve, change the analyzer status to Manual and turn on the stream switching valve on the sample line to let the purge gas flow in. • When the stream switching valve is a stop valve, close all the stop valves and open the stop valve on the sample line to let the purge gas flow in. (5) Close all the stream switching valves. IMPORTANT • During the purge, purge gas may flow into the sample return line, causing pressure fluctuation. Prepare the sample return line and collection tank, if necessary. • Prepare the sample return line so that the sample does not return. (6) Remove the pipes connected to the atmospheric pressure balancing valve and needle valve for controlling the flow rate. (7) Remove the four screws holding the bracket. (8) When replacing atmospheric pressure balancing valve, remove two screws on the back side of the bracket. When replacing flow rate control needle valve, remove the nuts on the front side of the bracket. (9) After replacing each components with new ones, reassemble in the reverse order of steps (6) to (8). (10) Confirm that the piping is correct and there are no leaks. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 6  6-64 <6. Maintenance> L9853AA Needle valve K9192WP Atmospheric pressure balancing valve (Diaphragm: Teflon, Wetted surface: Viton) K9192WQ Atmospheric pressure balancing valve (Diaphragm: Teflon, Wetted surface: Silicone) Screw (four) Sample Flow Rate Adjusting Needle Valve Atmospheric Pressure Balancing Valve F0246.ai Figure 6.43 Atmospheric Pressure Balancing Valve and Sample Flow Rate Adjusting Needle Valve (3) Flowmeter See Figure 6.44. (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 Stopping operation” for this procedure). (2) Turn off the supply of the sample. (3) If the sample is liquid, purge the sample line with the purge gas (nitrogen gas or instrument air). • When the stream switching valve is a pneumatic valve, change the analyzer status to Manual and turn on the stream switching valve on the sample line to let the purge gas flow in. • When the stream switching valve is a stop valve, close all the stop valves and open the stop valve on the sample line to let the purge gas flow in. (4) Close all the stream switching valves. IMPORTANT • During the purge, purge gas may flow into the sample return line, causing pressure fluctuation. Prepare the sample return line and collection tank, if necessary. • Prepare the sample return line so that the sample does not return. CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (5) Remove the four pipes connected to the flowmeter. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-65 <6. Maintenance> (6) Loose the mounting screws at the base and remove the flowmeter. (7) Replace the flowmeter in the reverse order of steps (5) and (6). (8) Confirm that there are no leaks in the piping. K9805WA, K9805WC for gas samples (Gasket: Viton) K9805WE for liquid samples (Gasket: Teflon) K9805WB, K9805WD for gas samples (Gasket: Teflon) K9805WF for liquid samples (Gasket: Daiel Par-Flour) 6 Taper tube Screw (two) Gasket Base Connector Nut 2 Nut 1 Figure 6.44 F0247.ai Taper Tube When replacing only the taper tube, follow the procedure below (see Figure 6.44). (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 Stopping operation” for this procedure). (2) Turn off the supply of the sample. (3) If the sample is liquid, purge the sample line with the purge gas (nitrogen gas or instrument air). • When the stream switching valve is a pneumatic valve, change the analyzer status to Manual and turn on the stream switching valve on the sample line to let the purge gas flow in. • When the stream switching valve is a stop valve, close all the stop valves and open the stop valve on the sample line to let the purge gas flow in. (4) Close all the stream switching valves. IMPORTANT • During the purge, purge gas may flow into the sample return line, causing pressure fluctuation. Prepare the sample return line and collection tank, if necessary. • Prepare the sample return line so that the sample does not return. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-66 <6. Maintenance> CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (5) Remove the lower pipe connected to the flowmeter assembly. (6) Hold the connector and loosen nut 1 and nut 2. (7) Gently move the connector downward and remove the taper tube. Replace the gasket if any damage is found. (8) Install a new taper tube in the reverse order of steps (5) to (7). (9) Confirm that there are no leaks in the piping. L9866AK Taper tube (for gas sample, 1.1 l/min) L9866AP Taper tube (for gas sample, 150 ml/min) L9866AR Taper tube (for liquid sample, 100 ml/min) L9866AS Taper tube (for liquid sample, 20 ml/min) K9193GQ Gasket (for gas sample, Viton) K9193GR Gasket (for liquid sample, Teflon) K9805ZA Gasket (for liquid sample, Daiel Par-flour) (4) Pressure Gauge See Figure 6.45 for the replacement procedure. (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 Stopping operation” for this procedure). (2) Turn off the supply of the sample. (3) If the sample is liquid, purge the sample line with the purge gas (nitrogen gas or instrument air). • When the stream switching valve is a pneumatic valve, change the analyzer status to Manual and turn on the stream switching valve on the sample line to let the purge gas flow in. • When the stream switching valve is a stop valve, close all the stop valves and open the stop valve on the sample line to let the purge gas flow in. (4) Close all the stream switching valves. IMPORTANT • During the purge, purge gas may flow into the sample return line, causing pressure fluctuation. Prepare the sample return line and collection tank, if necessary. • Prepare the sample return line so that the sample does not return. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  <6. Maintenance> 6-67 CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) Remove the pipe connected to the elbow on the rear of the pressure gauge. Remove the two screws on the fitting. Remove two nuts and two washers that fix the pressure gauge to the fitting. Remove the elbow connected to the pressure gauge. Install a new pressure gauge in the reverse order of steps (5) to (8). When attaching the elbow, always apply sealing tape to the connection of the pressure gauge. (10) Confirm that there are no leaks. L9867AG 0 to 0.2 MPa L9867AJ 0 to 0.6 MPa Bracket Screw (two) Pressure gauge Washer (two) Figure 6.45 Nut (two) Elbow F0248.ai Pressure Gauge (5) Pneumatic Valve for Actuating External Air Supply See Figure 6.46 for the replacement procedure. (1) Stop the operation. (See “3.3.4 (2) Stop the supply of power. Stopping operation” for this procedure). CAUTION The oven is extremely hot after turning off the power immediately. Keep the protective gas (instrumental air) supplied for more than an hour after turning off the power. Keep hands away from the oven components. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 6  <6. Maintenance> 6-68 (3) Turn off the supply of the protective gas (instrumental air). Remove the tubes connected to ports IN, OUT1, OUT2, and OPEN. When removing the tubes, put labels on them for ease of identifying the connections later (see Figure 6.46 and Figure 6.47). (4) Remove the two screws. (5) Install a new pneumatic valve for actuating the external air supply in the reverse order of steps (3) and (4). (6) Confirming that the piping is correct and there are no leaks. (7) After completing the piping, follow the steps below. (a) After fully opening each of the needle valves, rotate it back two turns and lock them. (b) Feed air and make sure that air comes out from point (1) but not from point (2). (c) Actuate valve SV11 and make sure that air comes out from (2) but not from (1). (d) Repeat steps (b) and (c) and confirm that the reaction times at (1) and (2) do not take more than 0.5 seconds, with respect to the actuation of SV11. (e) If the reaction time at (1) was more than 0.5 seconds as a result of step (d), open the EHX1 needle valve by 1/4 turns and check the delay again. If the reexamination still shows the same result, repeat this step. (f) If the reaction time at (2) was more than 0.5 seconds as a result of step (d), open the EHX2 needle valves by 1/4 turns and check the delay again. If the reexamination still shows the same result, repeat this step. K9193NX K9193NY K9193NT K9193NU OPE. OPE. EXH2 OUT2 OUT1 Figure 6.46 IN OUT1 EXH1 K9193NX (K9193NY) EXH2 OUT2 IN EXH1 K9193NT (K9193NU) Pneumatic Valve for Actuating External Air Supply In case of K9193NU, NX In case of K9193NT, NY SV11 OUT IN SV11 OUT IN EXH OUT2 IN OUT1 (1) (2) PV11 PV12 OUT2 Air OUT1 (2) EXH IN Air PV11 F0250.ai Figure 6.47 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  6-69 <6. Maintenance> (6) Diaphragm of Pneumatic Valve for Atmospheric Pressure Balancing or Stream Switching (1) Remove the pipe for air. (2) Remove the four screws on the upper section of the stream switching valve (see Figure 6.48) or the atmospheric-pressure balancing valve (see Figure 6.49) to remove the upper section of the valve itself. (3) Replace the diaphragm with a new one and reassemble the valve. Install the new diaphragm in the same orientation. Exercise care to avoid losing the adjusting pin and spring at the lower section of the valve. 5 3 2 6 4 air in 9 8 10 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Part name BASE BODY CAP PISTON O-RING O-RING SPRING SPRING PIN 10 DIAPHRAGM 11 SCREW Part number Quantity K9192WD 1 1 K9192WE 1 1 K9192WF 1 1 K9192WG 1 1 K9142QU 1 1 L9817FK 1 1 K9192WH 1 1 K9035AW 1 1 K9192WK 1 1 K9192WL 1 K9192WV 1 Y9335JU 4 4 1 K9192WB 11 K9192WA 7 F0251.ai Figure 6.48 Stream Switching Valve air in 6 7 2 4 8 9 5 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Part name BASE BODY CAP PISTON Part number Quantity K9192WD 1 1 K9192WR 1 1 K9192WS 1 1 K9192WT 1 1 K9192WL 1 DIAPHRAGM K9192WV 1 O-RING L9817FP 1 1 SPRING K9192WU 4 4 PIN L9192WK 1 1 SPRING K9035AW 1 1 O-RING L9817MY 1 1 SCREW Y9335JU 4 4 1 K9192WQ 3 No. 1 2 3 4 K9192WP 10 11 F0252.ai Figure 6.49 Atmospheric-Pressure Balancing Valve IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 6  7. 7-1 <7. Troubleshooting> Troubleshooting An alarm is displayed when a malfunction occurs. In the alarm display, possible causes and corrective actions are shown. Fix the problems referring to them. Even if alarms are not activated but analysis results show a malfunction, fix the problem referring to 7.2 “Troubleshooting in Malfunctions in Analysis Result.” 7.1 Alarm When an alarm is occurred, fix the problem referring to possible causes and corrective actions shown in it. 7.1.1 Alarm Type There are three types of alarm. ● GC8000 system-fixed alarm ● User-set alarm which can be defined by the user (Component Alarm) ● D/I alarm which can be assigned to contact inputs by the user 7 (1) Fixed Alarm These alarms has been set to GC8000. (2) User-set Alarm (Component Alarm) The maximum of 32 upper and lower limit check alarms can be set for calculation results. Such calculation items are (1) concentration, (2) retention time, (3) variation coefficient, and (4) tailing coefficient. Make the settings to define the user-set up alarm in Alarm Setup screen of the EtherLCD. To delete a user-set alarm, set both the stream number and peak number to zero. Stream and Peak Numbers Select streams and peak numbers to perform the upper and lower limit check. Check Items Set upper and lower limits in concentration, retention time, variation coefficient and tailing coefficient. Upper and Lower Limits Set the upper and lower limits to be checked. (3) D/I Alarm An alarm is activated when signals are fed into a contact input. There are up to 32 contact inputs. The alarm number is 200 + contact number for alarm level 2, and 400 + contact number for alarm level 3. For the alarm, do the following settings. To set or delete a D/I alarm, select “Alarm process” in the Process assign from the D/I Setup Screen in the EtherLCD. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  7-2 <7. Troubleshooting> Alarm Level Set to level 2 or 3. Alarm Message The alarm message can be defined with up to 22 alphanumeric characters. 7.1.2 Alarm Process There are four alarm levels which are processed as follows. l Level 1 This alarm is activated when malfunctions in the system or hardware occur. Once activated, the alarm status is maintained until released. When a level 1 alarm is activated during Process status with Run mode, Run mode moves to Stop at the end of the measurement being performed at the time. l Level 2 This alarm is activated when malfunctions in measurement conditions, etc. occur. Once activated, the alarm status is maintained until released. l Component This alarm is activated when measurement results for concentration, retention time, etc. fall out of range. Once activated, the alarm status is maintained until released. l Level 3 This alarm is activated for minor malfunctions or information. The alarm status is not maintained. 7.1.3 Alarm Number The alarm number is assigned for each alarm level as follows. l Alarm 1 to 174: Level 1 Alarm 1 to 174: Fixed Alarm l Alarm 201 to 294: Level 2 Alarm 201 to 232: D/I Alarm (200 + contact number) 251 to 294: Fixed Alarm 291 to 294: Composition Alarm l Alarm 401 to 562: Level 3 Alarm 401 to 432: D/I Alarm (400 + contact number) 450 to 562: Fixed Alarm 471 to 474: Composition Alarm IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  7.1.4 7-3 <7. Troubleshooting> Alarm Contents The alarm type and contents are as the following tables. In the alarm display, possible causes and corrective actions are shown. Fix the problems referring to them. The thresholds to activate alarms are shown in the table below. D/I alarm of level 2 and 3 are set from the D/I Setup Screen in EtherLCD. Alarm includes Alarm for the entire unit and GCM alarm. In “Alarm Kind” of the table, “M” shows alarm for the entire unit and “G” shows the GCM alarm. n Level 1 l Fixed Alarm No. MESSAGE 1 2 3 4 14 SYS ERR OVEN 1 SYS ERR OVEN 2 SYS ERR OVEN 3 SYS ERR DATABASE INIT ERR 15 CONC CALC ERR 16 OVEN1 INIT ERR 17 OVEN2 INIT ERR 18 OVEN3 INIT ERR 26 FILE INIT ERR 27 ETHER INIT ERR 28 FTP INIT ERR 31 CTL CARD ID ERR 32 OVEN1 CARD ID ERR 33 OVEN2 CARD ID ERR 34 OVEN3 CARD ID ERR 35 TMP CARD1 ID ERR 36 TMP CARD2 ID ERR 37 TMP CARD3 ID ERR 38 DET CARD1 ID ERR 39 DET CARD2 ID ERR 40 DET CARD3 ID ERR Alarm Contents Threshold Item Threshold Threshold Alarm Setting Kind N/A M G System error Oven 1 system error Oven 2 system error Oven 3 system error Database init error Launch task Send message Other Error to launch task Error to send message, etc Initialize DB Error to initialize DB N/A Conc calc error Calculation time Calculation was not concluded before the start of the next analysis Oven1 init error Launch task Error to launch task Send message Error to send Oven2 init error Other – initialize DB message Oven3 init error Error to initialize DB File initialization error Initialize File system Error to initialize File system Ethernet initialization Initialize Ethernet Error to initialize error Ethernet FTP initialization Initialize FTP Error to Initialize FTP error Card ID error System setting Mismatch between system setting and card ID Oven card 1 ID error System setting Mismatch in isothermal and programmed Oven card 2 ID error temperature settings, and explosionproof Oven card 3 ID error requirements Temp. card 1 ID error System setting Mismatch in card marks and Temp. card 2 ID error explosionproof types Temp. card 3 ID error Detector card 1 ID System setting Mismatch in card error types Detector card 2 ID error Detector card 3 ID error IM 11B08A01-01E M Method setting screen G N/A G N/A M N/A M M Slot setting M N/A G N/A G Detector setting G 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 7  No. 7-4 <7. Troubleshooting> MESSAGE Alarm Contents 52 DET1-1 FPGA ERR Detector card 1-1 FPGA error 53 DET1-2 FPGA ERR Detector card 1-2 FPGA error 54 DET2-1 FPGA ERR Detector card 2-1 FPGA error 55 DET2-2 FPGA ERR Detector card 2-2 FPGA error 56 DET3-1 FPGA ERR Detector card 3-1 FPGA error 57 DET3-2 FPGA ERR Detector card 3-2 FPGA error 61 AI A/D ERR AI card A/D calibration error 62 TMP CARD1 A/D Temp. ctrl card 1 A/D ERR cal. error 63 TMP CARD2 A/D Temp. ctrl card 2 A/D ERR cal. error 64 TMP CARD3 A/D Temp. ctrl card 3 A/D ERR cal. error 65 OVEN1 TMP A/D Oven 1 temp. A/D ERR cal. error 66 OVEN2 TMP A/D Oven 2 temp. A/D ERR cal. error 67 OVEN3 TMP A/D Oven 3 temp. A/D ERR cal. error 71 OVEN1 COM ERR Oven 1 communication error 72 OVEN2 COM ERR Oven 2 communication error 73 OVEN3 COM ERR Oven 3 communication error 74 TMP1 CTL ERR Temp. sensor 1 temp. cntrl error Threshold Item Error to write software in FPGA Calibrate 16-bit AD of temperature controller signal and AI signal upon power-on Error to calibrate 16- N/A bit AD of temperature controller signal and AI signal upon power-on M Communication with OVEN 1 Communication with OVEN 2 Communication with OVEN 3 Exceeds the deviation limit setting for Oven 1 temperature setting value and measurement value. Exceeds the deviation limit setting for Oven 2 temperature setting value and measurement value. Exceeds the deviation limit setting for Oven 3 temperature setting value and measurement value. Standard ZERO/ MIDDLE/SPAN values exceed the range N/A Communication between OVEN and CPU is disconnected for a set period of time G Temp. sensor 2 temp. cntrl error 76 TMP3 CTL ERR Temp. sensor 3 temp. cntrl error 77 TMP1 AD ERR Temp. sensor 1 standard AD error Temp. sensor 2 standard AD error Temp. sensor 3 standard AD error Temp. sensor 1 over Temperature sensor limit value Temp. sensor 2 over limit Temp. sensor 3 over limit 79 TMP3 AD ERR 81 TMP1 OVER LIMIT 82 TMP2 OVER LIMIT 83 TMP3 OVER LIMIT Threshold Alarm Setting Kind N/A G Write software in FPGA 75 TMP2 CTL ERR 78 TMP2 AD ERR Threshold Deviation exceeds the value set The contents of DATA1 1: Oven 2: LSV 4: FPD Deviation temperature setting screen G G Each value exceeds N/A x G Upper limit: User-set N/A value Lower limit: –20°C G IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  No. 7-5 <7. Troubleshooting> MESSAGE 84 TMP1 HIGH 85 TMP2 HIGH 86 TMP3 HIGH 87 TMP1 SENSOR BURN OUT 88 TMP2 SENSOR BURN OUT 89 TMP3 SENSOR BURN OUT 90 TMP1 SENS C S/C 91 TMP2 SENS C S/C 92 TMP3 SENS C S/C 93 TMP1 SENS P S/C 94 TMP2 SENS P S/C 95 TMP3 SENS P S/C 111 ELEC PRESS DOWN 112 OVEN1 PRESS DOWN 113 OVEN2 PRESS DOWN 114 OVEN3 PRESS DOWN 115 PURGING1 116 PURGING2 117 PURGING3 121 DET1-1 A/D ERR 122 DET1-2 A/D ERR 123 DET2-1 A/D ERR 124 DET2-2 A/D ERR 125 DET3-1 A/D ERR 126 DET3-2 A/D ERR 127 DET1-1 FLAME OUT 128 DET1-2 FLAME OUT 129 DET2-1 FLAME OUT 130 DET2-2 FLAME OUT 131 DET3-1 FLAME OUT 132 DET3-2 FLAME OUT Alarm Contents Overtemp protection zone1 Overtemp protection zone2 Overtemp protection zone3 Temp. sensor 1 failure Temp. sensor 2 failure Temp. sensor 3 failure Temp. sensor 1 short circuit Temp. sensor 2 short circuit Temp. sensor 3 short circuit Overtemp protect zone 1 short circuit Overtemp protect zone 2 short circuit Overtemp protect zone 3 short circuit Low electronic purge pressure Low oven 1 pressure Threshold Item Threshold Temperature sensor Temperature value exceeds the upper limit of 350°C Threshold Alarm Setting Kind N/A G N/A G Temperature sensor Temperature falls N/A value below the lower limit of –20°C G N/A G 7 N/A M N/A G N/A G N/A Exceed internal upper and lower limit values G Low oven 2 pressure Low oven 3 pressure Oven 1 purging Oven 2 purging Oven 3 purging Detector 1-1 A/D cal. Detector card value error Detector 1-2 A/D cal. error Detector 2-1 A/D cal. error Detector 2-2 A/D cal. error Detector 3-1 A/D cal. error Detector 3-2 A/D cal. error Detector 1-1 A/D FID & FPD flame flame out detector level Detector 1-2 A/D flame out Detector 2-1 A/D flame out Detector 2-2 A/D flame out Detector 3-1 A/D flame out Detector 3-2 A/D flame out Detector G Flame detectors for FID & FPD drop signal setting below detection level screen IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  No. 7-6 <7. Troubleshooting> MESSAGE 133 DET1-1 CURRENT ERR 134 DET1-2 CURRENT ERR 135 DET2-1 CURRENT ERR 136 DET2-2 CURRENT ERR 137 DET3-1 CURRENT ERR 138 DET3-2 CURRENT ERR 141 EPC1 COM ERR 142 EPC2 COM ERR 143 EPC3 COM ERR 151 CAR1-1 PRESS LOW 152 CAR1-2 PRESS LOW 153 CAR2-1 PRESS LOW 154 CAR2-2 PRESS LOW 155 CAR3-1 PRESS LOW 156 CAR3-2 PRESS LOW 157 CAR1-1 PRES CTL ERR 158 CAR1-2 PRES CTL ERR 159 CAR2-1 PRES CTL ERR 160 CAR2-2 PRES CTL ERR 161 CAR3-1 PRES CTL ERR 162 CAR3-2 PRES CTL ERR 163 UTL1-1 PRES CTL ERR 164 UTL1-2 PRES CTL ERR 165 UTL1-3 PRES CTL ERR 166 UTL1-4 PRES CTL ERR 167 UTL2-1 PRES CTL ERR 168 UTL2-2 PRES CTL ERR 169 UTL2-3 PRES CTL ERR 170 UTL2-4 PRES CTL ERR 171 UTL3-1 PRES CTL ERR 172 UTL3-2 PRES CTL ERR 173 UTL3-3 PRES CTL ERR 174 UTL3-4 PRES CTL ERR Alarm Contents Threshold Item Threshold Threshold Alarm Setting Kind N/A G Det 1-1 current out- TCD current value TCD current value of-range exceeds 350 mA for H2-He mix, and 150 Det 1-2 current outmA for others. of-range Current applied to Det 2-1 current outthe detector drops of-range below 60 mA during Det 2-2 current outRun mode. of-range Det 3-1 current outof-range Det 3-2 current outof-range EPC 1 EPC communication EPC communication N/A communication error fails 5 consecutive times EPC 2 communication error EPC 3 communication error Carrier gas 1-1 N/A pressure low Carrier gas 1-2 pressure low Carrier gas 2-1 pressure low Carrier gas 2-2 pressure low Carrier gas 3-1 pressure low Carrier gas 3-2 pressure low N/A Carrier gas 1-1 Pressure value The pressure control error exceeds 490 kPa (71.0 psi) or drops Carrier gas 1-2 below 0 kPa (0.0 control error psi). Carrier gas 2-1 control error Carrier gas 2-2 control error Carrier gas 3-1 control error Carrier gas 3-2 control error Utility gas 1-1 control error Utility gas 1-2 control error Utility gas 1-3 control error Utility gas 1-4 control error Utility gas 2-1 control error Utility gas 2-2 control error Utility gas 2-3 control error Utility gas 2-4 control error Utility gas 3-1 control error Utility gas 3-2 control error Utility gas 3-3 control error Utility gas 3-4 control error IM 11B08A01-01E G G G 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  7-7 <7. Troubleshooting> n Level 2 l D/I Alarm No. 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 MESSAGE DI#1 ALARM DI#2 ALARM DI#3 ALARM DI#4 ALARM DI#5 ALARM DI#6 ALARM DI#7 ALARM DI#8 ALARM DI#9 ALARM DI#10 ALARM DI#11 ALARM DI#12 ALARM DI#13 ALARM DI#14 ALARM DI#15 ALARM DI#16 ALARM DI#17 ALARM DI#18 ALARM DI#19 ALARM DI#20 ALARM DI#21 ALARM DI#22 ALARM DI#23 ALARM DI#24 ALARM DI#25 ALARM DI#26 ALARM DI#27 ALARM DI#28 ALARM DI#29 ALARM DI#30 ALARM DI#31 ALARM DI#32 ALARM Alarm Contents DI#1 Alarm DI#2 Alarm DI#3 Alarm DI#4 Alarm DI#5 Alarm DI#6 Alarm DI#7 Alarm DI#8 Alarm DI#9 Alarm DI#10 Alarm DI#11 Alarm DI#12 Alarm DI#13 Alarm DI#14 Alarm DI#15 Alarm DI#16 Alarm DI#17 Alarm DI#18 Alarm DI#19 Alarm DI#20 Alarm DI#21 Alarm DI#22 Alarm DI#23 Alarm DI#24 Alarm DI#25 Alarm DI#26 Alarm DI#27 Alarm DI#28 Alarm DI#29 Alarm DI#30 Alarm DI#31 Alarm DI#32 Alarm Threshold Item Setting Value Alarm Kind G•M 7 l Fixed Alarm No. MESSAGE Alarm Contents 251 OVERRIDE 252 DUAL ETHER ERR Override Wrong def. of dual Ethernet 253 FILE_READ_ERR File reading error 254 FILE_WRITE_ERR File writing error 255 FLASH WRITE ERR Flash write error 261 HMI SYS ERR 262 HMI COMM ERR 281 C-OVER 282 C-REPT 283 C-COEF 291 CONC OUT 292 RT OUT 293 DEV OUT 294 TAIL OUT 296 SECTION STOP ERR 297 CALIB CURVE ERR HMI system error Threshold Item IP address File File Flash memory Threshold Invalid IP address setting Error to read Error to write Failed to erase or write DO contact for HMI Fail HMI communication DO contact for HMI error communication error Calibration error Calibration range Exceeds the set value. Calibration Repeatable Exceeds the set repeatability failure calibration range value. Failure of calibration Invalid calibration Exceeds the set coefficient coefficient value. Concentration Concentration Exceeds the set abnormal value. Retention time Retention time Exceeds the set abnormal value. Variation coefficient Variation coefficient Exceeds the set abnormal value. Tailing coefficient Tailing coefficient Exceeds the set abnormal value. IM 11B08A01-01E Threshold Setting N/A Ethernet setting screen N/A N/A N/A Alarm Kind M M M M M N/A M N/A M Peak setting screen Peak setting screen Peak setting screen Alarm setting screen Alarm setting screen Alarm setting screen Alarm setting screen Peak setting Peak setting G G G G G G G G G 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  7-8 <7. Troubleshooting> n Level 3 l D/I Alarm No. 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 MESSAGE DI#1 ALARM DI#2 ALARM DI#3 ALARM DI#4 ALARM DI#5 ALARM DI#6 ALARM DI#7 ALARM DI#8 ALARM DI#9 ALARM DI#10 ALARM DI#11 ALARM DI#12 ALARM DI#13 ALARM DI#14 ALARM DI#15 ALARM DI#16 ALARM DI#17 ALARM DI#18 ALARM DI#19 ALARM DI#20 ALARM DI#21 ALARM DI#22 ALARM DI#23 ALARM DI#24 ALARM DI#25 ALARM DI#26 ALARM DI#27 ALARM DI#28 ALARM DI#29 ALARM DI#30 ALARM DI#31 ALARM DI#32 ALARM Alarm Contents DI#1 Alarm DI#2 Alarm DI#3 Alarm DI#4 Alarm DI#5 Alarm DI#6 Alarm DI#7 Alarm DI#8 Alarm DI#9 Alarm DI#10 Alarm DI#11 Alarm DI#12 Alarm DI#13 Alarm DI#14 Alarm DI#15 Alarm DI#16 Alarm DI#17 Alarm DI#18 Alarm DI#19 Alarm DI#20 Alarm DI#21 Alarm DI#22 Alarm DI#23 Alarm DI#24 Alarm DI#25 Alarm DI#26 Alarm DI#27 Alarm DI#28 Alarm DI#29 Alarm DI#30 Alarm DI#31 Alarm DI#32 Alarm Threshold Item Setting Value IM 11B08A01-01E Alarm Kind G•M 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  7-9 <7. Troubleshooting> l Fixed Alarm No. MESSAGE Alarm Contents Threshold Item 450 EXCP ERR 451 POWER ON Exception error Power on 452 PARA MISMATCH Parameter mismatch Setting parameter 453 TIME SET ERR 454 MODE CHANGE ERR 455 CHANGE STATE ERR 456 WDOG TIMER ERR 461 C-OVER Time setting failed. Operation mode change failed Measurement state change failed Watchdog timer error Calibration error Calibration range 462 C-REPT Cal repeatability failure Repeatable calibration range 463 C-COEF Failure of cal coefficient Invalid calibration coefficient Set time Operation mode Measurement state 464 DET1-1 CHANGE ERR 465 DET1-2 CHANGE ERR 466 DET2-1 CHANGE ERR 467 DET2-2 CHANGE ERR 468 DET3-1 CHANGE ERR 469 DET3-2 CHANGE ERR 471 CONC OUT Concentration 472 Retention time 473 474 481 Detector 1-1 state change failed Detector 1-2 state change failed Detector 2-1 state change failed Detector 2-2 state change failed Detector 3-1 state change failed Detector 3-2 state change failed Concentration abnormal RT OUT Retention time abnormal DEV OUT Variation coefficient abnormal TAIL OUT Tailing coefficient abnormal DETECT NO PEAK No peak detected Power supply 482 REF PEAK ERR 483 CALC PEAK ERR Wrong reference peak Detecor state Variation coefficient Tailing coefficient Gate Process Detection Slope Peak setting Threshold Threshold Alarm Setting Kind N/A M Power supply turned N/A M on Mismatch of setting Respective G•M parameters * parameters Error to set time M Error to change Respective G operation mode parameters Error to change Respective G measurement state parameters N/A M Exceeds the set Peak setting G value. screen (common) Exceeds the set Peak setting G value. screen (common) Exceeds the set Peak setting G value. screen (common) Detector state Respective G change failed parameters Exceeds the set value. Exceeds the set value. Exceeds the set value. Exceeds the set value. Depends on shape of peak Stream numbers of reference peak numbers are 1 to 31 and peak numbers are other than 1 to 999. Peak calculation error 484 TRACK PEAK ERR Peak tracking is not possible 485 PEAK RECALC ERR Peak re-integration is failure. 491 DET SIG OUT Detector signal out of AD conversion value In the range of range of detector 0x800000 - 0x800003 or 0x7ffffc - 0x7fffff 493 COR ERR Total compensation Peak setting Peak being executed or error peak being processed does not exist. 497 BL CHRMT ERR Baseline chromatogram error IM 11B08A01-01E Alarm setting screen Alarm setting screen Alarm setting screen Alarm setting screen Peak setting screen (separate) Peak setting G G N/A G N/A G N/A G N/A G G G G G Peak setting G N/A G 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 7  No. 7-10 <7. Troubleshooting> MESSAGE Alarm Contents 498 CHRMT SAVE ERR Saving chromatogram file failure 521 OVEN1 POWER ON OVEN1 power on 522 OVEN2 POWER ON OVEN2 power on 523 OVEN3 POWER ON OVEN3 power on 524 OVEN1 COOL ERR Oven 1 cooling error 525 OVEN2 COOL ERR Oven 2 cooling error 526 OVEN3 COOL ERR Oven 3 cooling error 551 PRG SEND ERR Program send error 552 COMMON INFO Common information ERR error 553 CARD START ERR Card start error Card communication error 556 COM SYS MSG System error message 557 SCRIPT SEND ERR Script send error 558 SCRIPT EXE ERR Script execution error 559 SCRIPT DEL ERR Script delete error 560 RESET MSG Reset message Threshold Item Script execution time-out error 562 MODBUS CLIENT ERR MODBUS CLIENT overlap error Threshold Alarm Setting Kind N/A G SD card Error to write SD Power supply Power supply turned N/A on M Temperature control for programmedtemperature oven File transfer File transfer Temperature control N/A does not start when analysis starts. Error to transfer file N/A Error to transfer file N/A G System setting Mismatch between Slot setting slot setting and card screen ID. N/A 554 CARD COM ERR 561 SCRIPT TIMEOUT ERR Threshold File transfer File transfer File transfer Power supply Error to transfer file Error to transfer file Error to transfer file Power supply turned on Script execution time Script execution is not completed within 3 seconds IP address, ID address or equipment ID equipment ID is overwrapped. M M M M N/A M N/A N/A N/A N/A G G G M Script File M IP address, M equipment ID *: Cases resulting in the mismatch of setting parameters 0: There is a valve ON/OFF time setting error. 1: The ratio between the SYS analysis cycle and GCM main cycle is not n: 8 (n = 1 to 8). 2: The pause time is not set at the last SYS analysis cycle in the GCM main cycle. 3: Gate ON/OFF times for peaks to be detected by each detector overlap. For the zone gate, the gate OFF time for a peak must be the ON time for the next peak to be detected in the same zone. 4: The SYS analysis cycle and the GCM main cycle do not match when a programmed temperature oven is mounted. 5: The sampling rates of the detectors belonging to the same SYS differ (different sampling rates can be set for the detectors belonging to the same GCM). 6: The peak detection completion time does not fall within the range from 5 seconds to the analysis cycle. 7: There is no stream in the current stream sequence number when the measurement state is set to the stream sequence. 8: All the SYSs belonging to GCM are set to “not used.” 9: The gate ON/OFF time does not fall within the range of the SYS analysis cycle. 10: No stream belongs to GCM. 11: During the calorific calculation, the units of each peak in streams do not match, or units of wt, mol or user-defined ones (including unused ones) are used. 12: Among multiple SYSs, there is at least one SYS whose peak number is zero. 13: The peak assignment number or peak number is zero (all peaks are set to “not used”). 14: The peak process is set to the base, signal or noise level, and the level action time falls in the time between gate ON and OFF. 15: Data in the main cycle, preparation time, or pause time is invalid. 16: The action time at the signal, base, or noise level does not fall within the range of the SYS analysis cycle. 17: Multiple systems belong to GCM whose distillation is set to Yes. 18: The stream type setting for the stream that is to be executed is inappropriate. If distillation is set to Yes, only cal run and sample run streams can be executed. If distillation is set to No, only measurement, calibration, and validation streams can be executed. 19: Programmed-temperature oven is included and the peak detection stop time is greater than the heating pattern stop time. 20: Programmed-temperature oven is included and the pause time is less than or equal to the heating pattern stop time. 21: If distillation is set to Yes, and concentration calculation is not set to Correction area fraction on the common peak setting screen. 22: If distillation is set to Yes, and calorific value calculation is specified. 23: If distillation is set to Yes, and the same GCM number and method number are set on multiple cal run streams. 24: In a cal run stream with distillation set to Yes, the number of valid peaks set to Indirect method on the peak individual setting screen is 7 or less. 25: In a cal run stream with distillation set to Yes, the standard B.P. values are not set in descending order for the peak numbers of a cal run stream starting with the smallest number. 26: In a cal run stream with distillation set to Yes, calib curve updating is set to Yes and the data acquisition stream specified on the SimDis Calib Data Setup screen does not match the cal run stream. 27: In a sample run stream with distillation set to Yes, cal run stream is not specified, or the type of specified stream is not cal run. 28: In a sample run stream with distillation analysis, the standard B.P. values are not set in descending order for the peak numbers of a cal run stream of a sample run stream starting with the smallest number. 29: Programmed-temperature oven is included, and the heating program time exceeds the SYS analysis cycle. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  7-11 <7. Troubleshooting> 30: Distillation can be set to Yes only on GCM1. Run mode is not possible if distillation is set to Yes on any of the GCMs from GCM2 to 6. 31: If pause time is set before 10 min. or more than 10 min. of the analysis time. 32: There is a setting error in the stream valve ON/OFF time, valve ON/OFF time, atmospheric balance valve ON/OFF time, or DO ON/OFF time. 7.1.5 GC-HMI Alarms No. MESSAGE Description 601 -- FTP error 602 -- 603 -- GC8000 connection error GC8000 physical connection error 604 -- LCD connection error 605 -- 606 -- 607 -- LCD physical connection error Periodic communication error GC8000 forced connection error 608 -- 609 -- 610 -- 611 -- Incorrect concentration history data from FTP 612 -- Incorrect retention time data from FTP 613 -- Incorrect calibration factor data from FTP LCD forced connection error Incorrect data from FTP Incorrect analysis result from FTP Threshold Item Threshold Load database Open file on FTP server Write setup file to FTP server TCP communication Error in loading database Failed to open file on FTP server Failed to write memory data to FTP server TCP transmission failure Threshold Setting N/A N/A TCP communication Failed to establish TCP connection Analyzer Selecting screen LCD TCP TCP transmission failure N/A communication LCD TCP Failed to establish TCP connection N/A communication Periodic Failed to process periodic N/A communication task information TCP communication TCP transmission failure Analyzer Failed to establish TCP connection Selecting screen LCD TCP TCP transmission failure N/A communication Failed to establish TCP connection FTP process Failed to open file on FTP server in N/A memory Analysis result file Analysis result file does not exist. N/A Analysis result file cannot be retrieved. Incorrect data in analysis result file Concentration history file does not N/A Concentration history file exist. Concentration history file cannot be retrieved. Incorrect data in concentration history file Retention time Retention time history file does not N/A history file exist. Retention time history file cannot be retrieved. Incorrect data in retention time history file Calibration factor Calibration factor history file does N/A history file not exist. Calibration factor history file cannot be retrieved. Incorrect data in calibration factor history file IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 7  7.2 7-12 <7. Troubleshooting> Common Procedure of Troubleshooting Common procedure of troubleshooting os shown as followings. Abnormality occurs Checking of alarm Checking of analysis result Checking of chromatogram Checking of parameters Checking of utility Checking of sampling system Checking of process condition Checking with standard sample Checking of parts F0301.ai Figure 7.1 7.2.1 Common Procedure of Troubleshooting Malfunctioning Component Concentration Value Troubleshooting diagram for malfunctioning component concentration value is shown as followings. Abnormal component concentration value Chromatogram is abnormal No Yes Check setting values Setting values are abnormal No Check the condition of process sample Yes Check setting values of sequence Setting are correct Change settings to correct value No Change settings to correct value Yes Abnormal chromatogram Refer to "3.2.3 Anbormal Chromatogram". Figure 7.2 F0302.ai Troubleshooting Diagram for Malfunctioning Component Concentration Value IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  7.2.2 7-13 <7. Troubleshooting> Malfunctioning Retention Time Troubleshooting diagram for malfunctioning retention time is shown as followings. Abnormal retention time Carrier gas pressure is as specified No Set carrier gas pressure to the specified value No Oven temperature control failure Yes Oven temperature is as specified Refer to the oven temperature control failure Yes Carrier gas flow through detector vent is as specified No Leakage and cloggung in piping inside the GC1000 Refer to the leakage and clogging in piping inside the GC1000 Yes Disconnect vent line pipng outdside GC1000 Retention time is still abnormal No 7 Clogging in vent line piping outside the GC1000 Yes Chromatogram is abnormal No Change setting values of gate timing Yes Abnormal chromatogram Refer to "3.2.3 Anbormal Chromatogram". Figure 7.3 F0303.ai Troubleshooting Diagram for Malfunctioning Retention Time IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  7-14 <7. Troubleshooting> 7.2.3 Malfunctioning Chromatogram It is available to use three types of detector such as TCD, FID and FPD. Troubleshooting diagram for malfunctioning chromatogram is different according to the shown as followings. (1) TCD Troubleshooting diagram for malfunctioning chromatogram is shown as followings. Abnormal chromatogram Status of detector is ON No Yes DET CURRENT ERROR is occured No Turn on detector Yes Bridge balance of detector is good No Replace detector Yes Wiring for detector is good No Replace wiring for detector Yes Replace detector board Current value is as specified in operation data No Adjust current with volume on detector board Yes Current can be adjusted No Yes End Baseline of detector is abnormal No Column system failure or sampling system failure Refer to the column system failure or sampling system failure Yes Temperature of oven is stable No Wait for stabilization of oven temperature Yes Replace part or tighten coupling Yes Leak in piping or components in isothermal oven Yes External piping is clean No Use clean piping Yes Bridge balance of detector is good No Repalce detector Yes Insulation resistance of detector is good No Yes Wiring for detector is good No Replace wiring for detector F0304.ai Replace detector board IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  Figure 7.4 <7. Troubleshooting> 7-15 Troubleshooting Diagram for Malfunctioning Chromatogram (TCD) 7 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  7-16 <7. Troubleshooting> (2) FID Troubleshooting diagram for malfunctioning chromatogram is shown as followings. Abnormal chromatogram Status of detector is ON No Yes DET FLAME OUT is occured No Turn detector Yes Flow rate of combustion gas is as specified No Adjust flow rate of combustion gas Yes Voltage value for ignition at DET board is as specified No Replace detector board Yes Voltage value for ignition at DET is as specified No Replace wiring for detector Yes Replace detector Flow rate of combustion gas is as specified No Adjust flow rate of combustion gas Yes High voltage value for signal at DET card is as specified No Replace detector card Yes High voltage value for signal at DET is as specified No Replace wiring for detector Yes Baseline of detector ia abnormal No Column system failure or sampling system failure Refer to the column system failure or sampling system failure Yes Temperature of oven is stable No Wait for stabilization of oven temperature Yes Replace part or tighten coupling Yes Leak in piping or components in isothermal oven No Combustion air is clean No Use clean combustion air Yes External pipng is clean No Ude clean piping Yes Instalation resistance of detector is good No Replace detector Yes Wiring for detector is good No Replace wiring for detector Yes Replace detector board Figure 7.5 F0305.ai Troubleshooting Diagram for Malfunctioning Chromatogram (FID) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  7-17 <7. Troubleshooting> (3) FPD Troubleshooting diagram for malfunctioning chromatogram is shown as followings. Abnormal chromatogram Status of detector is ON No Yes DET FLAME OUT is occured No TUrn on detector Yes Flow rate of combustion gas is as specified No Adjust flow rate of combustion gas Yes Voltage value for ignition at DET board is as specified No Repalce detector board Yes Voltage value for ignition at DET is as specified No Replace wiring for detector Yes Replace detector Flow rate of combustion gas is as specified No 7 Adjust flow rate of combustion gas Yes Increase combustion air pressure to twice value as specified Level of flame signal increase No Re-turn on detector with correct procedure Refer to the "Basic operation manual" Yes Decrease combustion air pressure to as specified value High voltage value for amp. board is as specified Yes No No Voltage value for amp. board at DET board is as specified Replace high voltage power supply Replace detector board Yes No Voltage value for amp. board at amp. board is as specified Replace wiring for amp. board Yes Baseline of detector is abnormal No Column system failure or sampling system failure Refer to the column system failure or sampling system failure Yes Temperature of oven is stable No Wait for stabilization of oven temperature Yes Combustion gas is clean No Use clean combustion air Yes External piping is clean No Use clean piping Yes Replace detector card, amp. board or photo-multiplier Figure 7.6 F0306.ai Troubleshooting Diagram for Malfunctioning Chromatogram (FPD) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  7.2.4 <7. Troubleshooting> 7-18 Column system failure Contact YOKOGAWA for column system failure. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.A-1 Appendix A Principle of Gas Chromatograph A gas chromatograph is an analyzer which first sends a fixed volume of the sampled multicomponent gas mixture to a column, separates it in the column, then measures the concentrations of the components with a detector. The process gas chromatograph analyzes intermittently, allowing periodic analysis by a specified method, thus automatic sampling is possible. This chapter explains the measurement principle of the GC8000 Process Gas Chromatograph. n Sampling Mechanism The process gas chromatograph consists of a sampling mechanism, a column and a detector. Sampling is carried out by switching a sampling valve. When separating components or detecting concentrations, the sampling valve is set to allow the gas (liquid) to be measured to flow through the sample column. When sampling, the sampling valve leads the gas (liquid) to be measured to a column on a carrier gas. (See Figure1) There are two important points regarding sampling: a regular volume is sampled since repeated sampling is required; and samples are taken quickly and securely. The volume is fixed by measuring a specific gas (liquid) of controlled temperature and pressure using a sample measurement tube. Samples are taken quickly and securely by ensuring that the gas to be measured always flows without interrupt. Component separation and concentration detection App.A Measuring tube Sample valve Sample Column Detector Vent Electric signal Carrier gas Status of sampling Measuring tube Sample valve Sample Column Carrier gas Detector Vent Electric signal F_A01.ai Figure 1 Basic Configuration of Gas Chromatograph IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.A-2 n Component Separation Using Column Four types of column are available for the GC8000 Process Gas Chromatograph: a packed column, micro packed column, mega-bore column and capillary column. Packed columns consist of a stainless steel pipe with a diameter of 2 mm filled with a bulking agent called a stationary phase. Micro packed columns consist of a stainless steel pipe with a diameter of 1 mm. Bulking agents are porous polymer, alumina, or diatomite carrier impregnated with a liquid phase. Capillary columns use a hollow pipe with a diameter of 0.1 to 1 mm. Those with a diameter of 0.45 mm or larger are called mega-bore columns. As the stationary phase, the inner face coated with liquid phase, micro-particle of porous polymer or alumina supported, or diatomite carrier impregnated with a liquid phase is used. The components in the multi-component gas mixture sample with carrier gas, which is called the mobile phase, move through the column, repeatedly dissolving into and eluting from the stationary phase at a certain cyclic rate conforming to a fixed partition coefficient* that is unique to each component. * Partition coefficient: The concentration ratio of the components, calculated by dividing the component concentration which is in equilibrium in the stationary phase by the concentration which is in equilibrium in the mobile phase. Figure 2 shows a diagram of how the multi-component gas mixture is led to a column and separated into its discrete components over time. Multi-component gas mixture Sampling (Intake) :Component A, Column :Component B, :Component C (Outlet) Detector Concentration signal Carrier gas (1st round) Carrier gas Injection Time A B C (2nd round) F_A02.ai Figure 2 Separating Components Using a Column n Detector The components separated in the column are led to the detector where the concentration of each component is measured. The GC8000 Process Gas Chromatographs can be fitted with thermal conductivity detectors (TCD), flame ionization detectors (FID) or flame photometric detectors (FPD). The thermal conductivity detector can measure almost all non-corrosive components but sensitivity is relatively low. On the other hand, the hydrogen flame ionization detector can measure hydrocarbon and the flame photometric detector can measure sulfur compounds, respectively with high sensitivity. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.A-3 l Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD) The TCD utilizes the difference in the thermal conductivity between the measured gas and the carrier gas and detects the unbalanced voltage produced in a bridge circuit as a measure of concentration. Figure 3 shows the fundamental principle of the TCD. As shown, there are two streams, each having two filaments. One stream passes the carrier gas only and the other, connected to the column outlet, allows the measured gas to pass during analysis. The filaments in the two streams form a bridge circuit such that the filament in one stream is adjacent to the filament in the other stream. The unbalanced voltage in the bridge is proportional to the concentration of the measured gas (liquid) component. The TCD is frequently used to measure the component concentration of the measured gas (liquid). Carrier gas Measurment filament Comparison filament Z1 Output Z2 Z4 Z3 Comparison filament Measurment filament App.A Carrier gas + Sampling gas Constant voltage F_A03.ai Figure 3 Fundamental Principle of Thermal Conductivity Detector l FID The FID utilizes the phenomenon that carbon molecules in the measured component (hydrocarbon) are ionized in a hot hydrogen flame. That is, it detects the ionization current which flows between electrodes to which a high voltage is applied. The ionization current is almost proportional to the carbon number. The FID is used to measure the component concentration of gases containing low concentrations of hydrocarbons. Ion collector coil + - - Hydrogen flame Jet pipe (nozzle) Carrier gas + Sampling gas + + + + - Output Hydrogen gas for combustion F_A04.ai Figure 4 Fundamental Principle of Flame Ionization Detector IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.A-4 l FPD Figure 5 shows the structure of the FPD. As the measured gas containing a sulfur component is led into the excess hydrogen flame, the component containing the sulfur atoms is excited. The FPD detects the luminous intensity of the light emitted when this excited component returns to its base state using a multiplier phototube and converts it to a voltage. This voltage represents the concentration of the sulfur component in the measured gas. The FPD can measure the sulfur component with a high sensitivity of 0.2 ppm. Hydrogen flame Photomultiplier tube Jet pipe (nozzle) Hydrogen gas for combustion Carrier gas + Sampling gas Hydrogen gas for combustion Air fo combustion F_A05.ai Figure 5 Basic Configuration of Flame Photometric Detector IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.B-1 Appendix B Terminology n Operation Terminology Process Description Status can be changed for each GCM. This operation can be made by operators with use level C or higher. The change is possible only in the Stop mode. Normal measurement, calibration and validation Manual Manual operation Status Term Icon/abbr. Measurement Status It can be changed for each GCM. This operation can be made by of Process operators with user level B or higher. Stream Sequence Continuously measures streams in order specified in Stream Sequence Stream Repeats the measurement of the specified stream for the preset Specification number of times (0: continuous, 1-999) Calibration/ Performs calibration or validation of the specified number Validation Operation Mode and Operation mode can be changed for each GCM or for all GCMs at Command the same time. Run Mode in which measurement is running. Starts the measurement in the Process mode. This operation can be made by operators with user level B or higher. Starts to display chromatograms in the Manual mode. (It does not detect peaks, calculate concentration, or save chromatograms.) Pause Mode in which measurement pauses. Operates until the pause time specified in the GCM method in the Process mode. This operation can be made by operators with user level B or higher. Stop Mode in which measurement stops. Operates in the Process mode for the main cycle specified in the GCM method. This operation can be made by operators with user level B or higher. Stops the Run mode immediately in the Manual status. Command Cancels the operation mode command that is in the operation queue Cancellation in the Process mode. This operation can be made by operators with user level B or higher. Forced Stop Stops the current operation mode forcibly in the Process mode. This operation can be made by operators with user level C+. GCM App.B *: Type 4 is Using multiple ovens and detectors, and simultaneously operating the same multiple methods, the GC8000 can measure each component under as with one optimum conditions. This reduces the analysis time and achieves a isothermal flexible configuration that meets customers’ needs. oven. A GCM is one virtual GC. When multiple GCMs are set, the GC8000 works as much as multiple actual GCs. Up to two GCMs can be set in an isothermal oven. Up to two for one isothermal oven Up to four for two isothermal ovens Up to six for three isothermal ovens The following settings are carried out for each GCM: atmosphericpressure balancing valve number, stream valve number, stream identification output, distillation point, and peak common settings. The operations of stream valves are set in the GCM method settings. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  SYS Term Description SYS is the minimum analysis unit. Multiple SYSs can be set in each GCM. SYSs in the same GCM are synchronized for analysis, while those in different GCMs are not synchronized. Up to two SYSs can be set in an isothermal oven. Up to two for one isothermal oven Up to four for two isothermal ovens Up to six for three isothermal ovens App.B-2 Icon/abbr. *: Type 4 is the same as with one isothermal oven. Valves (Valve, RV, or LSV), detectors, and EPCs are set for each SYS. Their respective operations are set in the SYS method. Although atmospheric-pressure balancing valves (AtmV) belong to GCM, their operations are also set in the SYS method. The operations of timing signals are set by using DO in this method as well. (SYS analysis cycle) = (GCM analysis cycle) / n (n: 1-8) GCM Method Any of methods No. 1 to No. 6 can be set for each GCM. In the Manual status or Process–Stop status, the method number will be blank. Main Cycle Time from start (0 second) to stop of analysis Warming Up Time Time for displacement in sample streams Stream Valve ON/OFF time of sample stream valves ON/OFF Time Pause Time Time for measurement pause SYS Method Analysis Cycle Peak Detection Stop Time Tracking Specification Automatic Renewal of Tracking Factors Valve ON/OFF Time AtmosphericPressure Balancing Valve ON/OFF Time DO Operation Setting EPC Program Setting Purging Custom Software Capability Gate Tracking Function Time from start (0 second) to stop of analysis Time to forcibly stop peak detection of chromatogram Valve AtmV The operation setting of timing signals by using DO Displacement of the gas in the pressurized enclosures with a protective gas (instrumental air) With the programming in YM-BASIC (Yokogawa’s original programming language based on BASIC), calculation formulas for analysis results and various measurement statuses such as stream switching can be changed. This function also allows special calculations using the data of analog inputs from other analyzers and/or contact inputs. The automatic peak tracking function of GC1000 Mark II was improved. The setting of tracking (correction) conditions of the gate time setting to detect peaks has become flexible, from simultaneously setting all GCs to setting each SYS or each detector. This enables precise measurement even in multicomponent analysis such as PIONA. n Instrument Terminology ASET Term Description Analyzer server engineering terminal software PC software which operates and displays analyzers Notes IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  ASGW Term ASIU DCS EPC EtherLCD FID FPD GC-HMI GCSMP LSV MC PCAS RV TCD Temperature Protection Circuit Column Switching Valve Carrier Gas Sample Valve Illuminance Hydrogen Limiting Unit Splitter AtmosphericPressure Balancing Valve Description Analyzer server gateway software Exchanges data with the upper system by using the STARDOM FCJ. Analyzer server interface unit software Serves as an interface with the network for analog output signals of field devices except for process gas chromatographs or input/output of contact signals. Distributed control system The upper system of analyzers Electronic pressure control A function which consolidates the settings for display of I/O and Ethernet connection status of analyzers under connection; operation of I/O, user program, and detectors; and parameters of hardware configuration, analysis method, and I/O, which are mainly used for maintenance among the general settings from the GC-HMI. This is equivalent to the functions of EtherLCD (display and operation), which is the human-machine interface of the GC1000 Mark II, excluding operation and display of analysis data. User-level settings for EtherLCD are independent of other screens of the GC-HMI (analyzer overview, etc.), and so they must be set separately. Flame ionization detector Flame photometric detector GC human-machine interface Displays the status of the GC8000 analyzer, operates it, changes its settings, and displays analysis data. 12.1-inch color LCD touch panel on the GC8000 App.B-3 Notes Liquid sampling valve Methane converter (methanizer) PC analyzer server software PC software which manages the network and automatically saves data Rotary valve Thermal conductivity detector A circuit for turning off the heater to prevent overheating App.B A valve for switching columns It uses RV. Gas for carrying sample gas of the measurement target from the sample valve to columns and detectors. H2, He, Ar, and N2 are used as the carrier gas. A valve for taking in sample gas. It uses RV (for gas/liquid) or LSV (for liquid). The intensity of incident light on a plane surface, based on human perception of brightness Illuminance of 1 lux is a flux of light of 1 lumen (lm) on a plane surface of 1 m2. Unit: lx Consists of an air operation valve and a flow controller. It limits the flow of hydrogen (300 ml/min for each oven) or shuts it off. To meet explosion-proof requirements, a regulator must be installed and provide hydrogen at 500 kPa to the GC8000. A flow splitter A balancing valve for sampling gases This valve can be used for sampling gas. As the flow rate changes, the compression rate of sample gas changes, resulting in changes in the sampling volume. This valve is used to prevent such changes. Specifically, install this valve before the sample valve measurement tube and turn it on to stop the flow of sample gas and then turn on the sample valve. When the pressure in the sample valve measurement tube reaches equilibrium with atmospheric pressure at the outlet, turn on the sample valve and start sampling. These procedures are carried out by setting each valve in the Method setting. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  Term Protection Device Description A device for detecting a pressure drop in the control unit to turn off the power supply The device is installed in a pressure-proof enclosure, and is denoted differently in respective explosion-proof standards. FM, CSA: Protection system (Explosionproof enclosure) ATEX, IECEx: Safety device (Flameproof enclosure) TIIS: Protection device (Flameproof enclosure) Pressurized An enclosure whose internal pressure is kept high with protective Enclosure gas (instrumental air) The electronic section of the control unit and the electronic section of oven units 1-3 (including EPC enclosure) connect with one another to form a single pressurized enclosure. A large isothermal oven and, isothermal oven, or programmed-temperature oven in each oven unit are independent pressurized enclosures. Back-flush Valve A switching valve for back flushing It uses RV. Non Explosion-proof General purpose Fore-flush Valve A switching valve for fore flushing It uses RV. Flame Arrester A device for protecting against “flame runaway” It is an explosion-proof device. Protective gas Air, Nitrogen, Carbon dioxide (instrumental air) Vortex Tube A cooler which uses compressed air Manifold Regulator Mesh Arrestor Detects FID and FPD. Utility Gas This term generally means all gases used in the device such as protective gas (instrumental air), carrier gas, H2 for FID and FPD combustion. In the GC8000, it means the following gases except for protective gas (instrumental air) and carrier gas: H2 (for combustion) Air (for combustion) Make-up gas (H2, He, Ar, N2) Stream Valve A valve which switches the streams through which samples of measurement targets are flowing. Restrictor A needle-valve type variable resistor It controls the flow rate of carrier gas or utility gas. App.B-4 Notes n Analysis Terminology Term σ (sigma) Description This term means standard deviation, and indicates how far individual data are from the mean. 1 σ: 68% of data are within the mean ±1 σ 2 σ: 95% of data are within the mean ±2 σ The GC8000 generally ensures that repeatability is ±1% or ±2% of full scale (2 σ). IM 11B08A01-01E Notes 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.C-1 Appendix C Standard Specifications 1. General specifications Measurable object: Gas or volatile liquid (400°C or lower boiling point) Analysis method: Gas chromatography Detector: TCD (thermal conductivity detector) high-sensitivity TCD FID (flame ionization detector) FID with methanizer FPD (flame photometric detector) (only for large isothermal oven) Number of detectors: Type 1: Maximum of 2 Selectable from TCD: 2, FID: 2, FID with methanizer: 1, FPD: 1 Type 2: Maximum of 4 Selectable from TCD: 4, FID: 4, FID with methanizer: 2, FPD: 1 Type 3: Maximum of 6 Selectable from TCD: 6, FID: 6, FID with methanizer: 3 Type 4: Maximum of 2 Selectable from TCD: 2, FID: 2, FID with methanizer: 1 Measurable range: Depends on analysis conditions TCD: 1 ppm to 100% FID: 1 ppm to 100% FID with methanizer: 1 ppm to 0.1% FPD: 1 ppm to 0.1% Number of components to be measured: Maximum of 999 (total number of components in all streams including calibration standard sample streams) Number of streams to be measured: Maximum of 31 (including calibration standard sample streams) Air output for automatic stream switching: Automatic stream valves can be directly operated for up to eight streams; Code switching circuits are necessary for nine or more streams. Note: Applicable only to 1GCM Contact output for automatic stream switching: Maximum of 20 points Analysis period: Maximum of 21600.0 seconds (six hours) Quantifying method: Absolute calibration, sensitivitycorrected absolute calibration, and corrected area normalization Utility gas supply method: Mechanical pressure regulator: Up to 6 for carrier gasses and up to 12 for other utility gasses (2 and 4 for each i-oven) EPC (electronic pressure controller) is optionally available. Please consult with Yokogawa or its Representative Offices. Note: For optimal chromatography performance, Yokogawa recommends the mechanical regulators. Stable retention times are achieved by using them with Yokogawa unique air distribution system within the ovens. Number of valves: Type 1: Up to 8 Selectable from 7 Rotary Valves (RV), 1 Liquid-sample Valve (LSV), and 2 Atmospheric Balance Valves (ATM-V) Number of RV and LSV is 7 or less Type2: Up to 15 Selectable from 12 RV, 2 LSV, 4 ATM-V Number of RV and LSV is 12 or less Type3: Up to 21 Selectable from 15 RV, 3 LSV, 6 ATM-V Number of RV and LSV is 15 or less Type 4: Up to 7 Selectable from 5 RV, 1 LSV, 2 ATM-V Number of RV and LSV is 5 or less Note: RVs are not available as Liquid-sample Valve, for ATEX, IECEx and NEPSI applications. Material of sample-contact parts: RV: 316SS, Hastelloy-C, Rulon, PTFE (Teflon, Bearee) LSV: 316SS, Hastelloy-C, Rulon, Glass, PTFE (Teflon, Bearee), Fluororubber (Viton), perfloroelastomer (Kalrez) Sampling connection: 6 mm or 1/4″ tube (including calibration standard sample streams) Maximum of 6 streams (up to 2 for each isothermal oven) Note: Only one Liquid-sample Valve can be mounted in each isothermal oven. Repeatability: Depends on analysis conditions Gas sample: ±1% of full scale for measuring ranges (2σ) Liquid sample: ±2% of full scale for measuring ranges (2σ) Ambient condition during operation: Depends on analysis conditions –10 to 50°C, 95%RH or less (no condensation) Ambient condition during storage: –40 to 85°C, no condensation Installation location: Maximum altitude of 2000 m Avoid exposure to wind, rain, sunlight Safty standard, EMC standard: See next table IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.C  Ex Certification MS code TIIS GC8000-T GC8000-T /KC *2 ATEX *1 GC8000-A IECEx *2 GC8000-E NEPSI *3 GC8000-P FM GC8000-F GC8000-G CSA *1: *2: *3: Safety Standard - EN 61010-1 EN 61010-2-030 FM 3810: 2005 (ANSI/ISA 61010-1-2004 (82.02.01), ANSI/ISA-82.02.02-1996 (IEC 61010-2-031)) GC8000-C CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1-04 GC8000-D *2: *3: Analyzer base sampling unit (GCSMP) or base placed under GC8000-A is not covered by the EUDoC nor the EC Type-examination Certificate. The empty compartment (base) placed by Yokogawa to create a Self-standing GC8000-A, does not impair the compliance of the GC8000-A. TIIS: Tecnology Institution of Industrial Safety NEPSI: National Supervision and Inspection Centre for Explosion Protection and Safety of Instrumentation Protection degree of enclosure: NEMA3R, Equivalent to IP54 (dust and water resistant structure) Display: LCD (or without display) and LED (POWER/ALARM/RUN) Operating display unit: Touch panel (or without operating display unit) Coating: Polyurethane baked finish Main body: Silver gray (Munsell 3.2PB 7.4/1.2 or its equivalent) Gauge: Mint green (Munsell 5.6BG 3.3/2.9 or its equivalent) Weight: Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 EMC standard EN 61326-1 Class A, Table 2 Influence of immunity environment (Criteria A): Chromatogram ±1 mV EN 61326-2-3 Korea Electromagnetic Conformity Standard RCM Mark - Analyzer base sampling unit (GCSMP) or base placed under GC8000-A is not covered by the EU-DoC nor the EC Typeexamination Certificate. The empty compartment (base) placed by Yokogawa to create a Self-standing GC8000-A, does not impair the compliance of the GC8000-A. The design is based on the safety and EMC standard, though the mark of CE, KC and RCM are not indicated. The design is based on the safety and EMC standard, though the mark of CE is not indicated. Type of protection: Pressurized enclosure and flameproof enclosure Certification standard: FM, CSA, ATEX (DEKRA), IECEx (DEKRA), TIIS, NEPSI FM/CSA: Type X Purging and Explosionproof for Class I, Division 1,Groups B, C and D. T1 to T4 (Described as FM-X, CSA-X hereafter) Type X and Y Pressurization for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D. T1 to T4 (Described as FM-Y, CSA-Y hereafter) ATEX *1: II2G Ex d px IIB+H2 T1...T4 Gb IECEx: Ex d px IIB+H2 T1...T4 Gb TIIS *2: Ex pd IIB+H2 T1~T4 NEPSI *3: Ex d px IIB+H2 T1~T4 Gb *1: App.C-2 Wall-mounting version Self-standing version approx. 100 kg approx. 140 kg approx. 155 kg approx. 190 kg approx. 200 kg approx. 220 kg approx. 140 kg approx. 170 kg Other functions: • A real-time clock with back-up batteries is mounted in the control unit (except for the TIIS specification). • Data storage The GC8000 can save 1 week of chromatogram data, any chromatogram data (up to 20 per GCM) 30 days of analysis results, and 100 calibration factors. The number of saved data depends on analysis conditions. Saved data can be read and displayed on both the HMI and the PC. • The GC8000 has a function for limiting the supply of hydrogen when the FID/FPD flame is extinguished. 2. Element Specifications 2.1 Isothermal Oven Volume: Large isothermal oven: Approximately 45 L Standard isothermal oven: Approximately 31 L Oven temperature range: 55 to 225°C (Temperature can be set in one-degree step.) Temperature stability: ±0.03°C * Temperature control: PID Temperature sensor: Pt100 Ω RTD Other functions: Over-heating prevention function 2.2 Programmed Temperature Oven Volume: Approximately 11 L Temperature setting method: Constant or programmed Oven temperature range: With cooler: 5 to 320°C Without cooler: 60 to 320°C Heating rate: 1 to 30°C/min (Temperature can be set in one-degree step.) Heating program number: Up to 3 Temperature stability: ±0.03°C at a control point in the steady state. * Stability to ambient temperature: ±0.1°C/10°C * Stability to supply voltage variation: ±0.03°C/10% * IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  Temperature control: PID Temperature sensor: Pt100 Ω RTD Other functions: Over-heating prevention function 2.3 Liquid-sample Valve with Vaporizer Sample pressure: 0 to 3 MPa Sample temperature: 150°C or lower Sample volume: 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, and 3 μL Vaporizing section: LSV temperature range: Oven temperature +5 to 250°C Temperature stability: ±1°C * Temperature control: PID Temperature sensor: Pt100 Ω RTD Other functions: Over-heating prevention function *: Reference value 3. Utility 3.1 Power Power supply: Type 1, 2, 3: 100/110/115/120/200/220/230/240 V AC ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±5% Type 4: 200/220/230/240 V AC ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±5% Note: Depends on analysis conditions. Protection devices, such as a breaker, are required to avoid overcurrent. Wiring method: FM/CSA: Conduit wiring (3/4NPT(F)) ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI: Cable packing (G3/4(F), 3/4NPT(F), M25x1.5(F)) TIIS: Cable packing (G3/4(F), 3/4NPT(F)) Note: Cable packing for TIIS is provided by Yokogawa. Other conduit wiring or cable packing should be prepared by the user. Wiring connection: FM-X, CSA-X, ATEX, IECEx, TIIS, NEPSI: Explosion proof enclosure FM-Y, CSA-Y: Control unit Maximum rated power: Type 1: 0.8 to 1.6 kVA Type 2: 1.4 to 2.9 kVA Type 3: 2.0 to 4.3 kVA Type 4: 1.8 to 3.7 kVA 3.2 Utility gas Note: It may vary depending on application. 3.2.1 Instrument air Pressure: 350 to 900 kPa 500 to 900 kPa (with FPD) 350 to 900 kPa (Programmed temperature oven without cooler) 500 to 900 kPa (Programmed temperature oven with cooler) Maximum flowrate: Type 1: 140 L/min Type1 with FPD: 440 L/min Type 2: 210 L/min Type2 with FPD: 510 L/min Type 3: 280 L/min Type 4: Depend on the specification App.C-3 210 L/min or more (Without cooler and immediate cooling function) 600 L/min or more (Without cooler with immediate cooling function) 510 L/min or more (With cooler without immediate cooling function) 510 L/min or more (With cooler and immediate cooling function) Temperature: –10 to 50°C Dew point: –20°C or lower (condensation of compressed air must be avoided at the ambient temperature.) Oil: 5 ppm or less Cleanliness: Must be free from dust, corrosive elements, and toxic elements. Connection: Type 1, 2, 3: Rc1/4 or 1/4NPT (F) Type 4: Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT (F) 3.2.2 Carrier gas, combustion gas for FID/FPD, make-up gas for FID/FPD Types: H2, N2, He, or Ar Purity: Measuring range from 0 to 50 ppm or more: 99.99% minimum (water: 10 ppm or less, organic components: 5 ppm or less) Measuring range from 0 to less than 50 ppm: 99.999% minimum (water: 5 ppm or less, organic components: 0.1 ppm or less) Pressure: H2: 500 ±20 kPa (72.5 ±2.9 psi) (Must be supplied at this pressure to meet the explosion-proof certification.) Other than H2: 400 to 700 kPa Consumption: 60 to 300 mL/min per isothermal oven Connection: 6 mm or 1/4″ tube 3.2.3 Combustion air for FID/FPD: Purity: Measuring range from 0 to 50 ppm or more: water: 10 ppm or less, organic components: 5 ppm or less Measuring range from 0 to less than 50 ppm: water: 5 ppm or less, organic components: 0.1 ppm or less Pressure: 400 to 700 kPa Consumption: Approximately 300 mL/min per detector Connection: 6 mm or 1/4″ tube 4. Input and Output Specifications Wiring method: FM, CSA: Conduit wiring (3/4NPT(F)) ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI: Cable packing (G3/4(F), 3/4NPT(F), M25x1.5(F)) TIIS: Cable packing (G3/4(F), 3/4NPT(F)), Sealing fitting (only for Ethernet cable) Note: Cable packing for TIIS is provided by Yokogawa. Other conduit wiring or cable packing should be prepared by the user. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.C  Wiring connection: FM-X, CSA-X, ATEX, IECEx, TIIS, NEPSI: Contact outputs for System Alarm 1, Annunciator: Explosion proof enclosure Other I/Os: Control unit FM-Y, CSA-Y: All I/Os: Control unit 4.1 Communication 4.1.1 Connection to Analyzer network Included as standard. Communication standard: Ethernet Connection type: IEEE802.3U 100Base-TX (RJ-45 shielded twisted pair cable) or 100Base-FX (SC fiberoptics cable) Channel: 1 or 2 Protocol: TCP/IP, FTP Data to be transmitted: Analysis results, calibration factors, alarms, status, and chromatogram Data to be received: Operation requests (stream sequence setting, stream setting, run, stop, pause, and range change) Device to be connected: PCAS, ASET, ASGW, GC8000 (LCD), OPC through FCN/FCJ, and GCVT through PCAS External I/O Cutoff Output: Number of outputs: 2 Function: Monitoring the purge air pressure in the electronics section, applying power (24 V DC) to the signal interrupter when the state is normal. Signal interrupter (Rack-mounted type: K9806AA, Desktop type:K9806AB): FM-X, CSA-X, ATEX, IECEx, TIIS, NEPSI: Additionally required (only with twisted pair cables). Signal is interrupted by power supply OFF signals from the external I/O cutoff output. FM-Y, CSA-Y: Not required Note: For installation in hazardous area, an explosionproof structure authenticated by a relevant certified body shall be prepared by customer. 4.1.2 Connection to DCS Both Ethernet and Serial communication are available. (1) Ethernet communication The same port as analyzer network is used. Refer to 4.1.1 Connection to Analyzer network. Communication standard: Ethernet Protocol: Modbus/TCP Communication speed: 100Mbps Number of DCS connections: Maximum of 4 (2) Serial communication (Option) Channnel: 1 or 2 Communication standard: RS-422 Transmission: Full duplex (4-wire system) App.C-4 Protocol: Modbus, Y-Protocol (GC1000/GC8, GC6 and BTU for Japan) Note: Concurrent usage of Y-Protocol is not available. Start-stop (asynchronous) communication: Start bit 1, Data bits 7 (ASCII)/Data bits 8 (RTU), Parity bit 1, Stop bit 1 Parity check: Odd/even/none Communication speed: 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400 bps Transmission mode: ASCII or RTU Note: Only the ASCII format is used in the Y-Protocol. Communication control: None/handshake Data to be transmitted: Analysis results, calibration factors, and alarms Data to be received: Operation requests (stream sequence setting, stream setting, run, stop, pause, and range change) External I/O Cutoff Output: Number of outputs: 1 or 2 Function: Monitoring the purge air pressure in the electronics section, applying power (24 V DC) to the signal interrupter/the communication converter when the state is normal. Signal interrupter (Rack-mounted type: K9806AE): FM-X, CSA-X, ATEX, IECEx, TIIS, NEPSI: Additionally required. RS-422 is outputed signal is interrupted by power supply OFF signals from the external I/O cutoff output. FM-Y, CSA-Y: Not required Note: For installation in hazardous area, an explosionproof structure authenticated by a relevant certified body shall be prepared by customer. Communication converter (Rack-mounted type: K9806AS, Desktop type: K9806AT): RS-422/232C communication converter with signal interrupter function. Signal is interrupted by power supply OFF signals from the external I/O cutoff output. Note: Two units are required for 2 channel communication. Note: For installation in hazardous area, an explosionproof structure authenticated by a relevant certified body shall be prepared by customer. 4.1.3 Connection to GCCU MarkII (GC Computing Unit) Both Ethernet and Serial communication are available. Note: Applicable only to 1GCM Note: Analog hold output in the analog output function cannot coexist with the GCCU communication. (1) Ethernet communication The same port as analyzer network is used. Refer to 4.1.1 Connection to Analyzer network. Communication standard: Ethernet IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  Protocol: Modbus over TCP Communication speed: 100Mbps (2) Serial communication (Option) Channel: 1 Communication standard: RS-422 Transmission: Full duplex (4-wire system) Protocol: Modbus Start-stop (asynchronous) communication: Start bit 1, Data bits 7, Parity bit 1, Stop bit 1 Parity check: Even Communication speed: 9600 bps Data format: ASCII Communication control: None Terminal: Terminal connection (Phoenix terminal) External I/O Cutoff Output: Number of outputs: 1 Function: Monitoring the purge air pressure in the electronics section, applying power (24 V DC) to the communication converter when the state is normal. Communication converter (Rack-mounted type: K9806AS, Desktop type: K9806AT): RS-422/232C communication converter with signal interrupter function. Signal is interrupted by power supply OFF signals from the external I/O cutoff output. Note: For installation in hazardous area, an explosionproof structure authenticated by a relevant certified body shall be prepared by customer. 4.2 Input/Output System alarm 1 and Annunciator are provided as standard contact outputs. Other Input/Output can be added depending on specifications. Note: Up to 5 optional cards are selectable. Note: The maximum number of the contact inputs is 32 and outputs is 20, with any combination of contact input cards, contact output cards, and contact I/O cards. 4.2.1 App.C-5 Contact Output for System Alarm 1 Number of contact outputs: 1 Function: Activated when Level 1 alarm occurs. Contact specification: Relay contact output, c-contact (NC/ NO/COM) Contact rating: 30 V DC, 100 mA Contact operation: Open/Close Contact System alarm Between NC and Between NO and COM terminals COM terminals Activated Open Not activated Close Close Open Power supply: OFF Open Close 4.2.2 Contact Output for Annunciator Number of contact outputs: 1 Function: Outputting the state of the purge air pressure in the isothermal oven and the electronics section (State 1 or State 2) State 1: Outputting the states of override mode ON, power supply of the analyzer OFF, purging, or insufficient pressure State 2: Outputting the state after the purge Contact specification: Relay contact output, c-contact (NC/ NO/COM) Contact rating: 30 V DC, 100 mA Contact operation: Open/Close Contact 4.2.3 Annunciator Output Between NC and Between NO and COM terminals COM terminals State 1 Open State 2 Close Close Open Power supply: OFF Open Close Analog Output (Option, Up to 4 cards) Number of outputs: 8 per card, maximum of 32 Signal type: 4 to 20 mA DC Isolation: Channel isolation, system isolation (selectable) Load: 300 Ω or less Output Types: Analysis results (analog hold output)/ Chromatogram output The maximum number of outputs is 32 analog hold outputs, and 8 chromatogram outputs even in multianalog output card. Note: The analog hold output cannot coexist with GCCU communication (but the chromatogram output can coexist with GCCU communication). Output range: Any setting is possible within the measuring range. Auto gain can be set for chromatogram output. 4.2.4 Analog Input (Option, Up to 4 cards) Number of inputs: 4 per card, maximum of 16 Signal types: 1 to 5 V DC, 4 to 20 mA DC Input signal range: 0.6 to 5.4 V DC, 2.4 to 21.6 mA DC Note: This value shows effective conversion range. Max. Rating of transient overvoltage: ±100 V Isolation: Channel isolation Accuracy: ±0.5% of full scale (–10 to 50°C) Input types: Analysis results (e.g. other analyzers), temperature (e.g. ambient temperature), pressure, etc. Function: The following values can be output by Modbus protocol in the DCS communication after computing input values. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.C  Average value: The one-second average of analog values measured at every 200 msec and filtered by a predetermined constant Current value: The value at the time set in a cycle time External I/O Cutoff Output: Number of outputs: 1 Function: Monitoring the purge air pressure in the electronics section, applying power (24 V DC) to the signal interrupter when the state is normal. Signal interrupter (Rack-mounted type: K9806AE): FM-X, CSA-X, ATEX, IECEx, TIIS, NEPSI: Additionally required. Signal is interrupted by power supply OFF signals from the external I/O cutoff output. FM-Y, CSA-Y: Not required Note: For installation in hazardous area, an explosionproof structure authenticated by a relevant certified body shall be prepared by customer. The same number unit of the signal interrupter as input card is required. 4.2.5 Contact Output (Option, Up to 4 cards) Number of contacts: 5 per card, maximum of 20 Function: The following settings are possible at each contact point. Stream sequence: Outputs when the specified stream sequence is operated. Stream: Outputs when the specified stream is operated. Operation mode: Outputs when the specified operation mode is operated. Alarm: System alarm: Outputs when the system alarm occurs. Composition Alarm: Outputs when the concentration alarm or the retention time alarm occurs. Timing: Outputs at the time to be set. Calibration/Validation: Outputs when the specified calibration or validation is operated. Stream valve selection: Output for the external sampling equipment, up to 31. Stream identifying: Output for the analog hold output, up to 5 points per 1 GCM (5 bits, up to 31 streams) Contact specifications: SSR or Relay contact output, c-contact (NO, NC, COM) App.C-6 Contact rating: SSR contact output: 100 to 240 V AC, max. 2 A (Load), Relay contact output: 24 V DC, max. 2A (Load) Contact operation: ON/OFF operation Contact state: Selectable from Open or Close on operation (Open when power supply is turned off.) External I/O Cutoff Output: Number of outputs: 1 Function: Monitoring the purge air pressure in the electronics section, applying power (24 V DC) to the signal interrupter when the state is normal. Signal interrupter (Rack-mounted type, AC: K9806AN, DC:K9806AJ): FM-X, CSA-X, ATEX, IECEx, TIIS, NEPSI: Additionally required. Signal is interrupted by power supply OFF signals from the external I/O cutoff output. FM-Y, CSA-Y: Not required Note: For installation in hazardous area, an explosionproof structure authenticated by a relevant certified body shall be prepared by customer. The same number unit of the signal interrupter as contact output card is required. 4.2.6 Contact Input (Option, Up to 4 cards) 4.2.7 Contact Input/Output (Option, Up to 4 cards) Number of contacts: 8 per card, maximum of 32 Function: The following settings are possible at each contact point. Alarm: Occurrence of external contact alarm (level 2 or 3) Stream sequence: Performing the specified stream sequence Stream (continuous): Measuring the specified stream continuously Stream (once): Measuring the specified stream one time Calibration/Validation: Calibrating or validating the specified stream Operation mode: Changing the operation mode (run, pause, stop) Range change: Changing the stream and peak ranges Contact specifications: Zero voltage contact input Contact rating: 5 V DC, 20 mA or more Input signal: Open signal: Input load 100 kΩ or more Close signal: Input load 200 Ω or less Operation on input: NC or NO (selectable) Number of contacts: 3 for input and 3 for output per card, maximum of 12 for input and output each Function, Contact specification, Contact rating, Operation specification: IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  Contact output: The same functions as in “4.2.5 Contact Output” Contact input: The same functions as in “4.2.6 Contact Input” External I/O Cutoff Output: Number of outputs: 1 Function: Monitoring the purge air pressure in the electronics section, applying power (24 V DC) to the signal interrupter when the state is normal. Signal interrupter (Rack-mounted type, AC:K9806AN, DC:K9806AJ): FM-X, CSA-X, ATEX, IECEx, TIIS, NEPSI: Additionally required. Signal is interrupted by power supply OFF signals from the external I/O cutoff output (contact output only). FM-Y, CSA-Y: Not required Note: For installation in hazardous area, an explosionproof structure authenticated by a relevant certified body shall be prepared by customer. The same number unit of the signal interrupter as contact output card is required. 4.3 Air output Atmospheric balance valve: Number of points: Maximum of 6 (1 for a GCM, up to 2 for an isothermal oven) Pressure: 350 kPa Connection: 6 mm or 1/4″ tube, the pressure control section of the oven unit Stream switching valve: Up to eight automatic valve streams: Number of points: Maximum of 8 points Pressure: 350 kPa Output method: 1 to 1 output Nine or more automatic valve streams (Note: Applicable only to 1GCM): Number of points: 4 points (4 bits, 1 to 15 streams) or 5 points (5 bits, 16 to 31 streams) Pressure: 350 kPa Output method: Binary code output Connection: 6 mm or 1/4″ tube, the pressure control section of the oven unit 4.4 User Programming (Option, Up to 1 unit) The following functions can be set: • Calculation of analysis results • Changing operation mode • ON/OFF operation of DO • Reading states of DI, AI App.C-7 5. Communication converter/Signal interrupter Weight: Approximately 500g Installation location: Non hazardous area (For installation in hazardous area, an explosionproof structure authenticated by a relevant certified body shall be prepared by customer.) Ambient condition during operation: -10 to 50°C, 95 % RH or less (no condensation) Ambient condition during storage: -40 to 85°C, no condensation Safty standard: EN 61010-1 CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1-04 UL Std. No.61010-1 EMC standard: EN 61326-1 Class A, Table 2 (For use in industrial locations) Korea Electromagnetic Conformity Standard RCM (C-Tick) Mark 5.1 Communication converter • RS-422/RS-232C converter: (Rack-mounted type: K9806AS, Desktop type: K9806AT) Number of port: 1 Communication speed: maximum of 38400bps Power supply: 24 V DC (Supplied from External I/O Cutoff Output of Serial communication card in GC8000) Earth: Functional earth Other function: Signal interrupter function 5.2 Signal interrupter • For Ethernet twisted pair cables: (Rack-mounted type: K9806AA, Desktop type: K9806AB) Number of port: 2 Communication speed: maximum of 100Mbps Power supply: 24 V DC (Supplied from External I/O Cutoff Output of CPU board in GC8000) Earth: Functional earth • For RS-422 output: K9806AE • For analog input: K9806AE Number of port: 2 Communication speed: maximum of 38400bps Power supply: 24 V DC (Supplied from External I/O Cutoff Output of Serial communication card in GC8000) Earth: Functional earth Number of input: 4 Input current: 4 to 20 mA DC Input voltage: 1 to 5 V DC Power supply: 24 V DC (Supplied from External I/O Cutoff Output of Analog input card in GC8000) Earth: Functional earth IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.C  • For contact output (AC): K9806AN • For contact output (DC): K9806AJ App.C-8 Number of output: 5 Rated input: 240 V AC, 2A DC Power supply: 24 V DC (Supplied from External I/O Cutoff Output of Contact output card in GC8000) Earth: Protective earth Number of output: 5 Rated input: 30 V DC, 2A DC Power supply: 24 V DC (Supplied from External I/O Cutoff Output of Contact output card in GC8000) Earth: Functional earth n GENERAL A Process Gas Chromatograph analyzes a vapor or volatile liquid sample and then separates the various chemical components in the sample for individual detection and measurement. The discrete separation and positive identification of components and measurement of the composition enables the process gas chromatograph to be one of the few analyzer types available that minimizes the likelihood of cross interference during measurement. It also allows the analyzer to measure multiple chemical compounds during each analysis to levels that reach parts-permillion and even parts-per-billion levels. These performance characteristics are what have made the process gas chromatograph the workhorse of the on-line chemical analysis industry. n FEATURES n High-speed analysis with multi-oven structure The multi-oven and multi-detector structure with simultaneous analysis settings enables each component to be measured under optimal conditions. This feature reduces the analysis time and allows configurations to be tailored to the customers’ needs. n Improved operation with a large touch panel A 12.1-inch color LCD touch panel mounted on the operating display unit of the main body offers enhanced visibility and interface. The screen displays of the main body and the PC are kept consistent to achieve intuitive, easy operations and quick acquisition of various information. n High reliability Since first releasing gas chromatographs in 1959, Yokogawa has developed a reputation of dependable performance among customers. The GC8000, with its main parts such as detectors and valves embodying our long experience and know-how, delivers outstanding reliability. Furthermore, many of the serviceable parts are compatible with those used in previous GC models. n Improved functionality The GC8000 offers improved functionality with the following functions: Reanalysis of chromatograms: This function analyzes and verifies the chromatogram data saved in the PC, to ensure the data is reliable. Data converting to the EZChrom software: This function shares data with the customer’s other analyzers, for consistent management of various analysis results and securing traceability. User programming: This function can be tailored to the customer’s exact requirements, such as a customized reports or sophisticated analysis routines. n EXAMPLE OF APPLICATIONS IN INDUSTRIES The gas chromatograph can be used for monitoring and quality control in the following industries and applications. l Petrochemicals: ethylene, polypropylene, polyethylene, BTX, butadiene, vinyl chloride, styrene, alcohol, aldehyde, ester, and vinyl acetate l Petroleum refining: distillation point analysis, PINA/PIONA analysis, FCC, sulfur recovery l Chemistry: chlorides, fluorine compounds, formalin, methanol, urea, ammonia, phenol l Electric power/gas: fuel gas, exhaust gases, coal gasification/liquefaction, fuel cell l Iron and steel: blast furnace, coke oven l Air plant: organic/inorganic gas analyses l Chemicals: chemicals, agricultural chemicals l Environmental monitoring: air/soil pollution monitoring, plant/work environmental analyses, analyses (VOC) The GC8000 can also be used for many other applications. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.D-1 Appendix D Action of External Input and Output Signals n Analog output There are two types of analog output. The maximum number of outputs depends on the type of outputs. Analog hold output Output of analysis results Up to 32 outputs (8 per card) The output range can be arbitrarily set within the measurement range. Note: cannot coexist with GCCU-MarkII (serial) communication. Chromatogram output Output of chromatograms Up to 8 outputs The same detector number can be assigned to multiple A/Os. The auto gain and auto zero can be set for each detector. Note: can coexist with GCCU-MarkII (serial) communication. (1) Analog Hold Output This is a function to output analysis results as A/O. The A/O range can be arbitrarily set within the measurement range in the individual peak setting by using partial settings. Some partial settings of the measurement range and A/O values are shown in Table 1. Table 1 A/O value Individual peak setting A/O range Concentration Concentration Current Voltage Current Voltage Stream Measurement (ppm) Partial setting (ppm) (mA) (V) (mA) (V) - peak range (ppm) 1.000 1000.000 20 5 #1-#1 1000 800.000 16.8 4.2 0.000 0.000 4 1 0.800 900.000 20 5 #2-#1 1000 800.000 14.7 3.7 0.500 600.000 4 1 * Voltage of 1 to 5 V is converted from electric current of 4 to 20 mA using a 250-ohm shunt resistor. In setting the analog hold output, the number of output analysis values and output actions are different when an actual stream is set and when “99” is set for the output stream number. Actions of contact output are different whether a contact output is used or not as a stream identification signal. Analog hold output When an actual stream number is set for the output stream number, up to 2 analysis values (different streams) are output. When “99” is set for the output stream number, an analysis value is output for every stream that belongs to the GCM. Without a stream identification signal With a stream identification signal With a stream identification signal (No other option) A stream identification signal is a binary-coded stream number which is encoded by turning on and off multiple contact outputs. To use the stream identification signal as a stream identification flag, which informs upper systems of the update of A/O, as many D/Os as the streams are required to be initially prepared. For calibration (or validation) streams, the stream identification signal output is initially set to “Exist” or “None.” It is set to “Exist” at shipment unless otherwise specified. • Output exists for calibration (or validation) • No output for calibration (or validation): IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.D  App.D-2 Holds the stream identification signal of the latest measured stream other than calibration or validation. Actions of analog output and contact output are described in (2) through (4) below. For actions of contact output other than stream identification signals, see the Contact Output. l When Actual Stream is Set for Output Stream Number (without Stream Identification Signal) Select Normal output for the AO chromatogram on the A/O setting screen to open the analog hold output (analysis result output) setting screen (Figure 1). Specify the GCM number, output stream number, peak number, and the upper and lower limits of the partial range for the peak of which analysis results are to be output. When an actual stream number is set for the output stream number, up to 2 analysis values of different streams are output. Set the stream identification signal output to “None” for each GCM (Figure 2). 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 A/O Setup (1/2) Slot # 1 AO # 1 > - GCM number 1 - AO Chromatogram Normal output - #1 Output stream 1 (STR1) #1 Output peak 1 (H2) - #1 Percent span offset 1.000 - #1 Percent zero offset 0.000 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 A/O Setup Slot # 1 AO # 1 > - #2 Output stream 2 (STR2) #2 Output peak 1 (H2) - #2 Percent span offset 0.900 - #2 Percent zero offset 0.600 (2/2) Menu Status Slot# AO# Menu Status Slot# AO# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 1 Analog Hold Output: Example of Actual Streams to be set for output stream number (A/O Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD) 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 GCM Setup (2/2) GCM # 1 > - ATM valve number 1-1 Strm identifying None - 1st num StrIdentify DO Slot #5 -#1 - 1st num StrValve 1 - Stream valve num 4 - Distillation None Menu GCM# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 2 Stream Identification Signal Output: None (GCM Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD) Table 2 shows an example of analog output settings. Figure 3 illustrates respective actions. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.D-3 Table 2 A/O1 A/O2 A/O3 A/O4 A/O5 A/O6 A/O7 A/O8 Example of Analog Output Settings Output stream #1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 Stream 1 End of Analysis *1 Output peak #1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Output stream #2 None None None None None None None None Stream 2 End of Analysis *1 Output peak #2 None None None None None None None None Stream 1 End of Analysis *1 Stream 2 End of Analysis *1 AO1 AO2 Analog Hold Output AO3 AO4 AO5 AO6 AO7 AO8 End of Analysis: Time when the final peak detection is completed or peak detection stop time. *1: One to two seconds (depending on analysis specifications) App.D F0501.ai End of Analysis: End of peak detection time in SYS method *1: One to two seconds (depending on analysis specifications) Figure 3 Example of Actions of Analog Output l When Actual Stream is Set for Output Stream Number (with Stream Identification Signal) Select Normal output for the AO chromatogram on the A/O setting screen to open the analog hold output (analysis result output) setting screen (Figure 1). Specify the GCM number, output stream number, peak number, and the upper and lower limits of the partial range for the peak of which analysis results are to be output. Table 3 and Figure 4 show the settings for one GCM with six streams where a stream identification signal is used. Table 4 and Figure 5 show the settings for two GCMs with three streams each where a stream identification signal is used. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.D-4 Table 3 Example of Stream Identification Signal Settings for One GCM with Six Streams GCM1 SLOT4 D/O1 D/O2 D/O3 D/O4 Stream valve number * * * GCM1 Stream 1 Stream 2 Stream 3 Stream 4 Stream 5 Stream 6 STR1 STR2 VAL1 VAL2 CAL1 CAL2 Measurement Measurement Validation Validation Calibration Calibration Stream Stream Stream Stream Stream Stream identification identification identification identification identification identification flag flag flag flag flag flag 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 3 4 Select Up to 7 streams and Starting D/O number for stream identification: 4-1 for GCM1. Use one D/O card (5 ch). The starting stream valve number and number of stream valves of GCM1 are “1” and “6,” respectively. The above settings are for the case where output exists for calibration (or validation) streams. In the case where output dose not exists for calibration (or validation), the stream identification signal of the latest measured stream other than calibration or validation streams is held. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 GCM Setup (2/2) GCM # 1 > - ATM valve number 1-1 Strm identifying Up to 7 streams - 1st num StrIdentify DO Slot #4 -#1 - 1st num StrValve 1 - Stream valve num 6 - Distillation None Menu GCM# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 4 Stream Identification Signal Output: Exist (GCM Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD) Table 4 Example of Stream Identification Signal Settings for Two GCMs with Three Streams Each GCM1 SLOT4 D/O1 D/O2 D/O3 D/O4 GCM2 SLOT5 D/O1 D/O2 D/O3 D/O4 Stream valve number * * * * * GCM1 GCM2 Stream 1 Stream 2 Stream 3 Stream 4 Stream 5 Stream 6 STR1 VAL1 CAL1 STR2 VAL2 CAL2 Measurement Validation Calibration Measurement Validation Calibration Stream Stream Stream identification identification identification flag flag flag 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 Stream Stream Stream identification identification identification flag flag flag 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 4 5 5 Select Up to 7 streams and Starting D/O number for stream identification: 4-1 for GCM1. Use one D/O card (5 ch). Select Up to 7 streams and Starting D/O number for stream identification: 5-1 for GCM2. Use one D/O card (5 ch). The starting stream valve number and number of stream valves of GCM1 are “1” and “3,” respectively. The starting stream valve number and number of stream valves of GCM2 are “4” and “3,” respectively. The above settings are for the case where output exists for calibration (or validation). In the case where output does not exist for calibration (or validation), the stream identification signal of the most recently measured stream other than calibration or validation is held. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.D-5 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 GCM Setup (2/2) GCM # 1 > - ATM valve number 1-1 Strm identifying Up to 7 streams - 1st num StrIdentify DO Slot #4 -#1 - 1st num StrValve 1 - Stream valve num 3 - Distillation None 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 GCM Setup (2/2) GCM # 1 > - ATM valve number 1-2 Strm identifying Up to 7 streams - 1st num StrIdentify DO Slot #5 -#1 - 1st num StrValve 4 - Stream valve num 3 - Distillation None Menu GCM# Menu F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Figure 5 Stream Identification Signal Output: Exist (GCM Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD) GCM# F6 Table 5 shows an example of analog output settings. Figure 6 illustrates respective actions. Table 5 A/O1 A/O2 A/O3 A/O4 Example of Analog Output Settings Output stream #1 1 1 1 1 Stream 1 End of Analysis *1 4s Output peak #1 1 2 3 4 Output stream #2 2 2 2 2 Stream 2 End of Analysis 2s *1 4s Output peak #2 1 2 3 4 Stream 1 End of Analysis 2s *1 4s Stream 2 End of Analysis 2s *1 4s 2s Analog Hold Output AO1 App.D AO2 AO3 AO4 Contact Output DO3 (Stream identification flag) DO4 (Stream identification signal) DO5 (Stream identification signal) End of Analysis: Time when the final peak detection is completed or peak detection stop time. *1: One to two seconds (depending on analysis specifications) F0502.ai End of Analysis: End of peak detection time in SYS method *1: One to two seconds (depending on analysis specifications) Figure 6 Example of Actions of Analog Output IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.D-6 l When “99” is Set for Output Stream Number (with Stream Identification Signal) Select Normal output for the AO chromatogram on the A/O setting screen to open the analog hold output (analysis result output) setting screen (Figure 5.37). To output an analysis value for all the streams that belong to the GCM, specify the GCM number and set the output stream number to “99.” Next, specify the peak number as well as the upper and lower limits of the partial range. The #2 output peak setting is invalid. When “99” is specified for the stream number, be sure to use contact output as a stream identification signal. For an example of settings in the case where a stream identification signal is used, see 6.1.3. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 A/O Setup (1/2) Slot # 1 AO # 1 > - GCM number 1 - AO Chromatogram Normal output - #1 Output stream 99 ( ) #1 Output peak 1 ( ) - #1 Percent span offset 1.000 - #1 Percent zero offset 0.000 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 A/O Setup (2/2) Slot # 1 AO # 1 > - #2 Output stream ** ( ) #2 Output peak ** ( ) - #2 Percent span offset 1.000 - #2 Percent zero offset 0.000 Menu Status Slot# AO# Menu Status Slot# AO# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 7 Analog Hold Output: Analysis Result of All the Streams that Belong to the GCM (A/O Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD) Table 6 and 7 show an example of analog output settings. Figure 8 illustrates respective actions. Table 6 Peak 1 Peak 2 Peak 3 Peak 4 Table 7 A/O1 A/O2 A/O3 A/O4 Conditions of Peaks for Streams Stream 1 Stream 2 Stream 3 Exist Exist Exist Exist None Exist Exist Exist None Exist None Exist Example of Analog Output Settings Output stream #1 99 99 99 99 Output peak #1 1 2 3 4 Output stream #2 None None None None Output peak #2 None None None None IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.D-7 Stream 1 End of Analysis *1 4s Stream 2 End of Analysis 2s *1 4s Stream 1 End of Analysis 2s *1 4s Stream 2 End of Analysis 2s *1 4s 2s Analog Hold Output AO1 AO2 AO3 AO4 Contact Output DO1 (Stream identification flag) DO2 (Stream identification signal) DO3 (Stream identification signal) End of Analysis: Time when the final peak detection is completed or peak detection stop time. *1: One to two seconds (depending on analysis specifications) F0503.ai End of Analysis: End of peak detection time in SYS method *1: One to two seconds (depending on analysis specifications) Figure 8 Example of Actions of Analog Output (2) Chromatogram Output This is a function to output chromatograms as A/O. Up to eight outputs are available. One detector number (DET1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 2-2, 3-1, or 3-2) is set for one A/O. The same detector number can be assigned to multiple A/Os. The auto gain and auto zero can be set for each detector. Settings are specified the detector signal setting screen and the individual peak setting screen. These settings relate not only to the display of A/O chromatograms but also to that of HMI and ASET chromatograms. l Data Display Cycle The A/O chromatogram data display cycle varies depending on the sample rate specified for the detector signal. Sample rate (ms) 40 80 160 * A/O chromatogram data display cycle (ms) 80 (A chromatogram data is extracted every 80 ms from the main unit.) 80 160 The HMI chromatogram data display cycle is the same as above. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.D  App.D-8 l Response Delay of Signal Height (mV) The signal height of A/O chromatograms is displayed with a response delay of approx. 70 % compared with HMI and ASET chromatograms. Table 8 Example of Response Delay of Signal Height of A/O Chromatograms Time (s) ASET chromatogram (mV) A/O chromatogram (mV) 0.08 0.000 0.16 0.500 (0.00–0.500) × 0.7+0.500 = 0.150 0.24 0.500 (0.500–0.500) × 0.7+0.500 = 0.500 0.32 1.000 (0.500–1.000) × 0.7+1.000 = 0.650 0.40 50.000 (1.000–50.000) × 0.7+50.000 = 15.700 0.48 100.000 (50.000–100.000) × 0.7+100.000 = 65.000 0.56 100.000 (100.000–100.000) × 0.7+100.000 = 100.000 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 A/O Setup Slot # 1 AO # 1 > - GCM number * - AO Chromatogram Det 1-1 - #1 Output stream ** #1 Output peak *** - #1 Percent span offset ***** - #1 Percent zero offset ***** (1/2) 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 A/O Setup Slot # 1 AO # 1 > - #2 Output stream ** #2 Output peak *** - #2 Percent span offset ***** - #2 Percent zero offset ***** Menu Status Slot# AO# Menu Status F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F1 F2 F3 Figure 9 Chromatogram Output (A/O Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD,) F4 (2/2) Slot# F5 AO# F6 l Auto Gain This is a function to change (enlarge or reduce) the display width of chromatogram signals according to gain values. The display width is calculated as follows. Type of chromatogram Display width of chromatogram signals HMI and ASET 1000.000 mV/2^[Gain] A/O 16 mA/2^[Gain] 4 V/2^[Gain] when a 250-ohm shunt resistor is used Example: Gain: 5 Display width of HMI and ASET chromatograms: 1000.000 mV / 2^5 = 31.250 mV Display width of A/O chromatograms: 16 mA / 2^5 = 0.5 mA 4 V / 2^5 = 0.125 V (Shunt resistance: 250 ohm) There are three types of auto gain function as listed below. The calculation method of the display width and the relevant types of chromatogram differ among them. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  Type None Individual gain Overall gain Display width of chromatogram signals The display width is fixed at 1000.000 mV. The display width is determined for each peak using the auto gain value specified for each individual peak. The display width is determined at once for all detectors using the overall gain value specified in the detector signal setting. App.D-9 Relevant chromatogram type — A/O chromatogram HMI chromatogram ASET chromatogram A/O chromatogram HMI chromatogram l Auto Zero This is a function to change the zero point of chromatogram signals according to the auto zero value. Type Automatic acquisition Auto zero value Invalid 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Display width of chromatogram signals The signal level automatically acquired at the auto zero time (s) specified in the detector signal setting is regarded as the zero value. The auto zero value specified for each individual peak in the detector signal setting is used. The zero value is fixed at 0.000 mV. Detector Setup Oven # 1 Det # 1 ( FID ) > - Filtering const 0.500 - Sample rate 40 ms - Square root calc req * * * * * - Flame detect level * * * * * - Sense set 4.0 mV - Sense set 10 times (1/2) Relevant chromatogram type A/O chromatogram HMI chromatogram A/O chromatogram HMI chromatogram — 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Detector Setup (2/2) Oven # 1 Det # 1 ( FID ) > - Auto gain setting Unexecuted - Full scale value 0 - Auto zero Off - Auto zero value 0.0000 mV - Auto zero time 0.0 s Menu Oven# Det# Menu Oven# Det# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 10 Auto Gain and Auto Zero Settings (Detector Signal Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD) 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Peak Setup-Specific (1/5) Stream #1 Peak #1 Using/Assigned peak num 1 / 10 > - Process (Type) Peak - Process (Detail) External 3rd - Name H2 - Execution Excuted - Synchronize to #01 #001 - Output flag Provided (31001) - Range number 0 - Auto gain value 4 Menu Copy1 Copy2 Strm# Peak# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 11 Auto Gain Value (Individual Peak Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.D  App.D-10 n Analog Input By using optional A/I cards (up to four cards, four inputs per card), up to 16 inputs can be output as A/O. A/I cards can acquire analog information from field instruments (process pressure gauges and flow meters) and analyzers, which can be calculated with the user program, a new function of the GC8000. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 Peak Setup-Specific (1/2) Peak Setup-Specific (2/2) 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Stream #1 Peak #1 Stream #1 Peak #1 AI signal 1 Using/Assigned peak num 8 / 10 > - 0% value 200.000 > - Process (Type) AI - 100% value 400.000 - Process (Detail) AI signal 1 - Action time 100.0 s - Name Pressure - SYS number 1 - Execution Excuted - Synchronize to #01 #001 - Output flag Provided (31001) - Range number 0 - Auto gain value 0 Menu Copy1 Copy2 Strm# Peak# Menu Copy1 Copy2 Strm# Peak# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 12 AI Processing (Individual Peak Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD) 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Multirange Setup Range # 1 > - Process (Type) AI - Process (Detail) AI signal 1 - 0% value 200.000 - 100% value 400.000 Menu Get Range# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 13 AI Processing (Multi-Range Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD) 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 A/I Setup Slot # 1 AI # 1 > - Signal name Pressure - Filter const 1.000 Menu Status Slot# AI# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 14 A/I Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.D-11 n Contact Output As for contact output, by using optional D/O cards (up to four cards, five outputs per card) and by using optional DI/O cards (up to four cards, three inputs and outputs per card), up to 20 outputs and up to 12 outputs can be output, respectively. Specify the settings on the D/O setting screen on the GC-HMI EtherLCD, and then verify the operation condition on the D/O condition screen on the GC-HMI EtherLCD. The following seven types can be specified for contact output. • Stream Sequence • Stream • Operation Mode • Alarm • Timing • Calibration/Validation • Stream Valve Switching l Stream Sequence The Stream Sequence function of D/O is a function to send out information that a preset stream sequence number is assigned to each GCM. When a stream number specified for a GCM on the D/O setting screen is activated, the contact output is turned on regardless of the mode (stop, pause, or run). Multiple stream sequence numbers can be set for one contact. Action in the case where the stream sequence number 1 of the GCM number 1 is set for the contact number 1 are described below. For example, Table 10 describes the action of D/O1 under the condition of stream sequence and calibration setting shown in Table 9. Table 9 Example of Stream Sequence Settings and Calibration Setting Stream sequence 1 Stream sequence 2 1st stream Stream 1 Stream 4 2nd stream Stream 2 Stream 5 Calibration Measurement Automatic stream frequency calibration number Calibration 1 Stream 7 2 Valid App.D 3rd stream Stream 3 Stream 6 Validation Measurement Validation Measurement stream frequency stream frequency number number after before calibration calibration 0 0 Stream 8 1 IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.D-12 Table 10 Actions of D/O1 Stop to Pause Stop to Run Run to Pause Run to Stop Run mode of stream sequence 1 to Run mode of stream sequence 2 Pause mode of stream sequence 1 to Stop mode of stream sequence 2 Stop mode of stream sequence 1 to Stop mode of stream sequence 2 Run mode of stream sequence 2 to Run mode of stream sequence 1 Pause mode of stream sequence 2 to Stop mode of stream sequence 1 Stop mode of stream sequence 2 to Stop mode of stream sequence 1 Run mode of stream sequence 1 to Run mode of stream specification 1 Pause mode of stream sequence 1 to Stop mode of stream specification 1 Stop mode of stream sequence 1 to Stop mode of stream specification 1 Run mode of stream sequence 1 to Calibration/ Validation Pause mode of stream sequence 1 to Calibration/ Validation Stop mode of stream sequence 1 to Calibration/ Validation In the status of stream sequence 1 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Always On for the specified stream sequence regardless of the mode Turned Off for stream sequences other than the specified stream sequence regardless of the mode Turned On for the specified stream sequence regardless of the mode Turned Off for stream sequences other than the specified stream sequence regardless of the mode Turned Off when analysis starts for the calibration/ validation stream Turned Off when the warming up time starts for the calibration/validation stream 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 D/O Setup (1/2) D/O Setup (2/2) 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Slot # 1 DO # 1 Slot # 1 DO # 1 > - Process assign Stream sequence > - Stream sequence 7 Off - GCM number 1 - Stream sequence 8 Off - Stream sequence 1 On - Stream sequence 2 Off - Stream sequence 3 Off - Stream sequence 4 Off - Stream sequence 5 Off - Stream sequence 6 Off Menu Status Slot# DO# Menu Status Slot# DO# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 15 Process Specification: Stream Sequence (D/O Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD) l Stream The Stream function of D/O is a function to send out information that a specified stream is in the run or pause mode. When a stream set on the D/O setting screen is in operation, the contact output is turned On regardless of the measurement status (stream sequence or stream specification). Actions in the case where the stream number 1 is specified for the contact number 1 are described below. For example, Table 11 describes the action of D/O1 under the condition of stream sequence and calibration setting shown in Table 9. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.D-13 Table 11 Stop to Pause In the status of stream sequence 1 or stream specification 1 Stop to Run Run to Pause Run to Stop Run mode of stream sequence 1* to Run mode of stream sequence 2 Pause mode of stream sequence 1* to Stop mode of stream sequence 2 Stop mode of stream sequence 1* to Stop mode of stream sequence 2 Run mode of stream sequence 2 to Run mode of stream sequence 1* Pause mode of stream sequence 2 to Stop mode of stream sequence 1* Stop mode of stream sequence 2 to Stop mode in the status of stream sequence 1* Run mode of stream sequence 1 to Run mode of stream specification 1 Pause mode of stream sequence 1 to Stop mode of stream specification 1 Stop mode of stream sequence 1 to Stop mode of stream specification 1 Run mode of stream sequence 1* to Calibration/ Validation Pause mode of stream sequence 1* to Calibration/ Validation Stop mode of stream sequence 1* to Calibration/ Validation * Turned On when the mode changes to the pause mode Turned On when the mode changes to the run mode Kept turned On Turned Off when the mode changes to the stop mode Turned Off when analysis starts for the stream 2 Turned Off when the mode changes to the stop mode of stream 2 Turned On when analysis starts for the stream 1 Kept turned Off Kept turned On Turned Off when the mode changes to the stop mode of stream 1 Kept turned Off Turned Off when analysis starts for the calibration/ validation stream Turned Off when analysis starts for the calibration/ validation stream Kept turned Off Same for the case of stream specification 1 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/O Setup Slot # 1 DO # 1 > - Process assign Stream - Stream 1 (GCM 1) App.D Menu Status Slot# DO# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 16 Process Specification: Stream (D/O Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD) Select Stream No. then shows GCM number, corresponding to the stream in stream setting screen. l Operation Mode The Operation Mode function of D/O is a function to send out information that the operation mode of each GCM is in the specified mode. The contact output is turned On in the operation mode set on the D/O setting screen. One among the following four types of operation mode is set for each contact point. • Run • Run (Warming up time) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.D-14 • Stop • Pause 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/O Setup Slot # 1 DO # 1 > - Process assign Operation mode - GCM number 1 - Operation mode Run Menu Status Slot# DO# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 17 Process Specification: Operation Mode (D/O Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD) l Alarm The Alarm function of D/O is a function to send out information that an alarm, which level is specified for all GCMs or each GCM, is activated. The contact output is turned On when an alarm of the level set on the D/O setting screen is generated. The contact output is turned Off when the alarm is cleared. To set an alarm for all GC hardware, specify “0” for the GCM number. To set an alarm for each GCM, specify the relevant GCM number. GCM number 0 is relevant to alarms that are common for all the GCMs. In case GCM number 9 is selected, all the alarms in any of 0 to 6 GCMs will triggers the DO. One or more of the following three types of alarm level can be set for each contact point. • Alarm level 1: No. 1 to 200 • Alarm level 2: No. 201 to 400 (including component alarm No. 291 to 294) • Component alarm No. 291 to 294 (part of Level 2 alarm) For the details of alarms, see 7.1. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/O Setup Slot # 1 DO # 1 > - Process assign Alarm - GCM number 1 - Alarm level 1 On - Alarm level 2 On - Composition Alarm On Menu Status Slot# DO# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 18 Process Specification: Alarm (D/O Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD) The Component alarm is a level 2 alarm that can be registered by users. An alarm is activated when a measurement of the peak specified for all streams or each stream exceeds the upper limit or falls below the lower limit. The alarm keeps going off until the measurement returns within the specified range. Up to 32 alarms can be set for each GCM. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.D-15 To cover the peak numbers of all streams, specify “99” for the stream number. To cover the peak numbers of each stream, specify the relevant stream number. The following four types of measurement (check items) can be set as a trigger of a Component alarm. One check item can be set for each contact. • Concentration • Retention time • Variation coefficient • Tailing factor 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Alarm Setup GCM # 1 Set # 1 > - Stream number 1 Peak number 1 - Check item Conc - Maximum 90.000 - Minimum 100.000 Menu GCM# Set# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 19 Alarm Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD l Timing The Timing function of D/O is a function to send information about the time of completion of peak detection to the upper systems. This is used in combination with analog hold output (analysis result output) that uses A/O. The contact output is turned On and Off at the time set for the D/O operating time in the SYS method. l Calibration/Validation The Calibration/Validation function of D/O is a function to send out information that a calibration or validation number set for each GCM is being executed. The contact output is turned On when the measurement status of the GCM set on the D/O setting screen is the status of the specified calibration or validation number. Multiple calibration or validation numbers can be set for one contact. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 D/O Setup (1/2) D/O Setup (2/2) 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Slot # 1 DO # 1 Slot # 1 DO # 1 > - Process assign Cal/Val > - Validation 1 On - GCM number 1 - Validation 2 On - Calibration 1 On - Validation 3 On - Calibration 2 On - Validation 4 On - Calibration 3 On - Validation 5 On - Calibration 4 On - Validation 6 On - Calibration 5 On - Calibration 6 On Menu Status Slot# DO# Menu Status Slot# DO# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 20 Process Specification: Calibration/Validation (D/O Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.D  App.D-16 l Stream Valve Switching The Stream Valve Switching function of D/O is a function to turn On and Off external stream valves using D/O signals. The contact output is turned On and Off at the time set for the Stream valve ON/OFF time in the GCM method. To enable the Stream valve switching function of D/O, One-to-one output (D/O) is required to be selected as the stream valve type in the initial hardware configuration, and as many D/Os as streams are required to be initially prepared. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/O Setup Slot # 1 DO # 1 > - Process assign Str valve select - Str valve number 20 Menu Status Slot# DO# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 21 Process Specification: Stream Valve Switching (D/O Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD) n Contact Input As for contact input, by using optional D/I cards (up to four cards, eight outputs per card) and by using optional DI/O cards (up to four cards, three inputs and outputs per card), up to 32 outputs and up to 12 outputs can be output, respectively. Depending on the initial hardware settings, the contact input must be set to On While Open or On While Closed. The initial setting is On While Open unless otherwise specified. Specify the settings on the D/I setting screen on the GC-HMI EtherLCD, and then verify the operation condition on the D/I condition screen on the GC-HMI EtherLCD. The following six types can be set for contact input. • Stream Sequence • Stream • Range Switching • Calibration/Validation • Operation Mode • Alarm Process l Stream Sequence The Stream Sequence of D/I is a function to give a command to change the measurement status to the status of a specified stream sequence number for a specified GCM using contact input as a trigger. Eight patterns of stream sequence can be used for each GCM. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.D-17 To give a command to all GCMs, set “0” for the GCM number. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/I Setup Slot # 1 DI # 1 > - Signal name G1-Seq1 - Process assign Stream sequence - GCM number 1 - Stream sequence 1 Menu Status Slot# DI# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 22 Process Specification: Stream Sequence (D/I Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD) l Stream The Stream function of D/I is a function to give a command to change the measurement status so that the specified stream is measured a preset number of times using contact input as a trigger. To measure the specified stream continuously, set “0” for the number of times of measurement. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/I Setup Slot # 1 DI # 1 > - Signal name STR1 - Process assign Stream (cont) - Stream number 1 (GCM 1) - Number of times 0 App.D Menu Status Slot# DI# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 23 Process Specification: Stream (D/I Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD) l Range Switching The Range switching function of D/I is a function to give a command to change the range to a specified range for the range-specified peak of the specified stream using contact input as a trigger. To enable the Range switching function of D/I, individual peak setting and multi-range settings are required in advance for the relevant stream and peak. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.D-18 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/I Setup Slot # 1 DI # 1 > - Signal name S1P1-R1 - Process assign Range Select - Stream number 1 (GCM 1) - Peak number 1 - Range number 1 Menu Status Slot# DI# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 24 Process Specification: Range Switching (D/I Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD) 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Peak Setup-Specific (2/5) Stream #1 Peak #1 External 3rd - Detector number 1-1 > - Measuring unit 1 - Measuring range 100.000 - Gate cut method Slope gate - Integ method Skimming - Peak polarity Positive - Detected slope 0.0010 mV/s Menu F1 Copy1 F2 Copy2 F3 F4 Strm# F5 Peak# F6 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Multirange Setup Range # 1 > - Process (Type) Peak - Process (Detail) External 3rd - Measuring unit 1 - Measuring range 50.000 - Ref peak number #40 #001 Menu Get Range# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 25 Individual Peak Setting Screen and Multi-Range Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD l Calibration/Validation The Calibration/Validation function of D/I is a function to give a command to change the measurement status to the status of a specified calibration or validation number using contact input as a trigger. Six patterns of calibration setting and validation setting can be used for each GCM. To give a command to all GCMs, set “0” for the GCM number. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.D-19 The Calibration/Validation function of D/I is available for semiautomatic calibration. To enable the function, the relevant calibration or validation number is required to be specified in advance. 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/I Setup Slot # 1 DI # 1 > - Signal name G1-CAL1 - Process assign Cal/Val - GCM number 1 - Cal/Val number Calibration 1 Menu Status Slot# DI# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 26 Process Specification: Calibration/Validation (D/I Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD) 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Cal/Val Setup (Main) GCM # 1 > - Cal(Val) method Semi-auto - Auto start date 2011/11/22 - Auto start time 17:00 - Time interval 001 day:00:05 Auto cal status Stopping Menu F1 Start F2 Stop F3 Cal F4 Val F5 App.D GCM# F6 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 Calibration Setup GCM # 1 Cal # 1 > - Cal stream 4 - Cal times 3 - Auto cal Executed - ValStr# before Cal 3 - ValStr# after Cal 4 - Val before Cal times 1 - Val after Cal times 1 Menu Peak Main GCM# Cal# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 27 Calibration/Validation Setting Screen and Calibration Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD. l Operation Mode The Operation Mode function of D/I is a function to give a command to change the operation mode to a specified operation mode for a specified GCM using contact input as a trigger. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.D-20 To give a command to all GCMs, set “0” for the GCM number. One among the following three types of operation mode is set for each contact point. • Run • Stop • Pause 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/I Setup Slot # 1 DI # 1 > - Signal name G1-Run - Process assign Operation mode - GCM number 1 - Operation mode Run Menu Status Slot# DI# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Figure 28 Process Specification: Operation Mode (D/I Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD) l Alarm Process This is a function to activate a specified alarm using contact input as a trigger. To set an alarm for all GCMs, specify “0” for the “GCM number.” To set an alarm for each GCM, specify the relevant GCM number. The alarm level can be set to “2” or “3.” The alarm number is determined as follows depending on the alarm level and the D/I contact number. Alarm level 2: 200 + Contact number (No. 201 to 232) Alarm level 3: 400 + Contact number (No. 401 to 232) An alarm message can be defined using up to 22 alphanumeric characters. For the details of alarms, see Section 7.1 “D/I Alarm.” 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/I Setup Slot # 1 DI # 1 > - Signal name ALM R2-1 - Process assign Alarm process - GCM number 0 - Alarm level 2 (201) - Message Sampling System Error 1 1 / 1 1 / 2 2 1 5 : 1 5 : 4 5 D/I Setup Slot # 1 DI # 1 > - Signal name ALM R3-1 - Process assign Alarm process - GCM number 1 - Alarm level 3 (401) - Message air conditioner alarm Menu Status Slot# DI# Menu Status Slot# F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Figure 29 Process Specification: Alarm Setting (D/I Setting Screen on GC-HMI EtherLCD) IM 11B08A01-01E DI# F6 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.D-21 n Serial Communication (Y-Protocol) The GC8000 uses two types of serial communications: DCS and GCCU. The protocol of DCS communication is classified into MODBUS and Y-Protocol (GC1000/GC8, GC6 and BTU for Japan). The settings for Y-Protocol are described below. For the serial communication settings, see “5.4.14 Communications Setup.” For the data specifications in the MODBUS communication, see GS 11B08B02-01E. The GC8000 supports Y-Protocol only when both GCM and SYS are a single configuration. The settings for Y-Protocol on the serial communication setting screen are shown below. ● Trans contents Analyzed value: Sends analysis value and calibration factor data, not alarm data. Alarm: Sends alarm data, not analysis value and calibration factor data. All data: Sends analysis value, calibration factor, and alarm data. ● Recep contents None: Accepts no input data. Command: Accepts no input data. All data: Accepts no input data. GC8 type: Accepts input data after sending analysis value or other data. The GC8000 normally accepts input data every 7 to 8 seconds. ● Procedure Without procedure: Upon outputting analysis value, calibration factor, or alarm data, the GC8000 sends the relevant data packet to DCS. The GC8000 sends the packet only once. With precedure: Upon outputting analysis value, calibration factor, or alarm data, the GC8000 sends an output command packet to DCS. After receiving the output command packet, DCS sends an input command packet back to the GC8000 as necessary. After receiving the input command packet, the GC8000 sends the relevant data packet to DCS. For the detail, see “l In the case of “with procedure”” in page of App.D-26 . l Communication Data The types of communication data for Y-Protocol are as follows: (1) Analysis value data (GC8000 to DCS) After the calculation, the GC8000 outputs analysis value data. (2) Calibration factor (GC8000 to DCS) After the calculation, the GC8000 outputs calibration factor data. (3) Error alarm (GC8000 to DCS) When an alarm occurs, the GC8000 outputs alarm data. (4) Input data (DCS to GC8000) The GC8000 receives various commands including the Run command. TIP Indication in the packet CR: Carriage return LF: Line feed A dummy space is indicated in gray. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.D  App.D-22 (1) Analysis value data (fixed to 45 characters) The data is output only when Execution is set to “Executed” and Output flag is set to “Provided” on the Peak Setup-Specific screen. The packets for the processes are classified as follows: Distillation Peak Calculation Process Linear 1 to 5 Ratio Separation cape Divisor Base level Signal level Noise level Deviation calc Heating value AI Program output Type of packet Type B Type A Type C Type B No output Type B Type B No output ● Type A If a unit other than ppm or % or no unit is used, data is not output. 1 2 S D 1 2 3 4 5 7 , └──┘ 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 P PM A : CH L A : C L L , , , T % , └──┘ a a: b: 6 └──────────┘ b c └─────┘ d └───────────────────────────┘ e . └─────────────┘ f A : R T └───────┘ g CR LF └─────┘ h Stream number (01 to 31) Peak number (01 to 99) *Relative peak number To address all 255 peak numbers, S comes in the second digit (from the head) for the peak numbers 01 to 99, 1 for the numbers 100 to 199, and 2 for the numbers 200 to 255. Analysis value (5 digits) The data format for analysis values depends on the measurement range for the peak setting (see Table 12). Analysis values are rounded. c: Table 12 Data format for analysis values Output value Measurement range Remarks n.nnn 0.001 to 9.999 9.999 is used for all values of 9.9995 or more. nn.nn 10.000 to 99.999 99.99 is used for all values of 99.995 or more. nnn.n 100.000 to 999.999 999.9 is used for all values of 999.95 or more. nnnnn 1000.000 to 9999.999 99999 is used for all values of 99999.5 or more. d: e: f: n: any value from 0 to 9. Unit (PPM, %) Concentration error alarm (A:CHL = Higher limit, A:CLL = Lower limit) They will be dummy spaces if no error occurs. Retention time (0000.0 to 9999.9) The unit is in seconds. The position of the decimal point is fixed. 0000.0 is used for values of 0 or less and 9999.9 for those of 9999.9 or more. Retention time error alarm (A:RT) They will be dummy spaces if no error occurs. Analyzer number (1 to 240) (zero suppression provided) g: h: The Analyzer number (h) to be used in the format is not provided. Only S comes in the second digit from the head because the peak numbers are 01 to 99. 1 2 3 4 DS 6 7 , └──┘ a b: 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 P PM A : CH L A : C L L , , , T % , └──┘ b └──────────┘ c └─────┘ d └───────────────────────────┘ e . └─────────────┘ f A : R T CR LF └───────┘ g Peak number (01 to 99) *Relative peak number IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.D-23 ● Type B 1 2 S D 1 2 3 4 5 6 , └──┘ 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 , CR LF └──┘ a a: b: 7 └──────────┘ b └─────┘ c d Stream number (01 to 31) Peak number (01 to 99) *Relative peak number To address all 255 peak numbers, S comes in the second digit (from the head) for the peak numbers 01 to 99, 1 for the numbers 100 to 199, and 2 for the numbers 200 to 255. Analysis value (5 digits) The data format for analysis values depends on the measurement range for the peak setting (see Table 12). Analysis values are rounded. Analyzer number (0 to 240) (zero suppression provided) c: d: The Analyzer number (d) to be used in the format is not provided. Only S comes in the second digit because the peak numbers are 01 to 99. See Type A. ● Type C If a unit other than ppm or % or no unit is used, data is not output. 1 2 S D 1 2 3 4 5 6 , 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 P PM A : CH L A : C L L , , % , └──┘ └──┘ a a: b: 7 └──────────┘ b c └─────┘ d CR LF └───────────────────────────┘ └─────┘ e f c: d: e: Stream number (01 to 31) Peak number (01 to 99) *Relative peak number To address all 255 peak numbers, S comes in the second digit (from the head) for the peak numbers 01 to 99, 1 for the numbers 100 to 199, and 2 for the numbers 200 to 255. Analysis value (5 digits) The data format for analysis values depends on the measurement range for the peak setting (see Table 12). Analysis values are rounded. Unit (PPM, %) Concentration error alarm (A:CHL = Higher limit, A:CLL = Lower limit) They will be dummy spaces if no error occurs. f: Analyzer number (1 to 240) (zero suppression provided) The Analyzer number (f) to be used in the format is not provided. Only S comes in the second digit because the peak numbers are 01 to 99. See Type A. (2) Calibration factor data (fixed to 45 characters) The data is output when Execution is set to “Executed” on the Peak Setup-Specific screen. When a CAL (calibration out of range) or RPT (calibration repeatability error) alarm occurs, this is not output. 1 2 3 CC 5 6 , └┘ a a: b: c: d: e: 4 7 , └──┘ b 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 , COE . └──────────┘ c CR LF └───────┘ └─────┘ d e Calibration number (1 to 3) Peak number (01 to 99) *Relative peak number Calibration factor (5 digits) Calibration factors are rounded. The position of the decimal point is fixed. Calibration factor error (COE) They will be dummy spaces if no error occurs. Analyzer number (1 to 240) (zero suppression provided) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.D  App.D-24 The Analyzer number (e) to be used in the format is not provided. (3) Error alarm (fixed to 45 characters) This is output only when an alarm occurs. All the alarms currently occurring are output at the time of startup. 1 2 3 4 AS 5 7 / └──┘ 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 , └──┘ a a: b: c: d: e: f: 6 : └──┘ b c , └──┘ d CR LF └───────┘ └─────┘ e f Month (01 to 12) Day (01 to 31) Hour (01 to 24) Minute (00 to 59) Error alarm types AD1_, AD2_ = Detector 1 (or 2) calibration error TMPH = Temperature control error or temperature exceeding the higher or lower limit CAR1, CAR2 = Carrier gas 1 (or 2) pressure drop EXT1 to EXT8 = External contact inputs 1 to 8 FLM1, FLM2 = FID1 (or 2) extinguished PRT_ = Calibration repeatability error CAL_ = Calibration out of range Analyzer number (1 to 240) (zero suppression provided) The Analyzer number (f) to be used in the format is not provided. Error alarm types (e) are as follows: e: Types of error alarms CAR_ = Carrier gas 1 or 2 pressure drop (Pressure switch 1 or 2 OFF) FLM_ = FID1 or 2 extinguished PRT_ = Calibration repeatability error CAL_ = Calibration out of range (4) Input Data Format ● Stream change command (SM/SE/SC) When the stream sequence is set for the measurement condition, the command changes the starting stream number of the current stream sequence. This change can be carried out in any operation mode (Run, Stop or Pause) except when the operation mode change or the measurement status change is being requested. The command changes only the starting stream number, not the stream sequence specification. The result is written in flash memory. 1 2 3 4 5 6 SM 3 4 6 3 4 5 6 CR LF a 7 8 S E 9 10 CR LF └──┘ a a: b: 2 └──┘ b 5 1 SC └┘ a 2 For GC6 8 CR LF └──┘ 1 7 └─────┘ b Starting stream number (1 to 31 or 01 to 31) Analyzer number (1 to 9 when M comes in the second digit, and 1 to 240 or 001 to 240 when E comes in the second digit) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.D-25 ● Calibration command (CM/CE/CA) Calibration/Validation command is executed. Calibrations 4 to 6 and Validations 4 to 6 are not supported. 1 2 3 4 5 CM └┘ 2 3 1 2 4 5 3 C A 4 5 CR LF └┘ b a 6 7 CE 8 9 CR LF └┘ └─────┘ a a: b: For GC6 7 └┘ a 1 6 CR LF b Calibration/validation number (1 to 3 = Calibrations 1 to 3; 4 to 6 = Validations 1 to 3) Analyzer number (1 to 9 when M comes in the second digit, and 1 to 240 or 001 to 240 when E comes in the second digit) ● Stream sequence change command (UM/UE) Stream sequence change command is executed. 1 2 3 4 5 UM └┘ 2 7 └┘ a 1 6 CR LF 3 b 4 5 6 7 UE 9 CR LF └┘ └─────┘ a a: b: 8 b Stream Sequence number (1 to 8) Analyzer number (1 to 9 when M comes in the second digit, and 1 to 240 or 001 to 240 when E comes in the second digit) ● Start command (BM/BE) Run command is executed. 1 2 3 BM 4 For GC6 5 1 2 B E CR LF 3 4 CR LF App.D └┘ a 1 2 3 4 5 B E 6 7 CR LF └─────┘ a a: Analyzer number (1 to 9 when M comes in the second digit, and 1 to 240 or 001 to 240 when E comes in the second digit) ● Stop command (FM/FE/FI) Stop command is executed. 1 2 3 FM 4 For GC6 5 1 2 F I CR LF 3 4 CR LF └┘ a 1 2 3 4 5 F E 6 7 CR LF └─────┘ a a: Analyzer number (1 to 9 when M comes in the second digit, and 1 to 240 or 001 to 240 when E comes in the second digit) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.D-26 ● Range change command (RM/RE/RA) The command executes range switching. The result is written in flash memory. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 └──┘ a 2 3 4 └──┘ b 5 6 7 c 8 └┘ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 CR LF └──┘ d a └──┘ b └──┘ c 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 RE CR LF └──┘ └──┘ a a: b: c: d: 1 R A CR LF └──┘ 1 For GC6 9 10 11 12 13 14 RM └──┘ b c └─────┘ d Stream number (1 to 31 or 01 to 31) Peak number (1 to 99 or 01 to 99) *Relative peak number Range number (1 to 31 or 01 to 31) Analyzer number (1 to 9 when M comes in the second digit, and 1 to 240 or 001 to 240 when E comes in the second digit) ● Reference peak overwrite command (YF) The command executes reference peak overwriting. If the specified stream number and peak number, as well as the reference peak stream number and peak number do not exist, the command does not execute writing. The command executes writing regardless of the processes. For the external linear model, it overwrites the reference peak database at the reference peak 1 or base level. The result is written in flash memory. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Y F CR LF └──┘ └─────┘ a a: b: c: d: e: b └──┘ └─────┘ c d └─────┘ e Stream number (1 to 31 or 01 to 31) Peak number (1 to 255 or 001 to 255) *Relative peak number Stream number of the reference peak (1 to 31 or 01 to 31) Peak number of the reference peak (1 to 255 or 001 to 255) Analyzer number (1 to 240 or 001 to 240) l In the case of “with procedure” Output instruction (GC8000 to DCS) ● Data receiving request (#E) 1 2 3 4 # E CR LF ● Data transmission completion (#F) 1 2 3 4 # F CR LF ● Input command prompt (#T) 1 2 # T 3 4 CR LF ● Answerback (command executed) (#B) 1 2 3 4 # B CR LF IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.D-27 ● Answerback (command not executed) (#W or #W#) 1 2 3 4 When receiving an invalid-format command # W CR LF 1 2 3 #W# 4 5 CR LF TIP Answerback (comannd not executed) #W and #W# #W: When the command includes an out-of-range parameter When sending a message to another task has failed #W#: Invalid format Invalid command length Undefined command Invalid analyzer ID for the GC1000/GC8 Input instruction (DCS to GC8000) ● Data transmission request (#A) 1 2 3 4 # A CR LF ● Data retransmission request (#R) 1 2 3 4 # R CR LF ● Example of communication “with procedure” The GC8000 sends “Input command prompt (#T)” at an interval of 8 seconds. In the case of “with procedure” and upon outputting analysis value (concentration/calculation), calibration factor, or alarm data, the GC8000 issues the relevant data packet to DCS by the following procedure. ● Normal comminucation (1) When the GC8000 is ready to send data to DCS, the GC8000 first sends “Data receiving request (#E)” to DCS. (2) Upon receiving “Data transmission request (#A)” from DCS, the GC8000 sends all data. After the completion, the GC8000 sends “Data transmission completion (#F).” *1 DCS GC8000 *2 #A #E *2 Data 1 #A -------- Data n #A #F *1: 3 seconds or less, *2: 0.04 seconds ● When not receiving “Data transmission request (#A or #R)” If the GC8000 does not receive “Data transmission request (#A or #R)” from DCS for about 3 seconds after sending “Data receiving request (#E)”, the GC8000 sends “Data receiving request (#E)” again. The GC8000 repeats the same request up to six times (7 times in total) until the GC8000 receives a reply from DCS. If it does not receive any reply, the GC8000 sends “Data transmission completion (#F)” to DCS. *1 DCS GC8000 #E *1 #E #E #E #E #E #E #F *1: 3 seconds IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.D  App.D-28 ● Retransmission Upon receiving “Data retransmission request (#R)” during data transmission, the GC8000 sends the previous data again. *1 DCS GC8000 #E *2 *2 #A #R Data 1 #R Data 1 Data 1 *1: 3 seconds or less, *2: 0.04 seconds ● Input command (normal) While not sending data to DCS, the GC8000 sends “Input command prompt (#T)” at an interval of 8 seconds. If the GC8000 does not receive an input command from DCS for 5 seconds after sending the prompt, the GC8000 waits for 3 seconds and then sends the prompt to DCS again. The GC8000 accepts any command only for the first 5 seconds after sending the prompt. *3 DCS GC8000 #T #T *1 *4 Cmd 1 #B or #W #T *2 *2 *1: 5 seconds, *2: 8 seconds, *3: 5 seconds or less, *4: 0.04 seconds ● Input command After successfully processing an input command from DCS, the GC8000 sends “Answerback (command executed) (#B)” to DCS. After that, the GC8000 accepts up to 6 (7 in total) input commands from DCS. If it fails to process an input command from DCS, the GC8000 sends “Answerback (command not executed) (#W)” to DCS. After that, the GC8000 accepts up to 6 (7 in total) input commands from DCS. If it receives an invalid input command from DCS, the GC8000 sends “Answerback (command not executed) (#W)” to DCS. After that, the GC8000 accepts up to 6 (7 in total) input commands from DCS. *1 DCS GC8000 #T Cmd 1 *1 #B or #W Cmd 2 #B or #W Cmd 3 *2 #B or #W *1: 0.04 seconds, *2: Accepts up to 6 commands including the unexecuted one ● GC8 type In the GC8-compatible mode, the GC8000 sends “Input command prompt (#T)” once after sending analysis value, calibration factor, or alarm data. The GC8000 accepts any command only for the first 5 seconds after sending the prompt. *1 DCS GC8000 #E #A *1 Data 1 #A *2 #F *3 #T Does not accept any command after this point *1: 0.04 seconds, *2: 3 seconds (Does not accept any command) ,*3: 5 seconds IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.E-1 Appendix E Computation Scheme This chapter describes how concentrations and computations are derived based on signals from the detectors so that you can understand the computation functions of the GC8000. n General The computation function of the GC8000 is composed of the processes shown in the figure below. Process mode Manual modes Detector signal processing Peak detection processing Additional computation processing Deviation component computation Computed value Concentration Detector signal processing Signal lebel processing Peak detection processing Peak waveform processing Peak waveform processing Concentration computation processing Concentration computation processing App.E Concentration Level value Concentration Upper and lower limit checking processing Alarm output F0201.ai IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.E-2 n Detector Signal Processing Detector signal processing receives signals from each detector, eliminates noise from the signals, and transmits the filtered signals to the following peak detection processing. The figure below shows the flow of the processing. Signals from each detector Signal filtering Data sampling Processed data Signal evalution Standard deviation values F0202.ai (1) Signal Filtering The filtering step eliminates high-frequency components from the signals transmitted from each detector every 20 ms. The filtering formula is: yt = f (xt – yt-1) + yt-1 Where: : filtered data yt yt-1 : previous data from 20 ms before f : filtering coefficient (variable between 0.01 and 1.000) xt : signal from a detector (2) Data Sampling At every time tsmp, the data sampling step averages the signals acquired every 20 ms from detectors. Note that tsmp is a value calculated from multiplying 20 ms by 2n (n=0 or a variable integer from 1 to 9; therefore, tsmp is a variable between 20 ms and 10.24 s). IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.E-3 Waveform of detector signals Waveform after filtering f=0.5 Waveform after sampling (tsmp=40ms) Waveform after sampling (tsmp=80ms) F020202.ai (3) Signal Evaluation The signal evaluation step calculates the standard deviation of sampled 20 signals according to the following formulas: yavrg = 1 20 sd = t ∑ yi i=t–19 1 19 t ∑ (yi – yavrg)2 i=t–19 Where: yi : sampled signals (20 signals) sd : standard deviation of the sampled data App.E n Process Mode Processing There are four kinds of process mode: 1. Signal level processing 2. Peak processing 3. Deviation component computation processing 4. Additional computation processing Up to 255 settings can be computed and they are separately divided for each stream. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.E-4 (1) Signal Level Processing There are three kinds of processing: base level setting, level detection, and noise detection. Detector signal data Select any one of these. Base level setting Level detection Noise detection Base level value Signal level value Noise value F020501.ai l Base Level Setting The signal level in the voltage at the specified time in the analysis cycle (operation time) is stored as the base level value. l Level Detection The difference between the latest base level and the signal level at the specified time in the analysis cycle (operation time) is detected as the signal level. E3 mV 0 mV E1 mV Base level setting Base level value = E3 mV Base level setting Base level value = E1 mV Level detection Level value = E2 mV Peak height from the base level F02050102.ai l Noise Detection The noise value of the signal at the specified time in the analysis cycle is obtained. The difference between the maximum and minimum values among 20 data is converted into a value as the noise value. Maximum and minimum value n=20 F02050103.ai IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.E-5 (2) Peak Processing Peaks are detected from the detector signal data, and the concentration is calculated from the area or height of the peak. Detector signal data Peak detection processing Base line correction Select whether to execute Square processing Select whether to execute Auto-tracking Peak-on time/peak-on level Select one of the following Slope gating Time gating Zone gating Slope/time gating Time/slope gating Retention-time detection Select whether to execute Retention time Tangent correction Peak waveform Peak waveform processing Peak-off time/peak-off level Result of tangent correction Tailing coefficient Peak half width Area integration App.E Select whether to execute Area calculation by tangent skimming Peak area Area calculation by vertical separation Peak height F020502_1.ai IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.E-6 Peak area/peak height Select one of the following External standard (approximation from cubic equation) External standard (approximation from linear equation) External standard (calibration computation) Concentration computation processing Indirect method Corrected area normalization Select wheter to execute Total compensation operation Variation coefficient Concentration value Variation coefficient F020502_2.ai l Peak Detection (a) Base Line Correction Processing l Base Line Correction In base line correction, stored chromatogram data are subtracted from the measured detector signal data, and processing following the peak detection are carried out on the subtracted data. When storage is specified, base line correction is not done. Measured chromatogram Stored chromatogram Corrected chromatogram F02040101.ai You can select whether or not correction is carried out for each stream. (b) Auto-tracking Peak Processing As the retention time changes, gates for each peak are displaced. To prevent this displacement, auto-tracking peak processing automatically changes the gate time for each peak according to the change in the retention time. Please refer to 1.12.4 (4) Gate tracking function. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.E-7 Actions: According to the change in the retention time of each peak that is specified as standard, the gate time of the specified peak and processing time of the specified signal level are changed. When only one standard peak is specified, the gate time and processing time are obtained in proportion with the retention time. When two or more standard peaks are specified, the gate time and processing time are obtained for each peak by performing a linear approximation on the first peak and the last peak. The variation coefficient of the obtained retention time is shared by all peaks. Initial chromatogram Initial gate Standard peak Initial chromatogram Chromatogram after change Gate after tracking processing Initial gate F0205020102.ai (c) Time Gating Time gating processing detects peaks within the predefined time interval when the following condition is satisfied: The detector signal value is from the specified gate-on time to gate-off time. App.E Base level setting Base level Base level Gate Peak Gate Peak F0205020103.ai (d) Slope Gating Slope gating processing detects peaks based on the change in the time of detector signal data. The time when detection is started is predefined as the gate time. When all the following conditions are satisfied, it is assumed that the peak is started (on): • The analysis elapse time is greater than the gate-on time. • The previous peak is ended. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.E-8 • The gradient of the detector signal (change with time) exceeds the peak-on detection slope value. When all the following conditions are satisfied, it is assumed that the peak is ended (off): • The analysis elapse time passes the gate-off time. • The detector signal passes the peak point. • The gradient of the detector signal (change with time) is smaller than the peak-off detection slope value. If the next gate is started before the detector signal passes the peak point, or if the analyysis time reaches the peak detection stop time, it is also assumed that the peak is ended (off). The peak-on detection slope value is equal to the detection slope value (set for each peak). The peak-off detection slope value is the detection slope value multiplied by the detection slope on/off ratio (that can be group-set). Peak-off detection slope value Base level Peak-on detection slope value Peak gate F0205020104.ai (e) Zone Gating Zone gating method detects peaks under the upper limitation of specified number of peaks in the range (zone) between the gate-on time and the gate-off time. (i) Peak detection action in zone gating The peak detection action in the zone gating acquires the number of peaks assigned to the zone using the gate on as a trigger and like the regular slope detection, starts the detection of peak on. As soon as the peak on is detected, the detection of peak off is started. At the point the peak off is detected, the first peak is determined. The following peak detection is started and then the second and third peaks are determined. This peak detection action is continued until the peaks of assigned number are determined. After the detection of the final peak in the zone has been completed, the peak detection is not performed until the gate-off time. For instance, assuming the assigned number of peaks is 5 in the zone peak detection starting at peak 3, the peak detection is started from the gate on, and if the detection is performed normally, the data will be stored in the peak buffers of peak 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 in the order of detection. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.E-9 (ii) Generation of peak search errors If the gate is finished after the peak detection has been started but before the peak detection of the assigned number of peaks is not completed, peak search errors with regard to the undetermined peaks will be generated. In the same example as above, assuming that three peaks are detected before the gate off, peak search errors will be generated for peaks 6 and 7, respectively (iii) Coexistence of zone gating with other peak detection actions Like the slope gating, time gating and slope-on/time-off method, the zone gating method is performed by setting at the peak unit. Therefore, the zone gating method is considered as one of the regular detection actions, allowing it to coexist with other detection methods in one stream. (iv) An action when the previous peak is on before the zone gating starts If the previous peak (in this case, the slope detection peak) has not been finished before the zone gating starts, the previous peak is forced to become off at the time the zone gating turns on. At this time an error message or any other notice indicating the forced termination is not generated. (v) An action when the current peak is on upon the zone gating is finished If the currently detected peak is not finished when the zone gating processing is finished, the current peak is forced to become off at the time the zone gating turns off. At this time an error message or any other notice indicating the forced termination is not generated. (vi) Auto-tracking peak method in the zone gating In the auto-tracking peak in the zone gating is not supported. (vii) Confirmation of minimum detection of peak width/height/area In the zone gating method, the settings of minimum detection peak width, height and area are enabled and for the peaks detected in all zone gating processing, the minimum detection peak width, height and area are checked uniformly. If there are some peaks not satisfying these conditions, the processing and data storing of those peaks are skipped and the following peak is processed. This means that the peaks not satisfying these conditions are not counted as a zone assigned peak, but discarded. (viii) Setting of the peak detection conditions The zone gating method performs slope detections under the same conditions by using the setting of the starting peak number (slope conditions and polarity) in the zone gating with regard to the slope detection conditions of the peak in the zone. (ix) Handling of chromatograph data errors If void data are found in the detecting peaks, the zone gating method generates a chromatograph data error, skip processing and data storing of the peaks of concern, and performs the following peak processing. Peaks that have caused a chromatograph error will not be counted as a zone assigned peak, but discarded. (f) Slope/Time Method Unlike the usual slope detection method or time gating method, slope/time method performs a peak detection by using the slope detection method for the peak on detection and the time gating method for the peak off. l Coexistence of slope/time method with regular peak detection actions Like the slope gating, time gating and zone gating method, the slope/time method is performed by setting at the peak unit. Therefore, the slope/time method is considered as one of the regular detection actions, allowing it to coexist with other detection methods in one stream. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.E  App.E-10 (g) Time/slope Method Unlike the usual slope detection method or time gating method, time/slope method performs a peak detection by using the time gating method for the peak on detection and the slope detection method for the peak off. l Coexistence of time/slope method with regular peak detection actions Like the slope gating, time gating and zone gating method, the time/slope method is performed by setting at the peak unit. Therefore, the time/slope method is considered as one of the regular detection actions, allowing it to coexist with other detection methods in one stream. l Peak Waveform processing Area calculation by tangent skimming or vertical separation can be specified for each peak. l Concentration Computation Processing Concentration is computed when level processing for the last peak is completed in each stream. Corrected area normalization or the standard method (external standard of indirect method) can be group-specified in the stream common list. (a) External Standard (Approximation by Cubic Equation) The external standard (approximation by cubic equation) computes concentration from the area value based on the predefined coefficient. The specified standard peak is used for the coefficient α, Sb, R, K, A and B. The computation formula is: C = RK(αSi/Sb) (A (αSi/Sb)2 + B(αSi/Sb) + 1) Where: C : concentration α : calibration factor Sb : standard area (or height) Si : measured area (or height) R : measurement range K : coefficient A : coefficient B : coefficient (b) External Standard (Approximation by Linear Equation) The external standard (approximation by linear equation) calculates a coefficient of the linear equation from the area (or height) of two peaks specified as standard peaks specified as standard peaks and calculates the concentration from the area (or height) measured using the coefficient. The equations are as follows. (1) During calibration During calibration, if the range of the calibration coefficient is zero, calculate the standard area, if specified, calculates the calibration coefficient. • When the range of the calibration coefficient is zero: Standard area = (Integrated area value / The number of integration) * (Measuring range / Standard concentration) Calibration coefficient = 1 • When the range of the calibration coefficient is other than zero: Calibration coefficient = ((Integrated are value / The number of integration) * (Measuring range / Standard concentration)) / Standard area IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.E-11 (2) During measurement Calculate the concentration of peak i using standard concentrations and areas (or heights) of reference peaks j and k. The area of reference peak j, Sj, is calculated as follows. Sj -= aj SOj (COj / Rj) Where: Sj : area of reference peak j aj : calibration coefficient SOj : standard area COj : standard concentration Rj : measuring range The area of reference peak k, Sk, is calculated as follows. Sk = ak SOk (COk / Rk) Where: Sk : area of reference peak k ak : calibration coefficient SOk : standard area COk : standard concentration Rk : measuring range Coefficients a and b in the linear equation are calculated as follows. a= Cj – Ck Sj – Sk b = Cj – aSj The concentration of peak i is calculated as follows. ci = asi + b App.E Where: ci : concentration of peak i si : area (or height) of peak i a : slope of the linear equation (coefficient) b : intercept of the linear equation (coefficient) Cj : concentration of reference peak j Ck : concentration of reference peak k (c) Calibration Computation The calibration stream, validation stream, and measurement stream are set for each stream. As for the calibration stream, the standard area or calibration coefficient is obtained for each peak. When the calibration streams continues three times or more the calibration coefficient is obtained using the average of the last three results. When the calibration streams continues less than three times, the calibration coefficient is calculated from the results obtained. If the range of the calibration coefficient is set to zero, the standard area is obtained setting the calibration coefficient to 1. If the range of the calibration coefficient is set to other than zero, the calibration coefficient should be obtained. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.E-12 Note that calibration is not performed in the following conditions; they are regarded as an alarm status: • The calibration coefficient of any one of the peaks in a calibration stream exceeds the standard range (lump setting by each GCM). • The variation coefficient (see (g)) of any one of the peaks in a calibration stream exceeds the requirement range (lump setting by each GCM). • The concentration value of any one of the peaks in a calibration stream exceeds the calibration range. These calibration range are concentration ration to standard concentration. There are set en bloc from 0 to 1. The alarm status is removed under the following conditions. • The results of the re-performed calibration stream does not induce an alarm status. • The operation mode is changed. (d) Indirect Method The indirect method computes the concentration of the measured peak assuming that the ratio of the area (or height) for the concentration of the standard peak to the area (or height) for the concentration is constant. The computation formula is: ci = Ki αj fi [ si s Ai (aj fi i sj sj )2 + Bi aj fi ] si + 1 cj sj Where: ci : concentration of measured peak i cj : measuring range of reference peak j (calibration stream) set in standard peak j (external cublic equation processing) si : area (or height) of measured peak i sj : standard area of reference peak j (calibration stream) set in standard peak j (external cublic equation processing) fi : sensitivity correction coefficient of measured peak i to standard peak j Ki : linearizing coefficient of measured peak i Ai : linearizing coefficient of measured peak i Bi : linearizing coefficient of measured peak i αj : calibration coefficient of reference peak j (calibration stream) set in standard peak j (e) Corrected Area Normalization Corrected area normalization computes the concentration of each peak using area values measured in a stream and taking the total area value as 1. Processing computes the concentration by multiplying the value of each peak by the coefficient (the mole sensitivity correction coefficient or weight sensitivity correction coefficient). The computation formula is: ci = fisi k ∑ (fjsj) j=l Where: ci : concentration of peak i si : area of peak i fi : sensitivity correction coefficient of peak i (f) Total Compensation Total compensation computes the concentration measured in a stream so that the total value of the measurement components is the total value specified in each stream. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.E-13 The computation formula is: ci cni = ctotal k ∑ cj j=l Where: cni : result of total compensation for peak i (excluding the concentrations of the “Total compensation disable” peaks) ci : concentration of peak i ctotal : total of the concentration values (g) Variation Coefficient Computation Variation coefficient computation computes the variation coefficient for concentration. The computation formula is: cavrg = ∑ ci cv = 1 n ∑ cspan (ci–cavrg)2 n Where: ci : concentration of peak i cspan : measurement span of peak i cv : variation coefficient of concentration for peak i (3) Deviation Component Computation Deviation component computation computes the difference between the concentration values measured in a stream and the total concentration specified for each stream. Deviation coefficient computation can be made for obtained concentration values. See the section on variation coefficient computation in peak processing. If the result of a computation is negative, the result is counted as 0. The computation formula is: k cj = ctotal – ∑ ci i=1 Where: ci : concentration of peak i : concentration of deviation component j cj ctotal : total of the concentration values IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.E  App.E-14 (4) Additional Computation Processes There are linear computation, ratio computation, resolution computation, Divisor computation, and calorific value computation functions. The computation flow is as shown below. Peak half-width retention time Concentration value Linear computation Ratio computation Divisor computation Calorific computation Resolution computation Computed value Computed value Computed value Computed value Computed value F020504.ai l Linear Computation Linear computation multiplies each obtained concentration (including deviation concentration values) by the coefficient and calculates the total of the results. Linear computation is available for the concentrations of a stream where the computation is predefined. Since five coefficients can be set for each concentration, five sets of computation formulas can be set for each stream. The computation formula is: k xj = aj ∑ aijci+bj i=1 Where: : result of the linear computation xj ci : concentration of peak i aij : coefficient of linear computation j of peak i aj : coefficient a of computation j bj : coefficient b of computation j l Ratio Computation. Ratio computation computes the ratio of two obtained concentrations. Every time the concentration of the numerator Xk is computed, the computation is updated. The computation formula is: xj = xk xm Where: : result of ratio computation xj xk : concentration of peak k xm : concentration of peak m IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.E-15 l Resolution Computation Resolution computation calculates the peak resolution from the retention time and peak halfwidth of two peaks. The expression formula is: xj = 2(tr(l) – tr(m)) 1.699(tw(l) + tw(m)) Where: xj : result of resolution computation tr(l) : retention time of peak l tr(m) : retention time of peak m tw(l) : peak half width of peak l tw(m) : peak half width of peak m l Divisor Computation When all components, such as a total compensation and area percentage, in the sample are measured and compensated so that the total is compensated to 100 % of measured values (or a specific value), the trend of changes in the absolute volume of the component concentrations. In this case, using this computation the trend of changes in the absolute volume can be monitored. (a) When the standard method (absolute calibration model method) is specified for computation and the total compensation is enabled. To perform the Divisor computation, the total compensation should be set to be enabled. Assuming that the concentrations of each peak by the absolute calibration model are a1, a2, a3, a4, a5, and a6, that “Total compensation disabled” is set for a2 and a3, and that the total compensation values is T, the Divisor value is calculated as follows. Sum = a1 + a2 + a3 + a4 + a5 + a6 Divisor_Value = (Sum - (a2 + a3)) / (T - (a2 + a3)) If (Sum - (a2 + a3)) or (T - (a2 + a3)) is zero, Divisor_Value should be zero. (b) When the area percentage method is specified for computation. In the area percentage method, the Divisor value is output in 0 to 1 as taking the standard total area (set value) as 100 %. l Function of Calorific Value Calculation As a standard function the GC8000 is capable of calculating calorific values. This section explains how it calculates the value in accordance with the following standards. • ISO 6976 • ASTM D3588-81 • ASTM D3588-91 • JlS K2301 (a) ISO 6976 The GC8000 converts each peak result obtained in volume percent into the one in mole fraction, and calculates the real gas calorific value on a molar basis, real gas calorific value on a mass basis, real gas calorific value on a volumetric basis, relative density of the real gas, density of the real gas, compression factor and Wobbe index of the sample gas from the ideal gas calorific value on a molar basis, ideal gas calorific value on a mass basis, ideal gas calorific value on a volumetric basis, molar mass, and summation factor of each peak. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.E  App.E-16 Zmix = 1 – ( ∑ xi bi )2 Zi = 1 – ( bi )2 xVi Zi xi = ∑ xZVii M = ∑ xiMi H = H° = ∑ xiH°i ˆ °i ˆ = H° ˆ = ∑ ( xiMi )H H M ~ ~ H° = ∑ xiH°i ~ ~ H° H= Zmix d° = ∑ xi Mi Mair d= d°Zair Zmix ρ° = p ( RT )∑ x M i i ρ° Zmix ~ H W= d ρ= Where: H H° H°i Hˆ ˆ H° Hˆ °i ~ H ~ H° ~ H°i M Mi Mair bi Zmix Zi Zair ρ ρ° xi xVi R p T W : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : real gas calorific values on a molar basis ideal gas calorific values on a molar basis ideal gas calorific values on a molar basis of component i real gas calorific values on a mass basis ideal gas calorific values on a mass basis ideal gas calorific values on a mass basis of component i real gas calorific values on a volumetric basis ideal gas calorific values on a volumetric basis ideal gas calorific values on a volumetric basis of component i molar mass molar mass of component i molar mass of air (28.9626) summation factor of component i compression factor compression factor of component i compression factor of air (Section 1.5.2, Table 6) density of real gas density of ideal gas mole fraction of component i colume percent of component i molar gas constant (8.314510J/molK) Pressure (101.325kPa) absolute temperature Wobbe Index IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.E-17 (b) ASTM D3588-81 The GC8000 converts each peak result obtained in volume percent into the one in mole fraction, and calculates the real gas calorific value, real gas specific gravity, compressibility factor, and Wobbe index of the sample gas from the ideal gas calorific value, ideal gas specific gravity, compressibility factor, and compressibility summation factor of each component. Z = 1 – ( ∑ xi bi )2 + 0.0005(2xH – xH2) xVi Zi xi = ∑ xZVii H= ∑ xiHi G = ∑ xiGi Hr = H Z Gr = 0.99959G Z W= Hr Gr Where: Hr : H : Hi : Gr : G : Gi : Z : Zi : bi : xi : xH : xVi : W : real gas calorific value (total or net) ideal gas calorific value (total or net) ideal gas calorific value of component i (total or net) real gas specific gravity ideal gas specific gravity ideal gas specific gravity of component i compressibility factor compressibility factor of component i compressibility summation factor of component i mole fraction of component i mole fraction of hydrogen volume percent of component i Wobbe Index App.E IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.E-18 (c) ASTM D3588-91 The GC8000 converts each peak result obtained in volume percent into the one in mole fraction, and calculates the real heating value per unit volume, real heating value per unit mass, real relative density, real gas density, compressibility factor and Wobbe index of the sample gas from the ideal heating value per unit volume, ideal relative density, ideal gas density, compressibility factor and summation factor of each peak. Z = 1 – P(∑ xi βii ) 2 xVi Zi xi = ∑ xZVii HidV = ∑ xiHViid did = ∑ xidiid ρid = ∑ xiρidi HVid ρid Hmid = id ~ HV Hv = Z didZa Z ρid ρ= Z d= ~ HV HV = ρ W= = Hm HV d Where: HV HVid HViid Hm Hmid d did diid ρ ρid ρidi Z Zi Za βii xi xVi P W : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : real heating value per unit volume (gross or net) ideal gross (or net) heating value per unit volume ideal gross (or net) heating value per unit volume of component i real heating value per unit mass (gross or net) ideal gross (or net) heating value per unit mass real relative density ideal relative density ideal relative density of component i real gas density ideal gas density ideal gas density of component i compressibility factor compressibility factor of component i compressibility factor of air (0.9996) summation factor of component i mole fraction of component i volume percent of component i pressure (14.696psia) Wobbe Index IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.E-19 (d) JIS K2301 The GC8000 converts each peak result obtained in volume percent into the one in mole fraction, and calculates the calorific value (gross or net), specific value, compression factor, and Wobbe index of the sample gas from the calorific value (gross or net), specific value, compression factor and summation factor of each peak. Z = 1 – ( ∑ CMi bi )2 + 0.0005(2CMH – CMH2) CMi = HG = S= CVi Zi ∑ CZVii ∑ CMiHi Z ∑ CMiSi H W= S Where: Z HG : Hi : S : Si : Z : Zi : bi : W : CVi : CMi : CMH : calorific value (gross or net) ideal calorific value of component i (gross or net) Specific value of the sample gas ideal specific value of component i compression factor of the sample gas compression factor of component i summation factor of component i Wobbe Index of the sample gas volume percent of component i mole fraction of component i mole fraction of hydrogen App.E IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.E-20 (5) Upper and Lower Limit Checking Upper and lower limit checking of 32 points can be set as to the following items. If the conditions of the specified upper and lower limit checking are not satisfied, an alarm is generated. For signal level processing, the base level value, signal level, and noise value should be checked according to the processing details. In peak processing, the following four upper and lower limits can be checked for each peak: 1. concentration value (including the base level value, signal level value, noise value, and computed value) 2. retention time 3. variation coefficient 4. tailing coefficient For deviation component computation and additional computation processing, the upper and lower limits of computed values can be checked. Multiple items can be checked for each processing as follows. Stream number Processing number Item (concentration, retention time, etc.) Upper limit Lower limit Alarm level The alarm status is removed when: • the value falls within the range between the limits; or, • the operation mode is changed. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.F-1 Appendix F GC File Converter (GCFC) GC File Converter (GCFC) software converts a chromatogram file, which is stored in the PC Analyzer Server (PCAS) and Analyzing Server Engineering Terminal (ASET) (single mode), into a file readable by EZChrom* * EZChrom is a chromatography data system from Agilent Technologies, which collects, processes, and controls analysis data of chromatographs. n Installation of GCFC This section describes how to install GCFC in a PC. This description assumes that your PC system is as follows and that you fully understand how to use it. l System Conditions Check that the operating system is one of the following: Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP3 (32-bit, Japanese or English) Microsoft Windows Server 2008 SP2 (32-bit, Japanese or English) Microsoft Windows 7 Professional (32-bit, Japanese or English) Check that the hardware meets the following conditions: OS CPU Memory Hard disk Windows XP Windows Server 2008 Windows 7 Pentium II 350 MHz or CPU 2 GHz or faster CPU 1 GHz or faster faster At least 128 MB At least 2 GB At least 1 GB At least 3 MB of free space (for the program only) There must be sufficient space on the hard disk to store data, in addition to the space for the program. l Installation procedure Insert the installation CD into the CD-ROM drive. The installation program starts automatically (or click on GCFC.exe instead). Then follow the instructions of the wizard. App.F IMPORTANT Administrator rights are required for installing and operating GCFC. Operation cannot be ensured for other log-in accounts without administrator rights. n Startup GCFC can be started by clicking Windows’ Start button, selecting All Programs, and clicking on GCFC.exe in the GCFC group. Or, if there is a GCFC shortcut icon on the desktop, you can double-click it instead. Figure 1 GCFC shortcut icon IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.F-2 Figure 2 GCFC main window (default) n Operation Click the button, and the File Open window appears for specifying a file to be converted. Select a file and click the Open button. Figure 3 File Open window IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.F-3 Select the chromatogram file of the GC8000 (*.chx). Information about the file appears. Figure 4 GCFC main window (after selecting a file) Click the Convert button, and a .cdf file that can be read by EZChrom is created. A .cdl file is also created, to be used if any error occurs. Delete it if it is not necessary. The name and location of these two files are the same as those of the .chx file. (The file extensions are “cdf” and “cdl”.) If files with the same name exist, a Warning dialog box appears. App.F Figure 5 Warning message n Exit Click the Exit button, or click the Close command on the File menu. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.G-1 Appendix G User Program User programming card option is necessary for this function. 1. Basic Syntax Rule 1.1 Texts and Lines The script program consists of several lines. A line consists of text which starts either a statement or label, and the end of the line (page break). l Length of one line (maximum number of enterable characters) A line ends when the maximum number of one-byte characters of 126 or maximum number of enterable characters have been entered, or by hitting the return key. l Labels Labels are used in cases such as a program divergence. Example: GOTO DISP@ … DISP@DP”A” Labels are indicated by upper case alphabets or numerals added with @. Following a label, texts are described at the end of the line or after a one-byte space. l Description of Texts Upper case alphabets are used for the characters to describe statements in a text. In cases where statement, labels, variables and constants are lined together, they must be separated by a one-byte space. A line cannot contain more than two complex sentences. Example: [Wrong] IFA = lTHEN GOTO DISP@ ENDIF [Correct] IF_A = 1_THEN GOTO_DISP@ ENDIF (The underscore (_) is a one-byte space) 1.2 Character Set Usable characters are one-byte alphanumeric characters and special characters. Kana or Chinese characters cannot be used. • Alphabets: Upper case - ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ Lower case - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz Lower case can be used for DP statements and comments. • Numerals: 0123456789 • Special characters: (one-byte space) !”# $%”( )*+,–./:;<=>?@[\]{}−| IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.G  App.G-2 1.3 Data Types Integer, real type (single precision real number type) and double precision real number type can be used. • Integer Type Integers in the range of –32768 to 32767 are taken as values. They are shown internally as 2-byte (16-bit). • Real Type (single precision real number type) Real numbers are taken as values. They are shown internally as 4-byte (32-bit). Significant figures are roughly 7-figure decimals. • Double Precision Real Number Type Real numbers are taken as values. They are shown internally as 8-byte (64-bit). Significant figures are roughly 16-figure decimals. 1.4 Constants l Numeric Constants The following numeric constants can be used. (1) Expressed without decimal point or exponential part. Example: 10, –10 (2) Expressed with decimal point but without exponential part. Example: 0.12, –0.145 (3) Expressed with both decimal point and exponential part. Example: 0.35E7, –2.5E–4 (4) Expressed without decimal point but with exponential part. Example: 1E12, –4E–7, 3E+10 Note: Only decimal numbers can be used. Numeric constants of over 16 digits in length generate a syntax error. l Character-string constant Character-string constants can use DP statements. Usable character-strings are one-byte alphanumeric characters and one-byte special characters. 1.5 Variables The conditions for GC8000 user script variables are as follows: (1) Use variables after declaring. Initial value of variable is 0. (2) Maximum length of variable name is 16 digits. (3) All variable names must be defined in upper-case characters. (4) Depending on the variable type, the initial character must always start with “I,” “R” or “D.” When the variable type is INTEGER, the initial character of the variable name is “I.” When the variable type is REAL, the initial character of the variable name is “R.” When the variable type is DOUBLE, the initial character of the variable name is “D.” (5) There is a limitation on the number of variables that can be used to define one script file. (Differs depending on RAM size being used.) (6) Variables are global within a script. Same variable name can be used in another script as an independent variable. l Numeric Variable The type of the numeric variable is specified by the statement type declaration (DEFINT, DEFSNG, DEFDBL). Numeric variables have a maximum of 16 alphanumeric digits that start with an alphabetic character as follows. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.G-3 DEFINT: I DEFSNG: R DEFDBL: D Up to 1024 numeric variables can be used (including reserved variables). l Array Variables Array variables are declared in DIM statements. One-dimensional arrays and two-dimensional arrays can be used. One hundred array variables can be used in one script file. One-dimensional arrays and two-dimensional arrays have up to 1024 elements each. Variable names that have been used as simple variables cannot be declared in the DIM statements as array names. An array name that has been declared cannot also be declared again in the DIM statement. When an array is declared, all the elements of the array are set to zero. Arrays are required to be declared in DIM statements (declarations cannot be made implicitly). One-dimensional array format: Two-dimensional array format: Array definition: X, Y: TYPE: Array name (X) Array name (X) (Y) DIM Array name (X) AS TYPE DIM Array name (X) (Y) AS TYPE Array size –1 INTEGER, REAL, DOUBLE Example: One-dimensional array statement: DIM RS (4) AS REAL Element: RS (O), RS (l), RS (2), RS (3), RS (4) Two-dimensional array statement: DIM IS (2) (3) AS INTEGER Element: IS (0) (0) IS (1) (0) IS (2) (0) IS (0) (1) IS (1) (1) IS (2) (1) IS (0) (2) IS (1) (2) IS (2) (2) IS (0) (3) IS (1) (3) IS (2) (3) l Reserved Variables Reserved variables are variables that are reserved by the system. User cannot use the variable name in Table 1 as a variable name defined by DEFINT, etc. Table 1 List of reserved variables Variable Name DATE HOUR MIN Data Type Integer Integer Integer Range 1 to 31 0 to 23 0 to 59 Function Saves the date of the current time setting. Saves the hour of the current time setting. Saves the minute of the current time setting. 1.6 Operations Table 2 shows the categories of arithmetic operation, relational operation and logical operation and the precedence order of operations. Table 2 Precedence Order of Operations Item Operation in parenthesis Unary operation Exponentiation Multiplication & division Addition & subtraction Relational operation Logical operation Logical operation Symbol (Operator) () +, –, NOT ^ *, / +, – =, <, >, >=, <=, <> AND OR, EXOR Precedence Order High ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ Low IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.G  App.G-4 2. Syntax The following explains the functions, statements and commands supported by the GC8000 user script. • Functions perform specific operations for numerical values and other inputs, and return values as results. Functions always use the right side of the assignment expressions; entry on the left side is not possible. • Statements are commonly used commands in normal programs. • Commands are specific to GC8000 and are used to read data into GC8000 main unit and to change settings. When actually entering data, comply with the following rules. 1. Uppercase alphabetic characters, parenthesis, and the symbol “@”can be entered directly. 2. Up to 126 characters can be entered in a line. 3. Enter a space for an underscore (_). Do not omit it. 4. In case of functions Enter mathematical equations or character string expressions in lowercase alphabetic characters. Numeric constants and numeric variables are included in mathematical equations. Only character string constants are included in character string expressions. When entering a character string, type quotation marks (“ ”) before and after the character string. Depending on the function, the range and content that can be described will differ. 5. In case of commands and statements Items in Chinese characters and lowercase alphabetic characters are entered in numerical values, numeric variables or character strings. When entering a character string, type quotation marks (“ ”) before and after the character string. 6. Items enclosed in square brackets are additional items and can be omitted. It is not required to enter square brackets “[” and “]” in the actual entry. Example: DATA constant [, constant, ….] Constants from the second onwards can be omitted. 2.1 Functions Constants supported by GC8000 user script are shown in Table 3. Table 3 List of functions No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Function Format ABS DIV EXP LOG MOD SQR Regarding to function content, see the following. ABS Function Format Explanation Function Gives absolute value. ABS (x) x: Equation Gives absolute value of x. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  DIV Function Format Explanation Function Gives division results. DIV (x, y) x, y: Equation Gives results by calculating x/y and rounding down decimal points. If x, y is either numerical value or variable, then it can be an integer, a single precision real number or a double precision real number. EXP Function Format Explanation App.G-5 Function Gives the value of the exponential function against e (2.71828...). EXP (x) x: Equation Takes the value of the exponential function result of the numerical value shown by the either the numerical value or numeric variable of x. When the value of x is more than 43.66827237527656, an operation overflow and error will occur (when x is a double precision real number). LOG Function Function Format Explanation Gives natural logarithm. LOG (x) x: Equation (x>0) Gives the numerical value of the natural logarithm (logarithm that takes natural number e as base) shown by either the numerical value or numeric variable of x. x must be a positive number. MOD Function Function Format Explanation Gives the remainder from integer division. MOD (x, y) x, y: Equation Calculates x/y and gives the remainder. If x, y are either numerical value or numeric variable, then it can be an integer, a single precision real number or a double precision real number. SQR Function Function Gives the square root. Format SQR (x) x: Equation (x ≥ 0) Explanation Calculates the square root of the numerical value shown by either the numerical value or numeric variable of x. Value of x must be more than or equal to zero. 2.2 Statements Please note the following points. • Layer depth of a nest (the general layer depth for IF, FOR and WHILE) can be up to 100 statements. • Up to 100 GOTO/GOSUB statements can be used in one script file. • Up to 100 labels can be used in one script file. • Up to 100 DATA statements can be used in one script file. Table 4 shows the statements that can be used in the GC8000 user script. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.G  App.G-6 Table 4 List of statements No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Statement Format DATA DEFINT/DEFSNG/DEFDBL DIM DP END FOR/NEXT GOSUB/RETURN GOTO IF...THEN/ENDIF, IF...THEN/ELSE/ENDIF, IF..THEN/ELSEIF…..THEN/(ELSE/)ENDIF LET READ REM RESTORE WHILE/END WHILE See the following for details regarding to statement content. DATA Function Format Explanation Statement READ statement sets replacement data in each variable. DATA constant [, constant, …] Constant: Numeric DATA statement can be placed anywhere in the program or even dispersed. Space is ignored for numeric variables in the READ statement. The RESTORE statement enables the DATA statement read by the READ statement to be set by line unit Up to 1024 constants can be used as a parameter after DATA. DEFINT/DEFSNG/DEFDBL Statement Function Format Explanation Declares type of variable. (1) DEFINT variable name [, variable name…] (2) DEFSNG variable name [, variable name…] (3) DEFDBL variable name [, variable name…] Declares type of variable. All variables specified with initial characters of variables become the specified type. DEFINT declares variable as an integer. DEFSNG declares variable as a single precision real number type. DEFDBL declares variable as a double precision real number type. The specified initial character of the variable is one uppercase alphabetic character. For any of the formats (1) to (3) listed above, it is necessary to make the declaration before the variable name is described in the program block. Complex sentences cannot be described. The maximum of 16 variables can be defined at one time. Regarding to the definition of variables, see Section 1.5 Variables. DIM Statement Function Format Explanation Declares array variables. DIM_ARRAYNAME_AS_TYPE Array name: Name of array Type: INTEGER, REAL, DOUBLE Declares as either one-dimensional array or two-dimensional array. Regarding to the definitions of array variables, see Array Variables in Section 1.5 Variables. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.G-7 DP Statement Function Displays the table list in the GCUD output window. Format DP_TABLELIST Table list: Allows specifying variable name, array variable name, numerical value and character string constant. Explanation (1) Items are separated by either a comma (,) or semicolon (;). (2) Gives equation values in decimal numbers. (3) The output content length of each item should be within 270 digits. The output content length should be within 4096 bytes. Error occurs when it exceeds the limit. (4) A new line will take place each time the DP statement is executed and completed. (5) Some character string constants are enclosed within quotation marks. (6) Output items of exponents cannot be used. (7) Separators (a) Semicolons (;) The output element following the semicolon (;) will be displayed immediately after the previous output element. (b) Commas (,) Since each line of the GCUD output window is partitioned with TAB, when commas (,) are used as the separators, the following area is output. Example: DIM IC (3) AS INTEGER DEFINT IA, IB DP “IB value is”;IB DP IA, IB DP IC(0), IC(1) END END Statement Function Shows the very end of the main program. Format END Explanation The END statement must always be declared at the very end of the main program. Do not omit it. When the very end of the main program does not have an END, the error “End is required” will occur. FOR/NEXT Statement Function Puts sequence of statements in the FOR to NEXT loop and repeats specified number of times. Format FOR variable = initial value TO final value [STEP increment] Statement NEXT variable Variable: Numeric variable Specify the same variables for FOR and NEXT as counter. Initial value, final value, increment: Numerical value or numeric variable If operations under STEP are omitted, the increment will be regarded as 1. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.G  App.G-8 Explanation Used in pair, FOR and NEXT statements execute as described below. (1) Calculates initial value, final value and increment. (2) Substitutes variable with initial value. (3) Executes statements between the FOR statement and the corresponding NEXT statement. However, when either the GOTO statement or GOSUB statement is executed during the process, the control can be moved out of the FOR loop (part that enclosed by the FOR and NEXT statements). (4) After reaching the NEXT statement corresponding to the FOR, the variable will be incremented (increased when the variable value is positive and decreased when it is negative). (5) Compares the value of the variable with the final value and executes as follows depending on the increment. When increment is positive: Go back to (3) when variable is less than or equal (≤) to final value. Execute the statement after NEXT statement when variable is greater than (>) the final value. When increment is negative or zero: Go back to (3) when the variable is greater than or equal (≥) to the final value. When variable is less than the final value, execute the statement after the NEXT statement. Calculation will stop when the final value and value of the increment are entered into the FOR statement. If the values of variables in the equations are changed during the process from FOR to NEXT, the final value and increment will also change. When the program is exited by the GOTO statement during the process between the FOR and NEXT, the values of the variables will be saved and can be used again. When the program is exited between the FOR and NEXT while processing (5), the values of the variables will be saved. When the values of the variables are changed in the process before the NEXT statement, those values are used to repeat processes (2) and (3). Zero increment causes an infinite loop. Also, if increment is set as a numerical value with decimal points, there is the risk that value of the final value will not be calculated due to an error in calculating real numbers. Notes on programming When using one pair of the FOR and NEXT statements in another FOR to NEXT range, the former pair must be within the range of the latter FOR to NEXT. Both the line and execution order must be correct. GOSUB/RETURN Statement Function Performs divergence to subroutine and reversion from subroutine. Format GOSUB label RETURN Explanation The GOSUB statement moves the control from the specified label to the subroutine. The subroutine processing is completed with the execution of the RETURN statement. The program is moved to the statement that follows the GOSUB statement. By using the GOSUB statement, the same process content can be used repeatedly in the program. Some subroutines are able to call other subroutines. Error will occur when the specified label is not in the program. Error will also occur when the RETURN statement is executed without executing the GOSUB statement. Furthermore, error will occur when the GOSUB statement is used to move the control to the block subroutine (FOR/NEXT, IF..THEN/ENDIF, IF..THEN/ ELSE/ENDIF, WHILE/END WHILE). IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.G-9 GOTO Function Format Explanation Diverges unconditionally to the specified label. GOTO label Diverges unconditionally to the specified label. Error will occur at time of executing the GOTO statement when the specified divergence destination label is not in the program. Error will also occur when the GOTO statement is used to move the control to the block (FOR/NEXT, IF..THEN/ ENDIF, IF..THEN/ELSE/ENDIF, WHILE/END WHILE). Notes on programming Avoid creating an infinite loop with the GOTO statement such as LA@GOTO LA@ (it is a waste of execution time). Use the WHILE/END WHILE statement to create an infinite loop. IF...THEN/ENDIF, IF...THEN/ELSE/ENDIF, IF...THEN/ELSEIF...THEN/(ELSE/)ENDIF Statement Function Creates a divergence in compliance with equation results or specified conditions. Format IF equation THEN Statement [ELSE Statement] ENDIF Statement: Can be composed into multiple lines. Multiple IF statements are also possible. Explanation When the equation result is TRUE (other than zero), execute the statement from THEN onward, and execute the ELSE statement when it is FALSE (zero). Relational expression such as (A>0) is often used for the equation. Other equations can be used but the result must be expressed in numerical value. (1) When the result is TRUE (≠0), execute the text in the multiple lines after THEN up to either ELSE or END. (2) When the result is FALSE (=0), execute statement in multiple lines after ELSE to ENDIF. Processes following ELSE can be omitted (the program after THEN will stop by executing ENDIF). LET Statement Function Replaces the variable on the left side of the equation with the calculation results of right side of the equation. Format (1) LET variable name = equation (2) Variable name = equation Variable name: Numeric variable name Equation: Numerical formula LET can be omitted. Explanation None READ Function Format Explanation Statement Reads values from DATA statements and allocates to variables. READ variable name [,variable name, …] Variable name: Numeric The READ statement is always used in combination with the DATA statement. The READ statement allocates data that have been set by the DATA statement to the variables one by one. Error will occur when there are no data to allocate to the READ statement variables. Use the RESTORE statement to repeatedly read out the same DATA statement data or to specify the DATA statement for read-out. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.G  App.G-10 REM Statement Function Format Explanation Adds remarks in the program. (1) REM character string (2) ! character string Adds remarks in the program. They are ignored at time of execution. Only ASCII characters can be used for the REM statement character strings. “REM” and “!” must be placed at the top of aline. RESTORE Statement Function Specifies the DATA statement read by the READ statement. Format RESTORE [label] Explanation Specifies the pointer (read-out location) of the DATA statement used by the next READ statement. Sets the pointer to the first DATA statement in the program block when labels are omitted. Sets the pointer to the first DATA statement following the specified label in the program block when labels are specified. WHILE/END WHILE Statement Function Repeats while conditions are met. Format WHILE equation Statement END WHILE Explanation While equation conditions are TRUE (≠0), the statement between WHILE and END WHILE statements are repeatedly executed. While equation conditions are FALSE (0), it moves to the statement in the line following the END WHILE statement. When conditions for the relational expression or logical expression specified in the first WHILE statement are not met, the statement between the WHILE and END WHILE statements will not be executed even once. Relational expression such as (A>0) is often used for the equation. Other equations can be used but the results must be expressed in numerical values. The processes from the WHILE to END WHILE can be multiplexed in the same way as the FOR to NEXT processes. When multiplexing, change to the nested structure (see FOR to NEXT statements). In the WHILE to END WHILE loop, it is possible to exit the loop by a divergence created by the GOTO statement, but it is not possible to enter the loop. 2.3 Commands The three categories of commands are described below. • Script commands for End of peak detect Command used only for script for peak detection stop time • Script command for periodical scripts Command used only for fixed period script • Common commands Commands that can be used by both fixed period and peak detection stop time scripts Commands used by GC8000 user script are shown in Table 5. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.G-11 Table 5 List of commands No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 Command Format DO_OFF DO_ON GET_ALARM_1 GET_ALARM_2 GET_ALARM_A GET_ALARM_C GET_ALARM_STS GET_DHM GET_GC_COMM_STS GET_S_AREA GET_S_HEIGHT GET_S_CALM_STS GET_S_CONC GET_S_END_H GET_S_END_T GET_S_RT GET_S_START_H GET_S_START_T MSS_CAL MSS_STR MSS_STR_SEQ MSS_VAL OMC_PAUSE OMC_STOP RANGE_S READ_AI READ_DI READ_DO READ_NV_DBL READ_NV_INT READ_NV_SNG WRITE_NV_DBL WRTIE_NV_SNG WRITE_NV_INT OMC_RUN WAIT GET_C_AREA GET_C_CALM_STS GET_C_CONC GET_C_END_H GET_C_END_T GET_C_HEIGHT GET_C_RT GET_C_START_H GET_C_START_T GET_STR_NO PUT_C_CONC READ_STRV_NO READ_ATM_STS Common Category Script for Periodical scripts Script for End of peak detect Common Regarding to command content, see the following for details. DO_OFF Command Function Switches off the specified DO number. Format DO_OFF(N) N: DO number (1 to 32) Return value: None Explanation Omitted DO_ON Command Function Switches on the specified DO number. Format DO_ON(N) N: DO number (1 to 32) Return value: None Explanation Omitted IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.G  App.G-12 GET_ALARM_1 Command Function Acquires level 1 alarm status. Format GET_ALARM_1 Return value: Integer Return 1 for level 1 alarm, 0 if other. Explanation Omitted GET_ALARM_2 Command Function Acquires level 2 alarm status. Format GET_ALARM_2 Return value: Integer Return1 for level 2 alarm, 0 if other. Explanation Omitted GET_ALARM_A Command Function Acquires level 1 & level 2 alarm status. Format GET_ALARM_A Return value: Integer Return 1 for level 1 and level 2 alarm, 0 if other. Explanation Omitted GET_ALARM_C Command Function Acquires concentration alarm status. Format GET_ALARM_C Return value: Integer Return 1 for concentration alarm, 0 if other. Explanation Omitted GET_ALM_STS Command Function Acquires occurrence status of specified alarm number. Format GET_ALM_STS(N) N: Alarm number (1 to 400) Return value: Integer Return 1 when the alarm occurs, 0 if other. Explanation Omitted NOTE Alarms that belong to GCM0 cannot be acquired GET_C_AREA Command Function Acquires analysis results of specific peak during calculation (area). Format GETC_AREA(N) N: Peak number (1 to 999) Return value: Single precision real number Explanation Omitted GET_C_CALM_STS Command Function Acquires the concentration alarm status of specified peak. Format GET_C_CALM_STS(N) N: Peak number (1 to 999) Return value: Integer Return 1 for concentration alarm, 0 if other. Explanation Omitted IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.G-13 GET_C_CONC Command Function Acquires analysis results of specific peak during calculation (concentration). Format GET_C_CONC(N) N: Peak number (1 to 999) Return value: Single precision real number type Explanation Omitted GET_C_END_H Command Function Acquires analysis results of specific peak during calculation (height at stop time). Format GET_C_END_H(N) N: Peak number (1 to 999) Return value: Single precision real number type Explanation Omitted GET_C_END_T Command Function Acquires analysis results of specific peak during calculation (stop time). Format GET_C_END_T(N) N: Peak number (1 to 999) Return value: Single precision real number type Explanation Omitted GET_C_HEIGHT Command Function Acquires analysis results of specific peak during calculation (height). Format GET_C_HEIGHT(N) N: Peak number (1 to 999) Return value: Single precision real number type Explanation Omitted GET_C_RT Command Function Acquires analysis results of specific peak during calculation (retention time). Format GET_C_RT(N) N: Peak number (1 to 999) Return value: Single precision real number type Explanation Omitted GET_C_START_H Command Function Acquires analysis results of specific peak during calculation (peak start level). Format GETC_START_H(N) N: Peak number (1 to 999) Return value: Single precision real number type Explanation Omitted GET_C_START_T Command Function Acquires analysis results of specific peak during calculation (peak start time). Format GET_C_START_T(N) N: Peak number (1 to 999) Return value: Single precision real number type Explanation Omitted IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.G  App.G-14 GET_DHM Command Function Acquires the current date, hour and minute and assigns acquired results into DATE, HOUR and MIN. Format GET_DHM Return value: None Explanation Used only with GCUD. GET_GC_COMM_STS Command Function Acquires the MODBUS communication status with the specified analyzer ID. Format GET_GC_COMM_STS(GC_ID) GC_ID: Analyzer ID (1 to 240) Return value: Integer Return 0 for communication failure, 1 for in communication, –1 for unregistered. Explanation Omitted GET_S_AREA Function Format Explanation Command Acquires the latest analysis results of specified stream and peak (area). GET_S_AREA(M, N) M: Stream number (1 to 31) N: Peak number (1 to 999) Return value: Single precision real number type Omitted GET_S_HEIGHT Command Function Format Explanation Acquires the latest analysis results of specified stream and peak (height). GET_S_HEIGHT(M, N) M: Stream number (1 to 31) N: Peak number (1 to99) Return value: Single precision real number type Omitted GET_S_CALM_STS Function Format Explanation Command Acquires specified stream and occurrence status of peak concentration alarm. GET_S_CALM_STS(M, N) M: Stream number (1 to 31) N: Peak number (1 to 999) Return value: Integer Return 1 for occurrence, 0 if other. Omitted GET_S_CONC Command Function Format Explanation Acquires the latest analysis results of specified stream and peak (concentration). GET_S_CONC(M, N) M: Stream number (1 to 31) N: Peak number (1 to 999) Return value: Single precision real number type Omitted GET_S_END_H Command Function Format Explanation Acquires the latest analysis results of specified stream and peak (peak stop level). GET_S_END_H(M, N) M: Stream number (1 to 31) N: Peak number (1to 999) Return value: Single precision real number type Omitted IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.G-15 GET_S_END_T Command Function Format Explanation Acquires the latest analysis results of specified stream and peak (peak stop time). GET_S_END_T(M, N) M: Stream number (1 to 31) N: Peak number (1 to 999) Return value: Single precision real number type Omitted GET_S_RT Command Function Format Explanation Acquires the latest analysis results of specified stream and peak (retention time). GET_S_RT(M, N) M: Stream number (1 to 31) N: Peak number (1 to 999) Return value: Single precision real number type Omitted GET_S_START_H Function Format Explanation Command Acquires the latest analysis results of specified stream and peak (peak start level). GET_S_START_ H(M, N) M: Stream number (1 to 31) N: Peak number (1 to 999) Return value: Single precision real number type Omitted GET_S_START_T Function Format Explanation Command Acquires the latest analysis results of specified stream and peak (peak start time). GET_S_START_T(M, N) M: Stream number (1 to 31) N: Peak number (1 to 999) Return value: Single precision real number type Omitted GET_STR_NO Command Function Acquires stream number during calculation. Format GET_STR_NO Return value: Integer Explanation Omitted MSS_CAL Command Function Performs calibration measurement of specified number. Format MSS_CAL(N) N: Calibration number (1 to 6) Return value: None Explanation Omitted MSS_STR Command Function Format Explanation Changes measurement status to stream specification. MSS_STR(M, N) M: Stream number (1 to 31) N: Number of repetitions (0: continuous, 1 to 999) Return value: None Omitted IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.G  App.G-16 MSS_STR_SEQ Command Function Changes measurement status to stream sequence. Format MSS_STR_SEQ(N) N: Stream sequence number (1 to 8) Return value: None Explanation Omitted MSS_VAL Command Function Performs validation measurement of specified number. Format MSS_VAL(N) N: Validation number (1 to 6) Return value: None Explanation Omitted OMC_PAUSE Command Function Changes operation mode of GCM to which corresponding SYS belongs to PAUSE. Format OMC_PAUSE Return value: None Explanation Omitted OMC_RUN Command Function Changes operation mode of GCM to which corresponding SYS belongs to RUN. Format OMC_RUN Return value: None Explanation Omitted OMC_STOP Command Function Changes operation mode of GCM to which corresponding SYS belongs to STOP. Format OMC_STOP Return value: None Explanation Omitted PUT_C_CONC Command Function Format Explanation Assigns the analysis results (concentration) during calculation to specified peak PUT_C_CONC(N, V) N: Peak number (1 to 999) V: Concentration value (0.000 to 9999.999) Return value: None Omitted RANGE_S Function Format Explanation Command Changes the peak range of specified stream. RANGE_S(M, N, V) M: Stream number (1 to 31) N: Peak number (1 to 999) V: Range number (1 to 31) Return value: None Omitted IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  READ_AI Function Format Explanation App.G-17 Command Acquires the input value (0.0 to 1.0) of specified AI channel. READ_AI (N) N: AI number (1 to 16) Return value: Single precision real number type Omitted READ_DI Command Function Acquires the ON/OFF of specified DI channel. Format READ_DI(N) N: DI number (1 to 32) Return value: Integer Return 1 for ON, 0 for OFF. Explanation Omitted READ_DO Command Function Acquires the ON/OFF of specified DO number. Format READ_DO(N) N: DO number (1 to 32) Return value: Integer Return 1 for ON, 0 for OFF. Explanation Omitted READ_NV_DBL Command Function Reads the data in double precision real number from the element number specified by the double precision real number-type nonvolatile memory. Format READ_NV_DBL(N) N: Element number to read out data (0 to 255) Return value: Double precision real number type Return double precision real number data read out from specified address. Explanation Omitted READ_NV_INT Command Function Reads data in integer from the element number specified by the integer nonvolatile memory. Format READ_NV_INT(N) N: Element number to read out data (0 to 1023) Return value: Integer Return integer data read out from specified address. Explanation Omitted READ_NV_SNG Command Function Reads the data in single precision real number from the element number specified by the single precision real number type nonvolatile memory. Format READ_NV_SNG(N) N: Element number to read data (0 to 511) Return value: Single precision real number type Return single precision real number-type data from specified address. Explanation Omitted WAIT Command Function Suspends script execution for N seconds. Format WAIT(N) N: WAIT time (1 to 864000, Unit: 0.1 sec) WAIT time = in order to set to 1 second, set parameter to 10. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.G  App.G-18 Return value: None Explanation When the WAIT command is called in the script, it will remain in standby mode until N elapses. After N elapses, the lines following the executed WAIT command in the script will be executed. The WAIT command cannot be used in the script commands for peak detection stop time (due to possible delay in analysis result output). Error will occur if the WAIT command is used in the script commands for peak detection stop time. WRITE_NV_DBL Command Function Writes the data in double precision real number into the element number specified by the double precision real number type nonvolatile memory. Format WRITE_NV_DBL(N, D) N: Element number to read out data (0 to 255) D: Write data (DOUBLE type) Return value: None Explanation When data type of write data differs from the command specifications, it will be a syntax error. (Example: When an integer variable is specified in the second parameter of the WRITE_NV_DBL command) WRITE_NV_SNG Command Function Writes the data in single precision real number into the element number specified by the single precision real number type nonvolatile memory. Format WRITE_NV_SNG(N, D) N: Element number to read data (0 to 511) D: Write data (REAL type) Return value: None Explanation See WRITE_NV_DBL. WRITE_NV_INT Command Function Writes data in integer into the element number specified by the integer nonvolatile memory. Format WRITE_NV_INT(N, D) N: Element number to read out data (0 to 1023) D: Write data (INTEGER type) Return value: None Explanation See WRITE_NV_DBL. READ_STRV_NO Command Function Acquires the number of the stream valve in operation. Format READ_STRV_NO Return value: Integer Returns the number (1 to 31) of the stream valve in operation. Return 0 for OFF. Explanation Omitted READ_ATM_STS Command Function Acquires the atmospheric balance valve status. Format READ_ATM_STS Return value: Integer Return 0 for OFF, 1 for ON. Explanation Omitted IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.H-1 Appendix H GC User Programming Debugger (GCUD) 1. Overview of GCUD This chapter outlines the GCUD and the basic matters that you must know before operating the GCUD. n What is the GCUD? “GCUD” is provided when the GC8000 with the user program function is purchased. You can debug and edit scripts for user program function. n Executing GCUD Since the GCUD is executed offline, set up the required gas chromatogram data before executing the GCUD. Gas chromatogram data that has been set up will be automatically saved to an I/F data file. It can also be exported to or imported from the I/F data file at any time. n GCUD files Script file (*.ymb): This is a GCUD execution script file. GCM setting data file (*.gms): This file has a one-to-one relation to a script file (having the same file name) and cannot be saved by users. GCM setting data export file (*.if): This file is used when GCM settings are exported. The contents are the same as a GCM setting data file, but a file name can be specified by the user. It can also be imported as necessary. GCM setting data Import Write (Related file, GCUD export file Export Script file Read GCM setting data file) Figure 1 GCUD files App.H IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.H-2 n Window Configuration The GCUD consists of one main window and four sub-windows. For details, see “3. Description of Each Window” of page App.H-5. Script Edit window Output window GCM Setting/ Status window Watch window Figure 2 GCUD window configuration l Script Edit window This is the main window with the menu bar. In the main window, you can run and control a user program, display or hide other windows, etc. In conjunction with sub-windows (Watch, Output, and GCM Setting/Status windows), it is used to read/write, edit, import/export, print, and debug a script file. Furthermore, as the Script Edit window, it displays a user program script and allows you to edit it and set breakpoints. Multiple files can be opened simultaneously, but only the active file can be edited. A script file of up to 64 kB (65536 characters) can be edited. l Output window This sub-window displays the results of executing a user program script, output details of the DP command, and analysis and execution errors. l Watch window This window displays variables and allows you to edit them. l GCM Setting and GCM Status windows Although the GCM Setting and GCM Status are independent windows, they are displayed in the same position in the initial status. In the GCM Setting window, you can set and display data. In the GCM Status window, you can check the results of executing a user program script instead of checking on the GC8000 main unit. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.H-3 2. Using the GCUD l Installing the GCUD This chapter describes how to install the GCUD in a PC. This installation assumes that your PC system is already in the following state and that you have some knowledge of how to use the system. l System configuration Check that your OS is one of the following: Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP3 (32-bit version, Japanese or English) Microsoft Windows Server 2008 SP2 (32-bit version, Japanese or English) Microsoft Windows 7 Professional (32-bit version, Japanese or English) Check that the hardware meets the following conditions. OS CPU Memory Hard disk capacity Windows 7 Windows XP Windows Server 2008 CPU 1 GHz or more Pentium II 350 MHz or more CPU 2 GHz or more 1 GB or more 2 GB or more 128 MB or more 20 MB or more ((for the program section only) For the hard disk, data storage capacity should be secured separately according to the format of your PC system, in addition to the capacity for the program. l Installation procedure Insert the GCUD’s installation CD into the CD-ROM drive. The installation program starts automatically. If it does not, double-click the GCUD.exe file to start it. Then, follow the prompts on the screen to perform the installation. IMPORTANT To install and use the GCUD, log onto your PC as the Administrator. n Startup To start up the GCUD, click the Start button to select All Programs → GCUD group and click GCUD.exe. Or, double-click the GCUD shortcut icon on the desktop. App.H Figure 3 GCUD shortcut icon IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.H-4 Figure 4 GCUD default window TIP The first time it is started up, the GCUD does not create a new script automatically. n Exit Click the Close button, or click the Exit command in the File menu. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.H-5 3. Description of Each Window Close Standard toolbar Execution toolbar Menu Toolbar Script Edit window Output window GCM Setting/ Status window Watch window Status bar Figure 5 Configuration of GCUD window In the GCUD window, you can read/write, edit, import/export, print, and/or debug a script file in conjunction with each window (Script Edit, Output, Watch, GCM Setting/Status). The Script Edit window is used as the main window for controlling various windows and functions. App.H IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.H-6 n Menus The following describes each menu. The contents displayed may differ depending on the settings. l File (F) Sub menu New Short cut [Ctrl]+[N] Open [Ctrl]+[O] Close Save ― [Ctrl]+[S] Save As... ― Import GCM Setting Data... ― Export GCM Setting Data... ― Description Creates a new script file and initializes GCM data. The default name of a new file is “AnaEnd_number.” (E.g.: AnaEnd_1. ymb) Up to 100 new files can be simultaneously created. If 100 script files are open on the Script Edit window, the New menu will be disabled. Opens the next script file (*.ymb). Periodic script file name: Cycle_n.ymb (n = 01 to 64) Script file name at the end of analysis: AnaEnd_n.ymb (n = 1 to 6) When a script file is opened, GCM setting data files (*.gms) with the same file name will be read simultaneously. If there is no GCM setting data file (*.gms), GCM setting data is newly created. Up to 100 files can be simultaneously opened. If 100 script files are open on the Script Edit window, the Open menu will be disabled. Closes the Script Edit screen for the active script. Saves an open script. If a new script is saved, this submenu works in the same way as the Save As.... When a script is saved by overwriting, a GCM setting data file (*.gms) with the same file name is also updated simultaneously. If a script is being executed, the Save menu is disabled and no operation can be made. Saves a script with a specified file name. (A GCM setting data file (*.gms) with the same file name is also updated simultaneously.) If a script is being executed, the Save As… menu is disabled and no operation can be made. Imports a GCM setting data export file (*.if) and updates GCM setting data. While a script is being executed, the Import GCM Setting Data… menu is disabled and no operation can be made. Exports GCM setting data to the GCM setting data export file (*.if). IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  Sub menu Language English Japanese Print... Print Preview Print Setup Recent File ― Exit Short cut ― [Ctrl]+[P] ― ― ― ― App.H-7 Description Allows you to select the GCUD display language (Japanese or English). When the Language menu is selected, the following message is displayed. When you click the Yes button, the GCUD restarts automatically in the selected language. Prints an active file in the Script Edit window. Provides a print preview of an active file. Sets up a printer. Displays a list of recently-used files. (The latest four files are displayed.) Exits the GCUD. If a script or GCM setting data is changed, the following message is displayed. If multiple files have been changed, this message will be displayed one by one. If you exit the GCUD, the open help file is also closed. l Edit Sub menu Undo Cut Copy Paste Short cut [Ctrl]+[Z] [Ctrl]+[X] [Ctrl]+[C] [Ctrl]+[V] Description Undoes the last action. Cuts a script character string. Copies a script character string. Pastes a cut or copied script character string. App.H IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.H-8 l View Sub menu Output Watch GCM Setting GCM Status Toorbars Standard Execution Status Bar Short cut ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― Description Switches the show (default)/hide of the Output window. Switches the show (default)/hide of the Watch window. Switches the show (default)/hide of the GCM Setting window. Switches the show (default)/hide of the GCM Status window. Switches the show (default)/hide of the standard toolbar. Switches the show (default)/hide of the execution toolbar. Switches the show (default)/hide of the status bar. l Debug Go Sub menu Stop Over Step Into Step Out Stop Breakpoint Watch Short cut [F5] Description Executes a script file. If a script file is new and has not yet been saved, the Save As… dialog box is displayed. Otherwise, a script is automatically saved. • When script execution is suspended and the GCUD or script is closed, the “The file is being executed. Stop?” message appears. • While a script is being executed, an attempt to close the GCUD or script causes the “The file cannot be closed because it is being executed.” message to appear. [F10] Runs the current line of code and pauses on the next line. In a GOSUB routine, it will not run line-by-line. Instead, it will run the entire routine and then return. Otherwise, this submenu works in the same way as Step Into. A blank line and annotation line are also executed. [F11] Executes a script file line-by-line. A blank line and annotation line are also executed. [Shift]+[F11] In a GOSUB routine, it will run the entire routine and then return. A blank line and annotation line are also executed. If the program does not enter the GOSUB routine, this submenu runs the same as GO. [Shift]+[F5] Stops script debugging. When script debugging is stopped, the “Debug has been stopped.” message is displayed on the Output window. [F9] Sets or cancels a breakpoint. For details, see “l Breakpoint”ofpageApp.H-14. ― IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.H-9 Sub menu Add Short cut ― Delete ― Delete All Hexadecimal Display ― ― Description Adds a watch equation for variables to the Watch window. A variable is added to a field below the last added variable. Deletes a watch equation for the variable specified on the Watch window. If no variable is specified, the watch equation of the last variable is deleted. Deletes watch equations of all variables entered on the Watch window. If the variable type of the Watch window is INTEGER, values are displayed switching between decimal and hexadecimal. l Window Sub menu Window... Short cut ― Description Opens the Select window dialog, allowing you to select the active window. Short cut ― ― Description Opens the GCUD help. Displays the GCUD version information. l Help Sub menu Help Topics About GCUD... App.H IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.H-10 n Toolbar There are two toolbars: standard and execution. l Standard New Open Save Paste Copy Cut For details, see the File and Edit menus. l Execution Go Step Over Step Into Step Out Breakpoint Stop For functional details, see the Debug menu. n Status bar Comment Keyboard status Caps Lock Scroll Lock Num Lock IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.H-11 n Windows In addition to the Script Edit window (the main window), there are four sub-windows: Output, Watch, GCM Setting, and GCM Status. Each sub-window can be displayed by placing a checkmark on the window concerned in the View menu. A sub-window can be hidden, displayed apart from the Script Edit window (the main window), or placed at any location in the Script Edit window. Window Title Window Position Auto Hide Close Figure 6 Example of sub-window configuration (the Output window) Name Window Title Window Position Auto Hide Close Description Indicates a window name. Allows you to change the window position. See “Menu list of the Window Position.” Sets ON/OFF of the Auto Hide function. See “Menu list of the Window Position.” Closes the window. Has the same function as the Hide menu of the window position. If you want to display the window again, select it from the View menu. l Menu list of the Window Position Right-clicking the title bar of the Output, GCM Setting/GCM Status, or Watch windows causes the Window Position menu to pop up. Pop up menu Floating Docking Description Floats a window. This menu cannot be used with Docking. Docks a window. It allows you to drag a floating window to a desired location and dock it there. Tabbed Document Causes document windows to be tiled on the tabbed pane. By default, this mode is used. Auto Hide For any operation required outside of the window, the window is automatically hidden and changed into a tab on the status bar. E.g.: Placing the pointer over the tab enables the window to be displayed. When the pointer goes outside of the GCUD window, it is automatically hidden. An active window is not hidden. If the Auto Hide function is activated, it is displayed in the title bar as shown below: Hide Hides a window. If you want to display the window again, select it from the View menu. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.H  App.H-12 l About docking When a floating window is dragged onto the GCUD window, the target location is displayed in blue. If that location is appropriate, drop it there. Figure 7 Example of docking (the GCM Status window is docked at the left of the GCM Setting window.) n Messages During operations, the following messages are displayed as necessary. Table 1 Messages Category Input range error Script file name limitation error Verification Message Input must be integers between [Min] and [Max] Description Integer-type value input error Max: Maximum value of a set item Min: Minimum value of a set item Input must be singles between [Min] Real-type value input error and [Max] Max: Maximum value of a set item Min: Minimum value of a set item Script file’s name is invalid. A script file name is wrong. ...already exists. Confirmation is requested if a file Do you want to replace it? with the same name already exists. Save changes to...? Confirmation is requested when a modified script is closed. File is in execution, stop execution Confirmation is requested when now? stopping the execution of the file. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  3.1 App.H-13 Script Edit Window The Script Edit window is started by clicking the New or Open submenu of the File menu or clicking the New or Open button in the toolbar. Clicking the Close button closes the Window. Upon starting the GCUD or if all script edit windows are closed, the Script Edit window appears blank. This window allows you to edit and debug a script file. The maximum number of characters that can be entered on each line is 126 bytes. For the script file for GCUD, see Appendix G User Program. Tab Active Files Close Execution pointer GCM setting Script editing area Scroll bar Breakpoint Line No. display column Edit condition Tab Name Active Files Close GCM setting Line No. display column Script editing area Scroll bar Breakpoint display column Breakpoint Execution pointer Breakpoint display column Debug condition Description The tabs allow you to select a desired script file from open script files. The file name of the currently displayed script file is shown in bold. Allows you to select a desired script file in the list of open script files. Closes the active Script Edit window. Sets the GCM number to bind a script. Displays line numbers. Edits a script. While the script is being executed, it cannot be edited. Right-clicking this area causes a popup menu to appear. Used to scroll the window horizontally and vertically. Indicates breakpoints. Double-clicking this column enables a breakpoint to be set or cancelled. Setting a breakpoint allows a script debug to be suspended. See “Breakpoint.” Indicates which line is being executed during debugging. App.H IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.H-14 l Popup menu Right-clicking the script editing area enables frequently-used functions to be displayed in a popup menu. For details, see the Edit and Debug menus. l Breakpoint Setting a breakpoint allows you to suspend script debugging. When a breakpoint is set, a red circle “●” is displayed in the breakpoint display column. A breakpoint can be set or cancelled as follows: At any line you want to set a breakpoint, click Breakpoint of the Debug menu or the Breakpoint button in the toolbar. Pressing the F9 key performs the same function. Or, double-click an area in the breakpoint display column corresponding to the line where you want to set a breakpoint. In the same way as setting a breakpoint, click Breakpoint of the Debug menu or the Breakpoint button in the toolbar. Pressing the F9 key performs the same function. Or, double-click ● (red circle) in the breakpoint display column corresponding to the line where you want to cancel a breakpoint. Precautions when using breakpoints: • Breakpoint setting information is not saved. When a script file is closed, breakpoint setting information is discarded. • A breakpoint can also be set for a blank line or annotation line. • The position of breakpoints is fixed relative to the corresponding line. If another line is added or deleted, breakpoints are shifted accordingly. • If you delete a line where a breakpoint is set, the breakpoint is also deleted. Even if the deleted line is undone, the breakpoint does not return. • A breakpoint can also be set in the Script Edit window which is simultaneously opened. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  3.2 App.H-15 Output Window The Output window displays the results of debugging. Output information Name Output information Description Displays the execution results. Syntax error output format: [error] AAAA (AAAA: error detail) E.g., [error] End is required. Error output format other than syntax error: Line N: [error] AAAA (N: line number where an error occurs. AAAA: error detail) E.g.: Line 2: [error] operand error in DEFINT, DEFSNG and DEFDBL statements. See Appendix G User Program Error Codes. 3.3 Watch window The Watch window allows you to monitor the values of variables for debugging. While no script is being executed or suspended, variables can be edited in the Watch window. Variable name display column Variable value display column Variable type display column Name Variable name display column Description Displays variable names. A variable name can be added or edited. How to use: 1. For variables, enter a variable name. 2. For a one-dimensional array, entering a variable name enables all values in the array to be seen. If an array name and line number are entered together, the value of the array concerned can be seen. 3. For a two-dimensional array, it is always necessary to enter the array name and the element number of a line (or row and column). For example, if you want to see all values in two-dimensional array IB(2)(3), always add IB(0), IB(1), and IB(2) to the Watch window. If you also want to see IB(0)(0), add IB(0)(0). Variable type display Displays the related types according to variable names. You cannot add or edit it. If column there is no variable, the “No symbol is found” message is displayed. Variable value A variable value can be displayed and edited. If there is no variable, the “No symbol is display column found” message is displayed. For decimal indication, enter a value as a decimal number. For hexadecimal indication, enter a value as a hexadecimal number. l Popup menu Right-clicking the Watch window causes frequently-used functions to be displayed by popup. For details, see the Debug menu. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.H  3.4 App.H-16 GCM Setting/Status Window In the GCM Setting/Status window, GCM data can be set in the GCM Setting window, while you can check the setting details on the GCM Status window. Although the GCM Setting and GCM Status are independent windows, they are displayed in the same position in the initial status. Click the tab of a required window to display it. Details of data set using the GCM Setting tab are not saved in a script file (*.ymb), but in a GCM setting data file with the same file name in the same directory. Figure 8 GCM Setting window (left) and GCM Status window (right) IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00  App.H-17 Table 2 Description of the GCM Setting Window Setting description Setting range Initial value Alarm level set GCM1 to 6 Level1/2 alarm ON, OFF OFF GCM1 to 6 Level1 alarm GCM1 to 6 Level2 alarm GCM1 to 6 Conc alarm Measuring stream GCM1 to 6 stream no 1 to 31 1 No. set DI set DI01 to 32 status ON, OFF OFF AI set AI01 to 16 0.000 to 1.000 1.000 Conc alarm set Peak#001 to 999 conc alarm Current time set Date Hour Minute Assign peak num Stream#01 to 31 Assign set peak num Peak conc set Peak#001 to 999 conc Peak keep time set Peak area set Peak heigh set On, OFF OFF 1 to 31 0 to 23 0 to 59 0 to 999 1 12 0 0 0.000 to 9999.999 0.0 to 21600.0 0.000 0.000 to 40000.000 Peak#001 to 999 height -1000.000 to 1000.000 Peak#001 to 999 start time 0.0 to 21600.0 0.000 Peak#001 to 999 rt Peak#001 to 999 area Peak start time set Peak start height Peak#001 to 999 start -1000.000 to set height 1000.000 Peak end time set Peak#001 to 999 end time 0.0 to 21600.0 Peak end height set Measuring stream valve No. set Measuring atm valve status set Peak#001 to 999 end height GCM1 to 6 stream valve no GCM1 to 6 atm valve status 0.0 0.000 0.0 0.000 0.0 -1000.000 to 1000.000 0 to 31 0.000 ON, OFF OFF 0 None Accuracy None None Three decimal places, significant number of digits ≤ 7 None None The upper limit of the total assigned peak numbers of all streams is 999. Three decimal places, significant number of digits ≤ 7 One decimal place, significant number of digits ≤ 7 Three decimal places, significant number of digits ≤ 7 Three decimal places, significant number of digits ≤ 7 Three decimal places, significant number of digits ≤ 7 Three decimal places, significant number of digits ≤ 7 One decimal place, significant number of digits ≤ 7 Three decimal places, significant number of digits ≤ 7 None None Table 3 Description of the GCM Status Window Setting description Indication Initial value GCM1 to 6 run ON, OFF OFF GCM1 to 6 stop ON, OFF OFF GCM1 to 6 pause ON, OFF OFF DO01 to 25 on ON, OFF OFF DO01 to 25 off ON, OFF OFF Peak#001 to 999 range 0 to 31 0 GCM1 calibration 1 to 6, GCM1 validation 1 to 6 ON, OFF OFF to GCM6 calibration 1 to 6, GCM6 validation 1 to 6 GCM stream sequence GCM1 to 6 stream sequence no 1 to 8 0 GCM stream specify GCM1 to 6 stream no specify 1 to 31 0 GCM stream repeat specify GCM1 to 6 stream repeat num specify 0 to 999 0 Peak update conc Peak#001 to 999 updated conc 0.000 to 9999.999 0.000 GCM run GCM stop GSM pause DO on DO off Peak range GCM calibration/validation IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.H  App.I-1 Appendix I Distillation Analyzer Operation This section explains information that you will need to operate and maintain the GC8000, which was delivered to you as a distillation analyzer application. This section assumes that the basic settings will not be changed from the default condition. If you need to change the distillation range or other analysis conditions, the GC8000 must be modified. In such a case, contact your nearest Yokogawa representative. n Basic Concepts of Distillation Analyzers Distillation analysis is mainly used in oil refinery to indicate the quantity of components in a sample according to their boiling points. The analyzer for making these measurements is called a distillation analyzer. The distillation analysis application in the process gas chromatograph uses components whose boiling points are known to determine the relationship between the elution time and boiling point in advance using a low-polarity column in which components elute in order by boiling point. (This is called a distillation curve.) This relationship is used to determine the boiling point for a specific elution quantity (the percentage of elution in relation to the total volume) from the chromatogram obtained by measuring a sample consisting of components with various boiling points. Specifically, data indicated in section 5.2.10, “Standard B.P data,” can be obtained on the GC8000. For details on distillation analysis, see also TI 11B08A01-11E Online Petroleum Distillation Analyzer by Gas Chromatography. n Calibrating the Distillation Analysis (Distillation curve) To perform stable, accurate distillation analysis, you must calibrate the distillation curve. This section explains the calibration procedure. Note that the procedure for calibrating the distillation curve is different from the normal GC8000 calibration procedure. The calibration is performed by measuring a stream whose “cal run” is set to a specific standard boiling point sample. (1) Preparing the Standard Sample Prepare in advance a sufficient quantity of the standard sample for determining the distillation curve indicated in the Operation Data. You need to calibrate using a standard sample that covers the entire distillation range of all components that could be present in a process sample (in a factory adjustment, a standard sample that meets this requirement is prepared). If the composition of the current sample is significantly different from that of the sample prepared at the time of factory adjustment, various settings need to be changed. In such a case, contact your nearest Yokogawa representative. There is no problem if the sample component ratios are slightly different. (The sample must include the correct quantity of all the components listed in the Operation Data. If this is not possible, settings need to be changed, so contact your nearest Yokogawa representative. (2) Setting the Operating Conditions (Part 1) On the SimDis Setup screen of Table Menu (3/3) of the EtherLCD screen, specify the following settings (see section 5.4.25, “SimDis Setup). • Set Response factor updating to None. • Set Section updating to None. • Set Calib curve updating to None. (3) Measuring the Standard Liquid (Preliminary measurement) With the standard sample flowing, select the cal run stream, and execute an analysis. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 App.I  App.I-2 With the chromatogram of the standard sample in a stable condition, verify whether the peaks of each component in the standard sample are being detected correctly. (4) Correcting the gate time If there are peaks that are not detected correctly, on the Peak Setup-Specific screen of Table Menu (1/3), select the “Strm#” for cal run, and set the Gate ON time and Gate OFF time on Peak Setup-Specific (3/4) for the relevant component to a few seconds before the gate on and off times that you have read. (5) Setting the Operating Conditions (Part 2) On the SimDis Setup screen of Table Menu (3/3), change the following settings. • Set Section updating to Auto. • Set Calib curve updating to Auto. (6) Measuring the Standard Liquid (Real measurement) With the standard sample flowing, select the cal run stream, and execute an analysis. After the analysis is complete, on the “Curve” SimDis Calib Data Setup screen of the SimDis Setup screen of Table Menu (3/3), check that the Data curve coef a, Data curve coef b, Elapsed time xx, and Std B.P xx values have been updated automatically. This completes the distillation curve calibration procedure. You can return to normal distillation analysis by setting the measurement stream back to the normal sample measurement stream. n Aligning Data with That of Other Distillation Analysis Methods If you want to reduce the difference between the distillation points that the GC8000 values are being compared to (hereafter referred to as laboratory values) and the values measured on the GC8000, you may be able to do so by correcting the GC8000 analysis characteristics. The procedure is provided below. 1. Setting the correction parameters (part 1) On the Peak Setup-Specific screen of Table Menu (1/3), select the stream number for the sample run, and select PeakNo. of Calculation/Linear. On the Peak Setup-Specific 2/2 screen, set Factor a and Factor b to 1 and 0, respectively. 2. Acquiring comparison data In advance, prepare several samples of the same type of oil but with different characteristics, and measure the laboratory values. Analyze these samples using the GC8000 standard sample stream, and calculate the distillation points. 3. Calculating the correction parameters For each of the process samples, plot the laboratory values on the X axis and the values measured on the GC8000 on the Y axis, determine the approximation line using the leastsquares method, and derive slope A and intercept B. Note: It may be difficult to match the GC8000 analysis values to the laboratory values, such as when the correlation coefficient is poor. 4. Setting the correction parameters (part 2) On the Peak Setup-Specific screen of Table Menu (1/3), select the stream number for the sample run, and select PeakNo. of Calculation/Linear. On the Peak Setup-Specific 2/2 screen, enter slope A and intercept B in Factor a and Factor b, respectively. 5. Verifying the operation For the process samples, verify that the difference between the laboratory values and GC8000 analysis values have diminished. IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00 i Revision Information  Title : GC8000 Process Gas Chromatograph  Manual No. : IM 11B08A01-01E Apr. 2016/8th Edition Software change (Main CPU: Rev 2.01.07 to 2.01.08) (Pages 3-8, 4-41, 5-41, 5-42, 5-58, 7-6) Software change (Main CPU: Rev 2.01.08 to 2.01.09 / UP CPU: Rev 2.01.07 to 2.01.09) (Pages App.G-11, App.G-18) GCUD Software change (Rev 1.01.04 to 1.01.05) (Pages App.H-16, App.H-17) Software change (Main CPU: Rev 2.01.09 to 2.01.11 / Oven CPU: Rev 2.01.09 to 2.01.11 / GC-HMI: Rev 2.01.03 to 2.01.04) (Pages 1-97, 5-40, 7-3 to 7-10) Corrections (Pages 1-3, 1-97, 2-1, 2-2, 6-1 to 6-3) Jul. 2015/7th Edition Software change (Main CPU: Rev 2.01.06 to 2.01.07) (Pages 5-40, 5-66, 5-69, 5-72, 5-92, App.E-5, App.E-7, App.E-8) Delete SHDSL (Pages 1-13, 2-31, App.C-4, App.C-5, App.C-7) Corrections (Pages 1-16, 3-34, 6-16 to 6-18, 7-4, 7-11, App.C-2) Feb. 2015/6th Edition Software change (Main CPU: Rev 2.01.04 to 2.01.06) Specification changes to the gate tracking function (Pages 1-94, 1-95, 5-63, 5-66, 5-70, App. E-9) Nov. 2014/5th Edition Addition type 4 (programmed-temperature oven), corrections, etc. Nov. 2013/4th Edition Add cautions and corrections, etc. (Pages xiv, xvi, xix, 1-26, 1-28, 2-23, 2-24, 5-14, 5-40, 5-88, 6-14, 6-15, 6-25, 6-26) Sep. 2013/3rd Edition Add Cautions (Pages viii, ix, xix, 1-10, 1-20, 2-24 to 26, 2-33, 2-35, 5-40, 6-2) Description change of Safety Standard and EMC standard (Pages 1-14, App. C-2, App. C-7) Explanation change and correction of typo (Pages vii, 1-33, 1-73, 1-78 to 81, 1-84, 3-22, 3-23, 4-36, 5-67, 5-68, 5-76, 5-83, 5-84, 5-90, 5-91, 6-3, 6-8, 6-26, 6-27, 6-43, App. C-6, App. D-13, App. D-14, App. E-3 to 4, App. E-6 to 7, App. E-9 to 10, App. E-12 to 13, App. E-17 to 18, App. G-2, App. G-5, App. G-10 to 12, App. G-17 to 18, App. H-2, App. H-16 to 17) May 2012/2nd Edition ATEX, IECEx certification is added. Appendix H (GCUD) is added. Correction of errors. Nov. 2011/1st Edition Newly published Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo 180-8750, JAPAN Homepage: http://www.yokogawa.com/ IM 11B08A01-01E 8th Edition : Apr. 11, 2016-00